Jinx: Goodbye 🤝 Then … 😿 – part 3

The Warm Hand and the THUD

The final penthouse sequence becomes even crueler once one realizes that Kim Dan may be misreading the sensory evidence itself.

The squeezing and warmth of Jaekyung’s hand can function as comfort and reassurance (chapter 100), convincing Kim Dan that the champion is alive, stable, and therefore ultimately “fine.” But warmth does not necessarily signify health. It can also indicate fever, exhaustion, overexertion, and a body approaching collapse. Thus the tactile comfort Kim Dan clings to may actually conceal the severity of Jaekyung’s condition rather than disprove it.

This reinterpretation fundamentally alters the meaning of the final “THUD.” (chapter 100)

Importantly, Mingwa does not visually show the collapse or wobbling itself. Instead, she makes both Kim Dan and the readers hear it. That distinction matters enormously because if she had visually depicted Jaekyung collapsing onto the floor, the interpretation would immediately become fixed and undeniable. Instead, she traps both Kim Dan and the readers inside uncertainty or into a false illusion.

Kim Dan sees the hollow eyes, the trembling exhaustion, the devastated face (chapter 100), the passivity, and the emotional distance. Yet he doesn’t initiate any conversation. On the other hand, the warm hand even allows him to construct a safer narrative. (chapter 100) The champion was not hurt, he won the match. He is warm. He will recover. There is nothing to fear.

The “THUD” violently interrupts this emotional minimization.

And the timing matters profoundly because according to me, Kim Dan has not actually left yet. The chapter only creates the illusion of departure. The words “Goodbye then…” remain suspended through the ellipsis itself. Kim Dan still stands at the entrance. He has not crossed the threshold yet. The goodbye remains emotionally unfinished. He is waiting for a response or word from his lover. By uttering the phrase, “Goodbye then…”, Kim Dan suddenly shifts from a passive observer of his own fate to the active arbiter of the narrative. He is the one stepping forward to single-handedly determine the meaning of the separation, dictating the final emotional framing, and drawing the absolute conclusion of the relationship itself.

(chapter 100) The sound forces reality back into the sensory field before Kim Dan can finalize the goodbye psychologically.

This pivot exposes a profound structural shift: it reveals the sudden emergence of power.

This is not a display of external authority, physical dominance, or toxic control. Instead, it represents something far more critical to his psychological survival: the reclamation of narrative and emotional agency. For the first time in the text, he is no longer waiting to be discarded or directed; he is attempting to author his own ending.

Thus the “THUD” becomes the sound of reality interrupting self-erasure before separation can become real. (chapter 100) By shattering his sensory anesthesia, the physical weight of that sound completely dismantles Kim Dan’s constructed fantasy of “noble self-sacrifice.” Up until this exact threshold, his mind had processed his departure as a perfectly balanced, clean transaction. (chapter 100) In his internal trauma script, he was performing a deeply logical, protective act: paying his final respects, leaving behind the material markers of a dissolved contract, and erasing his “toxic, burdening presence” so that the champion could return to unencumbered glory.

But the unyielding gravity of the “THUD” forces a terrifying realization into his consciousness: he has completely excluded his own personhood from his moral universe. (chapter 98) While Kim Dan possessed a fierce, uncompromising moral compass when defending the life of his grandmother—violently pushing the wolf’s hand away to establish that a dying human body is infinitely more important than sex, duty, or financial leverage (Chapter 21)—he systematically denies himself that same basic right to exist.

When lying in a pool of his own blood in Chapter 98, reaching up to touch Jaekyung’s face, he forced a desperate mandate upon the champion: (chapter 98) In that agonizing moment, Dan entirely broke his own foundational principle. He demanded that Jaekyung prioritize performance, utility, and a championship title over a dying human life. The irony is that here, he thinks he is being selfless. Nonetheless, Doc Dan, in his pursuit of self-erasure, accidentally acts with immense psychological cruelty. He forces Jaekyung into a horrific repetition compulsion: abandoning a dying loved one for the sake of the ring.

He remains tragically blind to the profound psychological heartlessness of this request which he repeats much later. (chapter 100) For Joo Jaekyung, the match had instantly lost all meaning; his entire world was paralyzed by the terror of losing Dan. By pushing the champion to abandon his bleeding body to go perform inside an octagon, Kim Dan did not save him—he unconsciously destroyed him. He pushed a man whose childhood trauma permanently fused athletic victory with the catastrophic death of his parents (Chapter 73) to go repeat his ultimate nightmare.

The “THUD” at the threshold is the precise moment Kim Dan is forced to face the real-world consequences of his own words. Throughout their entire history, Dan has remained completely unable to initiate emotional intimacy, perpetually waiting for a sign from Joo Jaekyung (chapter 100), as if he wanted to be “chosen” rather than face the terrifying vulnerability of making a conscious choice himself. He wanted to be selected by the champion, to be granted permission to exist in that space, rather than taking the emotional risk to claim it. If he continues to treat his own life as expendable and vanishes into the dark, his submissive endurance ceases to be a shield—it becomes an active weapon. (chapter 100) His passivity would effectively sentence Jaekyung to a lifetime of crushing, unearned guilt, forcing the champion to live as a monster in his own mind, convinced his presence only contaminates and destroys.

By attempting to slip away like a grateful ghost under the guise of an polite eviction, Kim Dan stands on the precipice of becoming the active architect of another person’s ruin. The hollow echo of the penthouse layout confronts him with the ultimate baseline of psychological responsibility: gratitude cannot engineer happiness (chapter 100), and if he walks away now, he will lose everything permanently—not because he was abandoned, but because he refused to choose to stay.

Toxic Positivity and Emotional Avoidance

Episode 100 repeatedly exposes characters trying to impose the illusion that everything will be alright now onto a reality that is psychologically catastrophic underneath.

Superficially, the chapter appears filled with healing imagery. Flowers, gifts (chapter 100), warm lighting, soft dialogue (chapter 100), survival, tenderness, and celebration aesthetically imitate recovery. And yet emotionally, the chapter feels suffocating.

Kim Dan constantly reframes catastrophe into survivable meaning. (chapter 100) At least the champion could fight. At least the title was reclaimed. At least he survived. He will recover. Everything will return to normal.

This is not healthy optimism. It is emotional minimization.

Team Black behaves similarly. Their affection is genuine, yet emotionally superficial. They celebrate survival, normalize the situation quickly, and soothe symptoms without confronting the psychological devastation underneath. Nobody openly says that something is deeply wrong. (chapter 100) In fact, they even praises him.

The final penthouse sequence therefore becomes a brutal dismantling of toxic positivity. Kim Dan tries to impose a healthy narrative onto reality. The debt is gone. The danger passed. Now he should leave. But Mingwa repeatedly inserts contradictions: the terrible face, the red eyes, the hesitation, the trembling silence, the disappointed mouth (chapter 100), the unfinished goodbye, the warm hand, and finally the THUD.

The chapter refuses emotional simplification. The body keeps revealing the truth the characters attempt to suppress verbally.

The Day Kim Dan Says “Stay With Me”

For this reason, Kim Dan’s emotional evolution cannot find its resolution in the moment Joo Jaekyung drops his armor and whispers, “Stay with me.” The phrase, though revolutionary within the champion’s own psychological history (chapter 97), remains entirely inaccessible to Kim Dan’s internal landscape. Within Dan’s trauma script, he remains the permanently expendable entity—the one who leaves quietly, adapts silently, apologizes constantly, and survives solely through systematic self-erasure.

Even after the profound physical and emotional crises of the hospitalization, his cognitive architecture is frozen in a state of hyper-vigilant transition; he prepares for a clean disappearance rather than a permanent settlement. He proceeds under the lifelong assumption that companionship is inherently temporary, strictly conditional, and destined to dissolve into an empty room the moment his immediate economic or physical utility reaches its natural expiration.

The roots of this profound emotional paralysis extend far deeper than his history with Joo Jaekyung, anchoring themselves in a foundational, intergenerational rupture. Episode 57 quietly exposes that Kim Dan’s defining psychological wound is not the surface-level humiliation of poverty, debt, or social isolation, but a deep-seated terror of broken permanence. (chapter 57) In the opening movements of his recurrent nightmare, the memory presents itself under an illusion of maternal comfort. Following an episode of childhood bullying (chapter 57), a young Kim Dan is met with the rhythmic, tactile reassurance of his grandmother: “Grandma will always be there for you. You still have me” (Chapter 57). However, the nightmare exposes the truth: the starting point of the little boy’s suffering is the opened door: (chapter 57), a symbol for departure which is strongly connected to loss and grief.

This tactile grounding is structurally paramount. (chapter 57) Within the visual language of the series, the physical act of patting and touch is established as the literal definition of safety, presence, and protection. The young Dan cries, yet he surrenders completely to the belief that emotional warmth possesses the power to permanently stabilize external violence. It is this total emotional vulnerability that renders his tearful, smiling response—“Okay!”—so retroactively devastating. (chapter 57) It represents an absolute, unhedged contract with permanence; a child’s clean surrender to the promise that an attachment figure will remain physically and emotionally reachable no matter what hostile forces gather outside.

The Trauma of the Unfinished Departure

The structural cruelty of the nightmare, however, lies in its precise chronological sequence: first comes absolute reassurance, and then comes immediate, total erasure. The bullying itself is merely an ambient hostility; the true catastrophe is the sudden mutation of safety into a void. (chapter 57) The visual transition occurs through one of the most chilling images in the work: a domestic door standing wide open, leading directly into an unyielding, featureless darkness. Kim Dan stands paralyzed before this threshold, staring into the empty entrance as he quietly whispers, (Chapter 57).

The emotional structure of the nightmare unfolds through a devastating chain of associations. It begins with maternal reassurance and the promise of permanence: “Grandma will always be there for you.” For a brief moment, Kim Dan experiences emotional safety, physical comfort, and the belief that attachment can protect him from the hostility of the outside world. Yet this reassurance is immediately shattered by sudden disappearance. The opened door leading into darkness transforms the promise of permanence into a terrifying image of absence and emotional unreachability.

The Ultimate Catastrophe: The Dissolution of Roots

The small, raw mound of dirt that marks the final resting place of the unnamed puppy in Episode 59 (Chapter 59) functions as a tragic monument to emotional minimization. The animal is given no name, no formal ceremony, and no structural acknowledgment within the household’s narrative. For the elderly landlord, this loss is processed through a lens of pragmatic detachment, viewed merely as a rustic, natural occurrence (chapter 59) or a minor rut (chapter 59) in life’s ordinary routine. Because the grandfather dismisses the animal’s death as a trivial event, he lacks the psychological framework to connect it to Kim Dan’s rapid mental deterioration. He never mentions the loss to Joo Jaekyung, effectively sealing the entire event in absolute silence. (chapter 65) By treating the puppy’s death as an unnoteworthy blip, the narrative environment strips Kim Dan of the baseline right to grieve, signaling to him that his sorrow is disproportionate, inconvenient, and ultimately invisible to the outside world.

This absolute isolation of grief yields the catastrophic psychological state exposed in Chapter 65. When the grandfather notes that Dan slips out like he is in a trance and expresses a terrifying fear that the young man might end up drowning himself in the ocean, he is witnessing a literalized enactment of Kim Dan’s trauma script. This behavior is not simple drunkenness or passive depression, but an active, sleepwalking surrender to the void. The ocean represents the ultimate space of non-existence, a vast, featureless horizon where a burdened identity can be quietly dissolved without disrupting the lives of others. When Joo Jaekyung physically intercepts Dan, lifting him out of the darkness and carrying him away from the shoreline, the physical contrast is stark. Jaekyung acts as an anchor of brute force, yet he remains completely blind to the ghost haunting Dan’s mind, pulling his body from the surf without ever reaching the unmourned graveyard hidden beneath the silence.

The true terror of this sequence lies in how the puppy’s death (chapter 59) interacts with Shin Okja’s terminal timeline. (chapter 59) With his grandmother’s days explicitly numbered, the sudden erasure of the unnamed puppy strips Kim Dan of his final buffer against the original, unresolved trauma of his life, which is the unmourned loss of his parents. While Dan consciously frames his terror as the fear of being left entirely alone in a hostile world, the deeper, more paralyzing horror is the total collapse of his past. Shin Okja is not merely his protector; she is the sole living witness to his childhood, his family, and his original identity. Because Kim Dan was never permitted to properly process, understand, or mourn the sudden disappearance of his parents, his psychological roots were already incredibly fragile. The photographs in Chapter 94 prove that his childhood was materially documented through images of flower fields and playgrounds (chapter 94), yet his parents were completely erased from that visual record. When the puppy dies unnoticed and the grandmother approaches the threshold of death, Kim Dan faces an existential erasure. If the last person who remembers where he came from vanishes, then Kim Dan ceases to exist in any meaningful, continuous reality, meaning his submissive endurance and his active steps toward the ocean are the desperate measures of a man who believes he has already become a ghost. However, what the physical therapist doesn’t know is that Shin Okja that Shin Okja already shared fragments of her memories and emotional legacy with Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 94) By showing the champion photographs from Kim Dan’s childhood, she quietly creates continuity where Kim Dan unconsciously expects only disappearance and erasure. In this sense, her final wish almost functions like a symbolic letter left behind through the athlete himself. (chapter 94) When she tells Joo Jaekyung that she wants nothing more than for Kim Dan to be happy and hopes he can be happy beside him too (chapter 100), she unknowingly entrusts Kim Dan’s future, memories, and emotional continuity to another person before disappearing herself.

The Ghostification of Memory

This disappearance does not function as an isolated fear connected only to Shin Okja herself. (chapter 57) Instead, it unconsciously reactivates Kim Dan’s primary unresolved trauma: the sudden loss of his parents in the accident. (chapter 94) Once again, someone leaves the domestic space and fails to return, forcing Kim Dan into the same helpless position of searching after an absence he cannot stop, explain, or emotionally resolve.

From this repeated experience of broken permanence emerges the survival script governing Kim Dan’s adult personality. He learns to survive not through emotional dependence or openly expressed need, but through usefulness, gratitude, debt repayment, minimization, and self-erasure. Because attachment repeatedly became associated with disappearance and loss, Kim Dan unconsciously prepares himself for abandonment before it fully arrives.

The psychological consequences of this unresolved loss extend even further than abandonment itself. Kim Dan does not simply lose people; he gradually loses the ability to stabilize their emotional reality internally. (chapter 94) When he quietly admits that he no longer remembers the faces of his parents, the statement appears deceptively simple. Yet psychologically, it reveals a catastrophic form of erasure. A face is not merely visual recognition. It anchors identity, continuity, emotional permanence, and existence itself. Without faces, loved ones gradually begin resembling ghosts.

This realization retrospectively illuminates Kim Dan’s strange confusion between dream and reality throughout episode 100. (chapter 100) Even when Joo Jaekyung physically touches him, lies beside him, squeezes his hand, and leaves behind tangible traces of his presence, Kim Dan struggles to stabilize the champion visually and emotionally. The face repeatedly appears blurred, hidden by light, partially obscured, or emotionally difficult to grasp. The body says: someone is here. But the unstable face says: they may disappear again.

In this sense, Kim Dan’s fear is not merely abandonment. It is the dissolution of emotional reality itself around attachment.

Visual Continuity and the Ghostification of Memory

And yet Mingwa quietly introduces one object that resists this entire process of emotional erasure: the amusement park photograph. (chapter 87) Unlike the fragmented visions haunting episode 100, the picture materially preserves Joo Jaekyung outside the role of the “Emperor.” The champion appears awkward, calm, almost ordinary, participating in a shared moment rather than performing dominance publicly. For perhaps one of the first times in Kim Dan’s life, emotional continuity becomes fixed visibly instead of dissolving into absence.

This matters profoundly because the photograph directly opposes ghostification itself. Kim Dan cannot reduce the moment into pure dream, hallucination, or unstable memory. The image preserves:

  • a face,
  • a shared place,
  • a lived moment,
  • and emotional reality existing outside survival and obligation.

For perhaps the first time since the death of his parents, attachment becomes materially anchored to reality rather than threatened by disappearance. Unlike the faceless disappearance haunting his childhood memories, Joo Jaekyung remains materially visible inside the frame.

And this may explain why the present-day “champion” after the stabbing feels so emotionally disorienting. (chapter 100) The exhausted, sleepless figure wandering through the hospital at night no longer fully resembles the mythological Emperor constructed by MFC and Team Black. (chapter 100) Yet neither does he fully resemble the ordinary man preserved inside the amusement park photograph. (chapter 87) Kim Dan therefore stands psychologically between two competing realities: the collapsing public myth and the fragile private human being slowly emerging underneath it.

The photographs shown in episode 94 make this even more devastating. (chapter 94) Shin Okja preserves Kim Dan’s childhood materially: the flower fields, the playground, the puppy, the smiling child. Yet the parents remain entirely absent from the preserved emotional narrative. Even more importantly, the photographs themselves are shown not to Kim Dan, but to Joo Jaekyung. Symbolically, the champion becomes a witness to a forgotten continuity that Kim Dan himself can no longer fully access.

As a result, Kim Dan’s personal history becomes emotionally frozen around a single surviving relationship: himself and his grandmother. Everything surrounding that bond gradually dissolves into invisibility. The accident does not merely take his parents away physically; it erases emotional continuity itself. The lost family begins resembling something unreal, distant, and ghost-like inside memory.

This also explains the overwhelming terror surrounding Shin Okja’s eventual death. (chapter 57) If she disappears too, Kim Dan unconsciously fears losing not only companionship, but the final remaining anchor connecting him to his own past and identity.

The horror of this panel is entirely acoustic and structural rather than explicitly violent. (chapter 57) The grandmother has vanished. The room remains physically ordinary, recognizable, and static, yet the emotional center that validated the space has been instantaneously wiped clean. The open doorway stands as a permanent monument to an irreversible departure. Someone has left, and Kim Dan has once again arrived too late to stop the hemorrhage.

This specific visual configuration exposes a profound sense of absolute powerlessness before disappearance. Throughout his life, Dan experiences the people and animals (chapter 94) upon whom his emotional survival depends as slipping away into unreachability without warning, explanation, or the possibility of interception.

This nightmare sequence does not merely depict the fear of losing Shin Okja; it functions as a psychological screen memory that reactivates the original, unresolved catastrophe of his childhood: the sudden death of his parents in an accident. The parental loss functions psychologically not as an understood transition, but as a sudden, violent departure completely stripped of emotional closure. Someone leaves the domestic sphere and simply never returns. The child is left behind to wander the empty rooms (chapter 57), searching for an explanation, a destination, or a lingering trace of continuity.

When Shin Okja later assumes the role of his sole protector, she temporarily stabilizes this primary wound , but her eventual illness and death cause the old terror to resurface with unchecked force. The reassurance that “Grandma will always be there” collapses into the exact same darkness, rain, breathlessness, and panic that defined the loss of his parents.

This cycle of sudden, unexplained abandonment implants a devastating psychological mechanism within Kim Dan: survivor’s guilt. He internalizes the catastrophic belief that his continued existence is a fundamental material and emotional burden to those around him. He adopts an identity of extreme minimization—reducing his physical footprint, eating nothing under stress, apologizing for occupying space, and preemptively preparing for his own eviction before the other person can abandon him first. Because he unconsciously links deep emotional attachment to sudden death, ruin, or disappearance, he learns to survive by never allowing himself to believe in permanence again.

To openly ask another human being to stay beside him is an act of agency completely prohibited by his trauma script. Such a request requires a fundamental faith in the stability of the future. It requires trusting that a shared warmth will not instantly mutate into an empty hallway or a clinical operating room. Trapped within the logic of the opened door in Chapter 57, Kim Dan cannot ask anyone to remain; he can only wait in silence for the inevitable moment they vanish.

Yet one of the cruelest aspects of the relationship is that Joo Jaekyung’s care alone cannot fully dismantle the psychological structure governing Kim Dan’s self-perception. The champion provides financial stability, physical protection, rest, fun (chapter 89), emotional attachment, and eventually even places Kim Dan above the championship itself. But none of these gestures automatically erase decades of trauma, survivor guilt, and self-erasure. Kim Dan continues interpreting himself through the logic of burden, usefulness, and temporary emotional permission. As a result, even genuine love becomes destabilized inside his perception. Care transforms into guilt. Freedom feels like eviction. Presence becomes dream-like. (chapter 100) And companionship itself remains emotionally difficult to trust.

From Ghost to Sinner: The Inversion of the Trauma Script

That is why the emotional reversal of the story likely requires something much more devastating: Kim Dan witnessing Joo Jaekyung collapse.

Until now, the champion has functioned almost like a force of nature inside Kim Dan’s mind. No matter how wounded, exhausted, or emotionally unstable he became, Jaekyung always remained standing. (chapter 69) (chapter 91)

But episode 100 quietly dismantles this image. The disheveled hair, dark red eyes from crying and insomnia, starvation, (chapter 100) emotional distance, and nightly wandering all reveal someone slowly destroying himself from within.

If Joo Jaekyung’s body finally gives in — if exhaustion overwhelms him, if his legs give in or if he faints or loses consciousness directly in front of Kim Dan — then the emotional structure of the story would reverse completely. Kim Dan would suddenly experience what Jaekyung experienced in the hospital and at the seaside: the terror of watching someone he loves become physically unresponsive and getting really sick.

This matters profoundly because Kim Dan’s understanding of death has never been linked primarily to gore or violence. (chapter 59) His trauma seems connected instead to stillness, sleep (chapter 59), silence, unconsciousness, and disappearance.

Thus witnessing Jaekyung collapse would strike directly at the center of his childhood trauma.

More importantly, such a moment would destroy Kim Dan’s ability to hide love behind gratitude. He could no longer tell himself that he stayed because he owed something. Instead, he would finally confront the truth: he cannot lose him.

And only then could Kim Dan truly say:

“Stay with me.”

Not as repayment. Not as obligation. Not as gratitude. But as pure emotional need. At the same time, speaking openly about his childhood, the accident, and the disappearance of his parents would force Joo Jaekyung to confront an important truth:Kim Dan’s suffering did not begin with him. He doesn’t know everything about him either. The champion incited the physical therapist not only to confront his traumas, but also to gather courage and affirm himself. He might have caused him some pain, but he did not create the original wounds. Long before entering the octagon’s violent world, Kim Dan had already learned to associate attachment with disappearance, guilt, and emotional instability. Besides, in reality, he is no angel either, just like him a sinner. (chapter 100)

This pivot exposes the agonizing threshold where Kim Dan undergoes a profound psychological transformation: the loss of absolute innocence and the violent birth of true adult maturity. Throughout his life, Dan has operated under the survival script of a grateful ghost, a creature who believes he must minimize his physical and emotional footprint to ensure the survival of those around him. (chapter 53) A ghost leaves no tracks, carries no weight, and can be evicted or replaced without altering the fabric of the room it inhabited. However, the unyielding weight of the physical collapse at the threshold forces a terrifying realization into his consciousness. By witnessing the catastrophic toll his words and his impending departure have taken on Joo Jaekyung, Kim Dan is stripped of his narrative anesthesia. (chapter 98) He is forced to realize that he is not a ghost at all. Instead, he has become a sinner which is symbolized by the blood left on the athlete’s cheek that night.

This shift from ghost to sinner is monumental because a sinner possesses density, gravity, and the undeniable capacity to inflict a wound. For the first time, Dan cannot hide behind the convenient illusion of his own insignificance; he is confronted with the undeniable evidence that he has left permanent, indelible traces in the champion’s life. He is not replaceable, and he cannot vanish cleanly because his presence has already fundamentally altered the internal architecture of the celebrity. To acknowledge that he has the power to wound Jaekyung is to acknowledge his own personhood and agency.

Paradoxically, this recognition of his own capacity to cause pain becomes the first true validation of his existence as a real, impactful human being. For someone anchored in a trauma script of self-erasure, happiness always appears fragile and temporary, destined to dissolve back into an empty room. Pain, however, possesses undeniable reality. Discovering that he can wound Joo Jaekyung therefore destroys the illusion of his own insignificance.

By forcing the loss of his protective, childlike innocence, this realization marks the birth of his adult maturity. (chapter 100) He can no longer view himself as a passive victim of fate or an expendable burden. If his existence carries enough weight to cause ruin, then it also carries enough weight to cultivate healing. Consequently, his psychological survival ceases to be about achieving safety through total self-erasure. Instead, it matures into a conscious, courageous choice to engage in a mutual exchange of lasting impressions—willingly claiming the power to leave indelible traces in Jaekyung’s heart, while finally allowing Jaekyung to carve permanent, undeniable traces into his own world.

This transformation also fundamentally alters Kim Dan’s relationship to silence and moral judgment. (chapter 91) Throughout the series, he remains almost completely passive toward institutional abuse and exploitation. He never openly confronts the perverted hospital director, never pursues legal retaliation against those who destroyed his livelihood (chapter 11), and never truly challenges the structures that repeatedly reduce him to a disposable object. His anger emerges almost exclusively toward Joo Jaekyung because the champion emotionally reaches him deeply enough to wound him personally. (chapter 100) Yet the “THUD” destroys the illusion that passivity itself is harmless. Once Kim Dan realizes that his choices possess the power to devastate another human being emotionally, he can no longer maintain the fantasy of existential insignificance. A ghost silently endures injustice because it believes it lacks the right to leave traces behind. (chapter 1) A sinner, however, possesses moral weight. By recognizing his own capacity to wound, Kim Dan simultaneously acquires the adult authority to judge silence, cowardice, and passivity in others as well.

The Closed Door: The Acoustic Anchor of Reality

Throughout the series, and especially within Kim Dan’s recurring childhood nightmare in Chapter 57, the open door functions as the primal image of abandonment. (chapter 57) It marks the threshold where loved ones disappear into darkness while he remains behind, powerless to stop them from leaving. In Kim Dan’s trauma logic, an open doorway is never neutral. It is a wound left permanently unresolved.

This symbolism returns with devastating force in Chapter 100. (chapter 100) Standing at the entrance of the penthouse, Kim Dan attempts to perform what he believes is a final act of noble self-sacrifice. His suspended “Goodbye then…” reflects the familiar survival strategy that has governed his entire life: leave quietly, minimize the burden, disappear before causing further damage. He still imagines departure as a clean emotional transaction, one in which he can slip away harmlessly like a grateful ghost.

The violent “THUD” of Joo Jaekyung’s collapse destroys this illusion instantly. It brings an end to the generational trauma repetition and as such Kim Dan’s jinx! (chapter 100)

The sound functions like an acoustic shockwave tearing through Kim Dan’s entire childhood survival script. For perhaps the first time in his life, he is forced to confront the catastrophic possibility that his passivity is not emotionally neutral. By attempting to erase himself quietly, he is no longer protecting the person he loves. He is actively destroying him. In this sense, Kim Dan unconsciously begins reenacting the very trauma that shaped his own childhood. Just like the parents who vanished beyond the open doorway of his memory (chapter 19), and just like Shin Okja repeatedly attempting to remove herself from his life for his “own good,” (chapter 65) Kim Dan convinces himself that disappearance is an act of love. The tragedy of the threshold scene lies precisely in this inherited logic of self-removal. He believes he is preventing suffering, while unknowingly reproducing the emotional catastrophe that destroyed him in the first place.

And this is where the scene undergoes its most profound symbolic reversal. (chapter 57) In the childhood nightmare, the open door represented irreversible disappearance and emotional hemorrhage. Here, however, the collapse effectively slams the threshold shut. The exit no longer exists psychologically. Kim Dan cannot continue drifting into the darkness as though his existence leaves no trace behind.

The apartment itself suddenly transforms. The hallway no longer offers escape into abstraction or self-erasure. The sealed space forces Kim Dan to confront the weakened body inside the room and the devastating evidence that his existence leaves real wounds behind.

This realization marks the destruction of the “ghost” identity he has inhabited for years. (chapter 97) A ghost passes through spaces invisibly, leaves no wounds behind, and can vanish without fundamentally altering the lives of others. Kim Dan has survived precisely by believing himself replaceable, temporary, and emotionally weightless.

But the body collapsing behind him proves the opposite.

For the first time, Kim Dan is forced to recognize that he possesses the power to wound another human being permanently. And paradoxically, this terrifying recognition becomes the first true confirmation of his own existence. (chapter 100) Pain carries undeniable gravity. Because suffering has always been the most concrete reality in Kim Dan’s life, discovering that he can inflict emotional devastation on Joo Jaekyung shatters the illusion of his own insignificance.

The threshold scene (chapter 96) (chapter 100) therefore becomes the site of an agonizing psychological transformation: the death of passive innocence and the birth of adult responsibility. Kim Dan can no longer remain a silent victim waiting to be chosen, summoned, or emotionally permitted to exist by someone else. The collapse forces him to understand that refusing to choose is itself a choice, and that disappearance can become cruelty when another person’s emotional survival depends upon your continued presence.

In this sense, the “THUD” becomes more than the sound of physical collapse. It is the acoustic force that seals the door against self-erasure. The fantasy of a painless goodbye is destroyed forever. Kim Dan is no longer allowed to vanish into darkness untouched by consequence. He must finally turn around, step away from the threshold, and confront the traces he has already carved into another person’s heart.

Two Ghosts at the Threshold

By the end of episode 100, both protagonists resemble ghosts trapped at an emotional threshold. Kim Dan believes that if he truly loves Jaekyung, he should leave and stop burdening him. (chapter 100) Joo Jaekyung believes that if he truly loves Kim Dan, he should let him go and stop endangering him. (chapter 100)

Both unconsciously reproduce the same inherited trauma logic: love through disappearance. Yet the webtoon author carefully situates this confrontation not during the stability of daytime, but at sunrise. (chapter 100) The timing matters profoundly. Throughout the series, dawn repeatedly appears after moments of emotional rupture, exhaustion, or psychological transition. (chapter 21) Kim Dan once returned from the hospital at the break of day after another traumatic encounter, intending only to “rest for an hour” before returning to work, as though emotional catastrophe itself had to be minimized and folded back into routine immediately. (chapter 100)

In episode 100, however, sunrise acquires a radically different meaning. (chapter 100) Mingwa carefully emphasizes the gradual awakening of the city itself through the changing atmosphere of the streets. When Kim Dan first exits the hospital, the urban environment still feels strangely suspended and emotionally empty. The streets remain quiet, the traffic sparse, and the pale sky carries the lingering stillness of night. Both men stand isolated within this transitional hour, suspended psychologically between separation and recognition.

This is perceptible, once you contrast the traffic in the same street during the day. (Chapter 56) So we have to envision the following scenery in episode 100. Cars begin accumulating in the streets, intersections grow crowded, daylight strengthens, and ordinary life resumes around them. The world itself begins moving forward again.

And significantly, this transition unfolds precisely while the “Emperor” identity starts destabilizing visibly. The sleepless figure (chapter 100) standing outside the building no longer resembles the untouchable public champion sustained by MFC, Team Black, spectacle, and violence. Instead, the growing daylight increasingly exposes exhaustion, emotional fragility, insomnia, grief, and human vulnerability. (chapter 100) In this sense, the awakening city does not accompany the rebirth of the mythological fighter, but the gradual emergence of the man hidden underneath the role itself.

This may explain why Joo Jaekyung increasingly appears ghost-like throughout the hospitalization arc. (chapter 100) He does not merely hide from Kim Dan physically. He is unconsciously shedding an identity built entirely around performance, dominance, and emotional suppression. The champion must temporarily become a ghost so that the man himself can finally emerge.

This is why the chapter feels so suffocating despite all its tenderness. The flowers are beautiful, but the giver disappears. The cake is sweet, but the celebration remains broken. The confession exists, but recognition becomes delayed. The warmth is real, but it arrives through traces left behind during darkness rather than open emotional presence.

The Managerial Ghost: Mobility versus Attachment

This transitional atmosphere becomes even more revealing once Park Namwook quietly exits the scene. (chapter 100) After dropping Kim Dan off in front of the building, the manager simply drives away without greeting Joo Jaekyung directly or remaining beside him. The movement appears emotionally hollow, especially when contrasted with the unresolved intensity surrounding (chapter 100) “Goodbye then…”. Namwook’s departure resembles transit rather than attachment. He arrives, transports, then disappears again.

The location itself quietly reinforces this instability. (chapter 100) Park Namwook leaves Kim Dan directly beside a pedestrian crossing: a place not meant for permanence, but for transition. Symbolically, Kim Dan stands neither fully inside the old structure nor fully outside it yet. He remains suspended between identities, relationships, and possible futures. Even Namwook’s language unconsciously reflects his belief that the previous system will continue functioning normally. (chapter 100) He assumes Kim Dan will simply “stop by” the penthouse to collect his belongings and perhaps “visit” Team Black again later. The manager still imagines continuity, routine, and return. (chapter 100)

And significantly, he expects Joo Jaekyung to behave according to that same logic. In episode 95, the time visible inside the car showing 9 a.m., (chapter 95) reveals their routine, though here, a small transgression took place. Joo Jaekyung let Kim Dan rest a little: (chapter 95). This scene indicated that Joo Jaekyung had already started psychologically drifting far outside this structure. He was already prioritizing his lover. Joo Jaekyung does not wake him despite obligations, schedules, or practical inconvenience. Instead, he silently watches over him for a while and allows the moment of rest to continue. The car therefore temporarily stops functioning as transportation toward labor, treatment, or fighting. It becomes a protected space where exhaustion is permitted rather than suppressed.

So the sunrise indicates that it is much earlier than 9.00 am, an indication that Park Namwook is already going to the gym in order to “welcome” the next physical therapist. By helping him with the discharge so early, the manager avoids a goodbye between the members of Team Black and Kim Dan. (chapter 100) The sleepless wandering through hospital corridors, the nightly visits, the emotional collapse after the stabbing, and the abandonment of ordinary rhythm (no shower and jogging) all reveal someone no longer functioning according to the predictable temporality of the fighting system.

Park Namwook, however, continues organizing life through functionality, punctuality, and performance structure. (chapter 100) This explains why his farewell with Kim Dan feels emotionally procedural (chapter 100) rather than existential. He drops him off, tells him he is always welcome to visit again, then drives away. (chapter 100) The car itself begins symbolizing Namwook’s role inside Joo Jaekyung’s life: constant movement toward fights, schedules, media obligations, and professional continuity, yet strangely little emotional presence outside those structures.

This irony becomes even sharper when connected to episode 5, where Park Namwook laughed about the circumstances concerning Yosep’s divorce. (chapter 5) Yosep had been “ghosted” emotionally by his wife, abandoned after years of prioritizing MMA over personal life. Yet episode 100 quietly suggests that Namwook himself increasingly resembles a ghost within Joo Jaekyung’s life. This explicates why he didn’t help him getting discharged from the hospital (chapter 53) contrary to the athlete. So this kindness toward the “hamster” is not truly selfless. He constantly orbits the champion professionally while remaining emotionally detached from the human being underneath the “Emperor” persona. And the best evidence is this video sent on his birthday: (chapter 45)

The contrast with Kim Dan therefore becomes profound. (chapter 100) “Goodbye then…” emerges from overwhelming attachment, fear of abandonment, survivor guilt, and anticipatory self-erasure. Park Namwook’s farewell, by contrast, remains rooted in managerial continuity. (chapter 100) One goodbye fears love too much. The other barely recognizes it at all.

And significantly, Joo Jaekyung waits outside. (chapter 100) Not inside the gym. Not inside the penthouse. Not inside the institutional spaces that previously defined the “Emperor.” (chapter 100) He stands beyond them at dawn, beside the crossing itself, as though the story were positioning him between an ending identity and an unknown new life.

And perhaps this becomes the true tragedy of Jinx. The problem is not absence of love. The problem is that Shin Okja, Kim Dan, and Joo Jaekyung all mistake self-erasure for love itself.

Yet beneath all the silence, flowers, interrupted confessions, ghostly gestures, and unfinished goodbyes, one desperate emotional truth slowly begins emerging: Kim Dan’s journey may ultimately require something even more transformative than saying:

“Stay with me.”

Because throughout his entire life, he has always been the one left behind. (chapter 57) The child standing before the opened door. The survivor searching after disappearance. The person quietly remaining while others vanish into emotional unreachability.

Beyond the Penthouse: Moving Toward a Shared Horizon

This is why the true emotional resolution of the story may instead take the form of a radically different sentence:

“Come with me, a new version of this scene (chapter 43)

Unlike “Stay with me,” which still implies remaining inside someone else’s space, (chapter 100) “Come with me” fundamentally reverses the structure of abandonment itself. It completely changes the geography of their relationship. It grants Kim Dan absolute agency. He is no longer walking out of an open door into darkness; he is the one opening a path forward. (chapter 94) He is inviting the champion into a mutual, shared trajectory.

In many ways, the story quietly foreshadows this desire much earlier through Kim Dan’s simple wish to travel together after Shin Okja leaves the hospital. (chapter 47) At first glance, the statement appears almost painfully modest: a peaceful trip, rest, shared time, ordinary companionship. Yet symbolically, the fantasy already contains the emotional architecture of “Come with me.” The dream is not organized around labor, debt, treatment, fighting, or survival. It imagines movement detached from institutional obligation entirely.

This matters profoundly because throughout most of the series, movement itself remains tied to exhaustion and performance. Cars transport fighters toward matches. Hospital corridors lead toward illness and disappearance. The gym reduces bodies into instruments of labor and spectacle. The imagined trip in the woods quietly opposes all of these structures. It represents shared movement without destination anxiety, emotional utility, or professional function.

In this sense, “Come with me” does not simply mean romantic attachment. It signifies the possibility of constructing a life no longer governed entirely by trauma, survival, or institutional rhythm. For perhaps the first time, Kim Dan is no longer merely trying to endure another day. He is imagining a future someone else could walk beside him willingly.

It completely upends his lifelong belief that he is an expendable creature who must minimize his physical footprint to avoid being discarded.

And psychologically, this changes everything. For perhaps the first time in his life, Kim Dan would no longer be searching after someone vanishing into darkness. Instead, both men would be walking toward the same horizon together, carrying their ghosts openly rather than disappearing behind them. In this sense, the story quietly redefines the meaning of home itself. Home is no longer a fixed place haunted by abandonment, empty rooms, or opened doors. It becomes the place where the loved person remains beside you willingly. (chapter 69) “Come with me” would illustrate this principle: life is a journey and not a destination.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Goodbye 🤝 Then … 😿 – part 2

Introduction — The Sentence That Arrived Too Late

Episode 100 of Mingwa’s Jinx revolves around a devastating psychological and rhetorical paradox: the most critical confession of the narrative is openly spoken and yet remains entirely unheard at the exact same time. In the immediate aftermath of the chapter’s release, a singular, collective frustration rippled through the global readership, prompting many to focus heavily on the apparent emotional silence paralyzing the protagonists. Audiences repeatedly questioned why Jaekyung allowed Kim Dan to walk away after everything they had survived together, why he refused to openly intercept his departure at the entrance of the penthouse (chapter 100), and why Kim Dan continuously retreated into the sterile scripts of formal gratitude and apology instead of absolute emotional honesty. Yet, the cruel irony of the chapter is that the confession itself does not belong to a future resolution; it already exists, fully articulated, inside the physical boundaries of the narrative. While Kim Dan drifts precariously in the liminal space between life and death following the stabbing, Joo Jaekyung drops his hyper-masculine armor and desperately begs him: (chapter 100)

The structural tragedy of this relationship is not that the words of reciprocal need were never spoken. The problem is that they arrived too late. Earlier in the story, Kim Dan had already witnessed Joo Jaekyung’s mouth moving during emotionally charged moments, yet the meaning behind the words failed to fully reach him. (chapter 84) And in episode 100, the wish is yelled at a moment that was both physically and psychologically too late. Physically, the plea materializes while Kim Dan is actively losing consciousness (chapter 100), rendering the data inaccessible to his waking mind. Emotionally, it lands at the exact moment where Dan has unconsciously associated the champion’s victory with an impending separation. (chapter 100) Psychologically, the words arrive before Kim Dan has developed the cognitive architecture required to understand love outside the crushing frameworks of usefulness, debt, and transactional obligation.

This distinction is vital because Kim Dan’s formative trauma has never been structured merely around the abstract concept of abandonment. (chapter 95) His entire existence has evolved instead around the crushing mechanics of repayment, survival, and economic and emotional burden. (chapter 5) Having lost his parents at a young age, Dan did not grow up believing that attachment could exist freely, unconditionally, or safely. (chapter 94) Instead, he learned that his literal presence beside others required a continuous, exhausting material justification. He had to perform labor, adapt to volatile environments, sacrifice his own well-being, and make himself transactionally useful simply to deserve remaining in the same room as another human being. (chapter 97) Therefore he never rested.

Consequently, emotional attachment became permanently fused with transaction. Kim Dan does not possess the psychological tools to exist as someone who is freely and voluntarily chosen (chapter 47); he only understands relationships through the desperate lens of survivalist necessity. Hence the grandmother and Kim Dan are seen clinching onto each other.

This is precisely why the subsequent hospital sequence becomes so profoundly devastating. When Kim Dan regains consciousness and hears that Joo Jaekyung has successfully reclaimed the championship title, (chapter 100) readers instinctively interpret his reaction through a lens of uncritical relief. (chapter 100) Yet, the formal pacing of the scene quietly suggests a far darker internal reality. For Kim Dan, the champion’s victory signifies nothing less than the absolute completion of their contract. The title has been recovered, the emotional and physical debt has been cleared, and the utilitarian role he assigned himself beside Joo Jaekyung has reached its natural endpoint.

This interpretation fundamentally changes the meaning of Kim Dan’s response: (chapter 100) On the surface, the sentence appears comforting and grateful. Yet the wording itself is strangely impersonal. At no point, Kim Dan does not ask how Joo Jaekyung won, whether he suffered, whether he was injured, or what emotional state he endured during the fight. He never expresses curiosity about the match itself and later shows no desire to watch it. Only the outcome matters.

This detail becomes psychologically revealing because Kim Dan instinctively processes the event not through emotional recognition, but through completed function. The objective has been achieved. The contract has fulfilled its purpose. Thus the sentence “Thank goodness” unconsciously redirects attention away from Joo Jaekyung’s suffering toward abstract successful resolution. Gratitude becomes displaced onto fate, luck, or providence rather than onto the terrified human being desperately begging him moments earlier: (chapter 98)

(chapter 98)

Meanwhile, Joo Jaekyung experiences the exact opposite emotional reality. For him, the fight was never merely about reclaiming a belt. It was about returning alive to Kim Dan after almost losing him forever. Thus while Kim Dan unconsciously interprets the victory as the natural endpoint of their relationship, Joo Jaekyung experiences it as proof that he cannot emotionally survive losing Dan. (chapter 100)

The micro-timing of this panel is extraordinarily deliberate. Upon hearing the news, Dan whispers, (chapter 100) but the linguistic script itself fractures through a heavy visual hesitation and pause. Almost immediately afterward, his body relapses into unconsciousness. (chapter 100) While a surface-level reading diagnoses this as mere physical exhaustion, psychologically the moment functions as an immediate emotional retreat. It is as though Kim Dan’s psyche reaches a instantaneous, catastrophic conclusion the second the victory is confirmed: everything is over; I am no longer needed. This interpretation achieves an exquisite, painful symmetry when placed against Joo Jaekyung’s own origin story, which similarly fused hyper-success with absolute loss, having lost both of his parents (chapter 74) on the exact night he triumphed as a boxer. Episode 100 constructs the perfect inverse of that trauma script for Kim Dan: the champion’s victory becomes structurally associated with emotional abandonment, proving that for both protagonists, success itself is a dangerous catalyst for isolation.

This deadlock explains why Jaekyung’s desperate plea carries such revolutionary weight (chapter 100), and simultaneously why a significant portion of the readership—particularly the English-speaking audience —initially overlooked its profound significance. The narrative deliberately buries the confession beneath the sensory noise of panic, medical urgency, and external interruption, causing many to interpret “Stay with me” as a generic, desperate plea for a dying patient to remain anchored to life.

Structurally, however, the sentence carries a much deeper emotional currency. It represents the very first non-transactional expression of pure need in their entire relationship. Joo Jaekyung is no longer commanding Dan to remain because of a contract, a financial advance, or a professional obligation; he is saying, with total vulnerability, I cannot bear your absence.

Yet, the confession is instantly and violently aborted by the intervention of the medical staff. (chapter 100) The nurses rush into the room, treating Jaekyung’s desperation as a physical disturbance to the patient’s recovery. While their actions are entirely reasonable on a clinical level, psychologically the scene becomes devastating. Unintentionally, the medical intervention reinforces the exact, toxic logic that governs both characters: your emotions are a disruption, your presence causes harm, and distance is the only metric of safety. (chapter 100) They show no understanding for his emotional outburst. Because Joo Jaekyung already suffers under the subconscious belief that his violent world has contaminated and ruined Kim Dan, this interruption silently validates his deepest fear. The confession is not merely delayed; it is actively policed and silenced before Dan can consciously receive it. So no wonder why he couldn’t ask later.

This emotional misunderstanding later reappears at the penthouse after Kim Dan’s release from the hospital. Throughout the recovery process, Dan instinctively continues operating through gratitude (chapter 100) because gratitude remains the safest emotional language he knows. When he thanks Joo Jaekyung for saving his life and bringing him to the hospital, he unconsciously falls back into the same survival mechanism that shaped his entire existence:

someone helped me,
therefore I must immediately repay them emotionally so I do not become an unbearable burden.

But for Joo Jaekyung, this gratitude becomes almost intolerable. The champion does not experience himself as Dan’s savior. On the contrary, he interprets himself as the very cause of the catastrophe. In his mind, Kim Dan was only hunted, targeted, and violently pierced by a blade because he became entangled in Jaekyung’s dangerous world. Thus every expression of gratitude silently transforms into accusation inside the champion’s psyche.

This is precisely why Jaekyung later grants Kim Dan total freedom without openly asking him to remain. (chapter 100) Objectively, he believes he is performing an act of love. He removes the contract, clears the financial burden, and breaks the cage open. But psychologically, his actions are also driven by guilt. If Kim Dan nearly died because of him, then holding him back would become another form of selfish violence.

Yet to a profoundly traumatized person like Kim Dan, sudden freedom does not feel like protection. It feels like abandonment. Because Kim Dan does not know how to exist beside someone without usefulness, obligation, gratitude, or necessity. Once the transactional structure disappears, he loses the emotional framework through which he justified his own presence in Jaekyung’s life. Now, he even represents trouble and burden. (chapter 100) Thus both protagonists arrive at the exact same tragic conclusion from opposite directions:

From that moment onward, both protagonists slowly mutate into ghosts trapped within their own defense mechanisms. Jaekyung begins expressing his intense attachment indirectly through flowers, food, nighttime vigils, and silent traces, while Kim Dan continues translating his love into the safe, contained boundaries of formal gratitude (chapter 100), apology, and eventual self-erasure. Neither man can openly ask the other to stay because both are trapped in the catastrophic belief that their own presence is a toxic burden to the person they care about most.

The Bouquets of a Ghost

At first glance, the bouquets filling Kim Dan’s hospital room appear comforting and almost romantic. Naturally, many readers interpreted the flowers through traditional symbolism. (chapter 100) The pink roses evoke tenderness, admiration, vulnerable affection, and emotional attachment. The peonies suggest healing, compassion, sincerity, and quiet devotion. The smaller pale flowers evoke remembrance, enduring emotional bonds, and spiritual connection despite distance. On the surface, the bouquets seem to communicate something reassuring: someone deeply cares whether Kim Dan survives.

And yet, despite their beauty, the bouquets remain strangely disturbing. (chapter 100) The reason lies in the absence of the giver himself. Joo Jaekyung never openly remains beside Kim Dan during the day. Instead, the flowers appear during the night like traces left behind by someone haunting the room in silence. (chapter 100) Kim Dan wakes up surrounded not by Jaekyung’s physical presence, but by evidence that he had been there before disappearing once again. The flowers therefore become emotionally contradictory objects. They communicate affection, but simultaneously reinforce absence. They say: someone came, while also saying: someone vanished again.

This is precisely why the bouquets become psychologically unsettling. They reproduce the exact emotional structure underlying Kim Dan’s childhood trauma: warmth followed by disappearance. The gifts themselves are beautiful, but their emotional atmosphere resembles haunting more than stable companionship. Instead of openly remaining beside Kim Dan, Jaekyung expresses attachment indirectly through objects, much like a ghost incapable of fully entering the living world.

The first bouquet (chapter 100) becomes even more meaningful once one notices how strongly its colors resemble Halmoni’s scarf. (chapter 94) This visual parallel quietly transforms the flowers from romantic gifts into symbols of caregiving shaped by distance and self-removal. Shin Okja genuinely loved Kim Dan, but her solution to his suffering repeatedly became emotional disappearance. She believed that if she removed herself from the center of his life, he would finally become free and happy. Episode 100 reveals that Joo Jaekyung begins reproducing this exact same pattern. He leaves flowers, cake, comfort, and reassurance behind, but increasingly excludes himself from Kim Dan’s life physically and emotionally. Like Halmoni, he convinces himself that the person he loves suffers because of him.

The progression of the bouquets themselves deepens this interpretation even further. Their colors gradually evolve from stronger emotional intensity (chapter 97) toward increasing emotional fading. Earlier arrangements contain reddish tones to vivid pink traditionally associated with attachment, tenderness, living warmth, and vulnerable affection. (chapter 100) Yet as the chapter progresses, the flowers become increasingly pale, soft, and washed out, eventually moving toward orange (chapter 100), cream and almost white tones (chapter 100). This transformation matters enormously because white flowers traditionally evoke mourning, farewell, remembrance, emotional resignation, and quiet grief. The bouquets therefore begin charting Joo Jaekyung’s own psychological deterioration throughout the chapter. What initially appears as devotion slowly starts resembling mourning. The flowers do not merely reflect Kim Dan’s fragile condition; they quietly externalize Jaekyung’s exhaustion, guilt, insomnia, emotional isolation, and gradual self-erasure. In this sense, the bouquets expose that the champion himself is beginning to wither emotionally and physically.

And yet the flowers become even more psychologically disturbing once one remembers Kim Dan’s earlier relationship to them. Earlier in the story, Kim Dan openly admits that he likes the smell of flowers because they put him in a good mood, while Joo Jaekyung bluntly responds: (chapter 31)

At first glance, the contrast appears humorous or merely reflective of personality differences. But episode 100 retrospectively transforms the scene into something much sadder. Joo Jaekyung now surrounds Kim Dan with the very objects (chapter 100) he once rejected because he desperately wants to comfort him emotionally. He instinctively tries to recreate psychological warmth through flowers because he knows Kim Dan associates them with peace and happiness.

However, in my opinion, this gesture unintentionally reproduces another hidden trauma at the same time. Throughout chapter 94, Mingwa repeatedly surrounds the young Kim Dan with flowers (chapter 194), plants, watering imagery, (chapter 94) and natural landscapes. We see him standing among daisies, holding flowers, and smiling inside an environment filled with softness, nature, and emotional warmth. If flowers symbolically belonged to the emotional world surrounding Kim Dan’s vanished parents, then the bouquets acquire an entirely different psychological meaning. Joo Jaekyung believes he is leaving behind comfort, reassurance, and evidence of care. Yet unconsciously, the flowers may also reconnect Kim Dan to memories of disappearance, loss, abandonment, and mourning. (chapter 100) Thus Kim Dan is not happy at all. The bouquets therefore become profoundly double-edged objects. They evoke tenderness while simultaneously reviving the emotional atmosphere of a childhood that vanished forever and departure.

The Emperor Learns Self-Erasure

The terrifying irony of episode 100 is that Joo Jaekyung gradually starts resembling not only Kim Dan, but also Halmoni herself. Earlier in the narrative, Kim Dan embodied exhaustion, dissociation, starvation under stress, emotional collapse, and self-neglect. (chapter 61) But now the Emperor begins displaying the exact same symptoms. His hair is disheveled. His eyes are red from crying and sleeplessness. (chapter 100) His face appears hollow, wounded, and emotionally extinguished. The polished public image of the untouchable champion slowly collapses, revealing someone who has stopped taking care of himself entirely. Additionally, I assume that the cook did not return to the penthouse after Kim Dan had asked her to take the day off. (chapter 97)

At the same time, Jaekyung unconsciously adopts Halmoni’s emotional logic. He increasingly believes that Kim Dan’s suffering originates from proximity to him. (chapter 57) The harassment, the assault, the stabbing, and the violence surrounding the title fight all reinforce the terrifying idea that Kim Dan’s life deteriorates because he entered the champion’s world. As a result, Jaekyung arrives at the same conclusion as Shin Okja: perhaps the person he loves would be safer without him nearby.

This is why the nighttime visits become so psychologically important. (chapter 100) Readers initially interpret them romantically, but the deeper emotional logic behind them is much darker. Joo Jaekyung is the only person who truly understands how little Kim Dan values his own life. (chapter 100) Team Black sees kindness, sacrifice, and goodness. (chapter 100) They call Kim Dan an angel. But Jaekyung sees passive self-destruction. He remembers the sleepwalking, the dissociation, the emotional emptiness, and Kim Dan’s willingness to suffer in silence. Thus when Kim Dan says that it was “better” for him to get stabbed so that Jaekyung could continue fighting, the sentence can only become horrifying to the champion, especially when it reaches his ears through Park Namwook, like this: (chapter 100) Others hear selflessness. Jaekyung hears someone quietly declaring that his own life matters less than the championship belt. Kim Dan is still behaving as though his own survival matters less than the well-being, expectations, or stability of others. Importantly, these self-destructive tendencies are almost never verbalized openly. Kim Dan does not explicitly speak about wanting death. (chapter 59) Instead, the pattern emerges behaviorally through starvation, bodily neglect, overwork, emotional resignation, rejection of care, passivity toward danger, and repeated willingness to sacrifice himself without hesitation. His self-erasure slowly extends toward the body itself.

And Joo Jaekyung witnesses this repeatedly. (chapter 79)

This is precisely why the stabbing scene affects the champion so violently. Even while bleeding out, Kim Dan’s immediate concern becomes the match and Jaekyung’s victory rather than his own survival. The moment therefore exposes something terrifying psychologically: Kim Dan still does not instinctively place his own life at the center of his emotional hierarchy. His survival remains negotiable inside his own perception. Thus when Joo Jaekyung screams:

(chapter 98) The reaction expresses far more than anger alone. It reveals panic, horror, and the unbearable realization that the person he loves may not value his own continued existence properly. From that point onward, the hospital arc becomes haunted not only by guilt, but by fear. Joo Jaekyung begins confronting the possibility that Kim Dan’s lifelong self-erasure could eventually become literal disappearance.

Because Kim Dan’s previous dissociative states occurred during the night, Jaekyung begins visiting him during darkness to ensure he is still resting safely. (chapter 100) In other words, the champion starts behaving like someone watching over a person with suicidal tendencies. He no longer trusts Kim Dan’s apparent improvement because the stabbing exposed something terrifying: Kim Dan’s mentality has not fundamentally changed at all. He still views himself as expendable and worthless.

Yet, the tragedy deepens further because Jaekyung himself increasingly mirrors this self-destructive behavior. Like Kim Dan earlier in the story, he begins excluding himself emotionally from the life of the person he loves. He no longer eats properly, wanders aimlessly through the night, and expresses care indirectly through silent objects instead of speaking honestly, effectively becoming a ghost himself, similar to the way Kim Dan left the penthouse (chapter 45) to buy a key chain as a birthday present.

And yet Episode 100 simultaneously exposes the hidden shortcomings within Shin Okja’s worldview itself. Halmoni genuinely loved Kim Dan and desperately wanted him protected, financially secure, and emotionally cared for. (chapter 94) Joo Jaekyung initially fulfilled this exact role. He gave Kim Dan work, stability, material protection, and relief from crushing economic pressure. But the chapter quietly reveals that Jaekyung also begins inheriting Halmoni’s deeper pathology: self-removal mistaken for love. Like Shin Okja and his hyung, he increasingly convinces himself that Kim Dan would ultimately suffer less without him at the emotional center of his life. Thus he leaves behind flowers, comfort, financial freedom, and reassurance while gradually destroying himself psychologically through absence, guilt, and emotional isolation.

At the same time, this parallel also exposes Halmoni’s own emotional blind spots. Although she encouraged Jaekyung to remain beside Kim Dan and repeatedly expressed gratitude toward him (chapter 94), she showed remarkably little curiosity about Jaekyung’s inner world, trauma, loneliness, or emotional needs. She imagined that physical strength and wealth equaled an easy life, mental and emotional health. Then the problem was reduced to a simple solution: “Be happy with Kim Dan.” But Episode 100 demonstrates that companionship alone cannot heal trauma, when both individuals continue mistaking self-erasure for care and love. You can not love someone, if you don’t love yourself first. In this sense, Joo Jaekyung gradually transforms not only into Kim Dan’s protector, but also into someone unconsciously reproducing the very emotional logic that shaped Kim Dan’s suffering in the first place.

The Fragment of an Interrupted Happiness

One of the most painful symbols in episode 100 is the small piece of birthday cake. (chapter 100) Before the stabbing, Kim Dan consciously bought a cake in order to congratulate Joo Jaekyung on reclaiming the championship title. (chapter 100) And on his way home, he started imagining what would happen with this cake. The atmosphere of the scene felt so real, though it was just a dream. Soft lighting, playful intimacy, teasing, physical closeness, and domestic warmth briefly isolate the two men from the violence surrounding the outside world. (chapter 97) For perhaps one of the first times in the narrative, Kim Dan acts not out of obligation, survival, or repayment, but out of genuine emotional desire. He wants to make Joo Jaekyung happy and have fun with him.

And then Mingwa quietly inserts the extinguished candle. (chapter 97) The smoke rising into the darkness transforms the celebration into visual foreshadowing. The dream of happiness exists briefly, warmly, beautifully… then immediately begins dissolving into air, as if this was already announcing the future stabbing. So the assault violently interrupts the vision before Kim Dan can fully inhabit it emotionally.

This interruption matters profoundly because the scene is not merely about happiness in the present. It also reveals the emotional future Kim Dan had unconsciously started imagining. (chapter 97) The celebration was not simply about the championship victory itself. It represented the possibility that warmth, intimacy, and laughter might continue after the fight, beyond the violence of the octagon. For a brief moment, Kim Dan allowed himself to believe that happiness could survive the match and extend naturally into everyday life.

And objectively, part of this dream actually became real. Joo Jaekyung did reclaim the championship belt exactly as Kim Dan had imagined. (chapter 97) The victory truly happened. (chapter 100) Yet the emotional continuation attached to that victory was shattered before it could fully materialize. Because the stabbing occurred before the match, the triumph itself becomes psychologically contaminated. The belt survives, but the celebration dies before it truly begins.

This is precisely why the small piece of cake becomes so emotionally devastating afterward. (chapter 100) The object itself destabilizes Kim Dan because it reconnects him not merely to loss, but to dream and possibility. (chapter 100) The cake silently reminds him that the happiness he imagined had not been absurd or impossible. For a brief moment, reality itself had begun moving toward that future. The championship victory happened exactly as expected. Yet the companionship attached to that imagined future never arrived.

And this is where the symbolism of the strawberry cake becomes extraordinarily painful. (chapter 97) What remains afterward is no longer the original cake itself, but only a single detached fragment. The large celebratory cake bearing the visible message: “Happy Birthday” disappears entirely.

This disappearance becomes even more devastating once one realizes that Joo Jaekyung himself had also emotionally anticipated Kim Dan’s birthday. (chapter 97) The original celebratory atmosphere therefore belonged not only to Dan’s imagined future, but also to Jaekyung’s own silent desire to share happiness with him openly. Yet after the stabbing, the birthday itself becomes psychologically unbearable. Kim Dan spent that day unconscious, hospitalized, and hovering near death. Thus by offering only a small piece of cake instead of a full celebratory cake, Jaekyung unconsciously buries the birthday itself. (chapter 100) The candles disappear. The written greeting disappears. The celebration disappears. Even explicit acknowledgement of the occasion itself vanishes.

This transformation quietly reveals how deeply the stabbing contaminated Jaekyung’s relationship to happiness and celebration. (chapter 45) Birthdays and presents didn’t exist innocently for him before, but now with this new incident, they become psychologically more than ever associated with catastrophe, interruption, and the terror of almost losing Kim Dan forever. The fragment therefore no longer functions as a birthday cake at all. It becomes reduced to something emotionally survivable: a quiet gesture of care stripped of festivity, joy, and openly shared happiness.

to conclude, the original cake had been playful, communal, emotionally open, and deeply mutual. (chapter 97) The written greeting openly acknowledged celebration, intimacy, companionship, and shared happiness. It transformed the object into something profoundly personal. Even if Kim Dan could still outwardly disguise the gesture as simple congratulations for the champion’s victory, the emotional atmosphere already belonged to something much deeper.

But afterward, none of that survives intact. The candles vanish. The greeting vanishes. The imagined celebration vanishes. Even the shared nature of the cake disappears.

What remains is only a solitary piece quietly handed to Kim Dan in silence. (chapter 100)

And this fundamentally changes the emotional meaning of the object. By offering only a fragment instead of openly sharing the entire cake together, Joo Jaekyung unconsciously excludes himself from the celebration itself. The gesture becomes stripped of festivity and transformed into something sober, restrained, and painfully serious. The emotional atmosphere shifts away from: (chapter 97)

“Let’s celebrate together,” toward something much quieter: “You should eat.”

This transformation mirrors Jaekyung’s larger psychological movement throughout episode 100. After the stabbing, he increasingly removes himself not only from Kim Dan emotionally, but also from happiness itself. Just as the flowers become traces left behind without the giver openly remaining beside him, the cake becomes celebration without the celebrant. The surviving slice no longer belongs to fantasy, playfulness, or dream-like intimacy. It belongs to aftermath, guilt, recovery, exhaustion, and emotional restraint. (chapter 100)

At the same time, however, the surviving fragment still carries enormous symbolic weight because it silently preserves possibility. The cake is no longer whole, but it still exists. Happiness itself has not completely disappeared. What vanished was not the possibility of happiness, but the illusion that companionship would arrive effortlessly on its own.

This distinction becomes crucial for Kim Dan’s emotional development. (chapter 100)

Before the stabbing, the imagined celebration existed safely inside fantasy. (chapter 97) Kim Dan could briefly dream about warmth, intimacy, and emotional continuity because the future still remained unrealized and emotionally distant. But afterward, reality violently interrupts passivity itself. (chapter 100) Now the contract is ending. Jaekyung is beginning to erase himself emotionally. Separation becomes real. The future no longer unfolds automatically.

Thus the small piece of cake becomes much more than a symbol of interrupted happiness. It quietly confronts Kim Dan with a painful realization: (chapter 100) companionship itself still remains possible, but only if he consciously chooses it instead of retreating from it emotionally.

This confrontation exposes the ultimate psychological friction defining Kim Dan’s internal conflict: the toxic divide between gratitude and actual happiness. (chapter 100) Throughout his entire life, Dan has used formal gratitude as currency to buy his way out of being a burden. But episode 100 quietly poses a devastating question: does gratitude ever make someone happy? Is he smiling, when he is taking his fated partner’s hand and expressing his gratitude? (chapter 97) For a profoundly traumatized psyche, the answer is no. Gratitude is a defensive mechanism designed to restore a transactional balance; it is an acknowledgment of a debt that must be managed. It requires a strict, professional distance to remain safe. (chapter 100) Happiness, however, demands the exact opposite: it requires the total abandonment of the ledger, a surrender to vulnerability, and a willingness to occupy space in someone else’s life simply because you want to be there and are wanted as well, not because you are useful. The problem is life is not a fairy tale with a happy ending like “and they lived happily forever”.

But episode 100 quietly dismantles the fantasy that happiness means the absence of pain or struggle. The stabbing proves that suffering can violently invade even the warmest emotional moments. Life without fear, uncertainty, or wounds is ultimately an illusion.

And yet the small piece of cake simultaneously suggests something equally important. (chapter 100) A cake does not need a justification to exist. Sweetness is not something that must be earned through usefulness, victory, or repayment. Cakes are shared because human beings continue searching for warmth, companionship, and moments of joy even inside painful lives.

This is precisely what Kim Dan still struggles to understand. Throughout his entire life, he has treated happiness as something conditional:

  • something that must be deserved,
  • justified,
  • or safely postponed until suffering finally disappears.

But episode 100 quietly reveals that companionship cannot wait for a perfect future without pain. The dream collapsed. The celebration was interrupted. Trauma invaded the imagined happiness before it could fully materialize. Yet the small piece of cake still remains.

And that remaining fragment becomes emotionally crucial because it silently insists on something neither protagonist fully understands yet: sweetness and suffering can coexist. (chapter 81)

The object therefore no longer symbolizes naïve fantasy or guaranteed happiness. (chapter 100) Instead, it becomes material proof that companionship itself can still survive inside imperfect reality. The question is no longer whether life will remain painful. It will. The real question becomes whether Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung are capable of choosing one another despite that pain instead of endlessly retreating into guilt, low self-esteem, gratitude, and emotional self-erasure.

The Architecture of an Excuse

This devastating pattern of protective alienation is exposed most cleanly by the logistical friction of Kim Dan’s return to the penthouse in Episode 100. Superficially, Dan presents his presence in the apartment as a purely transactional (chapter 100) administrative necessity: he must retrieve the final remnants of his worldly possessions. Yet, the narrative explicitly undermines this justification the moment Jaekyung questions the meager size of his single canvas tote bag. (chapter 100) Dan casually confesses that he had the vast majority of his belongings shipped ahead by a courier service.

This logistical detail betrays his entire psychological posture. If total self-erasure and a clean, unburdening departure were his true, absolute objectives (chapter 100), there was no logical reason to return to the penthouse at all. The remaining handful of items could easily have been included in the courier shipment or abandoned entirely. The return to the penthouse is, fundamentally, an excuse. It is a manifestation of what trauma psychology recognizes as a subconscious desire for interception. Dan has spent his entire life slipping away from rooms before he can be cast out, yet by physically placing his fragile, recovering body back into Jaekyung’s immediate sensory field, his actions betray an unuttered, desperate plea to be stopped. (chapter 100) That’s why each time Mingwa focuses on his facial expressions after each interaction with his lover. (chapter 100)

This staged closure is quietly facilitated by the manager, Park Namwook, who acts as the unwitting structural engineer of their final encounter. (chapter 100) The manager is the only entity who possesses the logistical knowledge of Dan’s whereabouts and timeline, making the deliberate choice to allow this meeting to occur. (chapter 100) For Park Namwook, bringing Dan to the penthouse is an attempt to foster a healthy, mature sense of closure between two heavily damaged men. That way, he won’t have to go through the trouble looking for the physical therapist like in episode 56 and Joo Jaekyung can move on.

Crucially, Joo Jaekyung did know Kim Dan was coming (chapter 100); as Namwook reveals in the car, the champion was actively waiting outside the penthouse threshold. Jaekyung anticipated the encounter, which makes his terrifying composure all the more devastating. He did not stumble upon Dan by accident; he prepared himself to face him. However, Jaekyung possessed absolutely no knowledge of the courier arrangement. (chapter 100) He stood waiting in the shadows expecting a standard move-out—a process that would require a massive physical effort, particularly to transport the traditional wedding cabinet that represents the absolute core of Dan’s history.

Thus, when Jaekyung stands in the doorway and questions, “That’s all you’re taking?” the query is laced with a hidden, profound panic. He looks at the tiny canvas bag and realizes, with sudden horror, that Dan did not come back to transition out of his life over days or hours; he has already systematically eradicated his own presence in secret. The revelation strikes Jaekyung like an emotional ambush. He realizes that Dan has almost left nothing behind to bind him to this home except the wedding cabinet.

This unexpected velocity of Dan’s departure triggers Jaekyung’s newly adopted script of self-erasure. Because he now believes his very proximity is a lethal contamination, he refuses to fight the departure openly. He stands paralyzed by his own guilt, operating under the catastrophic assumption that if Dan wants to vanish, letting him go is the only way to keep him safe.

The true emotional focal point of this tragic stalemate is manifested in the physical presence of the traditional Korean wedding cabinet. As Kim Dan stands before the massive, intricately patterned piece of furniture, his physical body freezes, and he trails off into a heavy, lingering silence: (chapter 100)

To understand the profound weight of this hesitation, one must contrast this moment directly with the visual composition of Episode 53. (chapter 53) Back then, when Dan believed he was fleeing the penthouse because of his failure and promise to his grandmother, acting under the absolute threat of emotional and professional ruin, his treatment of the cabinet was violent and definitive. (chapter 53) He had actively dragged it out of the domestic sphere, casting it out into the sterile, exposed isolation of the public hallway. In Episode 53, throwing the cabinet away was a desperate attempt to sever his connection to the space.

By Episode 100, the cabinet is standing there, and Dan’s psychological relationship to it has completely inverted. He cannot bring himself to discard it, nor can he bear to move it. (chapter 100) In the formal shorthand of the comic, the traditional wedding cabinet—an object culturally explicitly tied to domestic permanence, matrimonial continuity, and the building of a shared home—functions as a literal stand-in for Kim Dan himself. The cabinet is Kim Dan. It is an archaic, deeply sentimental object that does not naturally belong in the hyper-modern, sterile, concrete architecture of Jaekyung’s penthouse, yet it is the only item that infuses the space with genuine warmth.

When Dan hesitates before the cabinet, staring at its surface with a hand gently raised, he is wrestling with the agonizing divide between his trauma-driven narrative and his true emotional desire. His wide, hollow stare in the close-up panel reveals the terrifying vulnerability of a person who has completely run out of scripts. By leaving the cabinet behind, Dan is stripping away his final defense mechanism. He is presenting Jaekyung with a blank slate, silently begging the champion to fill the void, to make the first move, and to shatter the professional, civil boundary that is keeping them apart. His silence is a desperate holding pattern; he wants to stay, but his pathologically low self-worth prohibits him from asking for accommodation. He needs Jaekyung to claim him.

When Jaekyung breaks the silence by commanding, “Just leave it here. I’ll take care of it,” the tragedy achieves its absolute convergence. (chapter 100) Neither man can speak the truth. Dan cannot say, “Please keep this cabinet because it represents my desire to belong to you.” Jaekyung cannot say, “Leave it here because I will ensure that it is delivered properly.” Instead, they both hide behind the sterile language of property management.

Jaekyung takes custody of the cabinet just as he took custody of Dan’s medical bills, assuming that by taking the burden of the closet, he is performing a clean act of caretaking for a man who is leaving him. Dan receives this command not as an invitation to stay, but as the final, polite closing of the account. He interprets “I’ll take care of it” as a definitive statement that his presence is no longer required to maintain the home. They are two ghosts performing a ritual of mutual rejection, entirely blind to the fact that they are looking at each other through the distorted lens of their own inherited wounds.

The Ghost Beside the Bed

Perhaps the most unsettling aspect of episode 100 is not that Kim Dan confuses dream and reality (chapter 100), but that he repeatedly experiences Joo Jaekyung’s genuine presence as something psychologically unreal. Throughout the hospital arc, the champion increasingly resembles a figure existing at the edge of consciousness itself: someone who appears during the night, leaves warmth and traces behind, then disappears again before stable daylight certainty can fully emerge. (chapter 100) Yet the episode carefully distinguishes between two different nocturnal encounters, and this distinction matters enormously.

Yet the episode carefully distinguishes between two different nocturnal encounters, and this distinction matters enormously.

The first sequence begins with Kim Dan awakening to the sensation of warmth and physical presence beside him. (chapter 100) The atmosphere is soft, luminous, and emotionally unstable. Jaekyung’s face gradually dissolves into sunlight itself (chapter 100) while Kim Dan drifts between unconsciousness and waking reality. The sequence feels extraordinarily intimate, yet emotionally difficult to grasp. First, Kim Dan quietly concludes

Only then does he ask himself: (chapter 100) Part of him wants to move toward reality.
Another part immediately transforms the experience into dream-language before the emotional implications become overwhelming.

And this is why the panel is so powerful visually as well. Kim Dan’s eyes are half-open, suspended between sleep and waking, dream and reality, denial and recognition, emotional truth and emotional self-protection.

This order matters enormously because Kim Dan instinctively classifies the experience as unreal before even fully questioning it. The emotional reflex comes first. Stable tenderness automatically becomes dream-like inside his perception. Only afterward does uncertainty emerge.

And yet the sequence itself quietly resists pure unreality. The emotional structure strongly reflects behavior readers have already objectively witnessed in episodes 99 and 100: (chapter 99) Joo Jaekyung desperately holding Kim Dan’s hand, begging him to stay awake, refusing to leave his side, and remaining emotionally fixated on him after the stabbing. Because of this continuity, readers instinctively accept the warmth of the hand as emotionally real even while the scene itself remains visually suspended between dream and reality.

The second nighttime sequence becomes far more disturbing. (chapter 100) Here Kim Dan half awakens and perceives Joo Jaekyung lying beside his hospital bed. (chapter 100) The scene unfolds slowly, almost silently. Kim Dan shifts his body closer toward him (chapter 100), and then Mingwa inserts the sound: TAP!

This detail is extraordinarily important because the sound anchors the moment materially into physical space. The scene no longer functions purely as emotional atmosphere or symbolic vision. The bodily movement creates tactile interaction. Yet immediately afterward, Kim Dan appears alone in the bed. (chapter 100) It creates the illusion that the doctor had been hallucinating. But the sound “TAP” seems to indicate the opposite. Moreover, the narrative cuts toward the lonely hospital room accompanied by the statement: (chapter 100) And this is precisely where Mingwa quietly manipulates both Kim Dan and the readers simultaneously. Readers objectively know only one thing with certainty: Joo Jaekyung entered the room.

The flowers prove hidden visits. The warm hand proves physical contact. The hospital scenes confirm bodily presence. But everything concerning how long he stayed, whether he remained overnight, how exhausted he became, or whether he truly lay beside Kim Dan through the night is left deliberately unresolved. However, the sound TAP indicates that this was not only reality, but also how he acted during the night. (chapter 100) He couldn’t face his lover out of guilt, regret and pain, yet he ensured that he could fall alseep easily.

This ambiguity mirrors Kim Dan’s own fragmented emotional perception perfectly. He experiences warmth, touch, bodily closeness, and traces of companionship, yet he cannot emotionally sustain those experiences as stable reality afterward. Instead, his mind instinctively transforms presence itself into something dream-like before it can fully wound him emotionally.

This is why the lonely final bed panel becomes such an effective perceptual trap. Readers instinctively reinterpret the earlier intimacy as hallucination because the empty bed visually overrides the previous sensory evidence. But the narrative itself quietly resists this conclusion. The TAP remains. The warmth remains. The flowers remain. The tactile memory remains. Something continues contradicting the idea that Jaekyung had never truly been there. (chapter 100)

And this contradiction reveals the deeper psychological tragedy underlying Kim Dan’s behavior. Pain feels real to him. Absence feels real. Abandonment feels real. But stable companionship does not. Fully accepting the possibility that Joo Jaekyung may truly have remained beside him till he fell asleep becomes emotionally overwhelming because it would force Kim Dan to confront a terrifying realization: he is no longer merely being cared for, but genuinely accompanied.

That distinction changes everything.

A brief visit can still be rationalized. Flowers can still be interpreted as obligation or guilt. Even hidden care-taking can still remain emotionally distant. (chapter 100) But silently lying beside another person through exhaustion, darkness, and uncertainty belongs to an entirely different emotional category. It signifies companionship without function, intimacy without transaction, and presence without obligation.

And this is precisely why both Kim Dan and many readers instinctively hesitate before fully accepting the scene as reality. Mingwa deliberately traps the audience inside Kim Dan’s emotional logic. Just as Kim Dan downgrades overwhelming tenderness into dreams and unstable perceptions, readers also retreat toward the safer interpretation that the champion’s presence beside the bed must have been imaginary.

But the episode itself never fully confirms that interpretation. Instead, it quietly leaves behind tactile cracks inside the illusion of absence: a hand squeeze, bodily warmth, hidden flowers, unfinished intuition, and above all the sound of physical contact breaking the silence of the room.

Thus the true horror of the hospital scenes is not that Kim Dan hallucinates love where none exists. It is far more tragic. Kim Dan repeatedly senses genuine emotional presence, yet his trauma prevents him from fully believing in the reality of companionship before it disappears again.

The Fear of Believing in Happiness

There is another crucial psychological layer underlying Kim Dan’s confusion between dream and reality: he fundamentally does not trust happiness.

Whenever something emotionally comforting happens to him, he instinctively experiences it as unstable, unreal, or dream-like. Paris feels unreal upon waking beside Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 87) The champion’s desperate plea to “stay with me” (chapter 100) becomes fragmented by unconsciousness before Kim Dan can fully absorb it emotionally. Even the warm hand beside the hospital bed is transformed into something resembling a dream rather than accepted as tangible reality.

This is extraordinarily important because Kim Dan does not struggle to recognize pain. Pain feels real to him. Obligation feels real. Guilt feels real. Exhaustion, abandonment, sacrifice, and suffering all feel emotionally trustworthy because they correspond to the logic through which he learned to survive.

But tenderness destabilizes him. Safety destabilizes him. Being wanted destabilizes him. (chapter 100) The possibility that someone would remain beside him voluntarily, not out of obligation but genuine attachment, feels psychologically unbelievable.

As a result, Kim Dan’s psyche repeatedly converts emotional warmth into something unreal before he can consciously process it. It is not that he cannot perceive affection. On the contrary, his body and senses often recognize it first through warmth, touch, and presence. The tragedy is that his conscious mind and such his senses (chapter 100) instinctively downgrades these experiences into dreams because he has been conditioned to believe that lasting happiness is temporary, fragile, and destined to disappear.

Thus recognition itself always arrives too late. (chapter 100)

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Goodbye 🤝 Then … 😿 – part 1

The Ghosts in the Warmth: Why Episode 100 Left Us Cold

Episode 100 of Jinx left many readers strangely unsatisfied. Some felt frustrated 😤, others emotionally empty. A few among us — readers, fans, longtime Jinx-lovers — even believed that this chapter resembled an ending so much that Mingwa herself had to clarify publicly (on X) that the story was not over. Some readers even considered dropping the story entirely. That alone says a great deal about the emotional violence of this chapter.

When a story’s atmosphere becomes so suffocating that readers instinctively want to step away from it, something unusual has happened. Dropping the story almost becomes a survival instinct. Remaining inside the narrative means remaining trapped in that freezing penthouse together with Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung, surrounded by silence, distance, and unresolved pain.

But why did this episode create such discomfort? (chapter 100) Why does a chapter filled with flowers (chapter 100), warmth (chapter 100), survival, and reunion (chapter 100) feel so painfully cold? Why does “Goodbye then…” (chapter 100) sound more violent than the stabbing itself?

And perhaps the most disturbing question of all: how did Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung end up acting like ghosts around each other?

For dozens of chapters, readers endured intense angst, toxic power dynamics, emotional repression, and physical trauma while holding onto a collective expectation: eventually, communication and emotional honesty would heal the damage. (chapter 99) Episode 100 appeared to be that turning point. The stabbing should have shattered the emotional walls between the protagonists. Many expected tears, confrontation, confession, catharsis. Instead, Mingwa deliberately subverted the classic romance payoff. Rather than an emotional embrace, readers received silence, hesitation, distance, and a strangely clinical handshake. (chapter 100)

For many readers, that absence of catharsis felt almost unbearable. The realization suddenly emerged that the road toward healing might be just as long, painful, and exhausting as the road toward destruction itself.

At the same time, episode 100 strips away much of the fictional distance that once existed between the protagonists and the audience. Earlier in the story, Joo Jaekyung often functioned as a larger-than-life “red flag” character: (chapter 96) dramatic, excessive, intimidating, almost unreal. But the tragedy presented in this chapter feels painfully ordinary in comparison. (chapter 100) Two people paralyze each other through assumptions, guilt (chapter 100), low self-esteem (chapter 100), fear of vulnerability, and lack of communication. Neither asks the questions that truly matter. (chapter 100) Neither says what they genuinely feel. (chapter 100) Almost everyone has experienced a relationship, friendship, or family dynamic damaged not by hatred, but by silence and emotional avoidance. That realism transforms the chapter into something deeply uncomfortable because the fantasy slowly disappears, leaving behind a frighteningly human mirror.

Readers blamed Kim Dan for his passivity and self-sacrificial tendencies. (chapter 100) Others condemned Joo Jaekyung for his emotional withdrawal and ghost-like behavior. (chapter 100) Yet perhaps the real mystery of episode 100 is not who was right or wrong. Perhaps the more important question is this: how did two people who clearly long for each other become so incapable of speaking honestly at the very moment they needed it most?

The deeper one looks into this chapter, the stranger and more painful it becomes. Like wine slowly revealing hidden notes over time, episode 100 transforms upon rereading. Details that initially appeared insignificant — a warm hand, a bouquet of flowers, a hidden night visit, a missing conversation, a closed penthouse door, a simple “THUD” (chapter 100) — gradually begin forming another story beneath the surface.

A story not about the absence of love, but about the terrifying consequences of silence and secrecy.

The Counterfeit Departure

The final emotional image of episode 100 is not the handshake between Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung, but the empty entrance of the penthouse accompanied by the words: (chapter 100) and the unsettling sound effect:

This distinction is extremely important because the handshake itself does not yet create the impression of definitive separation. (chapter 100) On the contrary, the scene still contains physical proximity, warmth, gratitude, and mutual recognition. The handshake almost functions as an acknowledgment of everything the two protagonists survived together, but also as a quiet expression of thanks. Kim Dan recognizes the champion’s help, while Joo Jaekyung finally allows physical contact to occur without violence, coercion, or sexual tension. The emotional atmosphere only becomes truly haunting once Mingwa deliberately removes both protagonists from the frame itself, leaving behind nothing but the silent entrance and the implication of departure. (chapter 100)

Even the wording of the farewell creates ambiguity. Without the points of suspension, “Goodbye then” would sound definitive, emotionally sealed, almost like the final sentence of a completed story. Yet the ellipsis fundamentally changes the atmosphere of the phrase. The farewell suddenly becomes suspended, unfinished, hesitant. Kim Dan does not simply say goodbye; he trails off emotionally.

The word “then” itself is equally fascinating because it weakens the apparent finality of the separation. It functions as a temporal marker suggesting postponement:

The phrase therefore already contains the contradiction defining the entire chapter. Verbally, Kim Dan enacts separation. Emotionally, however, he still remains attached to Joo Jaekyung. The title quietly preserves the possibility of continuation, just as the chapter itself refuses to provide true emotional closure.

Why end the chapter there?

Doors in Jinx are never neutral architectural elements. Throughout the story, they repeatedly symbolize secrecy (chapter 7), emotional distance, hidden truths, privacy, abandonment, and separation (chapter 64). A closed door immediately creates the impression that something has ended. (chapter 100) Someone has left. Access has been denied. Naturally, many readers instinctively interpreted this panel in the simplest possible way:

Kim Dan has already left the penthouse.

And once this assumption is accepted, the chapter suddenly feels final. The emotional logic becomes brutally simple. The debt is gone. The fight is over. The criminals were arrested. (chapter 100) The protagonists separate. The door closes. The story ends. It almost resembles the conclusion of a dark fairy tale where the suffering has finally reached its endpoint.

The problem is that the panel itself is far more ambiguous than it initially appears. (chapter 100)

The entrance is empty, yes, but the image does not actually show Kim Dan leaving the apartment. On the contrary, the scene remains strangely suspended. Mingwa does not show the elevator descending, the street outside, or Kim Dan physically walking away. (chapter 4) Instead, she traps both the reader and the characters inside the penthouse itself, forcing us to stare at an almost silent threshold. (chapter 100)

This detail becomes even more significant when we observe the scene immediately preceding the “goodbye.” Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung still stand physically facing one another. (chapter 100) Their feet remain oriented toward each other at the entrance. In Jinx, body positioning often reveals emotions that words suppress, and here the contradiction is devastating. Verbally, both protagonists are enacting separation. Physically, however, their bodies still seek connection. Neither truly turns away. The image therefore creates emotional suspension rather than emotional closure.

This is precisely why Mingwa does not show the actual departure itself at the end of the chapter. Emotionally, the separation remains incomplete because the protagonists themselves are incapable of fully separating from one another. The final panel traps both the characters and the audience inside the threshold between staying and leaving. (chapter 100)

The farewell scene itself becomes even more painful when placed beside earlier internal monologues from Joo Jaekyung that gain new meaning in retrospect. Earlier in the story, the champion silently admitted: (chapter 97) Another scene reinforces this same emotional desire: (chapter 97) These confessions reveal that beneath the aggression, possessiveness (chapter 82), and obsession with fighting and Kim Dan stood a much simpler fear: abandonment.

Yet when episode 100 finally confronts him with the possibility of Kim Dan truly leaving, Joo Jaekyung says the exact opposite of what he once desired. Instead of asking him to stay, he turns his head away and quietly says: (chapter 100) The Korean version with “가” (“Ka”) makes the moment even harsher because of its simplicity. It is short, direct, emotionally stripped bare:

Go.

And suddenly, the scene exposes the champion’s loneliness with devastating clarity.

Kim Dan stands before him carrying his bag, partially turned away, visually resembling the blurred image of departure from Jaekyung’s earlier imagination. (chapter 97) At the same time, Joo Jaekyung himself avoids looking directly at him. Both characters physically reproduce emotional withdrawal. Neither can fully face the other because both are trapped inside fear, guilt, longing, and self-suppression.

Most tragically, Joo Jaekyung participates in the very abandonment he fears. Rather than risking rejection by asking Kim Dan to stay, he verbally permits the separation himself. The scene therefore does not portray emotional indifference, but defensive surrender. (chapter 100) The champion who once appeared emotionally untouchable reveals himself incapable of expressing the one thing he truly wants:

“Please stay with me.”

At the same time, both protagonists are now attempting to love through self-removal.

This emotional mirroring becomes even more fascinating when connected to the idea of tactile dissonance developed earlier in the story. (chapter 95) Ironically, the eight-day separation did not emotionally distance the protagonists from one another. Quite the opposite. During this period, they became increasingly synchronized mentally and emotionally. (chapter 97) Their thoughts, fears, and desires slowly began aligning almost unconsciously. Yet this growing emotional attunement produces a tragic paradox: they become so psychologically similar that they can no longer recognize their own reflection inside the other person. (chapter 100) (chapter 100) The real tragedy of episode 100 is therefore not emotional distance, but excessive emotional synchronization without communication.

Kim Dan increasingly convinces himself that he represents a burden (chapter 100) and even a threat to Joo Jaekyung’s career. The harassment, the public humiliation, the scandal surrounding the championship, and the stabbing itself all reinforce the idea that remaining beside the champion will only continue damaging his reputation and future.

Joo Jaekyung, meanwhile, arrives at the opposite side of the same tragedy. He increasingly perceives himself as a source of contamination and danger. (chapter 100) The harassment, Kim Dan’s suicidal despair, the sleepwalking, the stabbing, and the violence surrounding the championship all reinforce the terrifying idea that Kim Dan suffers because he entered his world. In his eyes, Kim Dan’s life is now endangered because of him.

Ironically, this emotional synchronization does not bring them closer together communicatively. Instead, it pushes both men toward the same logic of self-removal. (chapter 100) Kim Dan leaves because he believes the champion will recover better without him. Like out of sight, out of mind! Joo Jaekyung lets him go because he believes keeping him close will only expose him to more suffering.

Thus, both silently cooperate in mutual abandonment while simultaneously longing for the exact opposite.

Even the sound effect deserves closer attention. (chapter 100) Many readers automatically interpreted “THUD” as the sound of a closing door. Well, the Spanish translation is indeed “Clack” and not thud. So one might jump to the conclusion that there’s an error in the English version. Yet visually, the effect does not fully behave like one. The vertical motion lines suggest movement from top to bottom rather than the lateral motion usually associated with a door shutting. The sound resembles impact, instability, or collapse more than simple departure. This becomes particularly interesting when compared to earlier scenes such as episodes 57 and 61 (chapter 61) (chapter 57), where emotional shock and physical weakness are visually connected to walls, imbalance, and bodies searching for support. The ambiguity becomes important because chapter 100 never clearly identifies (chapter 100) who destabilizes physically in that moment. Readers instinctively assume Kim Dan has already left, but the visual language simultaneously leaves open another disturbing possibility: that someone inside the penthouse is collapsing.

In other words, the panel may not depict emotional closure at all. It may instead depict destabilization. This possibility completely transforms the emotional meaning of the chapter. The “goodbye” no longer functions as a clean farewell, but almost like a psychological blow. Words can kill. And here, Kim Dan’s calm “Goodbye then…” lands with the violence of an invisible wound.

The choice of the empty entrance as the final image therefore reveals something important about reader psychology as well. The chapter creates the illusion of a completed fairy tale ending while simultaneously making that ending feel emotionally wrong. Earlier in the story, Kim Dan unconsciously adopted this exact logic himself through the expression:

(chapter 41)

Like a little boy trying to force reality into the structure of a fairy tale, he attempts to convince himself that the story has now reached its proper conclusion. (chapter 100) The champion won. The villains were punished. (chapter 100) The debt disappeared. (chapter 77) Therefore separation must be the correct final step.

Yet Mingwa visually undermines this interpretation at every turn. (chapter 100)

The penthouse feels too empty, too silent, too cold, and too unresolved. The atmosphere resembles not peace, but haunting. Instead of emotional catharsis, the reader experiences emotional suspension.

Perhaps this explains why so many readers reacted so strongly to episode 100. The chapter weaponizes absence itself. Mingwa does not simply separate the protagonists; she traps both the characters and the audience inside uncertainty. The zoom on the closed entrance intensifies this sensation even further. Readers feel suffocated because the panel transforms the penthouse into a frozen emotional space where communication has failed completely.

The door therefore symbolizes much more than physical departure. It becomes the visual embodiment of the chapter’s central tragedy: two people standing on opposite sides of an emotional threshold (chapter 100), unable to reach one another despite desperately longing to do so.

What A Little Wimp

Before examining the significance of the handshake itself, we must return to one of the earliest emotional patterns established in the story: Kim Dan’s awkward departure after treating Joo Jaekyung at the gym. After accidentally crossing a physical boundary (chapter 1) and leaving himself totally embarrassed (chapter 1), the physical therapist has only one thought in mind: to run away. Before opening the door, he nervously stammers (chapter 1) and hurries away. Joo Jaekyung’s reaction after his departure is dismissive and mocking: (chapter 1)

At first glance, the scene appears almost comedic. Kim Dan blushes, panics, avoids eye contact, and escapes after touching the champion too intimately. Yet retrospectively, this moment establishes an important pattern: touch (chapter 1), admiration (chapter 1), destabilization, and departure are already intertwined from the very beginning. Kim Dan does not simply treat Joo Jaekyung’s body; he admires it through his hands and eyes, marveling at how different it is from every other client he has known. The accidental touch breaks the professional frame, and the result is immediate flight. (chapter 1)

This early departure quickly becomes part of Jaekyung’s mental archive. In episode 4, he does not actually witness Kim Dan leaving the penthouse (chapter 4); he only discovers the empty bed afterward. (chapter 4) The absence itself triggers projection. He imagines Kim Dan walking away, already converting disappearance into an internal image. Later, in episode 53, this fear becomes reality: Kim Dan truly leaves the penthouse (chapter 53), and this time the departure is explicitly shown. In his own mind, the doctor does not intend to return. By episode 97, the image repeats once more (chapter 97) when Jaekyung admits that he wants to ask Kim Dan not to leave, yet immediately imagines him walking away if he refuses. Significantly, as the figure of Kim Dan recedes into the distance, a heavy, creeping darkness swallows the panel. The shadow beneath Dan’s feet bleeds forward, stretching into a profound black void that anchors itself directly to Jaekyung’s perspective. This visual graduation of shadow reveals that Kim Dan’s departure is no longer just a hypothetical exit; it is an oncoming emotional eclipse. Jaekyung’s subconscious recognizes that if Dan walks out that door, the ensuing darkness will be absolute—a trauma from which the champion will not be able to recover.

This is why the line “What a little wimp” becomes deeply tragic in retrospect. The supposedly untouchable champion has become the one haunted by departure. The man who once mocked Kim Dan’s awkward escape now fears being left behind so intensely that he projects abandonment before it even happens. Hence he turns away like Kim Dan in episode 1. (chapter 100)

This fear cannot be separated from Jaekyung’s family wound. The image of his mother, presented entirely through her back and her silence (chapter 73), suggests not only physical departure but permanent emotional inaccessibility. His father’s bitter line—“You are your mother’s son, after all”—reveals that this silence wounded him too. The father was not merely angry because the mother left; he was wounded by the way she left: without true confrontation, without emotional clarity, and perhaps with some distant promise that never became presence. The turned back, the heavy silence, and the unresolved farewell became the core of Jaekyung’s inherited trauma. He stops fighting for the relationship itself (chapter 72) and begins fighting merely against the clock, trying to finish a transaction before the countdown hits zero. This memory exposes a foundational trauma. To a young Jaekyung, his mother’s disappearance was directly tied to a transactional failure—his father’s inability to stop her or provide financial security. Consequently, Jaekyung internalized a distorted lesson: love is not protected through vulnerability, communication, or emotional pleading. Love is protected through material capacity and performance. In his child mind, a countdown began: he had to grow up, amass immense wealth, and become powerful enough to buy back his mother’s presence.

Tragically, this transactional clock is the exact blueprint he uses when Kim Dan enters his life. We see the definitive script for this transactional countdown written explicitly by Jaekyung himself in episode 77. Sitting on a wooden platform under a rare, open sky, the champion retreats into the safety of a contract to mask his growing vulnerability, declaring: (chapter 77) This is no coincidence that as he sets this absolute deadline, Mingwa frames Jaekyung from behind (chapter 77) He turns his back entirely, casting his face in shadow and physically reproducing the visual motif of his childhood trauma. He is verbally establishing a countdown while visually acting out an ending. By telling Dan that their proximity is strictly bounded by the final bell of the title match, Jaekyung constructs the very cage that will later paralyze him.

Consequently, as the title match draws closer in episode 95, this psychological clock accelerates to a suffocating degree Surrounded by chaotic media headlines speculating about his imminent match and the possible collapse of his career (chapter 95), Jaekyung’s mental space becomes a dark, claustrophobic cage. While sparring, his only internal thought is sheer exhaustion: “I just want to win this match and get it over with…”

Therefore it is not surprising why he chose to listen to his manager and distanced himself from his fated partner. In a sense, he first stops fighting for Kim Dan and begins fighting merely to reach the end of the timeline. The championship ceases to represent ambition, glory, or even personal desire; it becomes an expiration date. Increasingly, the champion loses the ability to project himself into the future at all.

This is precisely why his later thoughts become so devastating. When Jaekyung admits: (chapter 97),

the importance lies not only in the fear of abandonment, but in the word ask itself. For perhaps the first time in the story, Jaekyung unconsciously accepts Kim Dan’s freedom to choose. He no longer thinks in terms of ownership, obligation, or debt. Deep down, he already understands that once the match ends, Kim Dan will be free to leave him behind.

Yet even here, Jaekyung’s emotional framework remains tragically incomplete. Although he has begun abandoning the logic of ownership, he still cannot truly imagine a future built upon mutual existence rather than temporary possession. His thoughts remain structured around the championship timeline itself. The title match continues functioning as the organizing principle of reality. Even the phrase:

“…even after the match is over”

reveals the limitation of his emotional imagination. Jaekyung can imagine asking Kim Dan to remain. He can imagine losing him. He can imagine surrendering him. But he still cannot truly imagine simply living with him.

In other words, the champion still thinks in terms of “having” rather than “being.” [For more read the essay The Art of Loving] ]The relationship continues existing psychologically as something bounded by deadlines, countdowns, and expiration points. Once the contractual structure dissolves, Jaekyung unconsciously reaches the edge of his own emotional framework. The countdown ends, yet nothing replaces it.

And tragically, this realization does not awaken hope inside the champion, but resignation. Even before Kim Dan makes any choice himself, Jaekyung emotionally begins surrendering him. (chapter 97) The man once defined entirely by his monstrous willpower gradually loses his fighting spirit altogether. He no longer fights for a future with Kim Dan; he merely tries to endure the final countdown before the separation he already believes inevitable.

Therefore, when Kim Dan stands before him in episode 100 (chapter 100), Jaekyung is not reacting only to the present moment. He is reacting to a projected abandonment shaped by earlier departures, his parents’ history, the transactional contract he wound up himself, and the immense guilt he carries over the violence surrounding Kim Dan. The champion now knows about the harassment, the attempted sexual assault orchestrated through the former director of the hospital, the suicidal despair, the sleepwalking, the stabbing, and the terrifying chain of events connected to the championship itself. Increasingly, Jaekyung no longer sees himself merely as someone who might lose Kim Dan emotionally; he sees himself as the center of a destructive orbit that continually places Dan in danger. He seems to think, he is Kim Dan’s jinx. (chapter 100) That’s why Joo Jaekyung is no longer fighting, he has already anticipated the loss.

Ironically, by episode 97, Kim Dan himself has already begun unconsciously stepping into a completely different emotional mode. While Jaekyung remains trapped inside countdowns, departures, and anticipatory endings, the physical therapist instinctively begins imagining ordinary relational existence. This contrast becomes particularly visible with the hamster’s dream (chapter 97) , where Kim Dan arrives with a cake to celebrate Jaekyung reclaiming his championship title. The atmosphere of the interaction is striking precisely because of its normality. There is no treatment session, no debt, no violence, no professional obligation dominating the exchange. For this brief dream , Kim Dan behaves less like an employee or caretaker and more like someone already sharing daily life with the champion. (chapter 97)

The small gesture of smearing cream across Jaekyung’s face becomes symbolically important for this reason. Kim Dan momentarily strips the champion of his overwhelming public aura and interacts with him through casual intimacy rather than admiration or fear. Unlike Jaekyung, Kim Dan unconsciously possesses fragments of an ordinary emotional model inherited from his life with his grandmother and parents: shared meals, small celebrations, routine care (chapter 94), and domestic familiarity. While the champion imagines endings, Kim Dan quietly begins imagining continuity.

The Warm Hand against the Jinx

This is precisely why the handshake matters so much. (chapter 100) It takes place right before Jaekyung tells Kim Dan to go. For one fragile moment, the projected departure is completely interrupted. Kim Dan is still there. His hand is still warm. The contact is no longer like that first treatment at the gym, where touch was mixed with embarrassment and professional confusion. (chapter 100) This time, touch becomes mutual recognition and reciprocity.

The tragedy is that this recognition does not yet become speech. The handshake briefly suspends the counterfeit departure, but it does not break the silence. After this fleeting moment of contact, Jaekyung retreats straight back into fear and self-removal. Unable to ask Kim Dan to stay, he turns away and says the exact opposite of what he wants: (chapter 100)

The handshake is not the end of the separation. It is the last, desperate interruption before the logic of abandonment reclaims them both.

This is where the spatial layout of the penthouse entrance exposes the final structural contradiction. (chapter 100) When Kim Dan stands before the champion, he is positioned directly in front of the door as though physically replacing it, turning his own body into the threshold. Yet meticulously, Mingwa leaves a massive, artificial gap between the physical therapist and the actual exit behind him. This distance is no coincidence. The vast, empty space behind Dan acts as a visual vacuum—a psychological buffer zone proving that while he is verbally enacting separation, he has not yet crossed the literal threshold.

He is suspended inside a vacuum of his own making, his hand still reaching forward toward connection while the enormous void at his back quietly threatens to swallow the moment whole.

Crucially, this gap represents a profound, hidden chance. It is the positive reflection of “distance.” By leaving such a significant space between his body and the door, Kim Dan has physically delayed his own exit, leaving a literal runway of time and possibility open. The finality of the goodbye has not yet been sealed; the door remains far behind him.

The ultimate tragedy of episode 100 is that Joo Jaekyung completely fails to recognize this positive reflection. (chapter 100) Poisoned by the creeping darkness of his own nightmares, the inherited trauma of his mother’s silence, and the immense guilt surrounding Kim Dan’s suffering, the champion no longer recognizes the distance as a space to step forward and intervene. Instead, his fear of vulnerability completely distorts his perception. He reads the gap not as an opportunity to change the script, but as an approaching, inevitable eclipse.

To protect himself from the pain of watching Dan step backward into the void, Jaekyung surrenders defensively—he turns his head away, preparing himself not to look back, and actively seals the very abandonment he was given a chance to prevent.

No, Joo Jaekyung is no little wimp, but rather a lost puppy frozen upon a threshold of his own making, completely blind to the choice standing before him. Yet because the contract has dissolved and the debt has disappeared, this wide, uncrossed emptiness also remains a radical space of possibility. For the first time, the relationship is no longer mediated by obligation, transaction, or countdown.

And perhaps this finally becomes Kim Dan’s chance to recognize Jaekyung’s paralysis, step into the gap himself, and prove his love and care without expecting anything in return.

Before the counterfeit departure can fully reclaim the scene, Mingwa inserts one final, crucial interruption: the handshake (chapter 100). Significantly, this gesture does not function as a standard goodbye. In ordinary social language, a handshake belongs either to a formal greeting or to a completed farewell. Here, however, the contact appears before Kim Dan says goodbye and before any true separation has taken place. Structurally, the handshake suspends the departure rather than confirming it.

This detail becomes even more meaningful when contrasted with the protagonists’ first encounter at the gym. Back then, there was no mutual greeting ritual between them. (chapter 1) Kim Dan bowed nervously while Joo Jaekyung remained emotionally detached, dominant, and superior. Their relationship began asymmetrically: champion and therapist, admired body and embarrassed observer. After accidentally crossing a physical boundary during treatment, Kim Dan fled the room in humiliation, unable to withstand the emotional destabilization caused by touch itself. No reciprocal gesture softened the imbalance. There was no handshake, no equal acknowledgment, and no mutual recognition.

Episode 100 quietly upends that entire foundation. (chapter 100)

For the first time, both protagonists voluntarily reach toward one another at the exact same emotional level. Neither obligation, debt, nor treatment mediates the contact. (chapter 100) The gesture is entirely mutual and even reciprocated, both squeeze each other’s hand. (chapter 100) And unlike the first touch at the gym, which produced panic and flight, this touch produces a profound illumination. Kim Dan’s little gesture exposes a gradual metamorphosis, he becomes more proactive. Hence his fingers linger on the MMA fighter’s skin. (chapter 100) (chapter 87) It becomes even more obvious, once compared with their hand gesture in Paris.

Unlike chapter 1, however, Kim Dan does not flee from the emotional intensity created through touch. This time, he consciously remains present. While extending his hand, he hesitates softly: (chapter 100)

The hesitation still reveals vulnerability, yet vulnerability no longer produces escape. Instead, Kim Dan deliberately chooses acknowledgment. This detail is crucial because the gratitude expressed here cannot be reduced to money, debt, treatment, or material compensation. In fact, the scene occurs precisely after the contractual framework governing their relationship has dissolved. The debt is gone. The transactional structure has collapsed. Therefore, Kim Dan’s gratitude suddenly becomes profoundly human rather than functional. He is no longer thanking:

  • an employer,
  • a client,
  • or a benefactor.

He is thanking Joo Jaekyung himself.

For perhaps the first time in the story, Kim Dan consciously chooses to close the emotional distance between them instead of running away from it. The hand extended toward Jaekyung therefore becomes far more than a polite social gesture. It becomes Kim Dan’s first genuine attempt to acknowledge their relationship openly and properly.

The importance of this moment lies in what Kim Dan suddenly realizes through physical contact itself. (chapter 100) Until now, the physical therapist remained trapped inside a distorted emotional narrative shaped by silence, institutional misunderstanding, his grandmother’s sacrificial principles, and Park Namwook’s logic of performance (chapter 43) and Hwang Byungchul’s wrong interpretation (chapter 70). Kim Dan had unconsciously learned to interpret Joo Jaekyung primarily as “the champion”: an untouchable entity sustained solely by victory, driven by a hatred of losing, and emotionally fulfilled through performance alone. This explicates why the “hamster” had made the following request: (chapter 98)

This misunderstanding becomes painfully visible during the hospital scenes. When Park Namwook explains that the culprit acted under Baek Junmin’s orders (chapter 100) and that Jaekyung blames himself for the attack (chapter 100), the manager unintentionally frames the entire assault through championship logic. The implication quietly becomes that Kim Dan was hurt because he stood too close to the champion, because enemies targeted Jaekyung, and because the title match had to continue.

As a result, doc Dan immediately internalizes guilt through a logic of substitution. He responds: (chapter 100) The statement is devastating because it fuses the two oppressive ideologies that have shaped Kim Dan’s entire life. From Park Namwook and Team Black, he inherited the belief that the championship comes first and that Jaekyung’s happiness depends entirely upon winning. From his grandmother, he inherited the logic of total self-erasure: if suffering must exist in the world, it should fall squarely upon him. Yet the sentence also reveals something even more tragic: Kim Dan still cannot fully imagine the depth of Joo Jaekyung’s emotional attachment to him. By concluding that it was “better” for him to become the victim, he unconsciously reduces the wolf’s suffering to the temporary inconvenience of a threatened match. In doing so, he actually denies the existence of the champion’s true feelings altogether. Kim Dan still sees “the Emperor,” the fighter obsessed with victory, rather than the terrified man who would have suffered infinitely more from losing him than from losing any championship belt. Thus before losing consciousness, he still had this image of the main lead: The Emperor (chapter 100)

And perhaps this is the most disturbing implication of all. Even after the stabbing, Kim Dan still unconsciously evaluates the situation through the same brutal performance logic governing the fighting world itself: as long as the champion successfully won the match, the suffering required to secure that victory becomes psychologically acceptable. In this sense, Kim Dan does not yet fully confront what the championship truly cost Joo Jaekyung internally. (chapter 100)

After all, Kim Dan never witnessed the psychological destruction surrounding the fight itself. He did not see the emotional collapse hidden behind the title defense, the confrontation with Baek Junmin afterward, or the horrifying guilt poisoning the victory from within. Thus, while Kim Dan begins sensing the champion’s warmth emotionally, he still hesitates to recognize the full extent of the suffering hidden beneath the belt.

The tragedy, therefore, is not simple blindness. Kim Dan is beginning to perceive the truth, yet accepting it fully would force him to confront something unbearable: the possibility that the very victory he believed he protected may have shattered Joo Jaekyung psychologically instead and he might be responsible for his “ruthlessness and destruction”.

So the tragic irony is that the very thing Kim Dan believes he protected—the fight itself—is precisely what begins destroying Joo Jaekyung emotionally. Had the match been postponed, Jaekyung would never have encountered Baek Junmin afterward, never acquired the horrifying knowledge surrounding the assault, and never fused the championship psychologically with harassment, violence, guilt, and emotional collapse. Thus, while Kim Dan believes his sacrifice saved Jaekyung’s future, the victory title increasingly becomes a toxic poison inside the champion’s mind. Hence the young man looks so terrible despite his “victory”. (chapter 100)

And remarkably, almost nobody around them notices this internal collapse. Inside the hospital room, (chapter 100), Kim Dan is constantly insulated by a loud wall of warmth, visitors, food, and collective reassurance. Team Black worries boisterously about him (chapter 100), jokes around his bed admiring the comfort of the room (chapter 100), scolds him affectionately, (chapter 100) and celebrates his survival. This lively atmosphere gradually reconstructs a superficial sense of normality. Meanwhile, Joo Jaekyung exists almost entirely outside this emotional circle. To the world, the champion is still perceived as rude, unmovable, and heartless, (chapter 100) while the members of Team Black get to play the roles of “affectionate and concerned” companions. (chapter 100) Even when people discuss Jaekyung, they rarely speak about his exhaustion, fear, loneliness, or his disintegration as a human being. Why? Because they simply do not see it and believes in their hyung’s statement, the manager. They remain entirely blind to the human being beneath the title. They speak only of the match, the culprit, the belt, and his capacity to perform. Because he won the last fight, they treat him as an object that functions correctly, while keeping their distance from his harsh demeanor. They essentially avoid him as a temperamental monster, completely oblivious to the fact that they are leaving a deeply traumatized, lost puppy entirely on his own.

But there is a sharper edge to this scene: Team Black’s affection reveals itself as naive and profoundly superficial. They easily follow conventional social norms—bringing gifts (chapter 100), crying at a bedside—but their care lacks real, grounding intimacy. Neither Potato and Oh Daeyhun were present at the hospital in the hallway in front of the surgery room. None of them have stayed by Jaekyung’s side to offer real comfort (chapter 100), thus the manager doesn’t leave his car to greet his boss and champion. He simply drops the physical therapist and drives away. But let’s return our attention to the scene at the hospital. Crucially, none of them correct the physical therapist when he pathologically apologizes for getting hurt. When Kim Dan stammers, (chapter 100), his words expose a deep reservoir of guilt and fractured self-esteem. Instead of challenging this unhealthy mindset, the crowd validates it by accepting the apology and coddling him as an “angel”. (chapter 100) And perhaps this image of the “angel” explains the deeper tragedy perfectly.

An angel is expected to comfort, heal, protect, and endlessly give. People receive warmth from angels, but rarely ask whether angels themselves are bleeding internally. Thus, Team Black fails to recognize that Kim Dan’s goodness itself has become pathological. They cannot see that his self-sacrifice contains a hidden violence directed against himself.

Therefore, it is entirely unsurprising that when Kim Dan finally walks out of that hospital, his internal narrative remains completely unchanged. (chapter 100) Because none of the members around him possessed the depth to correct his self-sacrificial logic, he still views himself exactly as he did before: as an inconvenient burden, a magnet for trouble, and someone who brings nothing but danger into the champion’s orbit. And note that the manager not only is not thanking him for his services but also is not determined to stop him from leaving. (chapter 100) For him, physical therapists can be easily replaced. Hence no tears and no handshake before the separation.

This is precisely why the handshake becomes so overwhelming for Kim Dan. Through touch, he suddenly realizes the truth. Joo Jaekyung had visited him for real. (chapter 100) At the same time, he gradually grasps that beneath the terrifying public image (chapter 100), Joo Jaekyung had quietly remained anchored beside him all along. The warmth in the champion’s hand reveals a hidden emotional reality that words denied. Thus, when Kim Dan thinks (chapter 100), the scene becomes far more than a romantic revelation. It is an emotional awakening. For the first time, Kim Dan realizes that the ‘Emperor’ was never emotionally distant by nature, only buried beneath fear, silence, and performance. The warmth in his hand reveals something profoundly human beneath the armor.

Importantly, this tactile recognition also begins transforming Kim Dan’s own inner world. For most of the story, he defined himself through usefulness, shame, and emotional disposability. He believed people kept him nearby only because he served a practical function: grandson, therapist, debtor, caretaker. Even his relationship with Jaekyung remained psychologically filtered through utility. (chapter 100) Once the debt disappeared and the championship was reclaimed, Kim Dan instinctively assumed that his role in the champion’s life had ended too.

But the handshake completely destabilizes this entire belief system. Not only the dream became a reality, but also (chapter 100) the warmth in Jaekyung’s hand reveals that Kim Dan had never merely been “useful.” He had become emotionally necessary. For one fragile moment, Kim Dan experiences himself not as a burden, an obligation, or a temporary possession, but as someone genuinely cherished.

This is why the tiny sparks surrounding the scene matter so much (chapter 100). Earlier in the story, the relationship between the protagonists was repeatedly associated with an invisible, chaotic electricity pulling them together. (chapter 86) Episode 100 revives this visual motif, yet transforms its meaning entirely. (chapter 100) The sparks no longer represent physical attraction or dangerous obsession; they resemble embers of emotional recognition finally igniting inside Kim Dan’s consciousness.

Significantly, however, only Kim Dan’s eyes contain visible light in these panels. (chapter 100) He is finally seeing the athlete’s warmth and care. Joo Jaekyung himself appears emotionally dimmed, exhausted, and internally extinguished. (chapter 100) Here, he is even portrayed as eyeless, as if he had lost his soul. (chapter 99) The asymmetry is devastating. It almost feels as though the champion transfers his final remaining warmth and energy into Kim Dan through the handshake itself. (chapter 100) While Kim Dan awakens emotionally, Jaekyung continues withering inwardly beneath the weight of his guilt, his resignation, and his anticipatory loss.

And perhaps this is the cruelest irony of the scene. Through touch, Kim Dan is not yet fully understanding the love intellectually, rather he is beginning to sense it emotionally.

The realization remains tactile, intuitive, incomplete, and almost dreamlike. Yet at the exact same moment, the man extending that warmth no longer believes anyone will truly remain beside him once the final bell has rung. That’s the reason why the physical therapist looks back at his lover (chapter 100), he is detecting lingering feelings.

The handshake scene ultimately transforms not only Kim Dan’s perception of Joo Jaekyung, but the meaning of the jinx itself. (chapter 100) Until now, Kim Dan never truly questioned the existence of the curse surrounding the champion. (chapter 27) He simply accepted it as an immutable part of reality. The “jinx” appeared almost supernatural: an ominous, mechanical force attached to Joo Jaekyung’s body, his victories, his violence, his rituals, and his frightening aura. Even the title of the series carried something cold, clinical, and oppressive. The word itself evoked danger, misfortune, contamination, and inevitability.

But episode 100 quietly begins dismantling this darkness.

When Kim Dan grasps Jaekyung’s hand, something extraordinary happens psychologically. Human warmth suddenly illuminates what fear, silence, and mythology had concealed for nearly one hundred chapters. (chapter 100) Mingwa reinforces this revelation visually in a remarkable way. Immediately after Kim Dan describes the hand as “pleasantly warm,” the title Jinx itself reappears, glowing softly inside a luminous white space (chapter 100). The contrast with the earlier, heavy atmosphere of the story is striking. The title card no longer feels entirely dark. For the first time in the series, light enters the concept itself.

It is almost as though a hidden truth finally begins surfacing: the real curse was never supernatural fate, sexual ritual, or victory alone.

The true “jinx” was emotional isolation. It was the inability to communicate honestly. The inability to believe oneself worthy of love without usefulness, sacrifice, or performance. The inability to ask someone to stay. The inability to recognize the humanity hidden beneath fear, armor, and symbolic roles.

And perhaps this is why the scene begins subtly echoing Michelangelo’s The Creation of Adam.

For nearly one hundred chapters, Jinx maintained a distorted version of that hierarchy. Joo Jaekyung existed as the towering “God” of the ring, wielding sovereign physical control, while Kim Dan remained the fragile mortal perpetually subjected to debt, rules, contracts, and bodily domination.

Yet as their fingers meet, Mingwa quietly reverses the entire structure. (chapter 100)

Kim Dan now stands upright, initiating the contact himself and reaching voluntarily across the emotional void. Meanwhile, Joo Jaekyung has become the limp, exhausted, emotionally paralyzed figure. His hand no longer stops gripping or possesses. Instead, it grows passive, heavy, and fragile as the fingers slowly begin slipping away.

This is precisely why the handshake becomes symbolically revolutionary. For one brief moment, the protagonists connect outside the toxic logic that governed their relationship for so long: no debt, no contract, no treatment, no championship, no transaction, and no performance. Only warmth.

But this is precisely where the tragedy deepens. Kim Dan is not a triumphant savior breathing life into a grateful recipient. He is still an insecure young man desperately searching for confirmation (chapter 100) that the warmth he sensed was real. He needs Jaekyung to tighten the grip, speak honestly, or offer any sign that he is wanted for more than his usefulness.

Instead, Joo Jaekyung retreats behind silence once again and delivers the devastating command: (chapter 100) This instruction seals Kim Dan’s internal misinterpretation completely. Paired with the slipping handshake, the sentence convinces him that the timeline established back in episode 77 has finally reached its inevitable conclusion. The transaction is over. The debt is dead. He is free to leave.

Yet the tragedy runs even deeper because Kim Dan does not perceive his own departure as abandonment at all. On the contrary, he genuinely believes he is acting lovingly and correctly by removing himself from Jaekyung’s orbit.

And in doing so, he unconsciously reproduces the exact emotional logic that shaped his own life and suffering. (chapter 57) Long before episode 100, his grandmother attempted to push him away through almost identical reasoning. (chapter 57) Feeling powerless, burdensome, and guilty for his slow emotional deterioration, she repeatedly urged him to return to Seoul, live his own life, and stop “wasting away” beside her. Her love expressed itself through self-removal. Rather than openly asking Kim Dan about the reasons behind his pain, she tried to free him from herself before death could do it instead. She thought, she had the solution to the problem, because she believed she knew why!

Kim Dan internalized this worldview completely. Thus, when he prepares to leave the penthouse, he unknowingly imitates Halmoni’s sacrificial logic almost perfectly. He believes to know the athlete. Like out of sight, out of mind. Joo Jaekyung will stop suffering. (chapter 100) Love becomes synonymous with disappearing for the other person’s sake.

And devastatingly, Joo Jaekyung reproduces the exact same pattern simultaneously. Back on the beach, the champion promised: (chapter 95) At first glance, the sentence appears comforting and romantic. Yet retrospectively, the structure of the promise reveals a deeply corrupted blueprint for attachment. First, Jaekyung imagines Kim Dan leaving long before he ever asks him to stay. Even his love remains psychologically organized around future abandonment. Jaekyung’s words directly mirror the childhood promise made by his own mother—who told him she would watch over and support him from far away, leaving him with nothing but an inaccessible back and a heavy, permanent silence. (chapter 72) But the ultimate cruelty of the narrative is that his mother’s promise was an absolute lie. (chapter 74) She did not watch from afar out of tragic necessity; she remarried, built an entirely new family, and willfully discarded Jaekyung to start a life where he had no place.

Thus, by episode 100, both protagonists express love through identical acts of self-erasure.

Kim Dan believes:

“If I want to help him feeling less guilty, then I should leave.”

Joo Jaekyung believes:

“If I want to protect him, I should let him go. He is getting hurt because of me. I am his jinx.

Neither realizes that they are silently reproducing the same inherited trauma script. And so, while still standing inside the vast uncrossed emptiness of the penthouse entrance, Kim Dan quietly utters: (chapter 100) The sentence acts like a psychological blade directly through Jaekyung’s deepest childhood wound. It confirms the terror haunting him since his mother’s disappearance and rejection: once the transaction ends and usefulness expires, people inevitably walk away. They don’t stay willingly, only because of money.

Then comes the devastating thud. Not the sound of emotional closure, but the sound of total collapse.

The monstrous willpower that carried Joo Jaekyung through brutal title fights, public scrutiny, and lifelong isolation suddenly evaporates beneath the unbearable weight of abandonment. The Emperor collapses on the threshold of his own making, similar to this nightmare: (chapter 79) (chapter 99) Joo Jaekyung can only collapse under the weight of his immense knowledge and guilt: the hospital director, Baek Junmin, the switched spray (chapter 100). He almost killed a man, just like he did with his “father”.

And if my theory is true, then this is the moment where Kim Dan may finally begin understanding the champion properly for the first time. The terrifying realization finally emerges: beneath the armor, Joo Jaekyung suffers from the very same abandonment terror and low self-esteem that shaped Kim Dan’s own life. Because suddenly, the “Emperor” no longer resembles a distant monster at all.

He resembles a child, and not just a patient. Just like Halmoni. Just like Kim Dan himself.

The lost puppy hidden beneath the armor finally becomes visible. (chapter 59) And because Kim Dan still has not crossed the literal threshold , the collapse does not function as an ending, but as a confrontation with reality “sound THUD. (chapter 100) The counterfeit departure shatters completely. For the first time, Kim Dan stands before someone who is entirely incapable of saving himself.

And perhaps that is the true, revolitonary meaning of the scene. (chapter 100) The illusion of the untouchable Emperor cannot survive a collapse, and the myth of the unbleeding Angel cannot withstand a genuine psychological crisis. Episode 100 destroys both false frameworks simultaneously, leaving only two human beings at the entrance, waiting to see if anyone has the courage to reach back across the gap.

A HIDDEN REQUEST

Many readers walk away from this devastating cliffhanger feeling deeply frustrated with Joo Jaekyung. Across the fandom, the same complaint echoes repeatedly: “Why didn’t he just open his mouth?” “Why didn’t he ask Kim Dan to stay like he originally wanted to?”

The bitter irony, however, is that episode 100 already contains the request. I now invite my attentive readers to return carefully to the chapter itself and search for the exact panel where Joo Jaekyung’s true desire surfaces.

Once you find it, the emotional meaning of the entire chapter begins shifting.

Suddenly, episode 100 no longer feels like the story of a man incapable of asking someone to stay, but the story of two people trapped inside a far more complex emotional silence. And perhaps this is why episode 100 feels so haunting and terrible.

In the second part of this essay, we will examine why Joo Jaekyung gradually starts resembling a ghost himself — and how the chapter repeatedly buries his voice beneath misunderstanding, distance, and interruption.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: A Ruthless Fight🩸🐺 , A Loverboy Break 💧😿

When does a curse truly disappear?

Episode 99 of Jinx initially appears to destroy the central superstition of the series. Kim Dan lies unconscious in a hospital bed. (chapter 99) He is absent from the ring. There was no sex before the match, no ritual, no “luck,” no physical reassurance. And yet Joo Jaekyung wins faster (chapter 99) and more decisively than ever before. (chapter 99) At first glance, the conclusion seems obvious: the jinx is broken.

But then another problem emerges immediately. Why does this victory feel so horrifying? To the audience in front of the octagon, the champion no longer appears heroic. Baek Junmin’s face is totally ruined. (chapter 99) (chapter 99) The moderator repeatedly describes him as ruthless. (chapter 99) The crowd boos when he leaves the cage. (chapter 99) He refuses the interview, (chapter 99), ignores the CEO, (chapter 99), abandons the championship belt behind him, and walks away as though the victory itself had become meaningless.

Without the hidden context surrounding Kim Dan’s assault, the public sees only one thing: a frighteningly violent champion who no longer behaves like a human being.

And yet the readers know something entirely different. We know that Joo Jaekyung entered the octagon after discovering that Baek Junmin was connected to Kim Dan’s assault. (chapter 99) We know that the fight was never truly about the belt. We know that the man appearing emotionally empty (chapter 99) inside the ring is, in reality, entirely consumed by one person lying unconscious in a hospital room.

This creates the real tension of episode 99. While outsiders witness monstrosity and rudelessness (chapter 99), the readers witness emotional clarity.

The chapter therefore reveals something far more unsettling. The jinx was never truly about sex at all. The real curse was hesitation and fear — the inability to escape the ghosts of the past. Kim Dan’s assault changes this completely. For the first time in the series, Joo Jaekyung stops fighting memory and focuses entirely on the present moment. (chapter 99) That is why episode 99 feels simultaneously triumphant and tragic.

The “loverboy” insult (chapter 99) intended to weaken Joo Jaekyung ultimately destroys the very hesitation that had governed him for years. But the result is terrifying to watch. The emperor wins, yet leaves the octagon looking less like a champion than like a ghost whose heart has already abandoned the arena long before his body does. (chapter 99)

The Champion Who Always Waited

One detail becomes impossible to ignore once we revisit Joo Jaekyung’s earlier fights. Again and again, his opponents attack first. Randy Booker rushes him aggressively, (chapter 15) Dominique lands the opening assault (chapter 40) while the athlete tried to avoid his attacks before (chapter 40), Gabriel initiates the violence (chapter 87), and even Baek Junmin, in their first earlier encounter, attempts to establish control first. (chapter 50) Joo Jaekyung’s usual fighting style therefore follows a recognizable structure. He absorbs the opponent’s aggression (chapter 40), studies it carefully, adapts to it, and only afterward retaliates with devastating precision.

But Episode 5 quietly introduces a striking exception to this pattern. For the first time in the series, Joo Jaekyung attacks first. (chapter 5) The moment is brief, yet Park Namwook immediately notices that something feels fundamentally different. Despite training normally, Jaekyung suddenly appears unusually sharp, aggressive, and emotionally accelerated. Namwook asks whether he “did something special,” instinctively recognizing the deviation without understanding its source.

Retrospectively, the scene becomes deeply revealing. Episode 5 already foreshadows the connection between Kim Dan and the temporary collapse of Jaekyung’s hesitation. Long before Episode 99, Kim Dan had already begun interfering with the psychological structure governing the champion’s violence. Yet the difference between Episode 5 and Episode 99 remains crucial. In Episode 5, (chapter 5) the hesitation merely weakens. In Episode 99, it disappears entirely. And this is precisely why the fight against Baek Junmin feels so terrifying. The emotional fragmentation that once forced Jaekyung to wait, analyze, and psychologically endure before retaliating suddenly vanishes. For the first time in the series, he no longer enters the cage divided between past and present. He enters it whole. (chapter 99)

For years, however, this hesitation was misunderstood by everyone around him. Earlier in the story, an older coach (chapter 75) remarked that Jaekyung performed perfectly during practice but somehow “fell short in important matches.” Park Namwook immediately interpreted this through the logic of sports psychology and asked whether the champion simply got “cold feet.” Episode 99, however, reveals how profoundly the manager and coach misunderstood him. Namwook consistently interprets Joo Jaekyung externally. (chapter 99) Before the fight against Baek Junmin, he asks whether Jaekyung wants to warm up, whether he wants to hit the mitts, and whether he has slept enough. He notices that Jaekyung’s body feels “cold to the touch,” yet even then he still assumes that the problem must be physical, routine-based, or performance-related. This misunderstanding reveals something important about Namwook himself. First, it is clear that he is projecting his own indeciveness onto his “pupil”. Besides, he represents the institutional mentality of the gym, a worldview in which performance functions almost like a mechanical equation. Training, preparation, discipline, and focus are supposed to produce victory. To Namwook, hesitation can therefore only mean athletic anxiety or fear of failure. In his mind, the match itself is the most important reality in the room. That is why he keeps trying to solve Jaekyung’s silence through professionalism, routine, and ritual. But what the hyung never truly graps is that Joo Jaekyung is not merely an athlete struggling with nerves. He is a man haunted by memory. The “coldness” in his body was never simple fear of losing. It was emotional numbness. (chapter 75) Joo Jaekyung entered fights carrying invisible ghosts with him: the father, violence, hierarchy, humiliation, fear of disrespect, and the expectation of punishment and rejection. The story repeatedly shows how his father enforced authority physically. (chapter 72) The elder struck first. (chapter 72) Resistance or even “presence” was punished. Submission and later avoidance became a survival mechanism. Even later, fragments of this mentality continued reproducing themselves through figures like Hwang Byungchul. (chapter 74) (chapter 74) As readers, we gradually realize something deeply unsettling. Joo Jaekyung unconsciously grants older men (Randy Booker, Dominic Hill, Park Namwook and Baek Junmin) the symbolic privilege of initiating violence. This explains why insults such as “baby,” (chapter 14) “child,” and “lost puppy” (chapter 96) carry so much narrative importance throughout the series. These words do not merely mock him. On the one hand they psychologically reflect his past fighting style (chapter 99), on the other hand they reduce him to the subordinate boy once again. But beneath this hesitation lies something even darker. Joo Jaekyung is not merely afraid of losing fights. He is afraid that his father might have been right about him all along. When his father insulted him, beat him, and treated him as worthless, the violence was never only physical. It implanted a deeper psychological curse inside the child. (chapter 54) Weakness became tied to identity itself. Hesitation became associated with inferiority. Emotional attachment became linked to failure and humiliation. This is why the champion’s mistrust persisted even after becoming the strongest fighter in the ring. Outwardly, Joo Jaekyung became “the Emperor.” (chapter 75) Inwardly, however, part of him remained trapped before the father’s judgment, still unconsciously waiting for the older man to strike first. The hesitation therefore was not simple caution. It was fear itself. It was the fear that he might truly be weak. It was the fear that he might truly be inferior. And, above all, it was the fear that he might ultimately become exactly what his father believed him to be: A loser! (chapter 73) And this is precisely why episode 99 changes everything. For the first time in the series, Joo Jaekyung stops fighting while carrying the father’s voice inside his mind. He is no longer hearing his voice, but only seeing his lover’s cold body. (chapter 99) The assault against Kim Dan forces him into a situation where doubt itself becomes impossible. Suddenly, something matters more than hierarchy, humiliation, fear, or inherited shame. Love overrides the old curse. And once that happens, the subordinate child disappears instantly.

The Shotgun That Backfired

Baek Junmin believes he understands the former champion perfectly. When he leans toward him before the fight and whispers, (chapter 99) he believes he has found the champion’s greatest weakness.

The insult is carefully calculated. “Loverboy” infantilizes emotional attachment and strips Kim Dan of dignity. Ironically, Kim Dan is actually older than Jaekyung — a hyung — yet Baek Junmin symbolically erases this hierarchy entirely. In his worldview, emotional attachment belongs to weakness, dependency, and humiliation. But there is another layer that makes the scene even darker. The antagonist uses the word “loverboy” through the logic of prostitution, possession, and mockery. For him, the insult reduces Kim Dan to an object of attachment, almost something transactional or degrading. Yet the wolf and Jinx-lovers know something Junmin himself does not fully understand. Kim Dan was not simply emotionally endangered. In the past, he was physically assaulted. (chapter 91) The “hamster” clearly showed clear signs of PTSD during the restaurant encounter in Chapter 90. (chapter 90) The trembling, the nausea, and the paralyzing fear were not just reactions to a “fight,” but to a perpetrator who had physically violated his agency. When the former hospital director attempted to “erase” the assault through further violence (the stabbing) (chapter 98), it proved that to the antagonists, Dan’s body was merely a canvas for their malice.

Consequently, when Baek Junmin whispers “loverboy” in Chapter 99, (chapter 99) he is unknowingly stepping onto a psychological landmine. He believes he is poking at a romantic weakness; in reality, he is mocking a victim of a coordinated assault. This is why the insult becomes so psychologically explosive. (chapter 99) For Joo Jaekyung, hearing Junmin use a “diminishing” term to describe a man who is currently lying in a hospital bed because of Junmin’s own schemes is the ultimate provocation. It transforms a standard pre-fight taunt into a disgusting trivialization of Dan’s suffering.

The “Shotgun” fires a bullet of mockery, but because of the hidden reality of the assault, it returns to him as a cannonball of absolute, righteous fury. The word therefore unintentionally collides with the reality of sexual violence and trauma. (chapter 99) This is why the insult becomes so psychologically explosive.

At the same time, Baek Junmin weaponizes morality itself. The implication is cruelly simple. While Kim Dan lies unconscious, Joo Jaekyung is here fighting for spectacle, money, and fame. The thug expects guilt, hesitation, emotional fragmentation, and inner collapse. Instead, he accidentally gives Joo Jaekyung the most powerful weapon in the entire series. Throughout the story, the “jinx” functioned as a psychological crutch disguised as superstition. The MMA fighter believed he needed the ritual beforehand in order to stabilize himself physically and mentally. (chapter 02) This is why the superstition held so much power over him. Kim Dan unconsciously became transformed into something functional, almost mechanical: a stabilizer, a ritual, a lucky charm. (chapter 87) But episode 99 destroys this illusion completely. The moment Baek Junmin says “loverboy,” Joo Jaekyung is forced to confront something openly for the first time. Kim Dan is not luck. Kim Dan is not a ritual. Kim Dan is not a tool. Kim Dan is the person he loves. (chapter 99) And this realization changes the entire structure of the fight. The irony surrounding Baek Junmin’s title, “The Shotgun,” (chapter 49) suddenly becomes extraordinary. A shotgun is a weapon of spread, chaos, and indiscriminate destruction. The antagonist’s psychological attack functions exactly the same way. (chapter 96) He fires insults everywhere at once: infantilization, guilt, mockery, emotional humiliation, and social shame. But Joo Jaekyung’s response becomes the complete opposite: a trigger for retaliation. (chapter 99)

Instead of psychologically fragmenting him, the attack compresses his entire emotional world into a single point of terrifying focus. Baek Junmin tries to blow Jaekyung’s mind apart; instead, he accidentally pressurizes it. This is why the fight immediately becomes so frightening to watch.

The moderator truly emphasizes that this is “not his usual style.” (chapter 99) Joo Jaekyung gives Baek Junmin no opportunity to speak (chapter 99), recover (chapter 99), breathe (chapter 99), or retaliate. (chapter 99) Yet despite the overwhelming brutality, his precision never disappears. The knee strikes, liver shots, uninterrupted combinations, and perfectly targeted blows reveal not emotional chaos, but emotional concentration.

And then Mingwa introduces one of the most disturbing visual details of the entire chapter: Baek Junmin’s face. (chapter 99) The shattered nose. The missing tooth. The blood covering his mouth. The trembling. Suddenly, “The Shotgun” no longer resembles a manipulative predator or rising star. He becomes reduced to raw, terrified biology. The smugness disappears entirely. And this is where the violence becomes deeply symbolic. Baek Junmin’s greatest weapon was never simply physical strength. His real power existed in his mouth:

  • the whispers,
  • the manipulation,
  • the destabilizing insults,
  • the weaponization of social morality,
  • and the psychological games.

He attempted to use language itself as ammunition. Joo Jaekyung’s response is therefore horrifyingly surgical. By destroying Baek Junmin’s mouth, nose, and face, he symbolically dismantles the mechanism of the “Shotgun” itself. (chapter 99) He silences the man who attempted to psychologically break him through words.

But there’s more to it. Baek Junmin’s identity as “The Shotgun” was never about his fists; it was about his mouth. (chapter 96) His smirk was his armor (chapter 96), a performative tool used to signal emotional superiority and untouchability. Throughout the series, he weaponized his smile to infantilize Jaekyung and degrade Kim Dan (chapter 99), positioning himself as the puppet master of the “last laugh.” (chapter 87) In Episode 99, Joo Jaekyung deconstructs this theatricality with surgical intent. He doesn’t target the body for a standard knockout; he targets the features of expression: (chapter 99)

  • The Mouth: The source of the “Loverboy” insult and the manipulative whispers.
  • The Teeth: The physical foundation of the smug, predatory grin.
  • The Nose: The center of the “arrogant” face that looked down on Dan’s trauma.

By shattering these specific points, Jaekyung pressurizes the “Shotgun’s” spread of insults into a single point of silence. The violence is not random; it is the literal destruction of mockery. The irony is absolute: the man who defined himself by his ability to laugh at others’ suffering is left with a face that can no longer form a smile. (chapter 99) Jaekyung didn’t just silence the “Shotgun”—he dismantled the very mechanism Junmin used to enjoy his own cruelty. To the audience, it was monstrosity; to the reader, it was the only way to truly kill the insult. This is why the violence feels so different from ordinary sports brutality. Joo Jaekyung is not simply aiming for victory. He is erasing the source of the violation.

And the irony becomes almost unbearable. Baek Junmin believes the word “loverboy” will emasculate the champion psychologically. Instead, the insult destroys the final separation inside Joo Jaekyung himself. The “Emperor” might once have fought for titles, legacy, spectators, or survival. But the “Loverboy” fights differently. (chapter 99) He fights personally. And that is precisely why he becomes so terrifying. The crowd boos because they expected a spectacle governed by sportsmanship, hierarchy, and ritualized violence. Instead, they witness sincerity stripped completely naked. The arena ceases to resemble entertainment and begins resembling execution. (chapter 99) The public therefore interprets Joo Jaekyung as monstrous. (chapter 99) But the readers understand the deeper irony. For perhaps the first time in the entire series, Joo Jaekyung is utterly sincere inside the cage.

The Crowd of One

To understand the true weight of the “loverboy” provocation in Episode 99, we must return to the subtle transformation that began much earlier in the story, long before Baek Junmin ever whispered the word.

The shift begins in Paris. (chapter 87) Chapter 15 quietly introduces one of the most important structural changes in Jinx: (chapter 15) Kim Dan’s transition from a private “function” of the jinx into a visible presence within the audience itself. At first glance, the scene appears insignificant. The arena is immense, saturated with blinding lights, cameras, and noise. Joo Jaekyung stands at the center of a gigantic machinery of spectacle that elevates him into the untouchable figure of “the Emperor.” At this stage, readers are still encouraged to view him primarily as a public myth sustained by victory, fame, and domination.

And yet something changes the moment Kim Dan enters the stands. For Joo Jaekyung, Kim Dan slowly becomes what we might call:

a crowd of one.

Before Paris, approval came from conquest itself. The cheers of the audience (chapter 15), the fear of opponents, the attention of cameras, the authority of the CEO, and the symbolism of the championship belt all participated in validating Jaekyung’s existence. The Octagon was not simply a workplace. It was the symbolic center of his identity.

But once Kim Dan begins watching him fight from the side, the emotional hierarchy quietly shifts. The roar of the stadium slowly fades into white noise. (chapter 40)

This transformation becomes unmistakable in Chapter 87. (chapter 87) Mingwa deliberately changes the visual framing. Instead of emphasizing the scale of the arena, she places Joo Jaekyung behind the chain-link fence while a camera lens continues filming the “Champion” in the background. Yet Jaekyung himself looks beyond the camera entirely. His attention bypasses the world in order to search for a single face.

Then comes the deceptively simple question: (chapter 87)

Psychologically, this moment marks a point of no return. Joo Jaekyung is no longer performing for twenty thousand spectators. He is seeking Kim Dan’s approval specifically. Public admiration has already begun losing emotional value because it is automatic, repetitive, and unconditional as long as he keeps winning. Kim Dan’s reactions, however, remain uncertain, emotionally complex, and therefore meaningful. (chapter 87)

Paris therefore functions as the silent diagnosis of Episode 99. Long before Baek Junmin calls him “loverboy”, (chapter 99) Joo Jaekyung has already begun emotionally abandoning the arena. The “Emperor” slowly hollows out from within because another identity quietly begins taking shape beneath it:

the lover.

And this is precisely why Episode 99 feels so unsettling. (chapter 99) Once the fight against Baek Junmin ends, Joo Jaekyung behaves almost as though the Octagon itself no longer exists psychologically. He does not celebrate. He does not acknowledge the audience. He does not look at the championship belt. He ignores the interviewer. Even the CEO becomes irrelevant. Instead of remaining beneath the lights as the symbolic center of the spectacle, he walks away immediately.

This refusal profoundly unsettles the public because spectators expect ritual closure. A champion is supposed to stand proudly beneath the lights, receive the belt, address the crowd (chapter 40), and transform violence back into entertainment. The spectacle depends on emotional resolution in order to preserve itself. But Joo Jaekyung refuses this transition entirely. He leaves the violence unresolved and emotionally raw. (chapter 99)

This rupture becomes visible even in Park Namwook’s reaction afterward. Earlier in the story, Namwook constantly spoke about Joo Jaekyung with possessive familiarity (chapter 40), treating him almost as “his” champion to manage, interpret, and direct. (chapter 88) But in Episode 99, his praise suddenly feels hesitant and emotionally uncertain. (chapter 99) The stutter in “G-good job, Jaekyung!” alongside the visible sweat drop transforms what should have been a triumphant moment into an awkward and deeply uncomfortable interaction.

Namwook instinctively rushes toward the champion as though trying to restore the old ritual structure of victory: praise the fighter, normalize the violence, and emotionally transition the spectacle back into professionalism. Yet Joo Jaekyung no longer participates in this structure at all. He does not emotionally return to the arena, the manager, or the system surrounding him.

For perhaps the first time, the manager appears confronted with something he cannot interpret, regulate, or emotionally reclaim. The discomfort visible on his face suggests an unconscious realization that the champion standing before him no longer truly belongs to him and the world of the Octagon anymore.

And this is where the “Crowd of One” dynamic becomes crucial. (chapter 99) Baek Junmin intended the “loverboy” insult to make Joo Jaekyung appear emotionally small, weak, dependent, and pathetic. Ironically, however, the insult produces the exact opposite effect. Instead of diminishing him psychologically, it radically compresses his emotional universe until everything outside Kim Dan disappears completely.

The crowd loses meaning.
The CEO loses authority.
The championship belt loses symbolic value.
Even the identity of “the Emperor” begins collapsing.

Only Kim Dan remains. And paradoxically, this narrowing of the world is exactly what makes Joo Jaekyung so terrifyingly effective inside the cage. (chapter 99)

Earlier in the series, he always fought amid psychological noise. (chapter 75) The expectations of others, the father’s ghost, the burden of hierarchy, fear of emotional weakness, public image, and the pressure to sustain the Emperor identity all occupied space inside his mind simultaneously. Part of him always remained divided between the immediacy of the present and the weight of the past.

But in Episode 99, that noise disappears completely. (chapter 99) By trying to weaponize Jaekyung’s attachment, The Shotgun inadvertently strips away the ghosts that had governed him for years. The father’s lingering shadow, the burden of legacy, and the fear of vulnerability all collapse beneath a single emotional imperative:

protect Kim Dan and his dignity.

And once this happens, Mistrust or doubt becomes impossible. (chapter 99)

This is why the fight appears almost inhuman to spectators. The audience and the moderator witness a fighter who no longer seems connected to the ordinary emotional economy of sports entertainment. (chapter 99) There is no vanity left inside him, no desire for applause, and no hunger for symbolic recognition. The crowd cannot understand what it is witnessing because Joo Jaekyung is no longer fighting for public validation at all.

He is fighting for someone specific. That is also why the booing carries such narrative importance. Earlier in the story, crowd approval still mattered (chapter 15) because the audience helped sustain the identity of “the Emperor.” But by Episode 99, the crowd has already lost its emotional authority over him. The boos therefore sound strangely hollow. They belong to a world Joo Jaekyung has already abandoned internally.

This is also why Mingwa’s depiction of the crowd earlier in Episode 99 becomes so significant retrospectively. (chapter 99) Before the match begins, both groups of supporters remain visibly divided. Some cheer passionately for Joo Jaekyung (chapter 99), while others support Baek Junmin with equal enthusiasm. Yet despite this rivalry, the audience still shares the same emotional framework. They participate in the same ritual structure of sports entertainment: choosing sides, anticipating victory, and emotionally investing themselves in the spectacle. But once Joo Jaekyung abandons the belt and walks away from the Octagon, this division suddenly disappears. (chapter 99)

The rival chants collapse into a single unified sound: (chapter 99) In other words, the crowd briefly becomes emotionally unanimous precisely at the moment Joo Jaekyung rejects it entirely.

Symbolically, this reversal is extraordinary. Earlier in the story, the collective audience helped sustain the identity of “the Emperor.” (chapter 75) But by Episode 99, Joo Jaekyung has already emotionally abandoned that entire system. The boos therefore no longer possess true emotional authority over him. They belong to a world he has already left behind psychologically. (chapter 99)

Ironically, while the crowd finally speaks with one voice, Joo Jaekyung himself no longer hears it at all. This is why he can leave the championship belt behind without even turning around. For years, the belt represented worth, hierarchy, legitimacy, and survival. In Episode 99, however, Joo Jaekyung silently chooses a fragile human body over the indestructible gold object waiting for him inside the cage. (chapter 99)

In other words, the insult intended to diminish him emotionally ultimately liberates him from the need to remain “the Emperor” at all.

The Ghost in the Ring

This emotional transformation explains why Joo Jaekyung appears so deeply unsettling throughout Episode 99. Mingwa repeatedly depicts him with shadowed or completely obscured eyes (chapter 99), while the backgrounds dissolve into blackness, fragmented speed lines, and empty space. The visual language of the chapter gradually strips away the surrounding world until only the violence remains visible. At first glance, this eyeless imagery makes him appear monstrous, detached, and almost inhuman. Yet the deeper irony is that the opposite is actually happening.

Joo Jaekyung is not emotionally absent because he enjoys the brutality of the fight. He appears ghost-like because emotionally he no longer wants to be there at all. This becomes especially important once we remember the scene before the match where he insists: (chapter 98) That sentence completely recontextualizes everything that follows afterward. Emotionally, Joo Jaekyung had already chosen the hospital over the Octagon. (chapter 98) The cage, once his kingdom, suddenly becomes a place of forced exile. He does not want the lights, the crowd, or the spectacle. He wants to remain beside Kim Dan. He wants proximity, silence, and reassurance. But the system surrounding him — the match, the organization, the expectations, and the machinery of professional fighting itself — forces him back into the arena before Kim Dan regains consciousness.

And this is precisely why he begins resembling Kim Dan himself. (chapter 97) Throughout the series, Kim Dan lived like a ghost. He erased himself emotionally and physically in order to survive. (chapter 57) He exhausted his body for others, suppressed his own emotions, accepted humiliation silently (chapter 90), and reduced himself to a functional object rather than a full human being. He moved through life almost invisibly, enduring suffering while abandoning parts of himself in the process.

In Episode 99, Joo Jaekyung briefly enters the same existential state. Hence he is not allowed to talk to the journalists before the event. Inside the Octagon, his body continues fighting, striking, calculating, and destroying with terrifying precision, but emotionally he has already left the arena behind. (chapter 99) Hence he is determined to finish this match as quickly as possible. His heart remains in the hospital room beside the unconscious man lying in bed. In this sense, the fight becomes profoundly uncanny because Jaekyung’s body operates almost independently from his emotional presence. Years of training allow him to perform absolute violence almost automatically. Baek Junmin is therefore not facing ordinary rage or uncontrolled fury. He is facing a perfectly functioning machine whose operator is psychologically somewhere else entirely.

And yet Episode 99 also contains brief ruptures where the “ghost” inside the cage suddenly reveals the human being still trapped within it. One of the most striking moments occurs when Joo Jaekyung screams: (chapter 99) At first glance, the panel appears to depict pure rage. His face is distorted, his eyes are wide open, and the violence reaches an almost frightening intensity. But even here, Mingwa carefully avoids portraying him as a man lost in uncontrolled fury. The strikes remain terrifyingly accurate. His body does not flail blindly. Every movement continues targeting Baek Junmin with surgical precision. (chapter 99) This distinction matters enormously.

Joo Jaekyung is not fighting like someone consumed by chaos. He is fighting like someone whose emotional world has collapsed into a single unbearable question. Why?

The scream therefore functions on multiple levels simultaneously. (chapter 99) On the surface, he is condemning Baek Junmin directly for his choices, for the assault, for the cruelty, and for reducing Kim Dan to collateral damage within a world governed by greed, hierarchy, and spectacle. But the question also reveals something deeper psychologically. For perhaps the first time in the series, Joo Jaekyung openly confronts the absurdity of the system surrounding him.

Why is he inside a cage fighting for a championship belt while the person he loves lies unconscious in a hospital bed? Why does this world demand violence, performance, and spectacle at the precise moment when he wants to be somewhere else entirely? Why must human intimacy constantly be sacrificed to sustain the machinery of “the Emperor”? This is why the panel feels so emotionally explosive. The “WHY?!” is not merely directed at Baek Junmin. It is directed at the entire reality trapping him inside the arena.

And this is precisely where the Emperor mask finally shatters completely.

Earlier in the series, Jaekyung’s violence usually remained emotionally controlled beneath layers of arrogance (chapter 15), intimidation, or performative dominance. Here, however, the emotional repression ruptures openly. Yet paradoxically, the loss of the mask does not weaken his precision. Instead, his years of training allow his body to continue functioning with horrifying efficiency even while his emotional state reaches a breaking point.

The result is deeply uncanny. His body performs violence automatically, almost mechanically, while his emotions remain entirely concentrated outside the cage. Mingwa reinforces this visually by stripping away the arena itself. The backgrounds dissolve into white speed lines and empty space until only Jaekyung and his target remain visible. The audience disappears. The spectacle disappears. Even the Octagon itself begins losing visual substance.

The fight stops resembling sports entertainment and starts resembling a private war. (chapter 99)

And this is why the public perceives him as monstrous. Joo Jaekyung no longer participates in the emotional economy of professional fighting. He is not trying to entertain the audience, preserve his image, or embody the symbolic role of “Champion.” To spectators, he appears frightening precisely because the normal rituals of the sport have collapsed entirely.

But the readers understand the deeper irony. The “ghost in the ring” is not a man incapable of feeling. It is a man whose feelings have become so painfully concentrated on one person outside the cage that everything inside the cage loses emotional reality in comparison.

And this is what makes the violence so terrifying. The body continues moving flawlessly, but the person inhabiting it has already departed emotionally. The Emperor’s shell remains inside the cage, mechanically “cleaning up” the threat standing before him, while the human being himself waits elsewhere.

This also gives new meaning to the “loverboy” insult. Baek Junmin intended the word to drag Joo Jaekyung back into the room emotionally through shame, humiliation, and guilt. He wanted to force the champion to confront emotional weakness publicly. Instead, the insult produces the exact opposite effect. By naming him a “lover,” Baek Junmin inadvertently gives Joo Jaekyung permission to stop caring about the Empire altogether.

The emotional hierarchy collapses instantly. The title stops mattering. The crowd stops mattering. The spectacle stops mattering. Only Kim Dan remains psychologically real.

This is why the fragmented speed lines and visual distortions (chapter 99) throughout the chapter become so significant. To spectators, they symbolize the overwhelming speed and brutality of the champion. But psychologically they also resemble static, interference, and white noise. Everything surrounding the fight begins blurring together because, from Jaekyung’s perspective, the world outside Kim Dan has already lost emotional clarity.

Even his eyes disappear.

Earlier in the series, Jaekyung’s gaze defined his identity. His eyes projected intimidation, dominance, confidence, and hierarchy before he even threw a punch. In Paris, however, that gaze had already begun changing direction. (chapter 99) Instead of seeking the crowd’s approval, he searched for Kim Dan’s reactions specifically. By Episode 99, Mingwa removes his eyes altogether because if Kim Dan is not there to watch him, then psychologically there is nothing left worth seeing inside the cage. (chapter 99)

And this is why the public completely misreads him.

To outsiders, the eyeless champion appears dangerous, emotionally detached, and frighteningly cruel. They cannot see the unconscious body waiting in the hospital room, the assault that triggered the fight, or the emotional clarity behind the violence. The audience believes it is witnessing a champion who has lost his humanity. But the readers understand something far more tragic. The “ghost” inside the ring exists precisely because Joo Jaekyung has finally discovered something more important than the ring itself.

For perhaps the first time in the entire series, the Emperor no longer wants the arena. He no longer wants the gold, the cheers, the cameras, or the “last laugh.” The ghost in the cage is merely the shell of an Emperor who has already abdicated his throne. What remains is simply a man waiting for another person to wake up. (chapter 99)

The Real Octagon

The true emotional climax of episode 99 does not occur inside the cage. It occurs afterward, inside the hospital room.

The contrast between these two spaces is extraordinary. The octagon is filled with noise, cameras, violence, lights (chapter 99), money, and spectacle, yet everything inside it suddenly feels false. The championship belt becomes meaningless. The real “octagon” is the hospital room. This is where Joo Jaekyung finally stops performing.

Inside the Octagon, his body continued functioning almost automatically. Years of training allowed him to strike, calculate, and destroy with terrifying precision even while emotionally he had already left the arena behind. But the hospital room strips away that final layer of mechanical control. For the first time in the chapter, there is no audience left to confront, no opponent left to destroy, and no role left to perform. Only Kim Dan remains.

And it is precisely this silence that transforms Joo Jaekyung completely. (chapter 99)

Throughout the series, Joo Jaekyung’s relationships were governed by an unconscious fear: the fear that attachment inevitably leads to rejection. His father did not merely punish him physically. He reacted to the child’s very presence with hostility and disgust. (chapter 99) As a result, Jaekyung internalized a devastating emotional logic. Being emotionally needy made him feel unwanted. Closeness became dangerous. Vulnerability became synonymous with humiliation.

This is why his relationship with Kim Dan remained so distorted for so long. Joo Jaekyung constantly sought proximity, yet he hid emotional dependence behind sex, money, possessiveness, irritation, or authority. Genuine emotional need terrified him because emotional dependence implied the possibility of rejection afterward.

And this is precisely why Baek Junmin’s words before the fight were so psychologically destructive: (chapter 99)

“You might never see him again.”

At first glance, the sentence appears to function like simple emotional manipulation designed to induce guilt. But its true impact runs much deeper. For a brief moment, Joo Jaekyung is forced back into the emotional position of the abandoned child once again: the boy not chosen, the boy left behind (chapter 73), the boy whose existence ultimately failed to make people stay.

Except this time, something changes fundamentally. Kim Dan cannot reject him. Kim Dan lies unconscious. (chapter 99) The feared separation is no longer tied to humiliation, disgust, disappointment, or emotional abandonment. It is tied to death itself. (chapter 99) And this distinction completely destroys the old psychological structure governing Joo Jaekyung’s relationships.

Earlier in the story, emotional distance could still be controlled through anger, domination, emotional withdrawal, or physical possession. (chapter 34) Pride could function as protection because rejection still belonged to the realm of human choice. But death cannot be negotiated with. Death cannot be emotionally controlled. Death strips away performance, ego, hierarchy, and pride.

This is why the hospital scene becomes emotionally revolutionary for Joo Jaekyung’s character. For perhaps the first time in his life, he experiences attachment without interpreting vulnerability as humiliation. And Mingwa visually announces this transformation even before Joo Jaekyung begins crying. (chapter 99)

One particularly striking panel depicts him in near-complete shadow after the fight. His eyes disappear entirely, but so does his mouth. The visual effect is deeply unsettling because the image no longer resembles the “Emperor” readers have known throughout the series. Earlier in Jinx, Jaekyung’s identity was strongly tied to his gaze, his smile and speech. (chapter 41) His eyes projected dominance, intimidation, hierarchy, and emotional control, while his words often functioned as weapons protecting him from vulnerability. But in this moment, both are symbolically erased.

The champion who once controlled others through violence, commands, mockery, and physical presence suddenly becomes silent and unreadable. (chapter 99) This panel therefore functions almost like a metamorphosis.

Joo Jaekyung appears suspended between two emotional states: the ghost-like fighter who mechanically completed the violence inside the cage and the human being about to collapse emotionally beside Kim Dan’s hospital bed. The “Emperor” identity has not merely weakened; it is actively dissolving.

And this is precisely why the following hospital scene carries such devastating emotional weight.

Ironically, Joo Jaekyung can finally speak honestly (chapter 99) only because Kim Dan cannot answer him. Kim Dan’s unconsciousness temporarily removes the immediate fear of judgment and rejection that had governed Jaekyung’s emotional life for years. His tears no longer emerge from wounded pride or fear of rejection. They emerge from something much more terrifying and much more human: the fear of irreversible loss.

That’s why his words gain enormous emotional weight.

These lines matter because they are entirely stripped of control. (chapter 99) There is no aggression hidden inside them. No transaction. No domination. No pride. The “Emperor” disappears completely in this moment. (chapter 99) What remains is simply a man terrified of losing someone he loves forever. We could say, the tears wash away the “Emperor.”

Why does the wolf become so ruthless inside the ring? Because Baek Junmin accidentally destroys the old fear governing him. The child who feared rejection disappears the moment the possibility becomes death rather than humiliation. Suddenly, protecting Kim Dan matters more than hierarchy, pride, the audience, the title, or even Jaekyung’s own identity as champion. This is why the fight appears so frightening to outsiders. The public sees only violence because they cannot perceive the emotional truth behind it. They witness a ruthless champion abandoning his humanity. But the readers understand the exact opposite. For the first time in the entire series, Joo Jaekyung is not fighting to protect his ego, his title, or the image of the “Emperor.” He is fighting because someone precious might disappear forever.

The Alchemy of Tears

This visual erasure of his features leads to the chapter’s true catharsis. (chapter 99) When the tears finally fall, they carry a symbolic weight that transcends simple grief. Throughout the series, Jaekyung’s body has functioned as a suit of armor—a fortress of hardness, discipline, and emotional immovability. In his world, pain was always displaced; it was never felt, only inflicted upon others through violence or control. He was the man who struck, never the man who collapsed.

But beside Kim Dan’s bed, that armor finally shatters. (chapter 99) For the first time, his agony is not converted into aggression; it is allowed to remain as grief. These tears accomplish what the brutality of the Octagon never could: they return the “Ghost” to his own skin.

This scene represents an emotional rebirth rather than a collapse. The “Emperor”—an identity built entirely on suppression and invulnerability—cannot survive this level of sincerity. (chapter 99) The tears act as a solvent, dissolving the emotional paralysis that has governed him since his childhood. At the same time, they also allow Joo Jaekyung to confront something he had carried unconsciously for years: the guilt, fear, and emotional burden surrounding his father’s death. (chapter 74)

Throughout the series, Jaekyung fought as though strength itself could protect him from becoming his father. (chapter 75) Victory became proof that he was not weak, not broken, not destined to fail the same way. But this also trapped him psychologically inside the father’s shadow. Every fight became tied to survival, worth, and the terror of becoming a “loser.”

In the hospital room, however, Kim Dan’s possible death suddenly reorganizes his entire emotional world. For the first time, Joo Jaekyung is no longer fighting to justify his own existence through violence or victory. He is simply afraid of losing someone he loves. (chapter 99)

And paradoxically, this finally allows him to stop reliving his father’s death through himself. (chapter 99) The tears therefore symbolize more than grief alone. They mark the moment when the son stops trying to survive through the Emperor identity and begins existing as a human being capable of mourning, loving, and fearing loss openly.

This is why the final irony of Episode 99 becomes so powerful.

The public interprets the champion’s violence as proof that he has lost his humanity. In reality, the tears reveal the exact opposite. Joo Jaekyung cries because, for the first time in his life, he allows himself to love someone more than he fears losing himself.

And that is why Episode 99 does not merely depict the breaking of the jinx.While the public looks at the carnage in the ring and sees a man who has lost his humanity, the readers see the exact opposite. The extraordinary irony of Episode 99 is that Joo Jaekyung has never been more human than in the moment he allows himself to cry. He finally accepts a reality where loving someone else is more important than the fear of losing his own ego. The “Jinx” wasn’t just a ritual; it was a barrier. By breaking it, Jaekyung doesn’t just win a fight—he finally allows the man hidden beneath the Emperor to breathe.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Why Sleeping Beauty 👸 Had to Bleed 🩸 (part 2)

The Web That Holds

If, in the first part of this essay, we have followed the blade back to its origin—tracing Kim Dan’s wound not to a single act, but to a structure that precedes it—then we must now ask a different question. Not where violence comes from. But how it is allowed to persist.

Because, as many of us have begun to notice—my attentive readers, my fellow Jinx-lovers—the tragedy does not lie in invisibility. The signs are there. The cracks are visible. The pattern repeats. And yet, it holds. Why?

The answer requires a shift in perspective. What appears as a sequence of isolated failures—misjudgment, delay, inaction—reveals itself instead as a layered system of perception. A structure not only of force, but of interpretation; not only of violence, but of its containment.

In the language of Sleeping Beauty, we might say this: the spindle has already done its work. The wound has appeared. But the deeper danger lies elsewhere—in the forest of thorns that surrounds it.

A forest that does not merely block escape, but obscures recognition. Or, to borrow another image: a web—fine, nearly invisible, yet resilient—through which each character moves, believing themselves free, while every motion remains guided.

If Kim Dan has come to embody the sleeping figure at the center of this structure (chapter 98), then awakening cannot mean simply opening one’s eyes. It requires something more difficult: the ability to perceive the web itself. (chapter 98)

And this, perhaps, is where the narrative becomes most unsettling. Because the web is not maintained by villains alone. It is sustained by those who care. (chapter 98)

The tragedy is not that the characters are caught in a trap, but that they have been persuaded it is a form of protection. The web is not spun from malice alone, but from the threads of good intentions and necessary silences. It offers the appearance of care, even as it constrains. (chapter 74)

This is precisely why it resists rupture. To tear it apart does not feel like liberation, but like betrayal—as though one were destroying the last remaining structure that promises safety.

The knife does not tear down the web; it exposes its tension. (chapter 98) It marks the moment when threads—long invisible—can no longer absorb the force placed upon them. What could once be deferred, explained, or reinterpreted now demands recognition.

We begin, therefore, not with distortion, but with its most intimate form: the promise of protection.

Shin Okja: The Architecture of Misrecognition

The Logic of Substitution: The Map of Stability

Shin Okja’s worldview is not born of cynicism, but of a profound, protective care. (chapter 94) She operates through a series of metonymic substitutions, formulas designed to translate the chaos of precarity into the language of stability. In her system, “Doctor” is synonymous with “Safety”, (chapter 65) and “Seoul” is equated with “Opportunity.” (chapter 65) This is the pragmatic logic of a survivor who has learned that in a world of scarcity, respectability is the only available armor. She seeks to build a fortress for Kim Dan out of credentials and institutional legitimacy, (chapter 47) believing that if the external conditions are sufficiently aligned, the internal suffering can be permanently contained.

This logic does not remain theoretical. It becomes actionable in her request to Joo Jaekyung. By entrusting her grandson to him (chapter 65), she extends her system of protection beyond herself. Unable to guarantee Kim Dan’s safety directly, she delegates it to another figure she perceives as stable, capable, and situated within a controlled environment. Protection, here, becomes transferable—something that can be secured through the right association. (chapter 78)

This logic extends beyond institutions to individuals. Shin Okja does not only trust systems; she transfers that trust onto figures she perceives as capable of embodying them. In this sense, Joo Jaekyung becomes an extension of her protective framework—selected for his strength (chapter 21), his status, and his apparent control over his environment.

Yet this projection is fragile. The image of the undefeated champion cannot sustain itself when confronted with his visible exhaustion. (chapter 98) Having spent the night at the hospital, deprived of rest and confronted with a situation he cannot resolve, he no longer appears as an agent of control, but as someone equally constrained by circumstance.

This moment introduces a critical dissonance. What had been imagined as delegated protection begins to reveal its limits. Strength does not equate to safety. Proximity to power and fame does not guarantee control and safety. The figure entrusted with safeguarding Kim Dan is himself exposed.

In this sense, the illusion does not collapse through abstract realization, but through perception. The body—pale, fatigued, unable to intervene beyond a certain point—contradicts the role that had been assigned to it.

Debt as the Silent Engine

At the core of this system lies a deliberate, structural silence. Debt is the hidden engine of her reasoning, yet it is the one element she refuses to name. (chapter 65) On the beach, Shin Okja frames Kim Dan’s presence as being “for her sake.” This formulation functions as a linguistic screen. By invoking the language of devotion, she replaces a financial obligation with a moral one. (chapter 41) The loan—the invisible force structuring their lives—is not addressed directly; it is translated into filial piety.

This shift is decisive. To acknowledge that Kim Dan remains because of a predatory debt would be to recognize their entrapment within a system that cannot be escaped through effort alone. By contrast, to say that he stays “for her sake” transforms necessity into choice, and coercion into care. The burden is not removed, but reinterpreted. It becomes dignified, even meaningful, while the structure that produces it remains unspoken.

This displacement extends into her projection of the future. When she urges him to go to Seoul and live his “best life”, she once again performs a temporal translation. The obstacles that constrain him in the present are not treated as active forces, but as temporary delays. (chapter 78) Seoul becomes a mythologized elsewhere—a space where the debt is imagined to dissolve, not because it has been resolved, but because it is no longer named.

In her philosophy, debt is not a crisis to be confronted or negotiated; it is a weight to be outrun. Her strategy relies on temporal displacement: she defers the reality of their economic entrapment into a future where it is expected to dissolve under the prestige of Kim Dan’s success. That’s why the champion confronted Kim Dan with reality in front of the hospital: (chapter 18) (chapter 94) This silence is not only strategic; it is protective. To name the debt would be to acknowledge its persistence and the origins of Kim Dan’s stress, and therefore the possibility that it cannot be escaped.

Within this framework, Kim Dan ceases to be merely a grandson and becomes the vessel of redemption. His career path—sacrifice, study, and integration into a large hospital—is the mechanism through which the family’s past is meant to be erased.

The Collapse of the Formula: Institutional Exposure

The tragedy of Okja’s position emerges when reality exceeds her formulas. She operates under the belief that safety can be produced through external alignment alone — that the “right” environment will naturally neutralize structural harm. (chapter 47) However, the narrative reveals that authority does not eliminate abuse; it provides a more sophisticated veil for it.

Kim Dan is not exploited in spite of the system, but precisely within its reach. The figure of the Doctor (chapter 98), who once embodied Okja’s promise of protection, becomes the primary agent of harm. (chapter 90) Here, the logic of debt is not interrupted; it is reframed as asymmetrical power, dependency, and coercion.

Her insistence that Kim Dan return to Seoul (chapter 57) acquires a different meaning in light of the events that follow. What was imagined as a movement toward safety reveals itself as a movement toward exposure. (chapter 78) The space she identified as protective—the large hospital, the urban center, the site of opportunity (chapter 65) — places him within reach of the very forces she sought to avoid.

This is the structural contradiction at the heart of her logic. Protection is pursued through integration into systems that do not eliminate vulnerability, but reorganize it. The path meant to secure his future does not lead away from danger—it leads him into a domain where danger operates under the guise of legitimacy.

The Blindness of Care: A Constitutive Role

Crucially, Shin Okja remains blind to this failure. Her faith in professional authority and institutional prestige remains intact because the underlying structure of exploitation remains outside her field of perception. She does not see the sexual harassment or the blacklisting because her framework has no language for them.

This blindness does not emerge in the present; it is learned. In an earlier scene, Kim Dan is shown as a child, isolated and surrounded by accusation (chapter 57) —his identity reduced to a single word: “bum.” The violence here is not physical, but symbolic. It is immediate, collective, and humiliating. Faced with this, Shin Okja intervenes, not by confronting the accusation, but by reframing it. (chapter 57) This response establishes a decisive pattern. The external threat is not analyzed or challenged; it is neutralized through emotional substitution. The problem is not located in a social structure—poverty, stigma, exclusion—but dissolved within the private space of care. What cannot be changed is not named. Instead, it is softened.

This moment becomes foundational. From that point onward, protection is no longer understood as the transformation of conditions, but as the management of perception. (chapter 65) Harm is not eliminated; it is reinterpreted. The world remains hostile, but its hostility is rendered bearable through the assurance of relational security. Under this light, it becomes comprehensible why Kim Dan started having eating disorder. (chapter 94)

It is precisely this logic that persists into the present. When Shin Okja later displaces debt into devotion, or imagines institutions as inherently protective, she is not ignoring reality; she is applying a learned strategy. (chapter 65). The same mechanism that once shielded a child from humiliation now prevents her from recognizing structural violence. Care continues to function—but as a filter.

This blindness is reinforced by distance. Shin Okja encounters much of the world indirectly—through television (chapter 30), through representation (chapter 65), through narratives that render events coherent and contained. Within these frames, suffering appears structured, bounded, and ultimately resolvable.

This mediation shapes not only what she sees, but how she assigns meaning. When she tells Joo Jaekyung that his matches give her strength (chapter 94), the statement appears benign, even affectionate. Yet it introduces a subtle displacement. What is presented as admiration becomes a form of reliance. (chapter 94) His performance is no longer his alone; it acquires a function beyond itself.

This logic reaches its critical point in the hospital. (chapter 98) Unaware of the circumstances surrounding her grandson, Shin Okja’s words persist as an implicit demand. Joo Jaekyung is positioned not simply as a fighter, but as someone who must endure— for Kim Dan’s sake and as such for her sake.

The parallel is striking. What Kim Dan once embodied—living under the weight of another’s need—is now reproduced in Joo Jaekyung. The structure does not disappear; it shifts its bearer. When Kim Dan, moments before losing consciousness, asks him to win the match (chapter 98), the transfer becomes explicit. Care transforms into obligation. Affection becomes pressure. That’s why his gesture resembles to her at the hospice: (chapter 94)

In this sense, the issue is not deception, but mediation. Because Shin Okja perceives the world through framed and partial representations, she cannot register the full reality of what she imposes. Her words do not intend harm—but they participate in a structure where devotion is translated into demand, and where the burden of survival is passed from one body to another. (chapter 98) Suffering becomes something structured and resolved within a frame. This mediated perception sustains her belief that reality is ultimately manageable, that danger can be contained within visible boundaries.

Consequently, her role within the “web” is not passive; it is constitutive. By maintaining a silence around the debt and insisting on the sanctity of the institution, she sustains the conditions under which the harm remains invisible. Her care does not prevent the violence; it renders the possibility of violence unthinkable until it has already occurred.

What remains implicit in this structure becomes explicit in the hospital sequence. The failure of Shin Okja’s logic does not simply manifest as the displacement of harm, but as the collapse of the very conditions that make such displacement possible. (chapter 99) Her framework depends on mediation—on the ability to translate reality into stable equivalences, to interpret suffering through distance, abstraction, and belief. In the hospital, these conditions disappear. Faced with the immediacy of the body, with breath, loss, and the possibility of death, no substitution can be maintained.

Joo Jaekyung initially follows the script— (chapter 99) —but the statement appears mechanical, detached from meaning. What follows marks a rupture: (chapter 99) (chapter 99) Here, translation collapses. Winning no longer signifies protection; strength no longer guarantees safety; endurance no longer equates to care. The logic of substitution becomes inoperable. What remains is not a new interpretation, but the absence of one.

In this sense, the hospital does not simply reveal the limits of Shin Okja’s system—it suspends it. Without distance, without abstraction, without the possibility of reframing, her logic cannot function. The burden is no longer redistributed or absorbed; it is encountered directly, in a form that cannot be mediated. For the first time, the structure does not conceal or displace reality—it is rendered irrelevant in the face of it.

The Stabbing as Narrative Exposure

In this context, the stabbing of Kim Dan is not a random escalation, but a narrative necessity. It functions as a violent exposure of the gap between Okja’s map and the actual territory. (chapter 98) The violence does not introduce a new reality; it forces the recognition of a structural condition that had been deferred for years.

And yet, this exposure remains incomplete. The act takes place in a dark hallway—removed from institutional space, from public visibility, and from the frameworks that produce legitimacy. The perpetrator, no longer an active representative of the hospital (chapter 91), appears as an isolated figure. In this configuration, the crime can still be contained. It risks being interpreted as the action of a single individual rather than the manifestation of a broader system.

In this sense, the doctor functions as the negative reflection of Shin Okja’s logic. (chapter 98) Where she translates structural constraint into devotion—rendering debt bearable by internalizing it—he performs the inverse operation. Faced with the consequences of his actions, he externalizes responsibility, transforming his own failure into accusation. (chapter 90) The structure remains identical; only its direction is reversed. What appears as care in one case becomes blame in the other. Both displace the origin of harm, ensuring that it is never confronted at its source.

This containment is reinforced by the persistence of representation. While violence unfolds in obscurity, the public sphere continues to operate uninterrupted. (chapter 95) The match is discussed on television, framed by expert panels, transformed into spectacle. Within this mediated space, events are reorganized into narratives that preserve coherence. The system remains visible—but only in a form that neutralizes its contradictions.

This disjunction is decisive. The stabbing reveals the structure, but only at the level of immediate experience. It does not yet disrupt the mechanisms that sustain belief in institutional integrity. The hospital’s reputation remains intact, the media continues to frame events as isolated, and the connection between domains—medical, criminal, and entertainment—remains unarticulated.

For this reason, the narrative cannot end here. If the web is to be fully exposed, it must not only produce violence—it must lose its capacity to contain it. The gap between event and interpretation must collapse. What occurs in the hallway must enter the field of visibility, where it can no longer be reassigned, softened, or displaced.

In this sense, the stabbing marks not the culmination of exposure, but its threshold. The threads of the web—once invisible—have become tangible through blood, but they have not yet been seen in their entirety. Until the structures that frame reality—hospital authority, media representation, institutional credibility—are themselves destabilized, the system retains its power.

The injury is not ignored; it is neutralized. What should function as a limit is absorbed into the system as something to endure.

The violence has occurred. Recognition, however, is still pending.

The Unsettling Conclusion: Immunity vs. Path

Ultimately, Shin Okja is not “wrong” in what she values—poverty is real, and status does offer certain protections. However, she is fatally incomplete in what she sees. The path she offers Kim Dan is not meaningless, but she has mistaken a path for immunity.

Underlying this entire structure is a more fundamental fear: not merely that Kim Dan might suffer, but that she might not be there to protect him. (chapter 65) Her philosophy is therefore not only a strategy for survival, but a defense against loss. By constructing a system that promises stability, she attempts to secure his future in her absence.

By persuading him that the hospital was his sanctuary, she inadvertently ensured he would be caught within its walls without the defenses necessary to survive its shadows.

She is the most tragic figure in the web: the one who weaves the trap out of the purest threads of love. This logic extends even to the moral qualities she values. When Shin Okja tells Joo Jaekyung (chapter 94), she is not offering a casual compliment, but reaffirming a belief that character itself can function as protection. Just as institutions are expected to secure safety externally, moral integrity is imagined to guarantee it internally.

Yet this belief encounters the same limit as the others. She does not simply misrecognize; she inhabits a filtered world—of distance, status, and representation—where violence can be deferred, softened, and explained, until it finally returns in the only form that cannot be ignored: blood. The presence of care, of sincerity, of a “good heart” does not prevent violence. (chapter 11) It does not interrupt the structure that produces it. What the stabbing reveals is not the absence of goodness, but its insufficiency. Moral character does not shield against a system that exceeds it.

Park Namwook and the Stabilization of Meaning

Park Namwook is not blind to violence. On the contrary, he recognizes it immediately. (chapter 11) When he sees Kim Dan’s injuries, he does not accept the explanation of an accidental fall. (chapter 11) The signs are too clear: the blood, the instability, the surrounding context. The truth is not hidden from him—it is fully accessible. And yet, this recognition produces no transformation.

This is the decisive point: Park Namwook does not misrecognize violence; he reclassifies it. Instead of allowing the event to disrupt his framework, he absorbs it into it. (chapter 98) The match must continue. The title must be defended. The schedule must be maintained. What should function as a rupture—an event that interrupts the spectacle—is translated into a professional condition. Injury becomes endurance, trauma or pain (chapter 52) becomes discipline (chapter 52), and even external aggression is reintegrated as part of the fighter’s burden. (chapter 96) Violence loses its capacity to expose the system; it becomes one of its operating principles.

The Ideology of Endurance

Yet Park Namwook’s role extends beyond stabilization. He does not merely interpret events—he produces the framework through which others interpret them. His injunction to Joo Jaekyung (chapter 96)—does not resolve conflict; it installs a logic. Emotion must be converted into performance, crisis into productivity, disturbance into focus. What cannot be solved must be endured, and what is endured must be made useful.

This logic is not merely practical—it is ideological. For the manager, value is inseparable from the capacity to endure. Suffering is not a flaw in the system; it is the proof that the system is functioning. To withdraw is not to protect life, but to fail its test. (chapter 95) His insistence that the match must proceed is therefore not simply a matter of scheduling or revenue. It is a defense of the very framework through which he understands worth. If the event were to stop because of blood, then the distinction between strength and failure would collapse.

The Internalization of Systemic Discipline

Within this perspective, relational bonds become unintelligible. The emergence of attachment—Joo Jaekyung’s concern for Kim Dan—does not appear as development (chapter 98), but as deviation. The fighter, in Namwook’s view, must remain a closed unit, defined entirely by performance. Any connection that interferes with that function is treated not as meaningful, but as a malfunction. Jaekyung’s hesitation is thus interpreted not as a moment of recognition, but as a breakdown in execution. (chapter 98)

Kim Dan’s request (chapter 98) does not emerge directly from a spontaneous emotional impulse, but rather from the grim resolution of a structured psychological conflict. This conflict is initiated when the manager installs a normative framework that demands emotion be converted into performance, effectively defining the fighter as a figure of pure, clinical focus. (chapter 95) This institutional lens does not remain an external suggestion; it becomes the dominant interpretive tool through which Kim Dan reads Joo Jaekyung’s behavior. (chapter 96) Simultaneously, Dan operates under a prior logic of care inherited from Shin Okja, which characterizes love as a practice of self-effacement and the vigilant avoidance of becoming a “burden.”

When Dan observes Jaekyung’s withdrawal, these two distinct logics come into tension: he must decide whether the distance between them signifies relational distress or systemic discipline. Selecting the latter, Dan interprets Jaekyung’s silence as a necessary concentration required to become a champion. (chapter 96) This selection is far from neutral; it activates a reflexive inversion in which Dan begins to view his own emotional presence as interference—an element that disrupts the conditions of performance. He ceases to position himself as a partner and instead redefines himself as an obstacle that must be removed. (chapter 96)

The Tragic Resolution of Care

Consequently, the request to (chapter 98) is the tragic resolution of this conflict. Care is not abandoned, but reformulated into compliance: (chapter 98) Dan aligns himself with the very system that isolates him. By explicitly stating that he does not want Jaekyung’s performance to be affected, he performs an act of self-erasure, translating his devotion into a demand that reinforces the system’s logic. In doing so, he does not transfer the inherited burden, but reproduces its structure: love becomes obligation, attachment becomes pressure, and care becomes indistinguishable from the demand to endure. Suffering is thus rendered manageable only by being structured into obligation—even at the moment where it should interrupt the system entirely.

The Collapse of the Spectacle

Chapter 99 exposes the limit of this mechanism. (chapter 99) Joo Jaekyung fulfills the demand—he wins—but the act reveals its emptiness. His victory produces no recognition, only dissonance. He ignores Park Namwook’s praise (chapter 99), treats the CEO and the belt as if they had no substance (chapter 99), and leaves the octagon under the sound of booing. (chapter 99) The spectacle continues, but he no longer inhabits it. In this sense, he appears as a ghost within the very space that once defined him: present, functional, but detached from meaning.

This detachment becomes visible in his relation to Park Namwook. The manager’s words no longer stabilize reality (chapter 99); they fail to register. (chapter 99) His compliment carries no weight. (chapter 99) His authority is not actively rejected—it is rendered irrelevant. Only one statement interrupts this indifference: the mention of Kim Dan (chapter 99). Here, and only here, Joo Jaekyung pauses. The contrast is decisive. Where the system’s language dissolves, the reference to an unmediated relationship produces an immediate response.

Structural Limits and Hollow Compliance

Park Namwook’s function thus reaches its structural limit. He can still organize the event, maintain the schedule (chapter 99), and reproduce the framework—but he can no longer guarantee its internal acceptance. Joo Jaekyung continues to act within the system, but no longer according to its logic. He becomes capable of fulfilling its demands without believing in them. The result is a hollow compliance: performance without adherence, victory without value.

This shift also clarifies the origin of Kim Dan’s earlier misunderstanding. His request did not emerge from misreading alone, but from a framework imposed upon him. By internalizing Park Namwook’s logic, he translated Joo Jaekyung into the figure of the champion and care into a demand for performance. (chapter 99) Chapter 99 reveals the inadequacy of this translation. Winning does not protect, endurance does not resolve, and the fulfillment of the request exposes its own misalignment.

The Execution of Absolute Logic

Namwook’s role within the system is therefore not to produce violence, but to stabilize its meaning, only under the assumption that violence remains mediated. Chapter 99 introduces a critical deviation: Joo Jaekyung does not reject Park Namwook’s instruction (chapter 96) —he fulfills it without mediation. By converting emotion into immediate and total aggression, he follows the directive to its limit. (chapter 99) The result is not a reinforcement of the system, but its disruption. The fight collapses into a single, decisive sequence, eliminating the duration and structure that sustain the spectacle. In this sense, Jaekyung does not oppose the framework; he exposes it by executing it absolutely. (chapter 99) As you can see, Park Namwook ensures that what could be recognized as structural failure is instead experienced as necessity. Where others might see a crime, he sees a complication. (chapter 69) Where there is rupture, he restores continuity. In doing so, he prevents the emergence of the question that could destabilize the entire structure: why? (chapter 98)

Neutralization of the Real

This makes him a crucial figure in the maintenance of the system. Violence alone does not sustain the spectacle; it must be interpreted in a way that neutralizes its implications. While others draw blood, Namwook ensures that the blood does not lead to recognition. He embodies a form of internalized control that presents itself as common sense. And it is precisely against this stabilization—this refusal to allow violence to signify anything beyond necessity—that rupture becomes possible. When Joo Jaekyung ultimately breaks with this logic, he will not simply be interrupting a match; he will be challenging the very definition of value that sustains it.

This is why Kim Dan’s assault becomes so important. (chapter 98) It confronts this ideology with the one thing it cannot easily absorb: real death. Until now, Park Namwook’s framework has revolved around the “fall” of an athlete (chapter 95) —the fake death of reputation, title, and career. A loss in the cage is treated as annihilation, as if nothing existed beyond the hierarchy of the sport. But Kim Dan’s bleeding body introduces another scale of reality. Here, the danger is not symbolic. It is not a fallen ranking, a lost belt, or a damaged public image. It is life itself. (chapter 98)

The Cruelty of Repurposed Voices

And yet even this real danger is pulled back into the logic of the match. Kim Dan’s own words (chapter 98) —his plea that Jaekyung win—are used to reinforce the system that has placed them both in crisis. His injury, even his possible death, is made to serve the same imperative: the champion must fight. This is where the cruelty becomes most visible.

The victim’s desire is transformed into an argument for continuing the spectacle, as if the proper response to his blood were not protection, investigation, or refusal, but victory. (chapter 98) Yosep’s statement intensifies this discomfort. When he tells Jaekyung that Doc Dan would want him to go to the match, he speaks with a certainty that feels almost intrusive. It is as though Kim Dan’s private words have already been absorbed into the group’s logic, detached from their intimate context and repurposed as pressure. Whether Yosep is merely guessing, repeating what he believes Kim Dan would say, or somehow knows more than he should, the effect is the same: Kim Dan’s voice is no longer used to protect his life, but to discipline Jaekyung back into the arena.

The Failure of Care in the Group

This alignment is not incidental. (chapter 98) Yosep does not merely reproduce Park Namwook’s logic; he embodies its long-term internalization. Having lived under the same principle—that emotion and relationships must be subordinated to performance—he has come to perceive this translation as self-evident. His statement does not register as an imposition to him, but as a natural extension of care. Yet the consequences of this logic are already visible in his own trajectory. The prioritization of endurance over relational presence has not only shaped his professional conduct, but also his personal life, culminating in the dissolution of his marriage. What appears, in the moment, as pragmatic guidance thus reveals itself as a learned incapacity to recognize when performance has displaced care. (chapter 5) It shows that the “endurance over care” logic doesn’t just affect the fighters; it is a virus that destroys every personal relationship it touches.

When Park Namwook insists, (chapter 98) the statement does more than impose a schedule—it redraws the field of obligation. The collective is reactivated, and with it, the logic of the system. Yet this “we” produces an immediate absence. If they go, who remains? The question is not logistical, but structural. The system can coordinate presence where spectacle is required, but it fails to assign presence where care is needed. In this gap, its priorities become visible.

Chapter 99 brings this structure to its limit. Joo Jaekyung fulfills the demand, but no longer recognizes its authority. (chapter 99) Park Namwook’s logic remains operative at the level of organization, but it loses its capacity to define meaning. His words no longer orient action; they become external to it. In this sense, his status as “hyung” does not collapse through confrontation, but through irrelevance. Authority persists formally, but it no longer binds. (chapter 99)

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Why Sleeping Beauty 👸 Had to Bleed 🩸 (part 1)

A Violence That Demands Explanation

The stabbing arrives without warning (chapter 98), and perhaps that is precisely why it unsettles so deeply. Readers had anticipated tension, even escalation—an argument, a kidnapping, a sexual assault or perhaps an act of self-defense—but not this sudden and irreversible intrusion of violence. (chapter 98) The former hospital director does not merely attack; he interrupts the narrative itself, breaking the expected rhythm and replacing it with something harsher, more disquieting.

Such a development has divided reactions. For some (including myself initially), such a twist reinforces an uncomfortable pattern: Kim Dan once again appears as the one (chapter 98) who suffers rather than acts (chapter 98), the one who is endangered rather than decisive. He does not yell or attempt to run away while facing his ex-boss. Does this not reduce him to a passive figure, repeatedly placed in situations where others must intervene? (chapter 98) Does it not risk transforming him into a character defined solely by vulnerability?

Yet these objections may overlook a more fundamental question. Why does the story insist on placing him in this position? Why must the narrative return, again and again, to his exposure, his fragility, his inability to escape harm? Is this repetition a failure of imagination, or does it point toward an underlying structure that has not yet been fully understood? Rather than dismissing the scene as cheap or excessive, one might ask instead: what does this act of violence reveal that could not be shown otherwise?

PRIDE and the Persistence of Spectacle

The first answer lies in the world of combat sports itself. The downfall of PRIDE Fighting Championships, which I had already explained in the essay “Unsung Hero: Rescues in the Shadow” offers an important parallel, not because Jinx simply copies real history, but because it borrows the same atmosphere: spectacle, gambling, media glamour, backstage influence, and the uneasy proximity between sport and organized crime. PRIDE was not only a fighting organization. It was an entertainment empire, a televised ritual (chapter 95), and a financial machine. Its fall revealed that the ring was only the visible surface of a much darker structure.

This “darker structure” was not exposed through speculation alone, but through concrete events. In 2006, PRIDE’s collapse followed confirmed ties between Dream Stage Entertainment and the Yakuza, yet even earlier, a more disturbing incident had already cast a shadow over the organization. On January 13th 2003, DSE president Naoto Morishita was found dead in a Tokyo hotel room, officially ruled a suicide. However, given the later revelations about PRIDE’s connections to the Yakuza, his death has often been reinterpreted as part of a much darker context, raising the possibility that he became entangled in conflicts of rivalizing gangs that exceeded the boundaries of sport. What matters here is not the definitive cause, but the atmosphere it reveals: a world in which power, money, and organized crime intersect in ways that can turn lethal.

From Isolated Event to Structural Logic

In this sense, violence within such systems is never entirely accidental. It is embedded in structures where money, influence (chapter 47), and control intersect. This is precisely why figures like Baek Junmin cannot be reduced to mere competitors. His involvement in rigged systems (chapter 47) places him within a framework where outcomes are manipulated and where harm—even death—becomes a possible consequence rather than an exception.

As you can see, despite the DSE CEO’s death in 2003, the spectacle continued till 2006. The fights were broadcast, the audience remained captivated, and the façade held—at least temporarily. Yet something had already begun to fracture. The system did not collapse because violence existed, but because that violence could no longer be contained or ignored.

The Moment of Fracture – From Pride to Jinx

I initially considered a more radical narrative turn for Kim Dan—one in which he would become proactive and confront the system directly. However, the stabbing reorients that expectation. It places him, instead, in a position structurally analogous to that earlier fracture point (chapter 98): not as the agent who exposes the system through action, but as the figure through whom its hidden logic becomes legible. Like the DSE case, where a single event forced observers to reconsider the boundaries between sport, money, and organized crime, Kim Dan’s injury functions as a node of convergence. It connects debts, institutional failure, and coercion into a single, visible rupture.

In this sense, his role is not diminished by passivity. On the contrary, it is precisely his vulnerability that transforms the incident from a private tragedy into a potential point of disclosure. The system can absorb isolated acts of violence, but it becomes unstable when those acts begin to reveal the structure that produced them.

This is precisely what Jinx is now suggesting through MFC. The upcoming Christmas match is not presented as an ordinary bout. (chapter 95) It is broadcast worldwide, surrounded by articles, posters, speculation, and commercial pressure, though I doubt that the interview from Baek Junmin was broadcasted worldwide, as he spoke in Korean. The poster itself (chapter 97) already exposes the bias of the system: Baek Junmin is elevated like a golden idol, while Joo Jaekyung is portrayed more as a ghost from the past. The media does not simply report the match; it prepares the audience to accept a specific narrative. (chapter 95) The question is no longer “Who will win?” but ‘How will Joo Jaekyung’s defeat be made to appear inevitable?’”

The Displacement of Violence

This is where the stabbing becomes crucial. The violence has not disappeared; it has merely migrated. By moving from the illuminated cage to the invisible hallway of the penthouse, the assault transforms from a sporting spectacle into a strategic strike against the champion’s emotional center. (chapter 98) Away from the cameras, the violence is stripped of its rules and its audience, becoming a “private” crime that the system can more easily ignore—or exploit. The hospital only appears afterward—not as the site of the crime, but as the place where its consequences are contained and neutralized. (chapter 98)

The MFC’s ability to proceed with the fight depends on a calculated separation: the crime is relegated to the “offstage,” allowing the spectacle to maintain its legitimacy. The show is preserved not merely by hiding the wound, but by formally decoupling it from the arena.

This produces a chilling structural contradiction. While Kim Dan is the victim of an attempted murder, the organization’s apparatus—personified by Park Namwook and Yosep—. (chapter 98) processes the event as a private misfortune rather than a systemic failure. Their response reveals a hierarchy of value in which legal accountability is secondary, while the continuity of the event remains imperative.

Even institutional intervention reinforces this logic. The police treat the assault as an isolated criminal matter, severed from the corporate structure that made it possible. (chapter 98) Their words reveal the logic of the organization: the attacker may be pursued, but the event must continue. The absence of MFC representatives at the hospital is therefore not incidental, but symptomatic: it visualizes the system’s refusal of implication. Violence is acknowledged—but only insofar as it does not disrupt the spectacle. In a way, everyone seems to be focused on the fight and nothing else. No one publicly asks the most dangerous question (chapter 98): why was Kim Dan targeted on the eve of the match?

Thinking as Resistance

And yet, this question has already been voiced—just not where one would expect it. Not by the police, not by MFC, and not by the members from Team Black, but by the one who stands at the center of the spectacle. Joo Jaekyung does not ask who attacked or whether the culprit will be caught. Instead, he formulates the question that destabilizes the entire situation: (chapter 98) His words are met with silence.

This shift is decisive. It moves the focus away from the act itself and toward its intention. The attack is no longer perceived as random violence, but as a targeted action with a specific purpose. Yet this question does not emerge from uncertainty—it is grounded in prior knowledge. Joo Jaekyung is aware of the former director’s public downfall, having read the article detailing the accusations against him. (chapter 91) More importantly, he has encountered the man directly and witnessed his attitude toward Kim Dan. (chapter 90) In that earlier confrontation, the director reduced the physical therapist to an object of contempt (chapter 90), employing degrading language that revealed not obsession, but dismissal.

This memory creates a tension rather than a simple explanation. The director’s resentment is undeniable (chapter 98), yet it does not fully account for the nature and scale of the violence. His contempt explains hostility, but not the escalation into a calculated act carried out under coercive conditions. The panels themselves reveal that he was first cornered, threatened, and offered relief from his debts in exchange for compliance. (chapter 98) The act thus exceeds the logic of personal grievance without entirely discarding it.

By asking “Why Kim Dan?”, Jaekyung is therefore not seeking information—he is refusing to accept a situation in which no explanation is offered, as if it was fate. While the police and the manager concentrate on the perpetrator and his arrest, the question of motive remains entirely unexamined. His intervention disrupts this premature sense of closure, revealing that the event has been processed without being understood. (chapter 98) In this sense, Jaekyung emerges as a different kind of hero. Not through his fists, but through his capacity to think against the narrative imposed upon him. By refusing to accept a fact as reality, he becomes the first crack in the façade—an element the system cannot easily control or contain.

In this moment, he becomes resistant to manipulation. The system may provide a culprit, but it cannot impose a motive that contradicts his own experience. (chapter 98) His question exposes the gap between appearance and reality: the figure who committed the act is not necessarily the one who explains it. While the authorities treat the incident as an isolated crime and the organization continues to prepare the match, the champion instinctively senses a connection that others refuse to acknowledge.

In that moment, the true conflict shifts. It is no longer limited to the fight inside the cage. It becomes an inquiry into the forces that operate around it—forces that select targets, manipulate circumstances, and remain invisible as long as no one connects the dots.

This institutional silence mirrors the logic of corrupted combat organizations. In such systems, the official event must remain clean, even when everything around it is contaminated. The match poster shines, the broadcast schedule remains intact, and the champion is still expected to appear. (chapter 98) Meanwhile, the real cost is paid elsewhere, by bodies that are not supposed to be seen. Kim Dan’s bleeding body becomes the hidden underside of the spectacle. (chapter 98)

The Reversal of the Shadow

This also reframes Joo Jaekyung’s role as the “dark knight” from my earlier essay. Back then, his heroic actions remained in the shadow: he rescued Kim Dan from the loan shark Heo Manwook and his minions, paid the debts (chapter 17), and protected him without receiving public recognition. (chapter 60) The assault on Kim Dan in the “private” space of the penthouse hallway (Chapter 98) marks a decisive reversal of Joo Jaekyung’s agency. Initially, Joo Jaekyung used the shadows as a form of self-protection—a way to maintain control, conceal his vulnerabilities, and act outside the reach of others. Over time, however, this use of darkness evolved. Later, he trained Kim Dan in secrecy, but not in a dark room. (chapter 88) The same hidden space became a refuge not only for himself, but for Kim Dan, allowing him to protect the physical therapist’s dignity and safety away from the media’s gaze.
In the current moment, the system has appropriated that same darkness… The “offstage” nature of the crime is no longer a shield for the victim (chapter 98), but an asset for the perpetrators, allowing them to keep the violence “manageable” so the public spectacle of the match remains undisturbed. The location of the assault is not incidental. Because it occurs in a private space—the penthouse hallway—it can be framed as a private matter. This stands in deliberate contrast to earlier incidents, such as the drugged beverage (chapter 37) and the switched spray (chapter 49), which unfolded within MFC’s operational sphere. Those events were embedded in the organization’s jurisdiction and thus carried the potential to implicate it directly.

By displacing the violence outside that sphere (chapter 98), the system gains a crucial advantage: it can isolate the act, detach it from the match, and treat it as an unrelated incident. The crime does not disappear; it is reclassified. What might have been evidence of structural manipulation becomes a matter of individual wrongdoing. In this sense, space functions as a tool of narrative control. The public arena produces accountability, while the private setting permits containment. The earlier incidents threatened the integrity of the spectacle; this one is arranged so the spectacle can proceed undisturbed. And now, you comprehend why he had to be stabbed in front of the wolf’s lair.

This transformation is captured with precision in the visual composition of the scene. (chapter 98) As Kim Dan lies bleeding, the most striking element is the shadow of Jaekyung’s silhouette looming over him. In this moment, the protector and the vector of vulnerability collapse into a single image. The shadow that once signified hidden care now reappears as a visual marker of consequence: Kim Dan is not merely the victim of an assault, but a “pressure point” used to strike at the champion’s core.
The “shadow” has ceased to be neutral; it has been weaponized. By targeting Kim Dan in a space removed from scrutiny, the perpetrators transform invisibility into leverage. The injury is not only physical—it is relational. (chapter 98) It converts Jaekyung’s attachment into a site of vulnerability, forcing him into a position where his private life can be used against him.

What follows is a demand rather than a consequence. (chapter 98) He is expected to compartmentalize, to separate the private from the professional, and to enter the ring as if nothing had occurred. The very existence of this expectation reveals the system’s underlying logic: it does not need to confront him directly if it can destabilize him indirectly. By displacing violence into the unseen, it preserves the spectacle while exerting control over the one who stands at its center. Thus, the mechanism of control evolves.

Where Jaekyung once acted in the shadows to protect, the system now operates in the shadows to constrain. His earlier rescues demonstrated agency (chapter 17); this injury imposes limitation. (chapter 98) The hidden space that once enabled autonomy now enforces compliance. And this transformation marks a critical turning point: the private sphere is no longer outside the system—it has been absorbed by it.

That is why the comparison with PRIDE matters. The scandal did not simply concern fixed fights; it exposed how an entire organization could maintain spectacle while concealing coercion, gambling, and criminal influence behind it. In Jinx, Kim Dan’s stabbing threatens to perform the same function. (chapter 98) It may become the first visible crack in the façade. The attack is supposed to remain a private tragedy, but if its connection to the match surfaces, then MFC’s credibility collapses. The question will no longer be whether Baek Junmin can defeat Joo Jaekyung, but whether the fight itself was ever clean or it can even take place at all.

In this sense, Kim Dan’s wound is not a detour from the main plot. It is the key to it. The assault reveals that the “match” is not confined to the cage. The real contest is no longer between two fighters, but between spectacle and truth, between public narrative and hidden crime, between the golden image of MFC and the blood spilled in its shadow.

Weaponizing Attachment: Shame Beneath the Spectacle

If the previous section demonstrated how systems like PRIDE—and by extension, the MFC—sustain spectacle by concealing violence, the events of Chapter 98 reveal the next evolution of that logic: the targeted personalization of harm. (chapter 98) The assault on Kim Dan is not a mere byproduct of corruption; it is a calculated refinement of it.

The Tactical vs. The Structural

At first glance, the decision to target someone close to Joo Jaekyung appears purely tactical—a familiar psychological strategy intended to destabilize a champion before a decisive match. Disrupting focus, inducing emotional strain, and weakening performance are recognizable objectives. Yet this explanation remains insufficient to capture the full gravity of the act. Baek Junmin does not merely seek to win a fight; he seeks to reshape the conditions under which Joo Jaekyung can continue to exist as a fighter. (chapter 98)

While a defeat in the ring can be reversed (chapter 87) and a title reclaimed, guilt alters not just performance, but identity. By transforming Kim Dan into a victim, Baek Junmin attempts to implant a belief far more enduring than physical trauma: that proximity to Joo Jaekyung is dangerous. The objective is not simply to destabilize him temporarily, but to reintroduce a form of inner collapse that had once defined the champion, shifting him from a state of self-destructive detachment back into a cycle of shame. (chapter 98)

This strategy directly addresses a prior failure. (chapter 74) In earlier encounters, Baek Junmin was unable to obtain the champion’s submission (chapter 74) and even to provoke any visible fear from Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 74) His self-destructive indifference functioned as a form of armor. A man who places no value on his own survival cannot easily be coerced through threats of violence. He could not be rattled, because there was nothing to lose. Kim Dan changes that equation entirely.

The Activation of Responsibility

Joo Jaekyung’s resistance did not stem from strength alone, but from a particular psychological condition: he had already accepted loss as inevitable. (chapter 74) What he could not escape, however, was responsibility. His past is marked by a formative rupture (chapter 74) in which personal achievement coincided with irreversible loss, producing a lasting association between his own success and the suffering of others.

By targeting Kim Dan, Baek Junmin deliberately reactivates this structure. (chapter 98) The goal is to force the champion back into the familiar and agonizing position of the survivor—one who advances while others pay the price in blood. In this configuration, the match itself becomes secondary to the internal consequence: the resurgence of self-blame, the reemergence of guilt, and the deepening of self-loathing. (chapter 98) This is where the strategy reveals its full precision. A psychologically destabilized fighter is not only easier to defeat in the present, but far less likely to return in the future. By binding Joo Jaekyung to guilt, Baek Junmin seeks to neutralize the possibility of a future challenge at its source. What cannot be defeated externally is instead weakened internally.

The Mechanism of Psychological Inscription

Kim Dan is not merely close to Joo Jaekyung; he is the medium through which guilt is produced. (chapter 91) The violence inflicted upon him is designed to echo within the champion, transforming an external assault into an internal fracture. In this sense, the attack operates less as a physical strike than as a mechanism of psychological inscription.

This pattern mirrors an earlier dynamic established within the narrative. Joo Jaekyung’s father associated boxing with degradation and criminality, projecting his own failures onto his son. (chapter 73) The result was not empowerment, but internalized blame—a distortion in which ambition became inseparable from shame. (chapter 73) Rather than confronting Joo Jaekyung directly, Baek Junmin reproduces this logic with greater calculation, engineering a situation in which the champion is compelled to interpret harm as his own responsibility.

What emerges here is not an isolated strategy, but the repetition of an earlier structure. The mechanism through which Joo Jaekyung internalizes blame does not originate with Baek Junmin; it echoes a prior dynamic in which responsibility was displaced and redirected until it became inseparable from his identity.

In this sense, Baek Junmin does not introduce a new form of violence; he reproduces an existing one with greater precision. (chapter 73) He occupies the same structural position—not as a replacement, but as a continuation—forcing Joo Jaekyung to relive a pattern in which success, loss, and guilt converge.

Yet this mechanism reveals an important limitation. It depends on the immediate internalization of guilt, on the assumption that Joo Jaekyung will once again accept responsibility without question. The present moment, however, introduces a fracture in that process.

This fracture does not emerge suddenly. It has already been prepared. (chapter 91) Prior to the assault, Joo Jaekyung had begun to recognize himself within the very structure that now seeks to ensnare him. In his interaction with Kim Dan, he confronts the possibility that he, too, has abused his position—that he has coerced, rather than chosen. The comparison with the hospital director is not incidental; it marks a moment of moral destabilization in which guilt is no longer externally imposed, but consciously experienced. Crucially, this guilt does not remain internal. It is voiced.

In articulating his self-accusation, Joo Jaekyung exposes it to the possibility of response. What would otherwise solidify into self-condemnation is instead opened to interruption. Kim Dan’s presence becomes decisive at this point—not as a passive recipient of guilt, but as the one who refuses its absolute form. Through this exchange, guilt is no longer a closed structure, but a contested one.

The Architecture of a Staged Conclusion

This prior transformation fundamentally undermines Baek Junmin’s strategy. His attempt to reinscribe guilt encounters a subject who has already begun to interrogate the very mechanics of his “Jinx.” Faced with the violence inflicted upon Kim Dan, Joo Jaekyung refuses to simply internalize the trauma; instead, he formulates a series of structural questions: (chapter 98)

This reaction marks a significant departure from the past. When he encountered his father’s death (chapter 73), —not out of a failure of intellect, but because the setting presented itself in a way that foreclosed inquiry. The space appeared as a tableau organized for immediate legibility: the sudden proliferation of narcotics, the conspicuous placement of syringes, the absence of functional traces such as a tourniquet, and the layered excess of degradation all converged toward a single conclusion. The body did not merely signify a biological end; it performed an interpretation—self-destruction.

In this sense, the room functioned less as a site of evidence than as a mechanism of instruction. It directed perception away from causality and toward an already determined meaning. The question of how this death came to be was displaced by an immediate attribution of why. Overwhelmed by the coherence of this constructed image, the young Jaekyung accepted responsibility without establishing it. What should have remained open to investigation was instead sealed by a self-evident “truth.”

The Contamination of Victory

This event cannot be understood in isolation. It unfolds in direct proximity to a decisive turning point: Jaekyung’s inaugural tournament victory. (chapter 73) This convergence is not incidental. On the very day his public success becomes visible, his private reality collapses into a scene of absolute abjection. Achievement and catastrophe are not merely juxtaposed—they are structurally bound.

The father’s rejection of boxing—framed as a refusal to produce a “thug” (chapter 73) — intersects with the son’s triumph in a way that contaminates both. Victory no longer functions as emancipation; it becomes implicated in loss. From that moment onward, every success carries the imprint of the “Spindle.” It does not liberate; it binds.

This semiotic contamination persists within Jaekyung’s narrative memory. The victory, though formally recognized, is never integrated as a foundational origin—symbolized by the fact that the trophy was never kept. It remains a point of fracture. Within this configuration, the presence of Hwang Byungchul at the funeral acquires a more complex significance. (chapter 74) As the sole representative of the athletic world, he becomes the figure through whom the scene attains institutional closure. By accepting the event as it appeared, without interrogating its conditions, he contributes—structurally rather than intentionally—to the stabilization of its official meaning. Boxing and the mob are two separate worlds. The tableau remains intact, not because it is verified, but because it is not questioned.

The absence of any external presence at the funeral further complicates the narrative of continuity. If the father had remained embedded within a criminal network (chapter 74), one would expect traces of that affiliation to persist—not necessarily as mourning, but at least as presence. Yet none appear. No representatives, no residual ties, no indication that he belonged to a structure beyond the domestic sphere. This absence does not confirm a break, but it renders continuity uncertain. (chapter 73) What remains is a figure who dies alone, within a scene that admits no extension beyond itself. In this isolation, the event becomes self-contained, and responsibility is implicitly redirected inward. Without external actors to distribute causality, the logic of guilt finds a single, immediate anchor.

The Unstable Tableau

And yet, the scene itself contains the seeds of its own destabilization. The conclusion of self-destruction is not simply given; it is produced through a configuration that reveals, upon closer inspection, a series of tensions.

Earlier depictions of the household suggest a shift that complicates the final image. While signs of substance abuse saturated Jaekyung’s childhood (chapter 72), the later environment appears comparatively stabilized. (chapter 73) This shift does not indicate resolution, but it does mark an interruption. (chapter 73) The father’s rejection of boxing does not simply express fear for his son’s future; it reveals a retrospective awareness of the trajectory it represents. By framing boxing as a path that inevitably produces “thugs,” he speaks not from within that identity, but at a distance from it. His words suggest not a completed transformation, but a partial disengagement—an ability to recognize the logic of the system precisely because he has already been shaped by it.

In this context, the sudden re-emergence of extensive drug paraphernalia at the hour of death reads not as continuity, but as rupture. (chapter 73) The density of objects—the multiplication of syringes and the coexistence of pills and alcohol—exceeds functional necessity. It is an excess of legibility. The scene does not document a process; it presents a conclusion with overwhelming clarity.

For the young Jaekyung, these inconsistencies remain inaccessible. This inaccessibility is not merely the result of shock; it is structured by regression. The scene is not perceived through the analytical lens of a teenager, but through the affective memory of a child. (chapter 73) The visual emphasis on syringes and narcotics does not introduce new information—it reactivates an earlier image, one already internalized during his childhood. (chapter 72) In this sense, Jaekyung does not encounter the scene as something to be interpreted, but as something already known.

What appears in front of him is therefore not a set of contradictions, but a confirmation. The present collapses into the past. The drugs, the father, and the atmosphere of degradation align seamlessly with the memory of a six-year-old who had already learned to associate these elements with shame and danger. (chapter 73) Under these conditions, perception does not produce inquiry—it produces recognition. And recognition, precisely because it feels immediate and familiar, forecloses the possibility of questioning.The visceral shock of the image, intensified by the disturbing visibility of the body, produces an immediate withdrawal from analysis. The scene compels recognition without permitting interpretation. What might have functioned as clues instead reinforces certainty.

Only in the present, at the hospital in Chapter 98, does this mechanism begin to falter. (chapter 98) The emergence of the question—Why?—interrupts the automatic transition from event to guilt. What once functioned as necessity now reveals itself as contingent—and therefore resistible. The structure has not disappeared, but it has finally become visible.

In this sense, the strategy does not fully succeed. The structure is activated, but not completed. The repetition is no longer exact, because it is no longer unexamined. The jinx persists not because it is real, but because it was never questioned.

Yet to read this pattern solely as a psychological repetition would be to miss its full implication. What appears as an internal mechanism—guilt, shame, and the displacement of responsibility—cannot be fully explained at the level of individual experience alone. The recurrence of this structure points beyond personal trauma toward a broader configuration that organizes and sustains it. The scene does not document a process; it presents a conclusion with overwhelming clarity. It does not prove that a murder took place—but it produces the conditions under which such a possibility can no longer be excluded.

The Illusion of Separation: From Trauma to Structure

The opposition between an “official” and an “illegal” system is ultimately misleading. (chapter 47) What the narrative reveals instead is a single structure operating on two levels: a visible arena governed by rules, discipline, and public legitimacy, and an invisible layer sustained by coercion, debt, and manipulation. Joo Jaekyung’s father stands at the point where these two layers converge. (chapter 73) His trajectory—oscillating between boxing and criminality—reveals that the boundary between legitimacy and illegality was never stable to begin with. What appears, at first, as a personal failure is in fact the collapse of a system that offers no coherent separation between discipline and exploitation. The paternal figure thus ceases to function solely as a source of trauma; he becomes the site through which structural contradictions are transmitted.

Within this configuration, the figure of the “hyung” (chapter 96) acquires particular significance. Unlike the father, whose role has been reduced to memory, the hyung represents the active principle of authority within the hidden layer. if the Father was the curse’s origin, the faceless Hyung is its manager. This reinforces my point that Jaekyung was never “free,” only “transferred” from one owner to another. His presence signals that control does not disappear—it shifts location. Responsibility is no longer anchored in a single individual, but distributed across a hierarchy that regulates behavior through coercion rather than care. Baek Junmin operates within this structure, not as its originator, but as its agent. His actions do not create the system; they enact it.

This is precisely what reframes his confrontation with Joo Jaekyung. The conflict between them is not merely personal, nor reducible to rivalry or resentment. It reflects a structural tension between two modes of existence within the same system: one that remains embedded in its concealed mechanisms, and one that has, at least temporarily, emerged within its visible and legitimized form. By targeting Kim Dan, Baek Junmin does not simply attack the champion—he attempts to draw him back into the logic from which he appeared to have escaped.

The Visual Symbolism of the Trace

The spatial logic of the story undergoes a significant transformation as the assault occurs in the private hallway of the penthouse, a space removed from public scrutiny. (chapter 98) This displacement allows the act to be framed as an isolated incident. Yet the shadows that once concealed protection now enable the conversion of violence into guilt without external interference.

This transformation is rendered with striking clarity in the visual composition of the scene. As Kim Dan lies bleeding, Joo Jaekyung’s shadow extends over his body, functioning as a visual articulation of perceived implication. The image collapses the distinction between protector and source, suggesting not direct causality, but internalized responsibility.

At the same time, Kim Dan performs a gesture that introduces a counter-movement within this structure. (chapter 98) By placing his bloodied hand against Joo Jaekyung’s cheek, he leaves behind a visible trace—one that cannot be easily rationalized or dismissed. Unlike previous injuries, this mark originates from another’s suffering. It resists assimilation into the logic of sport.

What is most striking is the collective failure to acknowledge it. (chapter 98) Those present remain focused on the match, the perpetrator, or the urgency of treatment. The mark remains unaddressed, almost invisible in plain sight. Yet precisely because it is overlooked, it acquires a different kind of force. Unlike concealed wounds, this trace has the potential to enter the public sphere.

The Fracture of the Impervious

Ultimately, the conflict has extended far beyond the cage and into the domains of memory, responsibility, and self-perception. Baek Junmin’s strategy reveals its full complexity by weaponizing attachment and transforming care into a source of shame and vulnerability.

The spectacle of the MFC persists, sustained by media and profit, but beneath that surface, a different struggle unfolds between the maintenance of an image and the emergence of truth. The central question of the narrative is no longer whether Joo Jaekyung can win his next fight, but whether he can continue to exist without once again becoming the source of his own undoing. (chapter 98) This brings us back to the question raised at the outset: is this repetition a failure of imagination, or does it point toward an underlying structure that has not yet been fully understood? What emerges here suggests the latter. The assault does not merely repeat violence; it exposes the mechanism through which that violence acquires meaning.

In doing so, it does not remain confined to the present. It reopens the past. The logic that becomes visible in the stabbing (chapter 98) — the staging, the displacement of responsibility, the transformation of harm into self-blame—casts a new light on what had previously been perceived as a closed event. The death of Joo Jaewoong, once accepted as an act of self-destruction, begins to appear less as a definitive conclusion than as a scene whose meaning was prematurely fixed.

What the present reveals is not simply that violence persists, but that its earlier interpretation may have been structured in the same way. A single stab, precisely because it makes the mechanism visible, destabilizes the coherence of the past. The question is no longer only what is happening now, but what was already made to appear natural before.

In this sense, Chapter 98 functions as a reopening of a scene that had once been closed. Where the death of Joo Jaewoong presented itself as a finished conclusion (chapter 74) —coherent, legible, and therefore unquestioned—the present moment resists such closure. The structure that once foreclosed inquiry is no longer fully operative. The “jinx” reveals itself not as fate, but as the effect of an interpretation that had never been interrogated. (chapter 73)

Rather than functioning as an isolated or excessive event, the act reveals what could not be shown otherwise: that the true site of conflict is not the body, but the structure through which violence is interpreted and internalized. (chapter 98) It is only through such a rupture that the narrative makes visible how guilt is produced, how responsibility is displaced—and, crucially, how these mechanisms retroactively shape the meaning of past events. What appears as repetition thus becomes disclosure.

Meeting the Maker — The Refusal to See

If the previous sections have demonstrated that violence in Jinx does not emerge randomly but follows a concealed structure, then the question becomes unavoidable: why do those within the system fail to recognize it? (chapter 95) Why is the mechanism that produces harm repeatedly misidentified as fate, necessity, or personal failure? (chapter 74)

This moment of questioning is not only internal to the narrative; it is also reproduced at the level of perception. The presence of the knife in the hallway does not remain a neutral detail. (chapter 98) It triggers a memory—one associated with Heo Manwook (chapter 17), whose violence was never concealed behind the illusion of sport. His weapon was direct, explicit, and inseparable from his words. During that earlier encounter, he articulated a principle that now returns with unexpected clarity: (chapter 17)

At the time, this statement referred to rankings, to legitimacy, to the structures that present themselves as objective while masking underlying manipulation. Reencountered through the image of the knife, however, its meaning expands. What was once understood as a cynical remark begins to function as a key. The distinction between the “real” and the “fake” collapses, revealing that the spectacle itself depends on this separation remaining unquestioned. (chapter 98) The hallway scene, far from being an isolated act of violence, reactivates this earlier insight: the system does not merely contain violence—it organizes it while presenting its outcomes as natural and deserved.

To “meet the maker” (chapter 17) in this context is not to encounter a person, but to confront the conditions that make one’s position possible.—the structure that organizes perception, distributes responsibility, and determines what can or cannot be seen. What the narrative reveals, however, is not recognition, but refusal.

The Curse Rewritten: From Spindle to Knife

The recurrence of the knife within the narrative follows the specific logic of the curse in Sleeping Beauty. In that framework, the spindle does not generate the curse; it merely activates it. What appears as a sudden injury is, in fact, the visible manifestation of a condition that long precedes it. (chapter 11). This condition does not remain static; it intensifies. The violence directed at Kim Dan follows a clear trajectory—one that escalates in both form and intimacy. What begins as physical assault quickly extends into spatial violation: trespassing, intrusion into his living space, and the systematic erosion of any boundary that might protect him. From there, it evolves into abduction (chapter 16) and coercion (chapter 16), culminating in sexual violence. (chapter 16)

This progression is not incidental. Each stage strips away another layer of autonomy, reducing the subject from a person to an object of use. By the time the stabbing occurs (chapter 98), the narrative has already exhausted all intermediate forms of domination. The blade does not introduce a new type of violence; it functions as its logical culmination.

In this sense, the stabbing reads as the material echo of an earlier declaration—Heo Manwook’s injunction to “meet the maker.” (chapter 17) What was initially articulated as a threat becomes, at this point, structurally realized. The body is no longer merely controlled or violated; it is brought to the threshold where existence itself is placed into question.

The act therefore marks not a rupture, but a climax. It condenses the entire history of escalating aggression into a single, irreversible gesture, transforming what had been a sequence of violations into a unified structure of destruction. Likewise, the knife in the hallway does not introduce violence—it reactivates a structural lethality that has always already been in place.

The Knife as Narrative Convergence

The significance of the knife lies in its repetition. Its reappearance recalls Heo Manwook’s earlier use of the same object, along with his cynical insistence that the entire professional system is “fake.” (chapter 17) Through this echo, the boundary between past and present collapses, as does the distinction between underground coercion and institutionalized spectacle. What once appeared as separate domains—the illegal underworld and the legitimate sport—are revealed as two expressions of a single, continuous structure.

In this sense, the knife functions as the narrative equivalent of the spindle: not the origin of harm, but the point at which an underlying cause becomes legible. The injury it produces is not an isolated consequence of rivalry, but the activation of a pattern that transforms hidden structure into visible damage.

This convergence becomes even more striking when one considers what remains unseen within the act itself. The violence enacted through the knife does not originate with the hand that wields it. (chapter 98) It emerges from a structure already in motion—one that had previously manifested in a different form. The attempted sexual assault by the hospital director (chapter 90) and the later stabbing are not discrete events, but successive articulations of the same logic: the exploitation of vulnerability under conditions of asymmetrical power.

What connects these moments is not direct coordination, but continuity through concealment. The earlier violation was neither publicly exposed nor institutionally challenged. As a result, it did not conclude—it persisted. The system remained intact, and with it, the conditions that made further violence possible. (chapter 91) What returns in the stabbing is therefore not a new intrusion, but the intensification of an unresolved structure.

This is where the irony of Baek Junmin’s position becomes visible. His insistence on distance (chapter 98) —his attempt to sever himself from the act by delegating it and erasing traces—presumes that violence can be isolated and controlled. On the one hand his demand effectively reassigns the burden of protection. The former director, once shielded by institutional authority, is now positioned as the one who must protect another individual from exposure. Yet the very structure he activates exceeds his knowledge. (chapter 98) The assault he commissions intersects with a prior history he does not perceive, linking his intervention to an already existing chain of coercion. The knife may be common, interchangeable, untraceable—but the structure it activates is not. The system operates on the principle of absolute replaceability; the identity of the one who ‘takes the fall’ is irrelevant, provided the architect remains unexposed. But the problem is that behind him stands a vast criminal enterprise (chapter 93); the money laundering operation represents the material reality that must remain hidden behind the ‘fake’ spectacle of the sport.

The irony is structural. The medical institution that failed to protect its victims now disappears from the scene, while individuals are compelled to safeguard one another—not out of solidarity, but to preserve fragmentation. What is being protected is not a person, but the separation of domains. The director’s silence does not defend Junmin alone; it prevents the convergence of narratives that would reveal the continuity between institutional abuse and criminal violence.

This continuity does not end at the level of individual actors; it extends into the institutions that frame and legitimize them. The case of the hospital director (chapter 91) reveals that the structure had already been visible —yet not acted upon. Multiple victims had come forward, and the institution had delayed its response, allowing the pattern of abuse to persist before ultimately isolating the perpetrator as an individual anomaly. In doing so, the hospital produced a familiar resolution: the crime was acknowledged, but the conditions that enabled it remained intact. Responsibility was displaced onto a single figure, while the institution itself avoided deeper scrutiny. What appears as accountability is, in fact, containment. At no moment, it was reported to the police.

This structure does not remain confined to the domain of criminal violence. It extends into the institutions that claim to oppose it. The hospital’s treatment of Kim Dan already revealed this logic. (chapter 1) He was not merely fired after the incident; he was made professionally untouchable. By damaging his reputation and preventing him from being hired elsewhere, the hospital did not simply remove a troublesome employee—it attempted to silence the one person whose testimony could expose the system that had protected the director.

Yet this attempt at containment seems to have produced the opposite effect. The director’s later resentment (chapter 90) suggests that Kim Dan’s case did not disappear quietly. His words imply that the incident created a ripple, perhaps even a precedent: other victims may have recognized their own experience in his and understood that they were not alone. In that sense, Kim Dan’s dismissal became the first crack in the hospital’s façade.

This is why the stabbing carries such institutional danger. (chapter 98) Once again, violence is meant to isolate Kim Dan and reduce him to a private victim. But if the connection between the assault, the former director, and the hospital’s earlier retaliation becomes visible, the incident can no longer be contained as an individual crime. Like before, Kim Dan’s wound may become the point through which others begin to speak.

The stabbing (chapter 98) represents a terminal failure of the system’s containment strategy. This instability is intensified by the precarious position of the former director. (chapter 91) Having been isolated as the sole bearer of responsibility, he has been stripped of the institutional protection that once enabled his abuses. This displacement produces a structural contradiction: while the hospital maintains its façade of public legitimacy, the individual it sacrificed remains a repository of knowledge that can destabilize that façade. The very mechanism used to preserve institutional coherence—the isolation of a “bad actor”—simultaneously generates the conditions for its undoing. What was meant to sever the link instead preserves it in another form.

The assault on Kim Dan reveals that the domain has shifted, but the objective remains identical: the coercion of the vulnerable. (chapter 98) This convergence forces into visibility a question the system had previously deferred: How could such a figure have operated within the institution at all? The director’s survival outside the hospital walls proves that his “crimes” were not individual deviations, but functional features of the environment that birthed them.

The Return of the Repressed

By reintroducing violence into the present through a criminal channel, the director acts as a “living bridge.” He reconnects the “official” medical world with the “underground” world of debt and violence. The victim remains constant—Kim Dan—but the mask of institutional authority has slipped.

The stabbing is not just a physical attack; it is a forensic exposure. He used his knowledge to hurt a human violating the very ethical framework that legitimizes medical authority. (chapter 98) It reveals that the “Official Narrative” of the director’s expulsion was a lie of containment. The institution did not heal itself; it simply exported its violence to a darker room, and in Chapter 98, that violence finally found its way back into the light of the hallway.

In this sense, the knife does not merely expose the criminal underworld; it reflects back onto the medical system that failed to interrupt it. What was once treated as an isolated scandal now reappears as part of a broader continuity, revealing that the boundary between protection and exploitation was never as stable as it seemed.

In this light, the stabbing no longer appears as a singular escalation, but as the terminal expression of a sequence that has progressively stripped away resistance: (chapter 11) from physical intimidation to spatial intrusion, from coercion to attempted violation, and finally to the threshold of death. The act does not introduce violence—it renders its continuity undeniable What is brought into view is not merely injury, but the continuity of a system that persists precisely because its earlier forms were never fully confronted.

From Accident to Structure: The Protective Fiction

It is precisely this legibility that Kim Dan cannot sustain. Kim Dan’s use of the word “accident” (chapter 94), is not a neutral description—it is a mode of interpretation. It designates his parents’ death as an event without structure, a rupture that cannot be traced back to conditions or causes. In doing so, it preserves the image of a past that appeared stable: a childhood not yet governed by coercion, obligation, or threat.

Yet this framing stands in direct tension with the reality that organizes his present. What appears as accidental loss is followed by a life structured entirely by debt (chapter 5) —financial, social, and existential. This transition is not simply temporal, but conceptual. Where accident suggests contingency, debt imposes necessity. One denies causality; the other enforces it.

The insistence on “accident” therefore functions as a protective displacement. It isolates the past as an irreducible event, preventing it from being connected to the conditions that now govern his life. By maintaining this separation, Kim Dan preserves the possibility that what happened to him was random—rather than the first manifestation of a structure that has never ceased to operate.

In this sense, the language of accident functions as a protective fiction. It enables survival by dissolving causality into randomness, allowing him to remain within a predatory environment without confronting the forces that govern it. Yet this strategy carries a decisive cost: what cannot be traced cannot be resisted. By accepting accident, he relinquishes the possibility of explanation.

Sleep as Structural Recognition

Kim Dan’s unconscious state (chapter 98) cannot be reduced to a purely medical condition. It introduces a different mode of perception—one no longer governed by the interpretive framework that structures his waking life. Sleep does not simply heal; it suspends the language of accident.

Within this suspension, a different form of memory becomes possible. The past does not return as isolated images, but as connections—links between events that had previously appeared unrelated. To remember under these conditions is not to recover identity, but to recognize structure.

Sleep, therefore, does not erase the curse. It creates the conditions under which it can finally be understood.

Debt as the Primordial Curse

It is here that the parallel with Sleeping Beauty reaches its full force. In Perrault’s version, the curse is not accidental, but the consequence of an earlier exclusion—a structural imbalance that demands resolution. The spindle does not create the disaster; it enacts it.

Within Jinx, the knife occupies the same position. It does not originate violence—it marks the point at which concealment fails. The decisive question is not who wields the blade, but what conditions make the strike inevitable.

Those conditions are structured by debt. I don’t think, it is a coincidence that the deal between the champion and his fated partner ends, when he regains the title. (chapter 77)

From childhood, Kim Dan’s life has been organized around repayment—financial, emotional, and existential. Loan sharks, inherited obligations, and the constant threat directed at his grandmother reveal a trajectory shaped long before the present moment. Like the princess, he inherits a burden he did not create. The stabbing is not a rupture in this trajectory—it is its culmination.

His blood is not spilled by chance (chapter 98), but by a necessity that has been building all along—a form of inevitability that functions as his own Ananke.

The symbolism of the spindle introduces an additional layer that complicates the logic of violence. In its original context, the spindle is not merely an instrument of harm; it belongs to a domain associated with care, intimacy, and transmission. It is embedded within a space of protection—yet it is precisely there that the curse is activated.

A similar ambiguity emerges in Kim Dan’s final gesture before losing consciousness (chapter 98). His movement is not defensive, but relational. He reaches out, touches, and speaks—not to preserve himself, but to secure the other. The “promise” he articulates does not interrupt the structure of violence; it reproduces it in another form.

What appears as an expression of love is simultaneously an act of transfer. The burden does not disappear—it shifts. In this moment, protection takes the form of self-erasure, and affection becomes indistinguishable from obligation. In my eyes, his attitude must be similar to the mysterious phone call: (chapter 19)

This is why the transition into unconsciousness acquires a particular significance. If the waking world is governed by the language of accident and denial, then this gesture marks the threshold at which another form of memory becomes possible. What is encountered in “sleep” is not simply the past as image, but the conditions under which such gestures became necessary.

To “meet the maker”, (chapter 17) in this sense, is not just to encounter an origin in the form of a person, but also to confront the structure that binds love, sacrifice, and inevitability together. In this world, the past does not recede; it persists as the ground upon which every action unfolds.

The tragedy is not that the spindle was found, but that in a system structured by inherited debt, every path was already converging toward the hallway—the point at which the structure demands its due. And yet, for the first time, this necessity is interrupted. The curse does not fall; it unfolds. But in the unfolding, it becomes visible—and therefore resistible.

Conclusion — The Unfinished Structure

Is this repetition, Kim Dan becoming a victim of a crime, a failure of imagination… or a structure?

What emerges, then, is not the resolution of a mystery, but the exposure of a structure. The violence that culminates in the hallway does not belong to a single act, a single perpetrator, or even a single domain. It reveals a continuity—one that binds the underground, the institution, and the intimate sphere into a single, operative logic.

And yet, this exposure remains incomplete. (chapter 98)

If the knife renders the structure visible, it does not explain why it continues to be sustained by those who inhabit it. The question therefore shifts once more—not toward the origin of violence, but toward its endurance. How is it that individuals who are neither blind nor malicious continue to reproduce a system that harms them and others?

It is here that the figures left at the margins—Shin Okja, Park Namwook, Hwang Byungchul, the Entertainment agency with Choi Heesung, the members of Team Black —return with renewed significance. They do not wield the knife, nor do they stand at its receiving end. (chapter 98) And yet, without them, the structure would not hold.

The final question is therefore no longer what produces violence, but what allows it to remain unrecognized, reinterpreted, or accepted—even by those who suffer from it.

If the curse has begun to reveal itself, then its true persistence may lie not in its origin, but in the ways it is continually lived, justified, and passed on. The curse persists not because it is inescapable, but because its victims have been taught to read it as fate—to mistake debt or guilt for destiny

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Steady Passionate 🌹 Devotion 💍

Kim Dan’s birthday and his presents

As the narrative of Jinx moves toward the decisive window of December 24th to (chapter 89) December 26th (chapter 97), readers are confronted with a question that seems simple yet resists any easy answer: what exactly has Joo Jaekyung prepared for Kim Dan’s birthday?

For many, the answer appears obvious. (chapter 97) The bouquet of red roses—long associated with romantic passion, desire, and confession—seems to speak for itself. Paired with the appearance of a strawberry cake and the long-anticipated possibility of couple rings (chapter 97), the scene appears easy to decode. It suggests a champion finally ready to step out from behind his walls and express what words have long concealed. But are these gifts the true center of the moment, or only its most visible layer? Is Jaekyung merely celebrating a birthday, or trying to alter the future he and Kim Dan might share?

Yet Jinx rarely reveals itself through what is most obvious at first glance. Again and again, significance emerges through timing (chapter 81), hesitation, gesture, and subtle changes in the spaces characters inhabit. A gift may matter less than the moment it is offered. A movement may reveal more than a confession. Even the introduction of something new into a familiar environment can carry emotional weight beyond words.

Perhaps the most important mystery lies not in what Kim Dan will receive, but in what Jaekyung himself is becoming. Is he still the man who equates care with possession and value with financial power? Or is he beginning, however awkwardly, to imagine another form of devotion—one expressed less through spectacle than through protection, constancy, and shared future?

To answer that question, we must look beyond the surface of roses and celebration. For the most meaningful present may not be the one that first captures the eye, but the one that reveals a transformation of the heart.

When Gifts Speak Volumes

At first glance, Chapter 97 appears easy to interpret. A bouquet of red roses, a strawberry cake marked Happy Birthday, and a pair of rings seem to point toward an obvious conclusion: (chapter 97) Joo Jaekyung has prepared birthday presents for Kim Dan. Yet the chapter becomes far more complex, once we recognize that these presents do not carry fixed meanings in themselves. In this story, gifts are shaped less by appearance than by intention, timing, and emotional context.

Red Roses: Desire and Reconciliation

The bouquet of red roses offers the clearest example. Traditionally, red roses signify romantic love, passion, desire, and confession. On the surface, they appear to announce a straightforward romantic gesture. Yet the surrounding context changes their meaning. Jaekyung brings them after acknowledging that he had treated Kim Dan badly. (chapter 97) Because of this, the flowers express more than attraction alone. They also function as apology and reconciliation. Their romantic symbolism remains, but it is deepened by remorse and by the desire to restore closeness after harm.

This double meaning is important. The roses do not erase desire; they refine it. Passion is no longer detached from responsibility. Attraction is joined to remorse. In that sense, the gesture marks growth: Jaekyung does not simply want Kim Dan—he wants to restore closeness with him. If intimacy follows that night (chapter 97), it would carry a different significance than in the past. It would no longer be defined by the old “jinx” logic of transactional or ritualized sex, but by reconciliation and mutual affection. The act would cease to be mere release and become an expression of true love.

The bouquet of red roses carries yet another layer of meaning when placed beside the couple’s earlier conversation about flowers. When Kim Dan once received pink roses from Choi Heesung (chapter 31), he explained that he liked flowers because of their scent. (chapter 31) The statement seemed simple at the time, almost shyly innocent, yet it reveals something essential about his character. Kim Dan values not spectacle, status, or monetary worth, but the quiet emotional effect an object can have. He does not love flowers because they are expensive. He loves the atmosphere they create, the comfort they bring, and the mood they awaken.

This detail becomes even more significant when contrasted with Joo Jaekyung’s immediate response: (chapter 31) At first, the line sounds like blunt indifference. Yet its emotional effect falls most sharply on Kim Dan. Having just admitted that he likes flowers because of their scent, Kim Dan is suddenly placed in an awkward position. Thus he apologizes. The rejection no longer concerns flowers alone. It risks sounding like a rejection of what Kim Dan himself has brought into the shared space.

This matters because scent crosses boundaries in ways other objects do not. A fragrance cannot be neatly contained. It lingers, spreads through rooms (chapter 31), and remains in the air. In that sense, Kim Dan may feel he has trespassed—that he has filled Jaekyung’s penthouse with something unwanted, leaving behind traces of himself where he had no right to do so. That’s how it dawned on me why the athlete refused to have the room cleaned for quite some time (chapter 55), he wanted to keep the physical therapist’s scent there.

But let’s return our attention to the scene with the pink roses. For a man as careful and self-effacing as Kim Dan, such a moment would naturally produce embarrassment. The shame lies not only in differing tastes, but in the fear of being too present. His preference seems to have occupied space that was never truly his. And now, you understand why he didn’t leave the elevator at the same time. (chapter 31) He wanted to be considerate of Joo Jaekyung, making sure that the flowers’ fragrance would not bother his “landlord”.

Striking is that the line “I hate flowers” is more than just blunt indifference. Yet later revelations about Jaekyung’s childhood allow it to be read differently. His past is marked by humiliation, deprivation, and social contempt. (chapter 72) He was mocked as dirty, poor, and (chapter 72) “smelly.” Odor, in his early life, was not associated with beauty or tenderness, but with shame. Smell became tied to exclusion.

That distinction matters because scent is one of the most powerful carriers of memory. Unlike rational thought, fragrance can bypass language and return a person directly to emotion. For Kim Dan, the smell of flowers “puts [him] in a good mood.” (chapter 31) For Jaekyung, sensory memory may have operated in the opposite direction, linking smell to poverty, rejection, and pain.

Seen in this light, the red roses of Chapter 97 are profoundly symbolic. The celebrity does not merely buy a conventional romantic gift. He chooses an object tied to a sensory world he once rejected. Whether consciously or not, he reaches toward what he had previously denied. (chapter 97) This contrast gives the bouquet an additional significance. The red roses do not merely symbolize romance or apology; they also possess an immediate emotional function. Because the wolf remembers that flowers can cheer up his fated partner, his choice of gift becomes quietly strategic as well as affectionate. He is not only offering an object, but shaping the atmosphere in which the encounter will unfold.

The fragrance of the roses can soften tension, brighten the space, and reduce the emotional distance created by their recent conflict. In that sense, Jaekyung is doing more than saying I’m sorry. He is creating the conditions in which that apology may be more easily accepted. Rather than forcing reconciliation through words or authority, he approaches Kim Dan through something known to bring him comfort.

The gesture therefore reveals a subtle but important evolution. The MMA fighter is no longer acting only from impulse or pride. He is observing, remembering, and responding to Kim Dan’s inner world. What he offers is not simply flowers, but consideration.

At the same time, the bouquet suggests the rewriting of scent itself. What was once connected to humiliation is now reintroduced through affection. What once belonged to trauma is placed inside a gesture of care. This is why the flowers can be understood as therapeutic for Jaekyung as well. In offering them to his fated partner, he may also be exposing himself to a new emotional association. The fragrance of flowers no longer belongs only to distance or discomfort. Through Kim Dan, it can become linked to warmth, intimacy, and home.

The color deepens this transformation. Earlier pink roses symbolized admiration, gratitude, joy, grace, and gentle affection. (chapter 31) Red roses carry stronger meanings: passion, desire, courage, and declared love. The movement from pink to red mirrors the movement of the relationship itself—from undecisive tenderness to chosen intensity. (chapter 97)

Most importantly, the bouquet reveals how Kim Dan changes Jaekyung’s relationship to the world. Kim Dan does not simply receive gifts; he rehumanizes meanings that trauma had distorted. Through him, even something as ordinary as scent can be recovered. In that sense, the roses speak not only to Kim Dan, but to the wounded child Jaekyung once was.

The Strawberry Cake: One Object, Many Readings

The cake works in a similarly revealing way. (chapter 97) Its packaging openly displays the words Happy Birthday, inviting the reader to assume that its purpose is self-evident. Yet the narrative itself unsettles that assumption. (chapter 97) Kim Dan also purchases the same kind of cake, but not to celebrate his own birthday. He chooses it to honor Jaekyung, expressing pride, care, and happiness for the champion’s success. (chapter 97) Gratitude and admiration replace regret as the emotional core of the gesture. The same object therefore carries different meanings in different hands.

This parallel reveals that the cake does not inherently mean “birthday.” Its significance depends on the giver and the feeling expressed through it. In Jaekyung’s hands, it becomes part of an effort to repair tension and reopen warmth. In Kim Dan’s hands, it becomes admiration and support. The printed message remains the same, but the emotional message changes. The same object becomes two messages: one says, I’m sorry. The other says, I’m proud of you. Without coordination, both men choose the same symbolic language: Love. They are beginning to meet each other in thought. To conclude, the cake reveals emotional convergence.

The cake gains additional meaning when placed within its seasonal context. In South Korea, the strawberry shortcake-style dessert displayed in bakeries each December is strongly associated with Christmas celebrations.

For more information, read this article: All Koreans need for Christmas is … a cake?https://www.koreaherald.com/article/3280348 / picture is quoted from https://www.orientalmart.co.uk/blog/how-christmas-celebrated-south-korea

Covered in white cream and topped with bright strawberries, it visually echoes the festive colors of winter and has become a familiar part of romantic holiday culture. It is not merely something people eat; it is an object tied to atmosphere, celebration, and shared occasions.

The cultural backdrop changes how the scene can be read, but not necessarily how the characters themselves understand it. On December 24th, roses and a strawberry cream cake naturally evoke the visual language of romance and couple celebration. To an outside observer, such gifts can resemble the signs of a private date or an intimate evening together. Yet the scene suggests that neither Kim Dan nor Jaekyung fully approaches it through that lens.

Kim Dan’s attention is drawn to a family leaving the bakery (chapter 97), which subtly shifts the emotional frame. Rather than reading the setting as romantic spectacle, he may register warmth, celebration, and shared belonging. True to his character, domestic happiness may speak to him more immediately than public codes of romance.

Jaekyung’s position is different, but no less revealing. He appears motivated first by personal memory and immediate need. He remembers flowers in connection with Kim Dan and seeks a way to repair the distance created by recent conflict. (chapter 31) His impulse is intimate rather than seasonal. He is not setting out to perform Christmas romance; he is trying, in the only way he can, to reconcile.

At the same time, that private intention takes shape within a very specific environment. Because he is shopping on Christmas Eve, he moves through spaces already saturated with festive displays, bakery counters, bouquets, and seasonal rituals of affection. The desire originates within him, but the language available to express it is supplied by the world around him. This helps explain his visible hesitation. (chapter 97) He questions whether it would be strange to give such presents and admits that he no longer even knows what to do. The uncertainty suggests that he has not fully mastered the symbolic code he is using. He senses that flowers, cake, and rings matter, yet he cannot entirely explain why they feel right or whether they will make him look foolish.

That tension makes the scene especially moving. Kim Dan sees warmth (chapter 97) where others might see romance. Jaekyung reaches for gestures of affection whose wider meanings he only partially understands. Neither man consciously names the moment as a couple’s ritual, yet their actions begin to inhabit that language all the same. Personal feeling leads, while culture quietly gives it form.

This gives the moment a special subtlety. The gifts carry meanings larger than either man explicitly names. Their relationship begins to appear as a couple’s bond, even before they fully recognize it themselves. Culture speaks around them before they can speak for themselves.

This makes the writing on the box especially significant. Happy Birthday offers an innocent and socially acceptable explanation for gifts that might otherwise appear overtly romantic. (chapter 97) The label clarifies the scene on the surface, yet it may also conceal its deeper meaning. What looks like a birthday errand can simultaneously function as an intimate gesture between two people, whose bond is becoming harder to hide.

The timing of Jaekyung’s gesture strengthens this reading even further. Kim Dan’s birthday falls on December 26th, yet the flowers and cake are brought on the night of December 24th. This is not merely an early delivery. It creates a practical contradiction. (chapter 97) Both gifts are highly perishable. (chapter 97) Fresh roses begin to droop with time, and a cream cake topped with strawberries is meant to be enjoyed while fresh. If these objects were truly intended as the final birthday presents for the actual day, they would be oddly chosen. By the time December 26th arrived, the flowers would already be fading and the cake would have lost the freshness that gives it value.

This everyday logic matters because it shifts the interpretation at the most basic level. Even before symbolism enters the discussion, the objects do not behave like conventional birthday presents. They belong to the present moment, not to a celebration two days away. (chapter 97) That present moment is emotional rather than calendrical. Jaekyung does not bring them because the date demands it, but because the relationship does. The gifts answer urgency: recent conflict, approaching uncertainty, and the desire to restore warmth before the match intervenes and the doctor leaves him.

In that sense, their perishability becomes meaningful in itself. These are objects made to be experienced now, just as reconciliation must happen now. They are temporary gifts chosen for an immediate wound, while the more lasting question of the future is carried elsewhere.

The Couple Rings: Equality and Commitment

Once the flowers and cake are recognized as gestures for the present rather than true birthday presents, one visible possibility remains: the couple rings. (chapter 97) They seem, at last, to be the real gift. Their permanence contrasts with the fragility of roses and cream cake, and their symbolism suits an important personal occasion far more naturally.

And yet even here, the scene proves more complex than it first appears.The rings belong to another emotional layer altogether. Unlike the flowers and cake, they are already in Jaekyung’s possession. He carries them with him (chapter 97) and admits that he has gone back and forth countless times about giving them. (chapter 97) This hesitation suggests that they were acquired well before the events of the chapter and tied to a longer internal struggle. An earlier panel strengthens this interpretation. (chapter 97) While still at the gym, before any flowers or cake appear, Jaekyung tells himself that he has to give Kim Dan something. The wording is important. He does not think about buying something, searching for something, or choosing something later. He speaks as someone who already has a gift in mind and already has it with him.

That object can hardly be the flowers or the cake. Both appear freshly purchased and belong to the practical errands of the journey home. The roses are newly arranged, and the cream cake with strawberries is clearly meant for immediate consumption. They are gifts obtained on the way, not items long carried in secret.

The rings fit the evidence far more convincingly. Small enough to remain hidden in his pocket, already burdened with emotional hesitation, and linked to a decision he has postponed many times (chapter 97), they are the only visible present that explains the panel at the gym. Jaekyung leaves early because he intends to act, but before returning home he stops at the bakery and flower shop, adding new gestures of apology and warmth to the older gift he had already prepared.

This also explains the subtle irony of the sequence. Though he departs the gym early, he does not arrive home immediately. The delay itself becomes meaningful: between decision and confession (chapter 97), he gathers the courage—and the accompanying symbols—needed to finally face Kim Dan.

Yet among everything he carries or acquires that evening, one object stands apart from the rest. The flowers and cake belong to the immediate moment: they soothe tension, create warmth, and answer a present emotional need. The rings, by contrast, reach beyond the night itself. They are not meant to be enjoyed briefly or consumed in passing, but to endure. For that reason, they carry the greatest symbolic weight of all.

Flowers can wilt, cake is consumed, but a ring endures. (chapter 97) Its circular form traditionally signifies continuity, fidelity, and mutual belonging. Most importantly, a ring cannot fully function within hierarchy. It gains meaning through reciprocity. One person may offer it, but its true significance depends on acceptance. In that sense, the rings challenge the old imbalance that has defined their bond: wealth versus debt, fame versus obscurity, strength versus vulnerability. If the wolf offers couple rings, he is not simply giving an object. He is inviting Kim Dan into a shared definition of the relationship. That is a radically different gesture from transactional generosity. It says not I provide for you, but let us belong to one another.

This is also why the rings cannot be understood as an ordinary birthday present. A birthday gift is usually directed toward one person alone. Couple rings follow another logic entirely: the giver receives one as well. The gesture is not centered on an individual celebration, but on the creation of a mutual bond. They do not say this day belongs to you so much as our future belongs to us.

And yet even this is not the final step. Commitment of the heart must still be matched by conditions in which that commitment can live.

For that reason, the rings signify something deeper than celebration. They do not simply mark a date. They express commitment, vulnerability, and the fear of loss. More than any other object in the chapter, they reach toward the future. Seen in this light, none of the visible presents can be reduced to simple birthday gifts. The flowers speak of love and apology. (chapter 97) The cake proves that even obvious symbols can be redefined by intention. The rings embody permanence and the hope that what exists now might continue beyond the match. (chapter 97)

Thus I conclude that even the rings do not complete the transformation. The roses may apologize, the cake may reconcile, and the rings may promise continuity, but all three remain symbolic gestures. They express feeling without necessarily changing the conditions in which that feeling must survive. In this story, love is tested not by sentiment alone, but by circumstances and actions. What use is confession without safety? What use is commitment without freedom? What use is tenderness if the surrounding world remains invasive, unstable, or controlling?

For Kim Dan, the deepest issue has never been exhaustion alone. His life has long been structured by dependence: on institutions, on precarious work, on family obligation, and finally on Jaekyung’s benevolence and protection. Flowers, cake, and even rings may express attachment, but they do not resolve the question of autonomy. Until now, the physical therapist has rarely been treated as a fully self-determining adult. (chapter 78) More often, he has been positioned as a servant to be used or a child to be guided. (chapter 89) His choices have repeatedly been shaped, directed, or provoked by the will of others rather than emerging freely as his own.

If the story ended with the rings, Kim Dan would be a loved dependent, but still a dependent. He would remain the one waiting in the penthouse (chapter 96), the one being driven, the one whose safety exists only when Jaekyung is physically present.

To love him fully, then, requires more than symbolic devotion. It requires the creation of conditions in which he can move freely, choose freely, and exist securely without total reliance on another person. And that is precisely where the question of the true birthday gift returns.

The Architecture of the Sanctuary

And once these meanings are recognized, a final question naturally emerges: does the champion truly have a birthday gift for Kim Dan after all—and if so, where is it?

The answer may begin not among the visible presents, but in a detail far easier to overlook: the parking garage. (chapter 97) The moment the flowers, cake, and rings are understood as gestures serving other emotional purposes, the possibility of another gift comes sharply into view. If those objects are not the true birthday present, then the narrative invites us to search elsewhere. One panel quietly draws attention to exactly such a possibility: for the first time, a third car appears.

This detail gains force when placed beside earlier chapters. The garage shown in Chapter 97 does not simply contain another vehicle; it reflects an evolution already underway. In Chapter 18, the space appears more functional and exposed. (chapter 18) By Chapter 32, the parking area has changed noticeably. (chapter 32) It is larger, more exclusive, and more carefully structured, resembling a private VIP bay rather than an ordinary shared garage. The environment itself has become more protected.

That architectural change matters. A private bay separates the vehicles from the risks of crowded public parking: scratches, collisions, intrusion, unwanted proximity. (chapter 97) The cars are no longer stored merely for convenience. They are sheltered. Even before any emotional interpretation, the space communicates a desire for control, security, and preservation.

In episode 32, Kim Dan wondered about the number of Jaekyung’s cars, because he noticed the new car. (chapter 32), and many readers likely did the same. Attention naturally falls on wealth and quantity. Yet the more meaningful change may lie elsewhere: not in how many cars exist, but in the kind of space being created around them.

Personal transformation in this story is often reflected through architecture. Rooms, hallways, rooftops, doors, and thresholds do not simply contain events; they externalize inner states. Jaekyung’s world has long been luxurious, elevated, and impressive, yet also emotionally isolated. The penthouse functions as both reward and prison: a symbol of success that often feels sterile and inaccessible. It is therefore significant that one of the clearest signs of change appears below the tower rather than inside it.

The deepest change may not be that Jaekyung owns more. It may be that he has begun arranging what he owns for someone else.

The White Sedan: Why This Car Matters

Among the parked vehicles, one stands apart: the white sedan. (chapter 97) . Unlike Jaekyung’s earlier sports cars—machines associated with speed, aggression, (chapter 32) display, and public image—this vehicle speaks a different language. It is understated rather than theatrical, spacious rather than cramped, functional rather than performative.

The color matters as well. White can suggest clarity, neutrality, and renewal. Whether read symbolically or simply aesthetically, it sharply contrasts with the darker, more aggressive aura of luxury performance cars. It looks less like an extension of ego and more like the beginning of another chapter. On the other hand, white is the safest color on the road because it’s the most visible to other drivers at night. If this theory is true, then it indicates that Jaekyung is truly prioritizing Dan’s safety over his own “cool” aesthetic.

More importantly, the sedan fits Kim Dan far more naturally than it fits Jaekyung’s former image. Kim Dan has never been defined by extravagance or spectacle. He values usefulness, modesty, comfort, and quiet sincerity. A practical and comfortable vehicle suited for daily life reflects his character far more than a machine built to impress strangers.

For that reason, the sedan becomes another clue that the new car may not be intended for Jaekyung at all. It resembles Kim Dan’s needs more than Jaekyung’s branding. The car also offers something rare in the world of Jinx: invisibility. Fame has repeatedly exposed Jaekyung to surveillance, intrusion, and manipulation. Many readers will certainly recall this episode where a black car was detected following the champion’s gray SUV. (chapter 33) A discreet sedan blends into ordinary traffic in ways a recognizable celebrity vehicle cannot. If registered under Kim Dan’s name, it would create even greater privacy and unpredictability. Protection would no longer depend only on physical strength, but on foresight and anonymity. And if this car was purchased recently, no one would know about its existence. Not even Park Namwook! If Chapter 33 presented movement as secrecy, confusion, and anxious uncertainty —where the question was Where are they going, and why? (chapter 33) —then Chapter 97 becomes its positive reflection. The same motif of driving now signifies trust, mutual desire, and emotional security. What was once shadowed by suspicion is transformed into intimacy. The destination matters less than the person beside you. The journey is no longer something done to Kim Dan, but something they experience together. (chapter 97)

Yet perhaps the most important meaning is autonomy. If Dan owns or drives the car, Jaekyung is not merely giving him transportation. He is giving him the power to choose when to stay, when to leave, and where to go. He is literally placing the keys of departure in Kim Dan’s hands.

But due to his social class, it is clear that Kim Dan does not yet have a driving licence. Therefore the gift cannot be reduced to ownership alone. It would imply learning, practice, patience, and future development. In other words, the present becomes a shared project. That changes Jaekyung’s role as well. He is no longer simply the powerful man who provides solutions from above. He becomes someone who teaches, encourages, and accompanies Kim Dan as he acquires a new skill. Instead of keeping Dan dependent, he would actively help him become more independent.

This matters because it reverses earlier patterns in their relationship. (chapter 89) So often, Kim Dan has been pushed by crisis, debt, or necessity. Here, he would be pushed toward growth. The pressure would no longer come from fear, but from care. The physical therapist could drive his drunk lover back home.

The symbolism is rich: learning to drive means learning confidence, judgment, orientation, and trust in one’s own decisions. It is not only about operating a vehicle; it is about entering a wider world. Seen in that light, the gift would expand Kim Dan’s life on multiple levels. It offers mobility in the present, autonomy in the future, and a new horizon of possibility. He could suggest to his lover to go on a trip: (chapter 47) Jaekyung would not merely be giving him a car. He would be helping him become someone who can go further than before.

And that changes everything. If Kim Dan remains after receiving the freedom to leave, then his staying becomes meaningful in an entirely new way. In other words, the white car stands for blind faith.

Rings Before Keys: Commitment and Shared Future

Even so, the car cannot come first. Among all visible presents, the couple rings carry the greatest symbolic weight. Unlike flowers or cake, a ring endures. It signifies continuity, reciprocity, and chosen connection. Its circular form evokes a bond without hierarchy, beginning, or end.

That symbolism matters because Jaekyung and Kim Dan’s history has long been shaped by imbalance: wealth against debt, fame against obscurity, strength against vulnerability. In such a relationship, an expensive gift can easily reproduce the old pattern of giver and receiver, power and dependence.

A ring resists that logic. (chapter 97) Its meaning does not come from price, but from mutual consent. It only becomes meaningful when accepted. For perhaps the first time, Jaekyung would be offering something that requires equality.

This is why the order matters. If the car came first, it could still appear as another transaction. But if the rings come first, the emotional foundation changes. Commitment precedes comfort. The relationship is defined before support is expanded.

Kim Dan once gave from scarcity. (chapter 42) He worked exhausting night shifts and spent money he could barely spare in order to offer something meaningful. The value of the keychain was not only monetary; it represented sacrifice, attention, and a sincere desire to make Joo Jaekyung happy.

If Jaekyung now offered only a confession with rings (chapter 97) and nothing else, the scene could risk feeling emotionally incomplete—not because the rings are insignificant, but because the story has already established a language of giving in which effort matters. Kim Dan gave beyond his means. Readers therefore expect Jaekyung, who possesses far greater resources, to respond not merely with sentiment, but with a gesture that shows equal thoughtfulness and concrete care.

That is why the possibility of another gift carries such force. It is not about luxury for its own sake. It is about demonstrating that Jaekyung has understood who Kim Dan is and what he actually needs. The true opposite of Kim Dan’s earlier sacrifice would not be expensive jewelry alone, but something shaped around Dan’s daily life, freedom, and well-being.

In that sense, the issue is not whether Jaekyung appears stingy. It is whether his love remains symbolic only, or becomes materially attentive. The narrative stakes are higher than generosity: they concern transformation.

Under those conditions, the white sedan acquires a different meaning. (chapter 97) It is no longer a trophy or display object. It becomes shared infrastructure. If the rings secure the emotional bond (chapter 97), the car secures the practical conditions in which that bond can live. For Kim Dan, that practical dimension matters profoundly. Until now, movement has rarely belonged fully to him. He walks (chapter 21), uses public transportation (chapter 11), takes taxis (chapter 1), or is driven by others. (chapter 32) Even mobility itself has often depended on circumstance and on the decisions of other people. (chapter 95) A car therefore symbolizes more than comfort: it represents agency, adulthood, and the power to move by his own will. Yet the emotional meaning goes even further. In Chapter 97, the question is no longer only where one goes, but with whom one travels. What was once denied to Kim Dan as independence now returns to him as both freedom and companionship. He is no longer merely carried by another person’s choices; he gains the ability to choose for himself while sharing the road with someone who chooses him in return.

The gift would also transform responsibility. Until now, Jaekyung has often been driven, managed, and accompanied by others on decisive days. His manager and coach occupied the space of trust around him—at least when he remained profitable and useful. (chapter 5) Yet when he was injured and vulnerable, that support proved conditional and incomplete. (chapter 53)

If Kim Dan becomes the one who drives, steadies, and accompanies him, the structure quietly changes. The old “hyungs” are not displaced through conflict, but through irrelevance. Care succeeds where management failed. At the same time, the gesture expresses trust. To let Kim Dan drive is to entrust him with direction, safety, and shared movement. The man who has long carried the weight of control would finally allow someone else to take the wheel. That change matters deeply for Jaekyung as well. It means he no longer has to bear every burden alone. He can rest in the passenger seat, just like Kim Dan does. (chapter 95) He can be guided instead of always guiding, supported instead of always performing. The positions become reversible: each can carry the other when needed.

In that sense, the car symbolizes more than freedom. It symbolizes partnership. (chapter 97) They are no longer fixed in rigid roles of protector and protected. They gain the ability to switch places, share responsibility, and move forward together.

This completes one of the story’s deepest reversals. The man once treated as burden or servant becomes the person closest to the champion’s future.

Kim Dan once gave Jaekyung a small keychain (chapter 81): modest (not too visible), personal, and sincere. The price for his hard work. (chapter 97) If Jaekyung now gives him a car, their gestures beautifully answer one another. Kim Dan once offered the symbolic key to his world; Jaekyung responds by offering the means to navigate a shared one.

One gift says: stay with me.
The other says: let’s move forward together.

And now, you comprehend why I made the following prediction: They would stay together, but leave the place too!

Conclusion: The Dragon’s Pearl

What emerges from these details is a quiet but radical truth: home in Jinx is no longer a penthouse, a contract, or a symbol of status. It is a person. (chapter 97)

Jaekyung’s deepest transformation is not that he has become softer in some simplistic sense, but that his strength is being redirected. The force once used to dominate, intimidate, and defend his own pride is gradually turned outward in service of another’s well-being. (chapter 97) That is why the image of the dragon and the pearl feels so fitting. In many traditions, the dragon guards treasure—but the highest treasure is not gold. It is wisdom, devotion, and the recognition of what truly matters.

Kim Dan, likewise, is no longer merely the exhausted and scared man in need of rescue. He becomes the emotional center around which Jaekyung reorganizes his life. He is his moon shining in the darkness. (chapter 97) Their bond moves beyond the false alternatives of burden and savior, victim and protector, debtor and benefactor. They begin to inhabit a rarer form of intimacy: mutual sanctuary.

In a world shaped by spectators, institutions, scandals, and past wounds, safety cannot be guaranteed by wealth alone. It must be created through trust, constancy, and the willingness to change for another person. If Jaekyung’s gifts truly point in that direction, then the greatest present is neither roses, nor rings, nor a car.

It is the life he is learning to build beside him. (chapter 97)

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Drama Queen 👸 Han Dan and The Joker 🤡😈-part 2

When Protection changes Hands

In the first part, I focused on the Joker’s method: not brute force, but construction. One visible diversion captures attention (chapter 96), while another movement unfolds elsewhere. (chapter 97) The interview, the damaged poster (chapter 96), the hallway encounter, the former director’s sudden presence — none of these incidents need to be isolated events. They can be read as layers of the same design, arranged to poison the climate around Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan through mistrust, guilt, and confusion.

Yet while returning to the final scene once again, I realized that another question may now matter even more than the scheme itself: the question of protection.

Until now, protection in Jinx often appeared in the form of rescue. (chapter 79) Danger emerged first, and only then did someone intervene. Joo Jaekyung repeatedly occupied that role. (chapter 17) He was the one who could step in, overpower threats, and remove Kim Dan from immediate harm. Kim Dan, by contrast, was usually placed on the other side of that equation: the one exposed, cornered, or in need of help. But rescue and protection are not the same thing.

The Gym’s Intervention: A Case Study in Failed Protection

A precise materialization of this concept can be seen in the scene where Joo Jaekyung, blinded by rage, is physically restrained by Park Namwook and other gym fighters (chapter 96). On the surface, this action resembles a form of protection: they are stopping him from committing a violent act that would derail his career, effectively “saving” him from himself (chapter 96). Yet, this is rescue, not protection. Their intervention is purely physical, reactive, and localized. Crucially, as they physically struggle, Park Namwook and the others remain mentally and verbally passive. (chapter 96) They do not challenge the source of the rage or offer a solution. They only seek to manage the immediate visible symptom. While the fist is stopped, the underlying “toxic climate” that allows these provocations to take root is left completely intact. This scene proves that without speech, strategy, and mutual agency, physical restraint—even when well-intentioned—is just temporary damage control. This is exactly the kind of passive, limited intervention that the new paradigm must overcome.

Rescue is immediate and visible. (chapter 72) It answers a crisis once it has already begun. Protection reaches further. (chapter 72) It concerns safety before the blow lands, the ability to recognize manipulation (chapter 49), to prevent harm from taking root, and to create a space where trust can survive pressure.

That distinction becomes difficult to ignore in the current arc. The hallway scene, the compromised penthouse (chapter 97), the article on the cellphone (chapter 91), and Kim Dan’s recent actions (chapter 97) all suggest that the old division may no longer be stable. The familiar roles of protector and protected are beginning to shift.

If that is true, then the real tension of the chapter may not be limited to whether Kim Dan will stay or leave. It may concern something deeper: who can protect whom now, and what protection truly means when fists, money, and walls are no longer enough.

The First Protection: Kim Dan Must Protect Himself

There is another layer that cannot be omitted. Before Kim Dan can protect Joo Jaekyung, he may first need to protect himself. That matters because the hallway is not a neutral space for him. (chapter 97) This atmosphere of entrapment is a haunting echo of the story’s beginning. One of the most defining early images of Kim Dan shows him descending a narrow, outdoor staircase, accompanied by the thought: (chapter 1). In that moment, the world was a predatory space where every threshold was a threat.

By returning to a similar threshold now—the dark hallway—the narrative forces Kim Dan to confront that original wound. The question is no longer just ‘is he safe?’ but rather, has he found a way to carry safety within himself so that the world no longer feels like that desolate staircase? If the man waiting there is the former director, Kim Dan would not simply see an unwelcome visitor. He would see the return of an earlier danger. (chapter 90) The memory is important. The director did not lure him with kindness alone. He used his position (chapter 1), status, and Kim Dan’s financial desperation to force compliance. Kim Dan needed the job, needed the salary, needed stability. (chapter 90) The imbalance of power was already doing the violence before any physical act began. What appeared outwardly as professional authority became a means of control. The setting itself carries symbolic weight: enclosed space, unequal power, obscurity, silence. (chapter 90) A place where Kim Dan’s options were reduced and his voice cornered. The hallway now echoes that structure. It is dark. It is private. It is detached from witnesses. (chapter 97) Once again, the same man appears in a threshold space, waiting. Seen this way, Kim Dan’s shock is not weakness. It is recognition. (chapter 90) This contrasts to his reaction at the restaurant. His fear was not only about the present moment. (chapter 90) It was the body remembering before language could fully explain why. (chapter 90) Trauma often recognizes danger faster than conscious thought. If so, the first battle of the chapter is not just one of emotional endurance, but of practical application. Like mentioned above, the look on Kim Dan’s face in the hallway is not one of paralyzing fear, but of profound shock (Chapter 97). It is the shock of recognition, yes, but it is also the moment where his training meets reality.

Jinx-lovers will recall the pivotal training session in Chapter 88, where Joo Jaekyung pinned him to the mat and challenged him: (chapter 88). In that moment, the champion wasn’t just showing dominance; he was imparting a philosophy of resistance. He taught Dan that ‘technique beats size’ (chapter 88) and that even a smaller person can take down a ‘bigger guy’ (Chapter 88).

The hallway encounter with the former director is Kim Dan’s first ‘unscripted match.’ The question is no longer whether he is a ‘frightened victim,’ but whether he can now apply the champion’s lessons, when the stakes are no longer a training mat, but his own physical and emotional safety. Can he use the ‘technique’ of self-assertion and restraint he learned in the gym to dismantle the ‘size’ of the director’s predatory influence? Only by proving he can protect himself using the tools Jaekyung gave him can the stage be set for mutual protection.”

The Joker Card and the Cellphone

One image deserves to be reconsidered before anything else. Earlier in the story, Joo Jaekyung was shown holding a Joker card. (chapter 27) The object symbolized instability, provocation, loss and a game whose rules could suddenly change. It represented a force that unsettled even the champion. Now another object occupies his hand: (chapter 91) the cellphone containing the article about the disgraced former director. (chapter 91) The visual echo matters. The card belonged to a world of tricks, chance, and psychological disturbance. The cellphone belongs to a world of information, memory, and proof. If the earlier Joker card stood for loss and frustration, this new “card” may stand for its opposite: exposure and “victory”. That possibility becomes especially important in the hallway. (chapter 97) So the moment Joo Jaekyung recognizes the intruder as the former director, then Joo Jaekyung is no longer facing an unknown threat. He is confronting a man whose public downfall has already been documented. In other words, the hallway does not only contain danger. It also contains evidence. It stands for trespassing and lack of credibility. This would mark a major turning point for the champion. In the past, he often relied on force, money, private networks, or silence after the fact. Hence he never reported himself the crimes to the authorities (chapter 18) because, for Jaekyung, the ‘system’ was never a source of safety. This mistrust is rooted in a childhood where his abuse was an open secret that remained unaddressed (chapter 72). While the director of the boxing studio knew of his suffering, the police were never involved. There is a bitter irony in the fact that while his father was a violent thug (chapter 72), on paper he remained a ‘good citizen’ who never faced legal repercussions. Jaekyung learned that authorities protect the appearance of order rather than the victims of violence. This skepticism manifested again at the docks (chapter 69), where he chose to ‘save’ Kim Dan through private force rather than wait for legal intervention. Yet those methods repeatedly failed to create real safety. Problems were hidden, postponed, or redirected, or relegated (chapter 52) but not resolved. The cellphone introduces another path (chapter 91): report the crime immediately, involve the authorities, and refuse to let the event be swallowed by the same closed systems as before. If so, the real weapon in his hand is not violence, but the possibility of lawful action.

When the Queen Protects the Champion

If Joo Jaekyung’s protection may now take the form of evidence and public accountability, Kim Dan’s protection works differently. His strength lies in perception. One detail remains highly significant: according to me, Kim Dan never watched Baek Junmin’s interview in full. (chapter 96) He only read the headlines. On the surface, this might appear dismissive or indifferent. (chapter 96) Yet it can also be understood as an expression of Jeong. Kim Dan’s attention was not captured by the Joker’s performance. His concern went directly to Joo Jaekyung and how such exposure might wound him. He absorbed the central facts — poverty, orphanhood, hardship — but did not grant full authority to the humiliating spectacle built around them. (chapter 96)That distinction matters because Baek Junmin likely assumes that public narrative equals truth. If the audience hears something loudly enough, then it becomes reality. But Kim Dan now stands in a different position. He has already met Hwang Byungchul. He has already heard another version of the champion’s past, something the Joker is not expecting. He knows about the father’s abuse, the violence of the home, and the suffering hidden behind Joo Jaekyung’s coldness. (chapter 72) This means that if the hallway encounter is designed to reveal a “hidden truth” — like for example that Joo Jaekyung is only a thug, a violent man who attacks doctors (chapter 1) and patients (chapter 52) ) someone unworthy of trust— the strategy may fail at its most important point. The intended listener is no longer ignorant. Kim Dan can now protect the champion by refusing reduction. He can challenge selective storytelling. Jaekyung is frequently depicted as an avid reader (chapter 97), a sign of a deeply disciplined and self-educated mind. This intellectual depth is his most overlooked form of protection. It means he isn’t just a ‘frightened kid’ or a ‘reactive thug’; he is someone who understands the power of information.Besides, he is a huge reader. He can insist that pain has context, that trauma cannot be erased, and that one act of rage does not explain an entire person. In earlier chapters, Joo Jaekyung protected through action (buying clothes, teaching him how to swim). Here, Kim Dan may protect through interpretation and words.

And this gives the title Drama Queen Dan a deeper irony. What once sounded playful or dismissive can now be read as the name of someone who understands that drama is not merely chaos, but the struggle over meaning itself. A “queen” in this sense does not protect through brute force, but through perception, timing, and the ability to read the hidden script beneath appearances. Kim Dan’s strength lies precisely there. He can recognize when pain is being turned into narrative, when provocation is being staged as truth, and when the man beside him is being reduced to a role he does not deserve. If Joo Jaekyung guards through physical power, then Kim Dan may guard through interpretation—protecting the champion not by striking an enemy, but by refusing to let false stories rule the stage.

Speech Over Force

This possibility reveals a deeper reversal in the story. For a long time, force appeared decisive while speech remained secondary. Those with power acted. (chapter 90) Those without power endured. Silence was survival, and violence seemed to be the language that changed outcomes.

But the hallway may invert that pattern for another reason as well: both Jokers (chapter 96) behind the present tension rely on the same weapon — the past. (chapter 90)

That may be the clearest link between Baek Junmin and the former director. Neither truly confronts the present. Instead, each tries to reactivate an earlier version of the people before them. Baek Junmin depends on old wounds, old shame (chapter 96), and old reactions, as though Joo Jaekyung were still trapped inside the same vulnerabilities and Kim Dan still occupied the same desperate, submissive position. (chapter 90)The former director operates similarly, but with a more intimate cruelty. He does not speak to Kim Dan as a person in front of him. He speaks about Kim Dan to Joo Jaekyung, reducing him once again to an object of transaction, greed, and sexual humiliation.

That distinction matters. The insult is aimed at Kim Dan, yet delivered through the champion. (chapter 90) Kim Dan is called money-hungry, fake, a slut, someone whose affection can be bought. Their apparent happiness is framed as performance, their bond as a financial arrangement, intimacy as deception. In one move, the former director attempts to degrade Kim Dan and poison Joo Jaekyung’s trust at the same time.

This is why his rhetoric belongs to the logic of the past. He still imagines Kim Dan through the old hierarchy: poor, vulnerable, purchasable, voiceless. He assumes economic need must still define him. He assumes shame will still silence him. He assumes that if enough dirt is thrown, the old imbalance will return by itself.

Baek Junmin’s logic is similar. He acts as though Joo Jaekyung can still be provoked into self-destruction (chapter 96) and as though Kim Dan can still be reached through doubt, guilt, or public image. Both antagonists depend on immobility. Once weak, always weak. Once poor, always dependent. Once violent, always reducible to violence.

Yet the present is no longer identical to the past. Kim Dan is no longer the employee trapped inside institutional dependence. He is no longer alone, voiceless, or forced to endure humiliation in exchange for survival. (chapter 97) Hence he plans to cook the athlete’s favorite dishes. (chapter 97) Joo Jaekyung is no longer merely a reactive fighter ruled by rage. He is now capable to reflect on his own behavior. (chapter 97) Their relationship itself has altered the conditions on which those older scripts depended.

That is why force becomes less reliable here. In darkness, appearances are unstable. Shadows distort faces, gestures, and intention. A punch may become proof. A reaction may complete someone else’s script. If Joo Jaekyung strikes first, the aggressor can pose as victim. If Kim Dan retreats in silence, the old narrative appears confirmed.

Words, however, can interrupt that mechanism. A refusal can expose coercion. A clear statement can stop confusion. Naming a lie can weaken it. Calling the police can shift the frame from private manipulation to public accountability. Speech does not erase the past, but it prevents the past from dictating the meaning of the present.

The staircase deepens this reading. Earlier, I described the hallway as a stage, and a stage always implies an audience. If so, who is meant to witness the scene? Perhaps Joo Jaekyung (chapter 97), expected to arrive at the right moment and see only the surface of what is happening. Perhaps hidden accomplices waiting nearby. Perhaps no single person, but the imagined spectator inside each victim — the internalized fear that says humiliation is inevitable and resistance useless.

The architecture matters. The elevator is the visible and ordinary route, (chapter 97) the official path of movement. But once it closes, that route disappears. What remains is the staircase: the emergency passage, yet also the more secret and ambiguous one. In Jinx, stairways (chapter 50) seem to be linked to conspiracy, crime (chapter 50), or offstage maneuvering (chapter 96). The hallway therefore feels less like a neutral corridor than a set arranged for entrapment, where ordinary exits vanish and only compromised paths remain.

That is why the real struggle of the scene may not be between strength and weakness, but between two temporal logics. (chapter 97) One insists that people never change and can always be returned to their former place. The other proves that they have changed already.

Joo Jaekyung may need to discover that strength includes relying on the police. Kim Dan may need to discover that care includes speaking aloud. And both may need to recognize that protection no longer lies in repeating old reactions, but in refusing the script entirely.

The real victory of the hallway may therefore not belong to the stronger fist, but to the clearer voice.

The Book and the Question of Time

The Gift as Emotional Infrastructure

At first glance, the book may look like a simple gift. (chapter 97) But it carries a far deeper meaning. It is not merely a birthday present. It is an expression of love, gratitude, and attentive recognition. That distinction matters because the story has already shown another gift: the keychain. (chapter 97) The keychain came together with a birthday card, yet the champion only truly saw the object. He never had the chance to read the written message attached to it. He only discovered its existence much later. (chapter 81) As a result, the gesture remained incomplete and vulnerable to misunderstanding. (chapter 45) The material gift was visible, but the feeling behind it stayed hidden. The book changes that structure. (chapter 97) Unlike the earlier present, it unites both functions at once. It is a physical object, but it also communicates what words alone might struggle to express. Even before it is opened, its cover already speaks.

Linguistic Shadows: Love, Stay, and Rest

Its title can be read in several layers. (chapter 87) Oui, c’est l’amour means in French Yes, this is love. The phrase functions almost like an answer to all the confusion that came before: the uncertainty in the dining room (chapter 93), the champion asking what he was feeling, the hesitation around whether kindness was guilt (chapter 93), pity, or something else. (chapter 93) The title responds clearly where the characters still struggle to do so themselves. Yes—what exists here is love. Another visible word, reste, signifies stay or remain in French. Yet because the final letter appears hidden or incomplete, the word can also be seen through English eyes as rest. (chapter 97) That double reading is powerful. It joins emotional fidelity with emotional relief. Stay with me. Remain beside me. Rest now. Sleep in peace. All of these meanings answer Joo Jaekyung’s deepest needs more precisely than an expensive object ever could.

The Portable Home: Love as a Protective Sanctuary

All of these meanings answer Joo Jaekyung’s deepest needs more precisely than an expensive object ever could. He needs someone who remains. (chapter 97) This linguistic double-meaning transforms the book from a mere object into the blueprint for a Home. For Joo Jaekyung, home has historically been a site of trauma and violence—a place where he was exposed rather than shielded. This longing for a safe domestic space is rooted in a childhood vow. In a poignant flashback (chapter 72), a young Jaekyung stands in a snow-covered phone booth, promising: ‘One day I’ll make a lot of money… and stop him. So can you come back home?’ For the young champion, ‘Home’ was a conditional destination—a reward that could only be reclaimed once he had enough wealth to physically ‘stop’ the source of violence. He equated protection with financial power and the physical ability to gatekeep. Yet, as an adult, even with the wealth and the power to stop anyone, he remained ‘homeless’ in spirit. By offering him the book and a space to ‘stay,’ Kim Dan is updating this childhood vow. He is proving that a ‘Home’ is not something Jaekyung has to buy or defend alone through force; it is a sanctuary that is built through mutual presence and emotional safety. Kim Dan is offering a new kind of protection: the creation of a domestic sanctuary. If the ring is a place of performance and the hallway a place of entrapment, the book represents a ‘portable home.’ (chapter 97) It signals that protection is no longer about walls or wealth, but about being truly ‘seen’ and ‘housed’ in another person’s care. In this sense, love becomes the ultimate protective layer, providing the internal peace necessary for the champion to face the external storm. He needs rest from insomnia and endless pressure. He needs affection detached from performance. He needs permission to exist outside the ring.

What does he need most on the eve of a fight? Not more hype, not more strategy, not more pressure—but a peaceful night and the possibility of sleep.

This is why the hidden or incomplete letter matters as much as the printed word. Something unfinished becomes full only through interpretation, just as the relationship itself has been moving from partial gestures toward clearer recognition. The cover says more than it first appears to say, just as Kim Dan’s care has always meant more than it openly declared. In other words, by receiving such a book, Joo Jaekyung’s insomnia can finally vanish.

Temporal Sabotage: Choosing Care Over Spectacle

Timing therefore becomes decisive. The Joker’s method depends on buying time (chapter 93), delaying genuine encounters, and keeping everything trapped inside the schedule of the match. Everything must wait until after the fight: truth, tenderness, resolution, emotional clarity. Human feeling is subordinated to spectacle.

The book does the opposite. It accelerates emotional truth. If given before the match (chapter 97), it says now what the system insists should only come later. It offers comfort before performance, care before victory, and peace before violence.

In that sense, the gift is not a distraction from the fight. It may be the very thing the champion needs most in order to face it.

The title therefore transforms the book into more than a purchase. It becomes a message Kim Dan may not yet be ready to say aloud. Through this single object, he expresses affection, constancy, and concern for the champion’s suffering. (chapter 97) In that sense, the gift also embodies Jeong: a form of attachment built not through grand declarations, but through accumulated care, remembered details, silent loyalty, and the desire to ease another person’s burdens. Kim Dan does not simply give an object. He gives the emotional attention he has been carrying for Joo Jaekyung all along.

Kim Dan did not buy the book out of obligation or because a date on the calendar demanded it. He bought it because, while moving through his own day, his attention still turned toward Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 97) Care continued in absence. The relationship was active even when they were apart. This places the gift in sharp contrast with the keychain episode. Back then, Kim Dan selected something through external logic. He entered the dressing room (chapter 42), crossing into the champion’s private space (chapter 42), and chose according to appearance and assumed usefulness. The gesture was sincere, but still uncertain. It responded to what Joo Jaekyung seemed to need. (chapter 42) The book is different because it responds to who he is. (chapter 97) Kim Dan remembers that the champion had been reading this author before. He notices the new release. He immediately connects it to Joo Jaekyung’s insomnia and inner unrest. The choice therefore emerges from observation, memory, and understanding rather than surface impression. This means the gift is modest in price but immense in emotional value. It is inexpensive materially, yet rich in evidence. Evidence that Kim Dan listens. Evidence that he watches carefully. Evidence that the champion exists in his mind beyond moments of direct contact. And that is precisely why it may become the best gift Joo Jaekyung has ever received. And he could even cry out of “happiness”. Not because of luxury. Not because of status. Not because it flatters his public identity. But because it answers a wound deeper than material lack: the fear of being unseen except for utility, strength, or performance. The fear of never being loved. Furthermore, the champion’s interest in this author also indicates his transformation (chapter 97), as the book seems to focus on emotions and relationships. It shows that despite the appearances, the athlete’s also learning and expanding his horizon.

So if crisis changes the order (the encounter with the director in the hallways), then the champion could discover or receive the gift beforehand, then the logic transforms entirely. The book would no longer reward success. It would precede it. Joo Jaekyung would receive something valuable not because he won, but because he already matters before the outcome is decided. That reversal is crucial. The wider system values him through belts, money, spectacle, and usefulness. The book values him as a person in advance of all results. This is why the gift stands against the Joker’s method. Manipulation delays truth, creates misunderstanding, and keeps feeling trapped behind timing, fear, and competition. The book does the opposite. It brings hidden care into the open. It accelerates emotional truth. It interrupts the schedule imposed by the match. And perhaps most beautifully, it gives Joo Jaekyung something rarest of all: not admiration, not demand, not pressure—but a sign that someone has truly learned how to love him.

The Damaged Poster, the Interview and the Wrong Audience

The ruined poster outside the gym should not be read in isolation. (chapter 96) It gains fuller meaning when placed beside the interview that preceded it. Together, they resemble two versions of the same attack: one verbal (chapter 96), one visual. One addressed through media spectacle, the other through physical vandalism. Both attempt to shape how Joo Jaekyung is seen.

At first glance, the interview appears directed toward the obvious audiences: the public, fans, gym members (chapter 96), sponsors, and the broader world watching the scandal unfold. The damaged poster seems to continue that same logic by materializing contempt in public space. The champion’s image is defaced where others can see it. Reputation is targeted through humiliation.

But there may be a more intimate audience hidden inside both gestures. One might think, it is to provoke the champion in order to have him disqualified. (chapter 96) However, there exists another possible interpretation. Readers may remember the earlier café scene, where Kim Dan met Choi Gilseok and photographs of that encounter were later sent to Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 48) That episode already suggested the presence of an unseen observer—someone in the shadows who understood that images can wound relationships more efficiently than fists can. If those photographs were indeed part of Baek Junmin’s broader method, then the interview and the poster follow the same principle: public content designed for private damage.

Seen this way, the real target is not only mass opinion. It is the person whose opinion matters most. Kim Dan. Don’t forget that back then, the physical therapist refused to accept the offer from the director of the rival gym: money, a place to stay, a treatment for his grandmother. But such a decision meant that the main lead was rejecting to work for Baek Junmin.

By this point, The Shotgun likely knows that Kim Dan has returned to Joo Jaekyung’s side. (chapter 93) He knows the physical therapist is no passing employee, but someone emotionally significant. That changes everything. If Kim Dan cannot be removed physically, he may be pressured psychologically.

The message then becomes sharper.

You chose a loser. (chapter 96)
You chose a weak man.
You chose a lost puppy (chapter 96), someone shameful, poor, abandoned, ridiculous.
You attached yourself to the wrong person.

The cruelty of the interview lies precisely here. It does not merely insult the champion’s past. It tries to make attachment to him feel embarrassing. (chapter 96) It reframes loyalty as foolishness. It attempts to poison admiration itself.

And this is where an important reversal emerges.

What is Kim Dan to Joo Jaekyung in reality? Not simply an employee, debtor, or dependent figure. He has become something closer to a true fan in the deepest sense of the word: someone who sees beyond branding, beyond headlines, beyond victories and losses. He is a true champion. (chapter 97) Someone who remains emotionally invested in the person rather than the image.

That kind of recognition is dangerous to Baek Junmin’s strategy because it cannot be controlled through spectacle alone. A casual fan (chapter 52) may turn away when public opinion shifts. A sponsor may withdraw when scandal appears. A crowd may cheer one day and mock the next. (chapter 36) But Kim Dan’s bond is no longer built on those unstable foundations. He believes in him.

He knows the child behind the champion. (chapter 94) For Baek Junmin, lost puppy oozes resent and mockery, but for the physical therapist, the same expression evokes care and protective instincts. (Chapter 29) He knows the wounds behind the arrogance. He knows the habits, the loneliness (chapter 97), the insomnia, the roughness that conceals care. He has seen the human being hidden beneath the public mask.

Once that level of knowledge exists, posters lose some of their power. (chapter 96) Headlines lose authority. Insults become transparent in their intention. This does not mean the attacks are harmless. Public humiliation can still wound, and symbolic destruction still creates pressure. But the scheme may fail where it matters most: in the private bond it seeks to fracture.

The wrong audience may have been chosen—or rather, the chosen audience may no longer respond in the old way.

There is another irony worth noting. Kim Dan never directly witnessed either of the two symbolic attacks. He did not see the damaged poster, and he did not fully watch the interview. The messages designed to shape his perception never reached him in the intended form.

This raises an important question about Baek Junmin’s own perspective. What exactly was he reacting to when he decided to escalate? (chapter 93) He may have seen the champion’s emotional reaction after the victory in Paris (chapter 87), where Joo Jaekyung visibly searched for Kim Dan in the crowd. Or he may have encountered videos (chapter 90) circulating online of the disturbance at the restaurant. (chapter 90) In either case, the external image would have looked simple: Joo Jaekyung had been provoked once again. The champion still appeared volatile, reactive, and unchanged.

And that perception matters because it fits the larger objective already discussed: to make Kim Dan leave the champion’s side and to have finally Joo Jaekyung disqualified for good. If Joo Jaekyung can be framed as unstable, violent, humiliating, or impossible to trust, then separation may occur without force. Kim Dan would withdraw on his own. The bond would break itself under pressure.

The restaurant scene especially could be misread in exactly that way. From an outsider’s perspective, Joo Jaekyung moved toward violence, while Kim Dan arrived only afterward to stop him. (chapter 90) It could seem as though the physical therapist was merely restraining, interrupting, or obstructing the champion. A hindrance rather than an ally. (chapter 90)

But that reading misses the hidden truth of the scene. (chapter 90) No outsider could know that the tension began because Kim Dan had left the room in emotional distress. No camera would capture the private wound beneath the public reaction. What looked like friction between the former director and the celebrity was in reality the consequence of care, misunderstanding, and emotional stakes invisible to spectators.

This highlights the fundamental flaw in Baek Junmin’s strategy. Junmin operates entirely within the realm of the Spectacle. Hence he is in reality the Drama Queen Han. His weapons are visual and immediate: TV interviews (Chapter 96), headlines (chapter 95), and shows designed for public consumption. To Junmin, truth is something manufactured for the camera; it is a ‘show’ of superiority and victimhood. This is why his method relies on surfaces—he assumes that if he can change the ‘image’ of Joo Jaekyung in Kim Dan’s eyes, the bond will break. (chapter 96)

However, Joo Jaekyung has quietly transitioned from being a ‘subject of the spectacle’ to a ‘man of the word.’ While Junmin is busy giving interviews, Jaekyung is increasingly depicted in private, intellectual moments. (chapter 97) We learn through Kim Dan’s observations that Jaekyung’s room is full of books and that he relies on reading to quiet his mind (chapter 97).

This shift is symbolic: Images are imposed, but words are interpreted. By becoming a reader, Jaekyung is no longer just a body to be filmed or a monster to be headlined; he is a person seeking depth. (chapter 97) When he reads the article about the Director’s sexual harassment (chapter 91), he is using the ‘word’ as a tool for justice, contrasting Junmin’s use of the ‘word’ for slander. Kim Dan, as a reader himself, recognizes this. He chooses the depth of the ‘book’—and the man who reads it—over the superficiality of the ‘video’ Junmin tries to sell him. In this arc, the bond remains unbroken because it is written in a language of depth that Baek Junmin’s cameras simply cannot capture.

Exit Scene: Stay and Leave

This returns us to the chapter’s apparent dilemma: stay or leave. (chapter 97) On the surface, the choice seems simple. Stay and remain inside danger. Leave and survive. But such a choice belongs to the Joker’s logic because it assumes safety is still tied to place: the penthouse, the gym, the old structures around them.

What if that assumption is already false? The penthouse has been compromised. Wealth did not secure it. The gym no longer guarantees protection or care. (chapter 96) Titles cannot create peace. (chapter 95) Walls cannot protect trust.

If so, then leaving a place may no longer mean losing safety. And staying may no longer mean remaining physically where one stands.

There is another detail that deepens this possibility. In an earlier reading of chapter 96, I described the relationship between the two protagonists through the idea of tactile dissonance. Their bodies no longer moved in harmony. (chapter 96) Distance, interruption, and broken rhythm shaped their contact. On the physical level, they seemed out of sync.

Yet chapter 97 reveals another reality beneath that surface: they are now mentally and emotionally aligned. (chapter 97) This alignment appears through a series of quiet but striking parallels. (chapter 97) Both independently buy the same cake. (chapter 97) Both choose gifts centered not on themselves, but on what the other would enjoy. (chapter 97) Each thinks in terms of the other’s happiness before speaking to the other directly. Care has become mutual instinct rather than negotiated obligation.

Even the visual composition reinforces this movement. (chapter 97) The author places them in mirrored and balanced panels, separated in space yet linked in intention. They stand apart physically, but the framing suggests an inner synchrony stronger than distance. What chapter 96 presented as bodily discord, chapter 97 answers with emotional consonance.

That contrast matters. Physical harmony can be disrupted by circumstance, misunderstanding, or outside interference. Mental and emotional harmony is harder to break, once it has truly formed. It means that even while separated by walls, schedules, or danger, they are already moving toward the same conclusion. (chapter 97) Stay together. And that conclusion may not be reached individually. They are no longer two isolated people reacting alone. They are becoming two people capable of choosing together. That’s what the couple rings symbolize here. (chapter 97) This is why the final question of the chapter may be less “Will Kim Dan stay?” or “Will he leave?” than whether they will make a shared decision at last. The mirrored gifts, the synchronized thoughts, the parallel panels — all suggest they are approaching a moment of joint agency. They are moving toward a ‘third path’ where they stay together by leaving the trap.

This transition is foreshadowed by the symbolic cards in their early history. If the former director represents the Joker card—the unpredictable threat to their peace (Chapter 27)—then the two ‘3’ cards Kim Dan held symbolize a deeper, private destination.

In Chapter 33, Jaekyung takes Dan to a secluded, ‘unknown’ location (chapter 33) where ‘no one would come’ (Chapter 33). The presence of the actor entering the club in slippers and no jacket despite the winter cold suggests a desperate, hurried escape from a world that had become a ‘trap.’ (chapter 33) Even then, Jaekyung’s motivation was clear: he followed Kim Dan because he could not bear for him to leave. That secluded house could be the physical ‘home’ Jaekyung had built while waiting for a partner worthy of sharing it.

Therefore, ‘leaving’ the current hallway or the compromised penthouse does not mean losing safety (chapter 97); it means relocating their sanctuary to a place where they are finally ‘alone’ in the way they both desired. They aren’t just fleeing a villain; they are choosing to occupy the ‘3’ cards—the private space they first glimpsed in Chapter 33. The mirrored gifts and synchronized thoughts suggest that for the first time, they aren’t being forced into a location; they are making a shared decision to ‘stay’ in each other’s presence while ‘leaving’ the narratives imposed upon them by others.”

If that happens, then the true harmony of the chapter will not be tactile at all. It will be volitional: two people finally choosing the same path at the same time.

Conclusion: Mutual Protection

The deeper movement of the story may therefore be this: rescue is no longer enough. Rescue removes someone from danger after the damage has begun. Protection asks how danger is recognized earlier (chapter 88), resisted differently, and prevented from defining the future. Joo Jaekyung may protect Kim Dan not through another violent intervention, but through truth made public, lawful action, and the refusal to let harm disappear in silence contrary to the past. Kim Dan may protect Joo Jaekyung not through physical force, but through knowledge (chapter 47), revelation (chapter 48), and the rejection of false narratives designed to reduce him (chapter 96). Each now carries what the other lacks. That is why the hallway matters. (chapter 97) It was staged as a place of fear, separation, and confusion. Yet it may become the very place where the old hierarchy collapses. Protector and protected are no longer fixed identities. If they overcome what is coming, it may be because they finally learn to protect each other. Ultimately, this shift reveals the story’s most vital truth: that safety is not a geographic location, and ‘home’ is not a piece of real estate. At the beginning of his journey, Kim Dan wandered through the city convinced there was ‘nowhere left in this world where I can feel safe’ (chapter 1). He looked for safety in walls, in locked doors, and in financial stability, only to find them all fragile. But as the protection changes hands in the hallway, we see the emergence of a different kind of fortress. If they can withstand the Joker’s design, it will be because they have realized that they are no longer each other’s burden or rescue project (chapter 97) — they are each other’s sanctuary. In a world of damaged posters and compromised penthouses, the only place left to feel safe is not a place at all, but a person.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Drama Queen 👸 Han Dan and The Joker 🤡😈-part 1

The latest chapter ends with an image that feels too deliberate to dismiss. A dark hallway. (chapter 97) An unexpected visitor. For readers, this is no coincidence. We already know enough to recognize a move set in motion from elsewhere. (chapter 93) The former director did not appear there by chance. What remains uncertain is not whether this is a scheme, but how the latter was arranged and what it is meant to achieve.

The real uncertainty belongs to Kim Dan. He steps into the corridor visibly shocked (chapter 97), confronted by a man who should not be there. His first thought is easy to imagine: Why is he here? Yet from that single question many others unfold. Who gave him the address? (chapter 97) How did he get inside? Why tonight? What role is he meant to play? And who is this encounter truly meant for? Since then, speculation has been running wild. Some predict a kidnapping. Others expect assault, self-defense, blackmail, public scandal, or another painful but brief departure. Every reader seems to be writing a different next episode and everything seems possible.

And yet the most interesting question may not be which shock event comes next, but what this final scene is already telling us about the direction of the story. In Jinx, closing moments rarely function as decoration. (chapter 97) They often contain clues — small visual decisions, strange timing, unusual framing, details that seem minor until later chapters reveal their weight. A final panel does not always announce the future directly, but it can offer glimpses of the forces already in motion.

That is why this essay is less about prediction than interpretation. The final beat of chapter 97 functions less as a simple cliffhanger than as a map of the unrest to come. (chapter 97) When this dark hallway encounter is set beside earlier thresholds, repeated patterns, and the chapter’s charged atmosphere, the outline of the coming conflict begins to emerge. The question is not only what may happen next, but why it happens now. This meeting takes place at the precise moment, when emotional pressure and narrative conditions have finally converged, making an earlier reckoning impossible.

One lesson from previous schemes in the story should also be remembered. Manipulation rarely arrives through a single act. When something suspicious occurred before (chapter 35), it was not one wrongdoing but two (chapter 36) or three (chapter 36) layered together: one visible distraction, another hidden move (chapter 37), and often a consequence (chapter 40) that only became clear afterward. In other words, the first event is rarely the whole trick. It is only the surface. If that pattern still applies now, then the interview may be only the loudest surface event, (chapter 96) while the real movement of the scheme occurs elsewhere — perhaps in the damage already done, or in the encounter still waiting in the dark.

This is where the title Queen Han Dan and the Joker enters the stage. It may sound playful at first, yet it points toward two very different forms of power now colliding. The Joker from Badman evokes chaos, disruption, and the pleasure of tearing order apart — qualities that fit Baek Junmin’s methods throughout the story (chapter 96). He does not merely attack people; he unsettles structures, humiliates rivals, and turns instability into advantage.

Yet the word joker carries another meaning as well: the unexpected card (chapter 27) that can suddenly change the game. By sending the former director into the hallway (chapter 97), Baek Junmin may believe he is playing such a card — one final move capable of breaking the fragile balance between the protagonists. But cards are dangerous things. Once played, they no longer belong to the hand that used them. They enter the table, where anyone can read them differently.

What is meant as a weapon may become a clue. What is sent to divide may instead reveal how much was hidden beneath the surface all along. And that is where the second half of the title quietly waits. If the Joker represents the move, Kim Dan becomes the board itself—the space where hidden strategies collide, and where even the most vulnerable piece can become a Queen when the game reaches its endgame.

The Joker’s Stage

Let us begin with the hallway itself. Many readers focus on what the former director might say or do, but before any words are spoken, the environment is already telling a story. The scene does not unfold like an accidental encounter. It unfolds like an arranged entrance.

The man is not standing directly in front of the elevator doors (chapter 97), where one would naturally wait if the goal were immediate contact. Instead, he has placed himself farther down the corridor. This matters because distance creates delay. Kim Dan must first step out, walk forward, and commit himself to the space before fully realizing that someone is there. By the time recognition becomes possible, the elevator doors have already closed behind him. (chapter 97) The easiest path backward has vanished. The resident is inside his own home, yet the geometry of the scene briefly turns him into the trapped figure.

Even more striking is the man’s posture. He is turned away from the elevator. (chapter 97) One might argue that he simply heard the lift arrive and then turned around — yet that is precisely what does not happen. He does not react immediately to the sound of the doors opening and the light. (chapter 97) He does not turn at once when footsteps begin. (chapter 97) The movement comes later (chapter 97), only after Kim Dan has already advanced and the elevator has closed. This delayed turn transforms a normal greeting into something theatrical. It resembles the timed reveal of an actor who waits for the right cue before facing the audience. Recognition itself is staged.

Darkness intensifies that impression. (chapter 97) There is no sign of a building-wide blackout. (chapter 97) The elevator functions normally. Yet the hallway itself remains unusually dim. This suggests not an ordinary malfunction, but lighting that has been selectively tampered with (chapter 97): the machinery still works, while the very space of encounter has been left in shadow. The contrast becomes sharper when we recall the earlier elevator and hallway scene from chapter 31 (chapter 31), which many readers have already associated because of the roses. Jinx-Lovers were moved that Joo Jaekyung had not forgotten that Kim Dan was fond of flowers. (chapter 97) Yet they overlooked another detail: that same threshold was fully lit, (chapter 31) and a lamp stood on the right side of the frame. In the present scene, that source of light has vanished. (chapter 97) Warmth and visibility once accompanied that passage. Now they have been replaced by coldness and obscurity. The shadows conceal identity, soften the traces of old bruises, and make the figure harder to recognize at first glance. (chapter 97) But they also perform symbolic work. Darkness signals secrecy, hidden intention, and the possibility that something is being arranged outside the viewer’s full awareness.

That does not necessarily mean everyone in the building is maliciously betraying Joo Jaekyung. The point is subtler than conspiracy. A guard may have let someone in as a favor. Staff may have assumed the visitor belonged there. Someone may simply have failed to verify who entered. In many systems, damage does not begin with grand treason. It begins with carelessness, routine shortcuts, or the small convenience of not checking facts. The same logic may be at work here. Once people stop checking what is true, appearances begin to govern reality. Kim Dan no longer appears at the gym (chapter 96), meals are handled by someone else (chapter 96), old routines seem restored (chapter 97) From the outside, the easiest conclusion is that the “hamster” has left. Yet that conclusion may be entirely false. He did not disappear. He only disappeared from view. And this observation leads to a deeper question. Who was the former director truly there to meet? Formally speaking, he has come to the penthouse of Joo Jaekyung, its official resident and owner. On paper, the visit concerns the champion. Yet formal appearances can be as misleading as visual ones. A registered address does not necessarily reveal the real destination of a scheme. Just as people may mistake absence for departure, they may also mistake the legal resident for the intended target. What appears to be a visit to one man may, in reality, have been arranged for another.

Yet the strongest clue may arrive after the reveal. (chapter 97) The former director is not startled, nor does he show visible signs of panic. He does not step back, apologize, retreat, or behave like a man caught trespassing. He remains composed. That calmness matters. If Joo Jaekyung were the true target, Kim Dan’s arrival should complicate the plan. Instead, the intruder stays exactly where he is, as though the person now standing before him is the one he came to meet.

(chapter 97) Kim Dan’s reaction is equally revealing. He freezes, but he does not panic, which becomes perceptible, once you compare his reaction at the restaurant. (chapter 90) The expression in the hallway is shock rather than terror. (chapter 97) This is not yet the fear of immediate violence. It is the cognitive shock of seeing someone impossible in a place where he should not exist. The emotional blow comes from meaning, not force. In that sense, the first weapon of the scene is psychological.

This changes how we read the likely target. The encounter may ultimately affect Joo Jaekyung, but its first aim appears to be Kim Dan. He is the one isolated, confronted, and forced into a moment of uncertainty. That matters because chapter 97 repeatedly frames his position through the question of movement: (chapter 97) whether he will go or remain. While Kim Dan crosses the street lost in thought, the pedestrian signal turns red (chapter 97), visually interrupting departure itself. By contrast, Joo Jaekyung’s desire to ask him not to leave (chapter 97) is paired with forward motion and a green light. (chapter 97) The chapter therefore stages two opposite directions at once: one character preparing to walk away, the other trying to keep him near. In that sense, the hallway confrontation strikes at the story’s central tension: stay or leave. (chapter 97) It appears designed to turn Kim Dan away at the very threshold where his deeper desire is already moving in the opposite direction (chapter 97) — not toward departure, but toward remaining at Joo Jaekyung’s side.

There is another reason this matters. To grasp the full significance of the scene, we must remember the beginning of the story. In episode 1, Joo Jaekyung summoned Kim Dan (chapter 1) to the penthouse and sent him the address while having sex with someone else. Kim Dan arrived under false assumptions, believing he had been called for treatment. In episode 2, not only the hallway was lit (chapter 02), but also the door stood open, and deception functioned through entry: he was drawn into a private space without understanding what awaited him inside. (chapter 2) The present encounter reverses that structure almost exactly. Now the door remains closed and the director is also standing at a certain distance from it. (chapter 97) The intruder does not seek to enter the penthouse, but to stop Kim Dan outside it. Additionally, this contrast strongly suggests that the former director is trespassing rather than arriving by invitation. Deception no longer serves to bring him inward, but to keep him from returning. (chapter 97) What once began with forced access may now continue through engineered exclusion.

The hallway carries another layer as well. (chapter 40) Earlier in the story, a different corridor became the place where Kim Dan’s heart first moved toward Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 40) There, the champion stood in light, framed by cameras and public attention, dazzling through image and presence. (chapter 40) That threshold marked attraction, recognition, and emotional movement toward him. The present hallway appears as its inversion. Darkness replaces light. (chapter 97) Intrusion replaces admiration. Instead of drawing Kim Dan closer, the scene may be designed to turn him away.

The corridor may carry yet another memory in the champion’s story. On the day before the match (chapter 49), Joo Jaekyung also encountered Baek Junmin in a hallway while Kim Dan watched from behind. To everyone else, the scene appeared harmless, even cordial: two fighters exchanging a handshake in public view. (chapter 49) Yet beneath that surface, something very different was taking place. The Joker used proximity and secrecy to whisper words that dragged the champion back toward a buried past (chapter 49) — weakness, humiliation, the memory of being a vulnerable child. The visible gesture was friendly; the hidden action was psychological assault. (chapter 49) That earlier corridor teaches us how these spaces function in Jinx: not merely as passages, but as places where unseen truths move beneath staged appearances. If so, the present hallway may repeat the structure in altered form. Joo Jaekyung now stands nearby but outside the frame, while Kim Dan occupies the position once held by the champion. What was previously aimed at one man’s repressed wounds may now be redirected toward another’s.

And yet darkness does not eliminate the possibility of light. It merely changes its source. In the earlier corridor, radiance came through spectacle. Here, if anything is to shine, it may have to shine through words: truth spoken aloud, motives exposed, guilt refused, emotional clarity finally named. That possibility matters because it points beyond Joo Jaekyung’s earlier response at the restaurant, where force answered insult. (chapter 90) This new threshold may demand another kind of strength altogether.

For that reason, the hallway should be understood as more than a corridor. It becomes a stage, a threshold, a place of transition, and certainly a test. The lighting, the distance, the delayed reveal, the closed elevator, the calm intruder, and the frozen witness all make the encounter feel less like reality unfolding naturally and more like a scene being performed. Before anyone speaks, the setting itself tells us that this night has been scripted to look like chance. Beneath the silence, another question is already waiting: stay, or leave?

The Joker’s Mask

The former director’s face matters as much as his position. (chapter 97) Mingwa draws him in a strangely diminished way. His bruises have almost vanished, yet not entirely. His glasses are opaque, hiding the eyes. Most striking of all, his mouth seems absent.

This is not how a fully present person is framed. It is how a function is framed. Without visible eyes, we cannot read sincerity, shame, fear, remorse, or hesitation. Without a readable mouth, speech itself becomes suspect. He does not appear as a man arriving to express something authentic. He appears as a messenger carrying lines that may not truly belong to him. Someone else may be speaking through him before he even opens his mouth.

The fading bruises deepen this effect. The traces of earlier violence remain, but only faintly. Darkness covers what is left of them. Old damage is neither fully shown nor fully erased. It is managed. The image suggests someone who carries the past into the present, yet only in the form most useful for the current performance.

The shadows may conceal even more than injury. (chapter 97) The man appears to be wearing the same clothes as before, linking this encounter to his earlier humiliation and social decline. (chapter 90) If so, the lack of light performs another function: it softens the visible signs of downfall. (chapter 97) The corridor does not simply hide wounds. It hides status. Poverty, disgrace, and failure are pushed into the background so that another narrative can stand in the foreground. By concealing how diminished he truly is, the scene allows Kim Dan to momentarily forget that this is a defeated enemy. In shadow, he can return as something more imposing: not a fallen man, but a ghost from the past. (chapter 90)

That contrast becomes sharper when we remember how he was drawn earlier in the story. Then, the director was all excess: licking lips (chapter 90), sweating greed, vulgar speech (chapter 90), predatory fantasy, shameless mockery (chapter 90), and a grin (chapter 90) that exposed appetite without restraint. He was visually loud, almost grotesquely transparent. Readers did not need to guess what kind of man stood before them. His face announced it.

Now the opposite occurs. (chapter 90) The eyes are hidden. The mouth recedes. The body grows still. The vulgar man seems to vanish into silence. But this should not be mistaken for redemption. Nothing in the visual language suggests genuine growth or moral awakening. What we are shown is not transformation, but suppression. He is not rewritten; he is dimmed.

And because he is low-key, language moves to the center. If the face cannot be trusted, if motives cannot be read, if the body itself has been visually reduced, then words can only become the true instrument of the next encounter. The danger is no longer what he can do, but what he has come to say. That is why he feels less like a person arriving with his own truth than a carrier of prepared lines — accusations, selective facts, emotional triggers, or a version of the past designed to wound on command. The real blow may not be physical at all. It may arrive through sentences.

The image also evokes an unexpected cultural echo. The facelessness recalls the famous scene in The Matrix where Neo suddenly discovers he has no mouth.

There too, the horror lies not in physical violence alone, but in the revelation that reality itself has been controlled by a larger system. Speech is removed because truth has been confiscated. The association is striking here. The former director appears less like a free subject than a man absorbed into someone else’s script. Yet the parallel may go further. In The Matrix, Neo eventually becomes the one who breaks the illusion. If this hallway is built on false appearances, then the real question is not whether a mask has arrived, but who will refuse the reality it tries to impose.

If the director is a mask — no eyes, no mouth, no visible agency — Kim Dan is becoming the opposite. (chapter 97) Even in shock, his expressions remain vivid and legible. His silence is full of inner questions. He thinks, reacts, judges, and feels in ways the other figure no longer seems able to display. The scene therefore stages more than an encounter between two characters. It stages a collision between a hollow vessel and a developing soul.

This is why a sincere apology feels unlikely as the true purpose of the scene. (chapter 97) If repentance were central, the image would need visibility: a readable face, clear bruises, accessible emotion, remorse we could recognize. As you can see, the scene in the hallway contrasts so much with the one in the Fairy wheel with the firework (chapter 84), where both main leads were trapped “together” and sound played a huge importance. Instead, the final scene in episode 97 withholds precisely those things. The darkness does not stage confession. It stages concealment. (chapter 97) The man himself becomes harder to read so that attention shifts toward whatever story he has been sent to deliver.

That is why the director feels less like the author of the scene than one of its props. He may move and speak, yet the visual language reduces him to an instrument: a body placed in the hallway so that someone else’s strategy can speak through him. He is not the Joker. He is the mask the Joker chooses to wear. If the Director is a prop (the Mask) and the hallway is a stage, then the only way for Kim Dan to “win” is to refuse the script.

The Conditions of Entry

We have already established the most important surface illusion: from the outside, it could appear that Kim Dan had left the penthouse. He no longer appeared at the gym. No one seemed to mention him to Joo Jaekyung. The champion himself was increasingly framed in isolation (chapter 97), absorbed by training and the imminent match. Publicly, Kim Dan had vanished. Privately, he had not moved at all.

What makes this significant is that Kim Dan himself may not have realized how easily absence can be misread. To him, remaining inside the apartment for several days may have meant reflection, hesitation, emotional conflict, or simply staying out of sight. (chapter 97) To outsiders, however, invisibility can quickly harden into narrative. If a person is no longer seen, people begin to explain that disappearance for themselves. And the easiest explanation is often the wrong one.

We have already seen this with Joo Jaekyung. After the match, Kim Dan was no longer beside him (chapter 52), and the champion interpreted that separation through what little he could observe. Later, at the hospital, he heard that Kim Dan had quit. (chapter 53) But quitting the job did not automatically mean leaving altogether. In his mind, Kim Dan had stepped out of the professional role, not necessarily out of his personal orbit. The evidence before him therefore remained partial: distance, silence, and formal resignation, but no clear answer about the bond between them. Hence he imagined that the main lead was still living in the penthouse. (chapter 53) Yet what he “knew” was never the full truth. It was a narrative assembled from scattered pieces while the emotional reality remained elsewhere.

There is another reason to take this seriously. Earlier in the story, Kim Dan was already being watched. (chapter 46) Secret photographs were taken of him without his knowledge. According to me, Baek Junmin was the one behind the camera. The hamster’s movements were monitored. His connection to Joo Jaekyung was observed from afar. That matters because it suggests the schemers did not suddenly become interested in him now. They had already understood that the physical therapist was not a minor side figure, but someone emotionally tied to the champion. If one wanted to wound Joo Jaekyung indirectly, Kim Dan had long been the obvious path.

At the same time, those operating from the shadows would have every reason to conceal their own involvement. (chapter 93) If Baek Junmin and Choi Gilseok are orchestrating events, they cannot appear to be doing so. A clean scheme often works best when responsibility seems to originate elsewhere. The most effective leak is not the one traced to its author, but the one attributed to an innocent intermediary.

This is where Park Namwook becomes central. Whether knowingly or not, he may be the most useful source of mistaken information in the entire system. He lives close enough to the champion’s routines to notice changes, yet not close enough to grasp their private meaning. He sees absence (chapter 66), altered schedules, replaced meals, and silence. From those fragments, a conclusion becomes tempting: Kim Dan is gone. Joo Jaekyung is alone again. And finally, don’t forget how Doc Dan was introduced to the champion for the first time (chapter 1): he had been hired by Park Namwook, for the previous physical therapist had suddenly quit. (chapter 1)

If that assumption took hold, it could open the perfect pretext. The former director would not need to arrive as an intruder, but as a practical solution. (chapter 1) A replacement. A therapist. Someone sent because the champion supposedly lacks proper care before an important fight, and, unlike others, is not asking too much money. (chapter 54) Observe how the manager reacted, when Joo Jaekyung selected the one with a lot of credentials. Park Namwook jolted. The language of professionalism becomes cover for personal sabotage. Entry is granted not through force, but through usefulness.

And this possibility gains weight when we remember the beginning of the story. Kim Dan first entered Joo Jaekyung’s orbit through need, employment, and convenience. (chapter 2) Professional necessity became the doorway through which a far more intimate bond later emerged. If so, the present scheme may mirror that origin in corrupted form. What once began through work and gradually became attachment is now imitated as strategy. A “helper” is sent not to heal, but to divide.

Even Park Namwook’s earlier words cast a shadow here. He claimed they had brought Joo Jaekyung the best in the industry (chapter 5), yet Kim Dan’s own life tells another story: job loss (chapter 1), exclusion, desperation, and a system willing to discard him while rewarding others. The language of merit has never been neutral in Jinx. It often hides power, convenience, and who gets chosen or erased.

There is also a darker irony beneath the practical excuse. Sending the former director under the pretense of treatment would place bodily care (chapter 97) beside an old superstition already tied to the story: sex before a match, the so-called jinx. In that framework, the intruder becomes more than a substitute therapist. He becomes the bridge through which blame can later travel. Professional contact, private scandal, and preexisting fear could all be rearranged into one accusation.

Such a scene would not only endanger Kim Dan. It would immediately raise another chain of suspicions: who knew where they lived, who allowed access, who understood the timing, and who knew enough about the champion’s private beliefs to exploit them. Anyone linked to that chain could appear implicated, whether guilty or not. Once again, appearances risk becoming accepted as truth before the latter has even had the chance to appear.

At the same time, Kim Dan’s role itself could be distorted. The physical therapist who offers care may be recast as something else entirely — a source of temptation, scandal, or transactional intimacy. In that sense, the scheme would not merely attack people. It would attack identities.

That is why the true question is not simply how the man entered the building. He may have entered much earlier — the moment appearances replaced truth, assumptions replaced knowledge, and a system once again mistook Kim Dan’s invisibility for his absence.

Queen Han Dan Learns to Speak

Before going further, I should pause for a moment and explain the title. Why Han Dan? Why a queen? Why borrow concepts that, until recently, were unfamiliar to me as well? I only began thinking in these terms after watching this video that introduced two emotional ideas often associated with Korean drama narratives: Jeong and Han.

It is almost ironic that Korean dramas led me toward manhwas — and then helped me understand them differently.

Once I encountered those notions, the recent evolution of Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung began to appear in a new light.

Jeong can be described as a deep bond formed slowly through shared everyday life. It grows through meals, routines, repeated gestures, quiet care, silent loyalty, and the feeling that these are my people. It is not limited to romance. Jeong often appears in the background, through presence more than declaration, through consistency more than spectacle. It is affection sedimented over time.

Han, by contrast, is compressed sorrow mixed with resentment that never fully disappears. It is the emotional weight left by abandonment, humiliation, injustice, debt, grief, or wounds that remain unresolved. Han is pain carried forward in time. It may remain silent for years, then suddenly speak through anger, distance, bitterness, or refusal.

In the earlier chapters, Kim Dan seemed to embody Jeong more clearly. (chapter 56) He stayed beside his grandmother. He worked despite exhaustion. He treated Joo Jaekyung despite fear and humiliation. He cooked (chapter 22), cleaned, worried, forgave, and endured. Much of what he gave happened almost invisibly. And that is precisely why Jeong is so often underestimated. It does not announce itself dramatically. It appears in support that is constant yet barely noticed until it is missing. Kim Dan’s passivity and silence were therefore not emptiness, but one form of devotion. I admit this was not immediately obvious to me. At times, Kim Dan’s attitude even frustrated me, because I was shaped by a different cultural environment — one in which care is often expressed more directly, emotions are verbalized more openly, and disagreement is more readily shown. Imagine that he did not talk to his roommate for 8 days! (chapter 97) In his mind, he was being considerate. He was giving him space, (chapter 97) supporting him quietly. In such a framework, silence can easily be interpreted as weakness, passivity, or a lack of personality. Precisely for that reason, the concept of Jeong became so illuminating. It allowed me to recognize that affection does not always announce itself through dramatic words or visible intensity. Sometimes it is carried through constancy, restraint, everyday gestures, and the quiet decision to remain.

Joo Jaekyung, on the other hand, was marked by Han. (chapter 72) He carried paternal violence (chapter 72), maternal abandonment, poverty, humiliation, insomnia, and the pressure of surviving through strength alone. His anger, possessiveness, and emotional volatility (chapter 91) were the visible forms of pain that had never healed. Even his need to control others often looked less (chapter 45) like confidence than fear translated into aggression.

Yet the story has changed. Kim Dan was the first to express animosity openly in season 2. He criticized Joo Jaekyung. He pushed him away. He refused his offers. He told him plainly that this was how he had always been treated. (chapter 64) Silent suffering became spoken judgment. Han entered his voice.

His collapse and departure only deepened that shift. He no longer swallows everything in silence. He no longer acts as a servant of Park Namwook, he keeps distance from him. (chapter 95) He no longer feels endlessly obliged. And when he sees the former director, his second reaction is not meekness but disgust. (chapter 91) That matters. Resentment is no longer buried beneath obedience. It has become part of his emotional language. But this change is not limited to anger alone. It also deepens Kim Dan’s ability to reflect. Earlier, he often positioned himself only as the one who had to endure, obey, or silently adapt. (chapter 46) Now he begins to examine situations from more than one side. He can recognize not only how he was hurt (chapter 97), but how his own actions may have wounded others as well. When he remembers packing in haste and preparing to leave, he no longer sees himself simply as justified and Joo Jaekyung as wrong. He understands that sudden departure, silence, and emotional withdrawal could wound the other person too.

That shift matters because it opens the door to reinterpretation. Once experience is no longer divided into victim and offender, Kim Dan can finally perceive gestures he once dismissed. (chapter 97) A command to eat more, once read as control (chapter 79), can be understood as concern. (chapter 97) Practical attention can reveal tenderness. What had seemed oppressive begins to show another meaning. This delayed recognition matters because Jeong is not always perceived in the moment it is given. For Joo Jaekyung, its value becomes visible through distance, uncertainty, and the fear of loss. For Kim Dan, recognition emerges differently: through gratitude, self-reflection, and the gradual realization that gestures once dismissed or misunderstood had been forms of care all along.

It also explains why Kim Dan rarely expects care for himself. For so long, he embodied the side of Jeong that gives, supports, and remains present for others. (chapter 96) He knew how to look after people, but not how to imagine being looked after in return. Receiving affection is often harder than offering it.

The same transformation can be seen in Joo Jaekyung. As Han encounters Jeong, strength begins to change its meaning. He starts to notice another world beyond force, pride, and survival: a world of mutual attention , small gestures (chapter 80), and emotional responsibility. (chapter 65) In different ways, both men are learning that relationships are not built through victory over the other, but through a new way of seeing one another.

Meanwhile, Joo Jaekyung has begun to move toward Jeong. One key moment came when he blamed Baek Junmin (chapter 54) rather than Kim Dan. He distinguished the real source of harm instead of attacking the nearest vulnerable person. Since then, he has worried about Kim Dan’s meals, noticed his body, bought flowers and cake, remembered small preferences, and even more than ever wants him to stay after the match. Care has begun to replace reflexive aggression.

This is where the title becomes meaningful. Han Dan is not mockery. It names Kim Dan’s transformation into someone who can finally carry and express Han instead of burying it beneath everyone else’s needs. It may also mean, for the first time, that his resentment will be directed outward — not against himself, nor only against Joo Jaekyung, but toward those who truly abused their power, such as the hospital director. The playful word queen acknowledges another change: he is no longer standing at the edge of the drama like a pawn moved by stronger hands. He has become central to the game itself.

In chess, the queen is the most versatile and often the most decisive piece. She is also the piece players fight hardest to protect. That symbolism matters here. Kim Dan may still appear vulnerable to those who underestimate him, but he now occupies the emotional center of the story. To remove him is no longer to remove a side character. It is to destabilize the entire board.

And there is one more reason the title matters now. If the current chapter turns on the question of whether he will stay or leave, then Kim Dan is no longer merely choosing for himself. His movement now affects the structure around him. That is what queens do in stories and in games alike: they transform space through the position they occupy.

There is also a more playful yet surprisingly revealing possibility hidden in the scene. Kim Dan does not return empty-handed (chapter 97), but carries a birthday cake covered in cream — an object already charged with recognition, celebration, affection, and the wish to create a shared moment. Just as importantly, playfulness is no longer absent from Kim Dan’s inner world. The man who once moved through life almost exclusively through duty, anxiety, and endurance is now capable of imagining teasing intimacy, shared fun, and lightness with Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 97) That shift matters enormously. It means joy has entered a consciousness long governed by burden.

In the exaggerated emotional grammar of many Korean dramas, conflict is often expressed through symbolic gestures such as the famous kimchi slap, a drink thrown in someone’s face or poured on someone’s head (chapter 37), or another act of public humiliation in which ordinary objects suddenly become dramatic instruments. Read through that lens, the cake in Kim Dan’s hands contains its own ironic potential: it could become not merely dessert, but a comic weapon of refusal, an insult that answers intrusion with ridicule.

Such a gesture would be funny on the surface, yet deeply meaningful underneath. The current arc is framed by seriousness, gravity, contracts, injuries, and psychological pressure before an important match; a messy burst of cream would instantly shatter that oppressive atmosphere and expose how fragile the staged tension really is. It would also reverse Kim Dan’s usual position in the story. For so long, he has been the one acted upon, blamed, cornered, or used by stronger figures. If he were the one creating the scene, even for a moment, he would step out of passivity and become the active force. More than that, the cake suggests a new relational role. (chapter 97) To bring someone a birthday cake is to acknowledge their existence, mark their growth, and care for them. In that sense, Kim Dan is quietly establishing himself as a hyung (chapter 97) — not the domineering version represented by Baek Junmin (chapter 96), who claimed authority through superiority, manipulation, and the posture of the one who “knows better,” but a different kind of hyung whose authority comes through tenderness, emotional understanding (chapter 95), and the ability to create warmth. If the self-proclaimed men of power arrive with schemes (chapter 93), threats, and humiliation, Kim Dan arrives with celebration, and perhaps with fun as well, a different kind of enjoyment and laughter than the Joker’s. (chapter 87) With this panel it is clear that Baek Junmin will never have the last laugh. Anyway, the impact of such a reversal would not be limited to the intruder alone. Instead of answering tension with more anger, Joo Jaekyung himself could be drawn into laughter. That possibility is relevant, because laughter would do what violence cannot: it would break the script from within. Remember how powerless he felt after the exposure and humiliation. (chapter 96) No one was there to cheer him up, they all stood silently and passively. (chapter 9) And if that very object of care were turned against the intruder, the symbolism would become sharper still: false authority would be confronted by a truer one, and the entire machinery of intimidation would collapse into absurdity. What appears playful therefore leads back to the deeper logic of the title itself, because every new gesture Kim Dan makes now carries structural weight within the story. And there is one more reason the title matters now. If the current chapter turns on the question of whether he will stay or leave, then Kim Dan is no longer merely choosing for himself. His movement now affects the structure around him. That is what queens do in stories and in games alike: they transform space through the position they occupy.

The Joker’s M.O.

If the hallway is the stage and the former director the mask, then Baek Junmin’s true weapon is not brute force, but construction. He does not merely strike; he arranges circumstances in which others mistrust one another and accept a false story as truth. The earlier image of him studying the calendar already suggested a man interested less in impulse than in timing, pressure, and sequence. (chapter 93) A manufactured narrative is far more dangerous than a visible enemy because it recruits its targets into its own logic, compelling them to generate the suspicion, conflict, and emotional damage themselves. The Joker does not need to control every move if he can persuade others to perform the script for him. (chapter 96)

We have seen this layered pattern before. Prior to their first match, the public meeting between Kim Dan and Choi Gilseok functioned as a visible distraction (chapter 48), as they met in front of the building where the gym Team Black is. Besides, the encounter was easily photographed and readily interpreted as betrayal. (chapter 48) Yet behind that surface stood the hidden move: the altered spray (chapter 49), seemingly tied to revenge, (chapter 48), but more likely prepared in advance to cause damage under pressure. In that reading, the point was never only retaliation. The point was that Kim Dan could later be made to carry the blame for everything surrounding the chaos. One event captured attention, another produced harm, and the true consequence emerged only afterward. What appeared spontaneous was structurally engineered. (chapter 51) But the irony is that neither the champion nor his manager called the police for an investigation right away.

The same architecture now returns. (chapter 96) The interview serves as the public strike — humiliation and provocation aimed at a wider audience. It drags old wounds into the open and fixes attention on spectacle. The ruined poster becomes the next layer: visible violation, immediate outrage, the sense that hostility has entered Joo Jaekyung’s own space. The atmosphere changes before any direct confrontation even begins.

Only after those outer layers comes the darker move: (chapter 97) the hallway encounter. Hidden from public view, detached from cameras, and staged in shadow, it targets something more valuable than image — trust, emotional balance, and the fragile question of whether Kim Dan will stay or leave. Public scandal can be repaired. A shaken bond is harder to restore.

Seen this way, the incidents are not random noise but coordinated pressure applied on different levels. First reputation. Then emotion. Then relationship. First the crowd. Then the self. Then the private space between two people. That is why the Joker is dangerous. He does not merely create problems. He sequences them. He understands that after enough pressure, people begin linking separate blows into one story, even when the links are false. And once that happens, blame can be redirected toward the nearest vulnerable person.

And that is where Kim Dan becomes central. The most efficient scapegoat is rarely the strongest rival. (chapter 96) It is the figure others still believe to be vulnerable: someone economically fragile (chapter 48), emotionally tied to the target, marked by past shame and abandonment wounds (he is also an “orphan”), and assumed to carry burdens in silence. From the outside, Kim Dan may still appear to fit that role. The schemers likely imagine a man who is isolated, unsupported, and easy to overwhelm — someone with no real backing, no language of resistance, and no choice but to absorb whatever is placed on him.

That assumption, however, may already be outdated. Earlier in the story, guilt and pressure might have worked more easily. Kim Dan often endured, withdrew, or blamed himself before questioning the motives of others. But he is no longer standing in the same place. He has begun to judge situations differently. He is now ready to talk (chapter 97) and become more proactive, hence he bought a cake, a book and has planned to cook for the champion. This means that he is now capable to recognize manipulation, and to speak where he once remained silent. The very person chosen as the easiest target may no longer be available in the form they remember.

Against the old Kim Dan, an accusation only needed to feel believable long enough to wound. Against the present Kim Dan, it may need to survive scrutiny, contradiction, and reply. And that response may be more dangerous than the accusation itself. For many of the burdens that could be placed on Kim Dan lead back to the former director’s own actions. If Kim Dan lost work (chapter 1), struggled to be hired elsewhere, fell into desperation, or became vulnerable to exploitation, (chapter 3) those conditions did not emerge from nowhere. They followed the abuse and professional ruin inflicted earlier. The blacklisting was and is the reason why he is not looking for a job in Seoul (chapter 56) In that sense, an attempt to blame Kim Dan for everything risks exposing the original cause instead. The man chosen as scapegoat may now be able to point back at the hand that first pushed him toward the edge. The setting makes that possibility even sharper. The hallway is dark, where faces are obscured and appearances become uncertain. But in darkness, a voice can be heard clearly. (chapter 97)

That is why the exact charge (the topic for the guilt trip) can remain flexible. Financial losses, damaged sponsors (chapter 54), injuries (chapter 95), overtraining, disqualification (chapter 96) leading to the loss of the championship belt — any of these can be reframed as the price of keeping Kim Dan close. Incidents tied to the hospital or health center can be folded into the same narrative. The content changes according to circumstance, but the structure remains the same: different burdens, gathered under one convenient name. He is guilty to have ruined the champion’s life.

Yet the hallway introduces another layer as well: the method of the former director himself. Long before this chapter, his preferred weapon was already visible. He repeatedly transformed abuse into accusation and his own misconduct into Kim Dan’s supposed guilt. (chapter 6) (chapter 90) (chapter 90) The wording changes, but the structure remains constant: responsibility is reversed until the victim feels like the cause.

If such rhetoric returns now, it would not merely repeat the past. (chapter 91) It would reactivate Kim Dan’s deepest vulnerability — the hidden belief that he damages the people around him. That is why separation matters so much. If Kim Dan can be pushed away from Joo Jaekyung first, he becomes easier to confront, easier to shame, easier to burden with every old and new misfortune. At the same time, the former director of the hospital can be blamed, if his presence was detected there. Alone, he can be told that he caused the champion’s losses, scandals, exhaustion, or decline. Beside Joo Jaekyung, those accusations meet resistance. Away from him, they may sink inward.

The true violence of the Joker is therefore narrative violence. He does not invent reality; he edits it. Misunderstandings become destiny. Coincidences become proof. Pain becomes accusation.

This is how a person is turned into a jinx. Not through magic, fate, or any real curse, but through repetition. Enough setbacks are placed beside his name, enough unrelated wounds are retold as his doing, enough guilt is made to feel natural. Eventually, others stop seeing separate causes and begin seeing only him. If pushed far enough, Kim Dan is no longer seen as healer, partner, or future companion. He becomes the explanation for misfortune itself. He becomes the jinx. To transform the emotional center of the story into a curse is to attack the structure forming around him — to recast the Queen as poison. The royal image carries another implication as well. (chapter 97) A queen is not only a powerful piece on the board; she also evokes a form of recognized union. In that sense, turning Kim Dan into a jinx would do more than isolate him personally. It would poison the very idea of partnership beside Joo Jaekyung. The chosen companion, the one meant to remain, is recast as a threat. What should signify attachment, continuity, and perhaps even a future resembling marriage is rewritten as danger. The attack therefore falls not only on a person, but on the bond’s legitimacy itself. (chapter 97)

Yet this retelling carries a second insult that is easier to miss. (chapter 95) It reduces Kim Dan to a curse while also erasing Joo Jaekyung’s agency. The champion is treated not as a man shaped by discipline, endurance, and strength, but as someone passively ruled by outside influence. His achievements, sacrifices, and proven resilience disappear behind the convenience of blame. The scapegoat story diminishes them both.

Ultimately, this method targets their oldest wounds. For Joo Jaekyung, the pressure point is abandonment: the fear that whatever he values will be taken or corrupted. For Kim Dan, it is the belief that he burdens the people he love. Hence he got abandoned. One voice in a dark hallway could therefore reopen two childhood wounds at the same time. If both can be pushed back into those inner prisons, they may damage the bond themselves without the schemer needing to break it directly.

That is why the hallway matters. (chapter 97) It is the newest trigger in a longer chain, designed to make pain interpret everything that follows. Yet the Joker’s power depends entirely on whether the targets accept their assigned roles. The moment Kim Dan rejects inherited guilt, or Joo Jaekyung questions the frame imposed on him, the script begins to fail.

And here the argument returns to the beginning. The dark hallway was never only a threat. It was also a question. Not simply who entered, but who will define what that entrance means.

The first incident is only the surface. What waits beyond it is still open. The two men may stay together (chapter 97), but even that would not be the end of the story. To stay can mean many things: to choose each other openly, to confront the systems around them, to speak truths long avoided, or to leave old roles behind while standing side by side. The real next move may not belong to the Joker at all. But if the script depends on their silence, what happens when the scapegoat finally finds his voice? And if the “Jinx” is proven to be a lie, what remains of the man who built his life around that fear?

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: Lazy Hand ✌of Justice ⚔ ?

1. Laziness or not?

When the final episode of the main story was released, many Manhwa-philes were laughing about Yoon Seungho’s work attitude as governor. The latter had left his seat in order to return to his lover’s side. (chapter 131) Hence the police officers found the governor’s seat deserted. (chapter 131) By contrasting the statement from the governor and the panel, the readers could easily catch his lie. He was a lazy governor, preferring to keep his lover company rather than attend to his official duties. On the one hand, it exposes the main lead’s true mind-set. He is not longing for power or glory. To conclude, he has no ambition. This implies that he is not determined to gain attention either. One might add that he selected this region on purpose. No one would willingly go to that place. The norm was that officials would go there, because they were demoted. (episode 129) Thus I deduce that Yoon Seungho made the opposite choice to his father. The latter longed for a high position at the government so that the family’s reputation would become famous and powerful again. (chapter 86) It is because Yoon Chang-Hyeon was thinking of getting the attention or support from noble families. What he truly wanted was to get recognition from people among his own social class. But with such a decision (join the painter’s side), Yoon Seungho seems to have turned the former patriarch’s nightmare into a reality. Yoon Seungho is about to ruin the family. The name “Yoon” is destined to become forgotten, right? However, I believe that this interpretation is not correct. How so? Let me ask you this.

Why is this region regarded as “backwater”? It is because there are no powerful families like in the town, where the Yoons used to live. There are no huge store or doctor either. The new governor is surrounded by “peasants”, commoners. In other words, it is not a place you can earn a lot of money or gain power, especially for an official. This signifies that buying the governor, like Yoon Chang-Hyeon did, won’t happen. (chapter 127) No one has such a wealth! That’s the reason why no official would select such a place. Yes, Jung In-Hun’s words from chapter 6 (chapter 6) (chapter 131) are reflected in the final episode. Peasants are poor und uneducated, and this will not change overnight. Hence they represent ignorance and naivety. This raises the following question. Why did the officers bring these two men? What was their crime? One might reply that it is impossible to figure it out. Nevertheless, I think, Byeonduck left clues in her story. Painter Of The Night is composed of reflections. In each season, certain scenes or elements resurface with slight changes.. Thus I developed the following theory concerning these two commoners.

My hypothesis is that these two men were innocent. In season 1, we have a similar scene: (chapter 37). It is about a crime, treason. In season 4, we know that the plot was true and there was an evidence, the paper with the signatures from lord Yoon and lord Song. Since in season 1 the wrongdoing was true and heavy, I deduce that it is not the case in the final chapter. Because there is an evidence of the crime in the past, I can’t help myself thinking that in the final chapter, there was no evidence. Additionally, I feel the need to expose my other interpretation about this man: (chapter 37) I have always stated that this man couldn’t be a servant, for he was smoking a pipe and we saw a glimpse of his memory. No commoner would be allowed to enter the courtyard, when three noblemen are tortured and interrogated. Moreover, notice that in both scenes (37 and 131), the magistrate is absent. That’s how it dawned on me that this nameless man could have been a former “governor” who lost his position.

But if the two commoners are rather innocent, why did the officers bring them to Yoon Seungho then? My idea is that they imagined that the new governor wanted to make a statement so that he wouldn’t be looked down by the locals. Or even worse. The guards desired to get protection money from them!! Yes, because this region is not well perceived, the guards thought that the governor would act like his predecessor. Since it is a poor region, it signifies that the officials are not well recognized and well paid. (chapter 131) First evidence that the last image is not symbolizing justice, but corruption, is the behavior from the guards. They are caught by surprise, when they arrive in front of the empty stool. Yet, they are not gesticulating or panicked. If a real crime had taken place, they would be looking for their superior. And this observation leads me to this image. (chapter 131) In this picture, we can detect the governor’s office in the background. It is the yellow building with the multicolor decorations. That’s where the empty stool is!! In other words, if they truly needed him, they just had to go to the other side of the wall. Third evidence for this hypothesis was left in season 3: (chapter 94) Here, the officers went to the mansion before visiting him at the gibang. (chapter 97) Back then, it was about the death of a commoner, a servant. If there’s an urgency, they would look for him. The comparison exposes that the “wrongdoing” from the peasants in the final chapter was no huge deal. Yet, many readers already condemned them due to the guards and the protagonist’s behavior. Funny is that the lord was portrayed as a huge liar, but not “the officers”. (chapter 131) But it could have been the reverse. Officers could have abused their authority. Furthermore, let’s not forget that Min indicated that guards could be bribed easily. (chapter 101) His statement displays another aspect: the governor and the guards are not working together. Jihwa would have been sent to jail without being able to talk to the superior, similar to this scene: (chapter 126) The guards’ own interests are not necessarily aligned with the governor’s. And now, take a closer look at this scene: (chapter 127) The official received the patriarch in his office alone. The reason is simple. That way, he wouldn’t have to share the money with others.

But since the guards never went to the lord’s mansion, they must have realized that this man was not like his predecessor. He was not frustrated or demoted. He was indeed not after power or money. They couldn’t rely on his protection either. In fact, they could get blamed for disturbing his privacy. I would even add that since Yoon Seungho comes from a wealthy family, he doesn’t need to rely on bribe at all. In other words, the guards can only come to the conclusion that treating him well can only benefit them. His wealth was already implied with his arrival: (chapter 129). He was not sitting on a horse with a few musicians contrary to Jung In-Hun. He was carried by four men, and other people were announcing his arrival with flags and music. (chapter 111) Moreover, Yoon Seungho had a inauguration banquet organized, where the local inhabitants could join. (chapter 129) There was no social exclusion at all. This stands in such opposition to the lord’s statement in season 1, where he distinguished between nobles and commoners.

But let’s return our attention to the two suspects. What happened to them then? (chapter 131) In my opinion, they were released. Why? For the simple reason that in this place, Yoon Seungho expected no huge duty! Yes, his words were not just exposing a lie, but also the truth. Nothing was supposed to happen. People are peaceful and helpful to each other. (chapter 129) This signifies that the arrest could lead to trouble to the guards too. So was the lord lazy in the end? (chapter 131) Yes and no… By acting that way, he put an end to the abuse of authority in that place!! Thus I deduce that the governor is destined to gain recognition and admiration from the local inhabitants. He is generous (inauguration banquet where anyone could join), humble, loyal (he is not forgetting his lover) (chapter 131), but also well organized! He had planned to join this place a long time ago. The peach trees were planted about 3 years ago. He is no longer making any distinction between nobles and commoners, and that’s how he will get the respect from the peasants. As a conclusion, we should envision that the lord will become famous. Therefore the son didn’t turn the father’s nightmare into a reality. He didn’t contribute to the family’s ruin at all. Yet, there exists a huge divergence. Yoon Seungho is about to make a name on his own. It is not about the Yoons. On the one hand, the father’s dream was illusory and superficial, especially due to the treason (chapter 86). Since Lord Song had been forced to resign, there’s no doubt that the man would resent the Yoons to become successful again. This explicates why lord Song saw Yoon Seungwon as a problem (chapter 107) and tried to tarnish the younger son’s reputation. But let’s return our attention to the patriarch. His vision was based on Confucianism. However, he had a very narrow-minded perception of it.

He expected not only blind obedience from his son, but also absolute devotion for the family. The individual steps aside for the community, and as such for the Yoons. This explicates why the main lead’s relative has no name in episode 6, he is simply reduced to a grandfather. (chapter 7) This shows that the tradition was to “vanish behind the family name, the Yoons”. Under this new light, my avid readers can grasp why the main lead was destined to suffer immensely (chapter 57). His reputation was already outshining his father’s. Secondly, by being stigmatized as a homosexual, he was endangering this principle. His role was to continue the lineage and as such produce a heir.

As you can see, Yoon Seungho is breaking the tradition and even dropping Confucianism, as the latter rejects homosexuality. The main lead embodies other values: Modernity, Individualism, true Love and Humbleness. Yoon Seungho is no longer judging people based on their social status and relationship. This signifies that at the end of the story, the new governor symbolizes true justice. He put an end to corruption and malpractice. He is not influenced by people’s opinions and prejudices either. He is only listening to his heart and conscious. He makes sure to keep all his promises and not to say any empty words. He is a reformed man through and through.

However, we shouldn’t forget that the protagonist did kill many people before. Hence my other interpretation is that Yoon Seungho as a sinner is not “allowed” to become a judge himself. (chapter 131) How could he condemn others, when his hands had been soiled with blood? Thus I deduce that through her work, Byeonduck exposed the corruption of human justice in Joseon. It was impossible to get true and fair justice from anyone, let alone from the authorities. The latter were ruled by greedy and arrogant nobles who used law enforcements for their own needs. That’s why the patriarch (chapter 116) or even Min could commit crimes in the open. They felt safe, for they knew that the authorities belonged to the same social class than them. However, this could only work, as long as the nobles would cover for each other. Should a yanbang denunciate a noble family, it was a different story. Therefore I assume that lord Lee was the one who reported the treason to the authorities (the painting in the bedroom was the evidence). But such a painting couldn’t represent a proof. However, since human justice was corrupted, the gods decided to give justice to the protagonists. That’s how Yoon Seungho became the hand of justice. Everyone involved in the protagonists’ suffering had to pay for their crimes. (chapter 102) That’s the reason why Baek Na-Kyum’s martyrdom was strongly intertwined with the young master’s. Yoon Seungho only received this power through Baek Na-Kyum, the character embodying fairness, sincerity, hard work, home and equity. This was particularly perceptible in this scene: (chapter 27) The lord couldn’t kill anyone randomly.

Yet, considering the scene in the shrine as a trial from the “gods”, can appear weird, for the main lead attacked Min and his friend under the influence of his unconscious past. (chapter 102) However, I consider it as a first step to the lord’s emancipation and life lesson. The latter is indirectly learning not to pay attention to status and power. That’s why the author portrayed him as blind and deaf to their plea and special status. While his behavior in the shrine was rather impulsive and influenced by deeply rooted fears, we should consider lord Song’s execution as a true act of justice. (chapter 123) (chapter 123) The latter had confessed all his crimes: the ones from the past (the lies in order to fool the father) (chapter 123) and the painter’s murder. Funny is that lord Song didn’t feel threatened by the young master at all despite the sword. (chapter 123) Why? It is because he feels, he is the one with the upper hand. First, he has the petition, hence he is already projecting himself in the future (he can get a high position again). Secondly, he thinks, Yoon Seungho is outnumbered. He is surrounded by 4 guards. But more importantly, he views himself superior to the main character due to his age. He is an elder. That’s the reason why he calls “my dear boy”. This implies that he is underestimating the main figure. The latter would never dare to raise his hand against a senior!! However, true justice is also blind to age. (chapter 123) His smile at the end of the episode should be perceived as a reflection from Min’s vanishing. (chapter 103) One might even add that the lord’s action could have been seen as self-defense. However, don’t forget that we are here in Joseon, where a commoner’s life means nothing. Because of this new association, I came to the following deduction: lord Song was the one behind lord Shin’s death. (chapter 103) The latter couldn’t imagine that an elderly yanbang, an official, would raise the sword against another noble. After this new realization, it dawned on me why Yoon Seungho had to get separated from his loved one. (chapter 126) This humiliation made Yoon Seungho realize that he needed to have his power on his own. He learned through the hard way that he was not just a Yoon, but Seungho. Yes, this helped him to differentiate himself from his father and to become stronger mentally. His religion was now his lover, Baek Na-Kyum, whom he needed to protect. But he could only do it, if he had himself a powerful position. But he needed to witness the corruption of the authorities to realize that in Joseon, there exists no justice. (chapter 127) That’s the reason why I deduce that Yoon Seungho is not destined to become a lazy or unfair governor. He learned through the hard way how important it is to give proper justice. (chapter 131) Should these two men know the artist, the latter could encourage his lover to listen to their testimonies and not judge them based on their status.

Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why I don’t perceive the main lead as a lazy governor. Just because he appears as one in this scene (chapter 131), we shouldn’t generalize such a behavior. By paying no attention to power and fame, the protagonist learned what true justice is. Moreover, he realized the true source of happiness: love and simplicity. He made sure to keep all his promises to his loved one. Moreover, the artist is there to remind Yoon Seungho of his duties: (chapter 131) Hence I can’t help myself imagining the couple strolling through the village and listening to the people. Thanks to the artist, Yoon Seungho can only get recognition and acceptance from the autochtones. Besides, Baek Na-Kyum is even giving painting lessons to children, so I doubt that he will drop everything for his lover’s sake. We should envision the opposite behavior from the scholar: (chapter 6): neglect and indifference towards the commoners. And this new observation brings me to my other topic, Jung In-Hun.

2. The real sinners: the hidden hustlers and workhorses

In the first part of this essay, I compared the arrival of the lord in his new jurisdiction with the scholar’s Jung In-Hun.

YoOn SeunghoJung In-Hun

Through this comparison. I had a huge revelation. Manhwaphiles can notice not only the absence of flags and the palaquin, but also the absence of uniforms. The two men in black leading the horse were simply wearing black hanboks and not blue and white costumes. Then it dawned on me that after this cortege on the street, there was no banquet after his success. Hence I deduce that he had not really succeeded at the civil service examination. First, he had not finished top place (chapter 129), therefore he couldn’t select one position contrary to the main lead. This means that when he celebrated his “victory” in episode 111, it was not official. He had no post. I would even add, his name had not been announced on the official board, like we could witness it in this scene. (chapter 121) Here, he is informed that he didn’t pass the exam, for his name was not written there. We can detect this, because people are congratulating each other. His name was left out due to the intervention from lord Song. This means that when Yoon Seungho made him this offer (chapter 7), these were not empty words. He did help the learned sir to pass the civil service exam. But the scholar didn’t succeed like anticipated. The absence of his success explicates why Jung In-Hun received such an offer from lord Song later. (chapter 117) He had no post, he couldn’t choose it, for he was not the best. Thus I deduce that the scholar had just proven his mediocrity. He was just an average man. That’s how it dawned on me that the ceremony in the street was more a simulacre! (chapter 111) Yes, it was fake, for there was no banquet, no sedan chair, no flag and just civilians were surrounding the former teacher. The painting from Baek Na-Kyum can even serve as another evidence that a palanquin and flags are attributes to a ceremony of inauguration. (chapter 44) Only one thing was real: Jung In-Hun was wearing an official uniform, that way no one would doubt his “victory”. Moreover, observe that lord Song only approached the learned sir after the parade. So he was not behind the parade. Besides, keep in mind that the main couple was informed about the parade through the tailor (chapter 111) and not from the official board. His reaction shows not only his displeasure, but also his ignorance. If he had known about the cortege, he would have avoided the place in the first place. Thus I suspect that the tailor had been encouraged to leak this information in front of the couple. Let’s not forget, as a tailor, he was definitely involved in the cortege. It is no coincidence that he informed Yoon Seungho about this “sudden parade”. At the same time, I come to the following deduction: someone must have paid for this spectacle, and it was not Yoon Seungho, for he had been kept in the dark until the last moment. I doubt that the learned sir had the connections and money for this. This new perception corroborates my previous interpretation: the show was sponsored by someone, and it was definitely inspired by the drawing (the hat and the green uniform). (chapter 111). Yet this was just a cheap trick, for the person didn’t send a sedan chair with carriers. Under this new light, I realized why Jung In-Hun ended up stigmatized as a criminal. (chapter 127) It was his karma, for he had deceived the painter with his lies. His success was not his own. (chapter 111) He realized that even after passing the exam, he needed the assistance of people, a sponsor for the spectacle, a noble with connections. Besides, when in season 1, the painter was accused of a crime (ruining the picture), the learned sir did nothing at all. He didn’t protect his student, for he desired to keep his sponsor. When the latter was sick, he neglected him as well. He wouldn’t have sent a doctor for him. Hence in season 4, the sponsor Na-Kyum decides to end his “sponsorship” for the learned sir. We could say that the former teacher is confronted with a similar situation. He ends up being abandoned and framed for a crime, which he didn’t commit. Yet, contrary to his pupil, he is not entirely blameless, for he played a huge role in the death of the nobles lord Song, lord Shin, lord Min and others. Because Baek Na-Kyum embodies hard work, justice, equity, love and honesty, I deduce that his surrogate father embodies the negative notions: laziness, corruption, partiality, hierarchy, ambition and hypocrisy. That’s why his face ended up on the official board, while the painter’s accusation just remained rumors. : (chapter 125) versus (chapter 127) His fate reflects Joseon’ society and authorities, especially when the latter are closer to the capitale.

At the same time, the poster of the scholar exposes that the scholar’s dream had always been to see his name on the official board. (chapter 121) However, the notice was not associated with glory and honor, but with the opposite value. He was an immoral and brutal man. (chapter 127) which was actually reflecting his true personality. We should see the parade in episode 111 as an illusion due to the absence of an official document. And who had paid for this charade? One might think lord Song. However, don’t forget that he approached the man much later. I feel like someone else was involved as well. For me, it was Heena. She was seen with the tailor in season 2, and she had seen the painting from her brother. Finally, she had tried in season 2 and 3 to separate the couple. So she should have repeated the same action, because her resent towards nobles runs deeply, just like her admiration for Jung In-Hun is strong. She knew that her donsaeng was no longer listening to her and his new lover. He was determined to remain by his lover’s side. Thus she didn’t intervene here. (chapter 105) IMO, she had to use another mean in order to achieve her goal: the scholar. Let’s not forget that the artist had confided to her this: (chapter 68) He was simply waiting for the learned sir’s return. And she was present during the cortege. (chapter 111)

Naturally, Jung In-Hun ended up being accused of murder, because not only he had lied, but also he had contributed to the death of lord Min and the others. By giving the spectacles, he was also responsible for their death. Finally, by hurting Baek Na-Kyum and giving him to lord Song (chapter 121), he put the painter in a position which led him to take for the fall for his loved one. It was like framing an innocent. Exactly like in season 3 (chapter 99), Yoon Seungho had been forced to take the sword because of the scholar. And the trigger for the massacre (chapter 124) was always Jung In-Hun. And now, you comprehend why Jung In-Hun became the scapegoat for the last incident. But there’s more to it.

The sexual and physical assault, playing a trick on multiple occasions and the lies are the reasons why the learned sir ended being labelled as a dangerous bandit. (chapter 127) The paper reflects the transformation of the former teacher. He is no longer a honest man. He lost everything: his home, his name and even his life, killed by lord Song’s minions. (chapter 121) His final lesson was to learn that he was exactly like the others: he is just a human despite his education. All humans are equal in front of death. In fact, during his confrontation with lord Song, he came to give up on his integrity. His true face came to the surface: he was just an opportunist, a lazy scholar who relied on fate and his arrogance. (chapter 6) This brings me to my next interpretation. Jung In-Hun learned through the hard way that there is nothing like fate (“right time”), but life is the result of decisions. However, because the scholar always regretted all his past choices, he decided to blame others for his wrong choices. That’s the reason why he ends up to take the whole crime. We should see this paper (chapter 127) as a reflection from the poem in episode 4: The author from this sijo was the poet and official Wang Bang-Yeon who is said to have lived in the time of Joseon’s sixth king Danjong (1441-1457) and his successor king Sejo (1417-1468). As the official of the state tribunal, he followed the young king Danjong into his exile and gave him poison to drink by royal command. Yes, both are symbols of power, corruption, partiality and injustice. Yet, there exists one divergence. While Wang Bang-Yeon left a poem revealing his yearning for the king, the learned sir had no deep attachment towards the artist. Hence it is no wonder why the paper “Wanted” is not connected to affection. It really reflects the emotions and thoughts of Baek Na-Kyum. Due to the last incident, the latter no longer cares for this man.

Jung In-Hun should have realized much sooner that happiness is not a synonym for power and admiration. In reality, he was living quite well in the small village. (chapter 6) He had a roof over his head, and he was surrounded by children, who liked him. (chapter 121) But the problem is that he was consumed by entitlement and greed. How so? It is because of his education. He saw himself superior to others morally and mentally. Hence he didn’t feel the genuine admiration from the children. (chapter 6) He couldn’t enjoy it at all. It is no coincidence that the synonyms for ambitious person are “busy person” and “workhorse”. Yes, this mirrors the expression “laziness”. A true ambitious person is actually proactive and not really relying on sponsors and bribes. So when we see the learned sir on the horse (chapter 111), he is acting like a workhorse. The reality is that he is lazy, as he saw himself destined to achieve greatness. He had the impression that no one had recognized his true value. On the horse, he is just waving his hand and smiling. Later, he confesses this to the artist: (chapter 111) As you can see, his success is not the result of his hard work, but rather of his connections!! Though he didn’t kill lord Song himself, Jung In-Hun had to receive his due punishment for all his lies and sins.

3. The brother’s punishment

This brings me to the next interpretation: Yoon Seungwon and his success. (chapter 107) Though he passed the civil service exam too, he is not able to fulfil his father’s wish either. (chapter 86) They lack support now because of the treason. The families close to the Yoons got executed. But there’s more to it. The youngest son had first betrayed his father by giving the petition to Yoon Seungho, (chapter 118) His intention was to protect not only his brother, but also their family. It was to ensure that lord Song would get blackmailed. That’s how this investigation (chapter 37) got stopped in the end, and the Yoons escaped any punishment. However, by doing so, Yoon Seungwon turned his brother into a blackmailer. Thanks to him, Yoon Seungwon could keep his reputation intact. In fact he never lost his father’s trust. However, in season 4, we can witness a change of heart in the brother. (chapter 118) It is because he knows that with the petition in his brother’s hands, lord Song represents a hindrance to his own career. The latter can only see the Yoons as a threat. Besides, he can only resent the family, if they are able to gain reputation and power, while he can not return to Hanyang and occupy a high position. As you can see, the young master’s success can only irritate lord Song. You can sense a rivalry between Seungwon and lord Song Haseon (chapter 116) in this scene: (chapter 116) The latter has already sensed that the traitor is sitting next to them, thus he raised this question. That’s why I come to the following conclusion that the young master must have realized that he also needed his brother’s assistance. First, if Yoon Seungho returns the petition to the father, the investigation about the traitor in the mansion would be no longer necessary. Secondly, Yoon Seungwon needs to create new connections in Hanyang, but he can only achieve it with his elder brother. Under this new light, you comprehend why Seungwon asked his relative to move on from the past and as such “forgive their father”. (chapter 118) In other words, the young man embodies the notion of “fake forgiveness, fake promise, fake understanding”. He is an opportunist, exactly like the scholar. Yet, there exists a huge divergence between them. His affection for Yoon Seungho was not fake. He is feeling sympathy for his brother. But that’s it. This explains why he didn’t help his brother before. In my eyes, Seungwon represents a different notion of family: bloodline. In my eyes, he embodies traditions and Confucianism. His goal is to turn his father’s dream and life motto into a reality: glory and power for the Yoons. Besides, he must have experienced himself the downfall for the family. And this observation leads to my next interpretation. This means that Yoon Seungwon must have lied to his father by omission as well. (chapter 86) In my opinion, he must have promised to fulfil the patriarch’s wish, but reality made him realize that this was not possible. He couldn’t do it alone. However, I doubt that he confronted the elder with reality.

Let’s not forget that he is only the second son. So he can not inherit the family’s properties. Remember that once the main lead succeeded the civil service exam, he received many marriage proposals. (chapter 128) What about Yoon Seungwon then? Though he succeeded too, there is no mention about engagement or marriage proposals. However, it is clear that this achievement is connected with adulthood and marriage, therefore the elder Song Haseon brought up the topic sex! (chapter 107) It is because Yoon Seungho is the first son who will inherit the title and properties. Yoon Seungwon’s success can only work with his brother’s presence. This means that thanks to the last episode, I could finally find the answer from Byeonduck’s question: What was the reason for Yoon Seungwon’s embarrassment? First, it is because his brother selected the backward place, though he had passed the exam with flying colors. Yoon Seungwon imagined that once his brother had passed the exam, he would get married and establish new connections. That way, Seungwon would be able to get married with a properous and famous family. In other words, Yoon Seungho would turn the father’s dream into a reality: the return of the Yoons’ glory and power. And Seungwon would benefit a lot from this. So in the gibang, his advices might have sounded well meant, (chapter 118), in verity he was also motivated by his own desires. He wanted to get the help from his older brother. This means that the moment the main lead lost his father, Seungwon’s words became true. Yoon Seungho followed his advice: he cut off ties with his past and as such with his family. He was no longer obliged to fulfil the family traditions and the father’s dream. This means that Yoon Seungwon is now on his own. I find it funny that he blamed his brother for his debauchery, but what did he do during this time? Nothing… he waited, until he received pressure from his own father. Moreover, since Yoon Seungwon didn’t help the artist and allowed him to take the fall for the massacre (chapter 126), his karma is not only to end up alone, but also not to receive any support from his brother.

To conclude, Yoon Seungwon tried to convince his brother to change his behavior (chapter 117), because his career was still insecure due to lord Song’s influence. He needed his brother’s help in the end. At the same time, Seungwon had already long internalized the values from his father: Yoons’ honor and reputation were top priorities. In other words, the younger brother stands for social norms and fake righteousness. He desires to maintain his perfect image (loyalty, filial piety),

(chapter 118), hence he left the document at the mansion. He wanted his brother to return the papers on his own so that his past action would remain undetected. Returning the paper was like an admission that he had stolen it in the first place. Yet he still barged in his brother’s house twice. (chapter 117) Here, he exposed the existence of the “petition” to Baek Na-Kyum for one reason. The latter should be used as a way to pressure the main lead to give up on the paper. Notice that this topic was brought up in the gibang: (chapter 119) However, the reality is that Seungwon is not just trying to fulfil his father’s dream, but also he has his own ambition. He wants to make a name on his own. That’s why he confessed this to his brother: (chapter 119) He doesn’t associate himself with the father and his sins. In his eyes, he is blameless. The reality is that he is guilty like his father, for he failed to care for Yoon Seungho. He failed to listen to him and his suffering. He didn’t try to understand him. Like mentioned above, he only sympathized with him and that’s it. Thus he condemned him for his debauchery in the gibang, but this was no longer the case.

When the father confronted his own son with reality (he had no power without him), Yoon Seungwon was once again absent!! The latter is the evidence of his “neglect”. It is important, because when the main lead bowed in front of the patriarch, (chapter 127) (chapter 127) the former only made a promise to his father and not to the brother. With his death, Yoon Seungho is no longer bound by a promise. Since the main lead had been living properly for 3 years and even passed the civil service exam, it is clear that for the brother, Yoon Seungho must have forgotten his past lover. He must have judged his brother based on appearances, just like he was behaving himself. However, this was just a subterfuge. He was waiting for the right time too. He had no change of heart, he had just been copying his brother’s behavior.

To conclude, the main lead abandoned Yoon Seungwon in the end for his loved one. It happened, when he not only rejected the marriage proposals, but also moved to that “poor region”. The sibling received his punishment for his lack of loyalty and his dishonesty. Funny is that the main lead actually followed his brother’s advices: 8chapter 118) He cut off ties with the past and the family!! This means that his words in the lord’s bedchamber came true: (chapter 78) Let’s not forget that at the gibang, Yoon Seungwon never revealed his true intentions towards his brother. The latter always said that his advices were for his best interests. He should become involved in the government. But everything was for the Yoons, or better said, for Yoon Seungwon’s sake. And there exists another reason why the sibling must have been embarrassed: This marriage! To conclude, Yoon Seungwon embodies the opposite values of Baek Na-Kyum and Yoon Seungho: ambition, corruption, forgetfulness, hierarchy/social norms, traditions and reality versus understanding, forgiveness, simplicity, closeness, modern family and happiness. Selfishness versus Selflessness. This explicates why the main lead gave up his success for the artist. However, though it looks like an exile, the reality is that he will gain popularity and admiration among the inhabitants. Why? It is because he is no longer making distinctions between nobles and commoners, he doesn’t see this place as a punishment, but as a heaven and as such he has a better perception of humans in general. In my eyes, he is bringing progress and change in the region. Baek Na-Kyum is already teaching the kids how to draw… so it is only a matter of time, until his lover takes care of the education for these children. This means that these words will become a reality: (chapter 6) He will think of the futures of those children because of his lover.

PS: Tell me, if you are interested in another essay. The question would be: how did lord Yoon die? Was he poisoned or not?

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: 🟦⬛Back to square one? ⬜🟥

Because the manhwaphiles are witnessing the downfall of the protagonist, people get the impression that history is repeating itself. It was, as though nothing has ever changed. Besides, in my previous essay, I had already outlined the similarities between the past and present and explained the reasons behind this resemblance. However, as you can imagine, we are not back to square one. Thus in this composition, I will elaborate the changes. And this can only be possible by contrasting the present with the past.

1. Monsters in Joseon society

1. 1. Yoon Seungho and his peers

The Painter Of The Night-philes can certainly recall how in the beginning of the story Yoon Seungho was perceived. He was introduced as a brutal and bloodthirsty monster, for he killed a servant in the open. (chapter 1) He was even called a psychopath, for he resorted to kidnapping (chapter 1) sequestration, threats (chapter 2) and blackmail and he initially showed no remorse. (chapter 7). On the other hand, he never got into trouble for his wrongdoings. Why? It is because he wasn’t violating social norms. (chapter 10) It was his right to punish servants, for they are not considered as humans but as propriety. As a lord, he could treat commoners, like it pleased him. Though murder is prohibited, even against a lowborn, (chapter 43), the reality is that nobles would never get into trouble!! As you can see, there exists a discrepancy between laws on the paper and the reality which was exposed by the rumors in episode 106. (chapter 107) The fathers would use their position and influence in order to cover up their children’s wrongdoings. And we have the perfect illustration, when the elder master bribes the governor. (chapter 127) That’s the reason why the younger generation could do everything! Though the lord appeared as a monster first, he became a “normality”, the more we got to read this story. Under this explication, it becomes comprehensible why lord Min was so sure not to get bothered by the authorities. (Chapter 101) He had bought the officers (“the guards”). This explains why Black Heart could threaten No-Name. (chapter 76) He didn’t need to dirty his own hands, he could simply frame him. Consequently, I deduce that he had learned this misconduct through the elders’ behavior.

1. 2. The old bearded men and their roles

Interesting is that in season 4, Yoon Seungho gets protected from prosecution by his father’s power, however the latter did not do it for his sake, rather to protect the Yoons’ reputation and influence. (chapter 116) This shows that neither Black Heart’s father nor Yoon Chang-Hyeon truly love their children, as according to Erich Fromm, love is knowledge, respect, care and responsibility. However, the elder master Yoon is totally ignorant about his son’s talents and good nature. Thereby, I see lord Seungho from season 1 as the perfect illustration of the corrupted world of the nobility. The monster “Yoon Seungho” was just a reflection from this ruthless and immoral society. Since he committed wrongdoings, his karma was to pay for his sins. It starts with a murder, and the main lead ended up killing people. He might have not broken “traditions” like the disregard of the yangbans against lowborns, but it is considered immoral. He had sinned and now, he is paying for his sins. Therefore his words in the prison resonate differently. (chapter 126) He expresses regret. He confesses his crimes, he killed people! This means that he is now siding with the lowborns. Their life is as precious as the ones from the nobility. Yet, note that in this image, the author didn’t drew his eyes. Why? It is because in the moment he executed people, (chapter 102) he was either not himself or he did it out of reflex to protect himself. He was influenced by his past experiences and as such traumas. In the shrine, it becomes more obvious, for he has a lost gaze. He is not even looking at his target. Finally, when he met lord Song, he did it to “protect” himself. (chapter 123) For me, in episode 1, the execution was triggered by his desire to protect himself and his traumas. And what is the common denominator between these three scenes? The father Yoon Chang-Hyeon! Don’t forget that the petition was the reason for their meeting. And now look at the actions from the patriarch. (chapter 116) He had given the order to eliminate all the servants, for they could represent a threat to his “treason”. This explains why the butler describes himself as the only survivor and witness. (chapter 86) And we see him giving the order to kill the surviving guard (chapter 125) Besides, he had no problem to order the assassination of his own son which was stopped by the intervention of a helping hand. The father had never asked to spare the main lead’s life. (chapter 124). He was his bad role model. But he is not the only one. There is another one…

And if crimes were to take place, then the nobles would find scapegoats in order to avoid punishment. Hence No-Name got so many tattoos in the end. (chapter 51) Once a criminal, always a criminal… therefore it is not surprising that the joker chose assassination as second work. By working for the nobles, he would be able to escape punishment, because if he got arrested, he could denunciate them. To conclude, justice is inexistent in Joseon. Yes, we are witnessing the downfall of Joseon, or precisely the king’s bad ruling. The latter is not capable of providing justice to anyone. And this coincides with the purge! (chapter 37) What is a purge?

The purge is the symbol for injustice, because it is connected to violence and intolerance. As you can see, the “fake servant” was exposing his true nature through his words. He should have said “sentenced” or “punished” or “executed” but not purged for treason! I am more than ever convinced that the old bearded man in episode 37 is the king. Those two words (“purged”; “treason”) are contradicting each other. In the first case, the authority is committing a crime by abusing its power, while in the second case, a group is plotting against the authority and as such is breaking laws. Finally, I would like to outline that Yoon Chang-Hyeon and lord Song got evicted from the government which coincides with the second signification of “purge” (chapter 107) “Stepping down” was actually an euphemism for removal. The officials were chased out, (chapter 80) but their evictions were turned into stepping down. (chapter 122) No wonder why lord Song came to resent the protagonist. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why the purge was not noticed by commoners. There was no fire and the staff was sparred. (chapter 37) And if they knew, people didn’t feel concerned… for they were violent, filthy nobles. Remember how the woman came to curse the gentry: (chapter 106) Moreover, we could see how an official came to murder lord Shin. (chapter 103) The boots were the indication that this person was working for the government. And it was an elder, for he was wearing this particular headgear. (chapter 103) (chapter 67) The murder of lord Shin is the evidence of the anarchy in Joseon. But actually, the monsters are actually everywhere, and not just among the nobility. The Chungin with the scholar and the physicians who have no problem to lie, participate in a kidnapping and drugging people… the kisaengs, the maids, the servants. They are all accomplices, for they feigned ignorance or chose to remain passive, for they preferred avoiding trouble. What people failed to realize is that no one is safe from this tyranny. Hence people could get killed and thrown into a well so easily (chapter 97) (chapter 101) and their perpetrators got scot-free. Why? It is because the mastermind and the helping hands are protecting each other, like we could see in the Joker’s case. However, the latter in season 3 had no idea that they would face divine retribution and pay with their life. (chapter 102) In front of gods, humans are all equal. There is no distinction between gentry, Chungin and commoners. That’s the reason why I come to the conclusion that Yoon Seungho is the divine hand of justice, he is bringing the “divine retribution”. This explicates this vision: (chapter 83) Under this new approach, it becomes comprehensible why he is called “the bird of misfortune”. People around him got to suffer, for they received their karma. Funny is that lord Song mocked him by calling him a grim reaper. (chapter 123) He underestimated his opponent, not imagining that the latter would use his sword against him. So he became a grim reaper. Lord Song Haseon must have thought that his minions, just like his age and status, would protect him. But no, someone had planned his death and counted on the main lead’s decision.

2. Karma and Baek Na-Kyum

What caught my attention is that Min even expressed the disinterest of the authorities towards peasants. (chapter 99) Thus Min’s karma was to die in the total indifference of others. No one is missing him, for he was turned into a brigand himself. (chapter 113) But wait… Why did Black Heart get killed in the end? One might say that it was his karma, for he had planned the murder of Baek Na-Kyum in the past. In my opinion, the uke serves as a representative of the divine retribution. The artist is the “judge” and his lover is executing the sentence: death. And we can detect this gods’ intervention through the learned sir’s case as well. Jung In-Hun had looked down on the artist for his origins and education. When the generous main lead chose to accept his apology (attempted rape), (chapter 120), the latter reminded him that contrary to Yoon Seungho, he was admired. He had such a good notoriety! Since he betrayed the artist and had almost him killed, the scholar ended up losing everything. (chapter 127) He became the scapegoat for this incident, for he played a huge role in the painter’s suffering (kidnapping, assault, murder and brainwashing). His success at the civil service examination was erased within a few weeks and now he is viewed as a brigand. How could such a person get selected as an official? His fate gives a bad impression of the civil service examination. And what is the common denominator between these two villains? They both belong to different social classes. Their cases is exposing the king’s negligence and arbitrariness. The latter is the perfect personification of this corruption. Not even Confucianism is respected, for fathers are abusing their own children or even killing them. Season 4 is exposing the chaos in Joseon. Therefore it is not surprising that the sacred tree and the shrine got burned. (chapter 106) The gods were using the humans to voice their anger. At the same time, when the woman made this comment, the Manhwa lovers can detect the huge gate in the background, the symbol for royalty. And now, you comprehend why Yoon Seungho was pushed to go to Hanyang. It is his fate to face the king! His task is to clean the palace of these old bearded men. (chapter 44) I had already portrayed him as a black shaman in the essay “Spirits and the lustful shaman“. And since he became a believer in episode 126, this means that he can fulfil his task, giving the king’s divine retribution. (chapter 65) Don’t forget that the monarch is the only one who stands above the laws, though he is controlled by social norms and his officials. In my opinion, this can only take place, when a new scheme takes place. How so? Note that in the scholar’s case, Jung In-Hun received his karma, but not real human justice. For me, he is not dead. Besides, don’t forget that someone took the petition from lord Song, before Yoon Chang-Hyeon came to the bloody place. There is no ambiguity that the accomplices and schemers didn’t get happy with the last outcome. The couple might be separated physically, but they are attached to each other by their strong love. And since the main lead kept wearing hanboks with the phoenix (chapter 34) (chapter 45), it indicates that someone saw him as his bird of fortune. And this can not be Yoon Seungho, for the latter was full of self-hatred. Finally, his own father, Kim and Heena called him as a bird of misfortune. As you can see, the king could no longer see the main lead due to the artist’s presence. He is his bird of fortune, for he could live out all his dreams thanks to him, and at no moment he got into trouble. No one is suspecting his intervention.

3. Though fate parts us once more

As soon as I read this whisper from the main lead (chapter 127) I recognized why the painter and Yoon Seungho had to go separated ways. It is because the schemers wanted him to return to Hanyang. Remember the learned sir’s suggestion before his departure. (chapter 44) Why? It is because now the main lead is an adult. Since my theory is that the pedophile is the ruler, he can no longer approach the protagonist like that. The latter is no longer visiting the gibang. He wants their path to cross again so that they can rekindle. Hence he had to create an opportunity proving that their meeting is not a coincidence. Under this new approach, it becomes comprehensible why Yoon Seungwon encouraged his brother to reconcile with their father. (chapter 37) That way, he would be “following” the tradition and become an official. But since Yoon Seungho developed a fear of “old bearded men”, he had no reason to go there. (chapter 44) This exposes that in his unconscious, the young man was aware that his suffering was related to the officials. But in season 1, their attempts (Jung In-Hun and the brother) failed because of Baek Na-Kyum. The latter had to leave the lord’s side. And this brings me to the following observation. Since the beginning of the story, people were used to make the commoner leave the protagonist’s side:

  • Lee Jihwa with the ruined painting and the murder
  • Min: the party at the kisaeng house, the orgy in episode 33, the kidnapping and murder
  • Heena: (chapter 46) (chapter 68) (chapter 97)
  • Jung In-Hun (chapter 111) (chapter 120)

I could mention Ýoon Seungwon, the staff, butler Kim, Deok-Jae and the kisaengs. And now, it is time to examine the circumstances of their farewell. (chapter 127) As you can see, the painter was feverish. Why? From my perspective, he was drugged. He was not allowed to see his loved one, because they don’t want him to remember their departure. The schemers desire him to feel abandoned like in the gibang (chapter 105). The reason why I am suspecting a drug is that this panel (chapter 127) is similar to the first Wedding Night: (chapter 21) At the same time, this scene is also a reflection from the night after the massacre in the shrine. (chapter 103) Back then, he was also under the influence of an aphrodisiac. They don’t want him to remember his last words. And since he didn’t take care of him during that night, though he was unwell, they hope to create the illusion that Yoon Seungho neglected him. He broke his promise. But their trick can no longer work because of the lord’s visitation in the prison and his words. (chapter 126) (chapter 127) The separation arc is there to prove these plotters wrong. Their affection is not trivial and momentary. He is not a plaything, but his “partner”. In fact, they have absolute trust in each other, and their source of strength will be their short happy moments together. Besides, I am quite certain that the artist will remember the lord’s whisper from that night, since he had problems to recall the First wedding Night and the incident in the shrine. Both are related to his bad conscience. Besides, I have another reason for that, the power of the unconscious knowledge.

Thus I am suspecting that neither the painter nor the lord will be in touch through a correspondence. They have to create the illusion that the main lead is forgetting him. This explicates why Byeonduck created 3 episodes where the silence and miscommunication between the two protagonists played a huge role. (Chapter 108) Though both were close physically, they still allowed others to manipulate them, for their trust was not complete. In other words, the schemers are thinking that time is working for them!! On the other hand, since Kim is by his side, the painter can only consider his presence as the evidence of the lord’s care. (Chapter 127) This coincides with the beginning of the Manhwa, when the lord was seen without his butler. (Chapter 1) The latter only appeared in episode 7, and back then Yoon Seungho had to dress himself. (Chapter 7) Finally, I am expecting schemes again.

4. Yoon Seungho a servant again

I have to admit my surprise, when I saw Yoon Seungho’s bow in front of his father. I really didn’t expect this, yet his decision makes sense. He swears to become his father’s servant. (chapter 127) This means that he is giving up on his status and freedom for Baek Na-Kyum’s sake. (chapter 127) And naturally, this reminded me of this scene with the straw mat beating. (chapter 127) Here Yoon Seungho had been treated like a servant, because he had been submitted to the straw mat beating. Exactly like in the past, there was a promise. Notice how similar the words are: “No matter”. (chapter 77) However, there exists a huge difference. Back then, the vow was made between the butler Kim and Yoon Chang-Hyeon. As you can see, Yoon Seungho is now copying his surrogate father’s behavior. (chapter 127) This shows that the young master is following Kim’s path. On the other hand, the domestic employed the future tense in his pledge (“I will do as he commands”), whereas the “spiritual son” is using the present (“I swear to live as you command”). Moreover, the main lead is talking about his way of life and not “order”. And what does the father desire? (Chapter 86) Making connections so that the Yoons can become influential again!! But how can he do that? By showing his talent? I have my doubts about it. Why? It is because in season 1, the lord was having sex with his peers, and back then they were like battles… for an exchange of favors. I hope, I might be wrong, but I fear that he is about to become a male kisaeng again. Or if not, then this is what the king is expecting from him. And we have the best example in this scene: (chapter 80) Sex against favors. Yoon Seungho has become the symbol of nepotism, though in reality he is the biggest victim of this. According my investigations, Yoon Chang-Hyeon was left in the dark about the pedophile. But now by asking his eldest son to “become his servant”, he is now responsible for his fate. This means that he can no longer “feign ignorance”. What is more important to him, his hatred for sodomy or his dream of power? By using his elder son, Yoon Chang-Hyeon can maintain his reputation and have a clear conscience. However, this makes him a hypocrite. Besides, why would Yoon Seungwon keep pestering his brother to change his life and go to Hanyang, when he “succeeded” with the exam? (chapter 118) Why does he need the protagonist? It is because he needs “connections”. And how can he get these connections? Through his brother. But with the last incident, it looks like Yoon Seungwon jeopardized the remains of his influence, for the noble ignored him. (chapter 127)

But let’s return our attention to the contrast between Kim and his adoptive son. (chapter 127) Another common point between Seungho and Kim is the bow. (Chapter 56) Yet, the domestic is only bowing with his head and not his body. The protagonist is dressed exactly like his father. This comparison exposes that my past interpretation was correct: the butler had awakened his master during the night by lighting the candles. And after receiving this letter, Yoon Seungho dressed himself in order to meet his childhood friend, which reinforces my theory that the valet won’t follow the protagonist.

Interesting is that the butler and his “adoptive son” are acting for someone else’s sake. Yet, the second divergence is that the protagonist’s vow is not affecting the painter’s life (chapter 127), while the butler’s oath was describing Kim as the helping hand to “fix” Yoon Seungho! In other words, at no moment, the valet was risking his life, whereas the main lead is now “sacrificing” his own life (“as a willing servant”) for the painter. And this brings me to the following observation. Why did Yoon Chang-Hyeon order the straw mat beating for his own son in episode 77? It is because the latter had failed the father’s expectations. He had not been able to have sex with a woman. (chapter 86) However, back then, he was considered as the eldest son. One of his duties was to continue the lineage (chapter 82) and because of the stolen kiss, the patriarch became obsessed with sexuality. Observe how lord Song Haseon described the father’s attitude. He knew about the atrocities that the young master was exposed to (chapter 123), but he chose to turn a blind eye, for he believed that the end justifies the means. This explicates why he left the room so quickly and abandoned his son. Yoon Chang-Hyeon’s resent for the eldest son came from his high expectations. This can only reinforce my past interpretation that Yoon Seungho is a new version of Prince Sado. Thus the elder master Yoon’s personality is based on king Yeongjo. Moreover, lord Song alluded to the execution of a prince ordered by the monarch. (chapter 107)

Yoon Seungho has a similar disposition. He also hoped to be recognized and loved, thus he was constantly looking at his father’s eyes. (chapter 55) But what did he see in his father’s gaze? Anger and disappointment, for he was never able to satisfy Yoon Chang-Hyeon’s expectations. (chapter 55) With the release of episode 127, I had this sudden revelation concerning this memory. In the past, I used to think that he had been submitted to the straw mat beating. But now, I think that in this scene, Yoon Seungho was forced to bow to his father by the servants or guards!! Yes, the former version of this scene. (chapter 126) This idea came to my mind, the moment Yoon Seungho emphasized his bowing! (chapter 127) The protagonist’s words imply that he had never done it before!! And now, you know why Yoon Chang-Hyeon agreed to make a deal with his eldest son. (chapter 127) Yoon Seungho’s bow and oath stand for blind obedience and loyalty. This explicates why the author drew him without eyes. (chapter 127) He believes that he has finally been able to tame Yoon Seungho. He has become the perfect “puppet or tool” in order to make his dream come true: POWER! Actually, he is hoping to restore the Yoons’ reputation and glory. (chapter 87) That way, he can act, as if the purge and the humiliation had never happened. So by submitting himself to his father’s will, it looks like Yoon Seungho is put in the same position than in the past. He is “exposed” to the harsh judgement from the patriarch. However, it is just an illusion. How so? First, what caught my attention is the absence of the protagonist’s eye. (chapter 127) The blue color and the absence of the eye are displaying the coldness from Yoon Seungho. He is not looking for recognition and love from his father. He is now totally indifferent towards him. Moreover, if you read my previous essays, you already know that the absence of “eyes” is indicating a lie, like here for example: (chapter 11) (chapter 35) Does it signify that the protagonist has the intention of betraying his own father? I don’t think so, but the manhwaphiles shouldn’t forget the lord’s wish in the kitchen: “I shall remember this moment for as long as I live”. (chapter 118) This shows that when the lord bowed to his father, he was thinking of Baek Na-Kyum in the kitchen. His body might be by his father, but his mind and heart were elsewhere. Thus I couldn’t help myself thinking that Yoon Chang-Hyeon will get betrayed and abandoned by his own son. During the same night, he made 2 vows. It was, as though he had two “lords”! His goal is to meet his loved one again. (Chapter 127) Finally, don’t forget that the main lead is following Kim’s path. He will have to choose between his father and the painter. Yoon Seungho is actually applying the father’s principle: the end justifies the means. So if necessary, he can break his vow to his father.

And now, you are wondering why. It is related to the deal between the father and son. (Chapter 127) It is because Baek Na-Kyum represents a leverage for the father to control his son. He is now replacing the petition. This coincides with Yoon Seungwon’s words: (chapter 116) I still believe that the painter has the original petition. And who is by Baek Na-Kyum’s side? Kim!! (Chapter 127) He is now in charge of the painter so that his pledge to the lord becomes a reality. (Chapter 108) By living by his side, he can lead a quiet life far away from Hanyang. However, this signifies that the artist has become a “prisoner”. As long as he lives in Yoon Chang-Hyeon’s claws, his loved one can not return to his side. Interesting is that a carriage was used to carry away the protagonist. (Chapter 127) Such a transportation was utilized for noblewomen. This can only reinforce the rumor that the protagonist has a fiancee! (Chapter 78) But where is the painter going? To the mansion? Or to another secluded place? In my eyes, the location is important. His existence is still a source of problems for the schemers. I see a future conflict in the lord’s life, for one oath stands in opposition to the other. Moreover, should the patriarch lose Baek Na-Kyum, he can no longer control his son. He can not suddenly blame the painter for the death of lord Song, for Jung In-Hun has been now convicted for the crime. (Chapter 127) The latter is now stigmatized as an arsonist and murderer.

Another reason why I believe that the actual situation diverges from the past is that the patriarch becomes “responsible” for his decisions. (chapter 127) He can no longer blame Yoon Seungho, for he is now just a “servant”. The expectations are also much lower. He just needs to follow his orders. Yoon Seungho is exempted from continuing the lineage. Moreover, Yoon Chang-Hyeon is now as the lord responsible for his son’s protection. Since he is his servant, he has to ensure his safety as well. That’s why he can no longer abuse like in the past. He is his tool to become powerful. This means that he is now dependent on him. Moreover, note that the father and son have a deal. (chapter 127) In other words, there is a certain equity. The painter serves as a leverage which reminds us of the deal between Baek Na-Kyum and his fated companion. (Chapter 7) In exchange for sponsoring the learned sir, Baek Na-Kyum had to go to his bedchamber and paint there. (Chapter 7) Now, the positions are switched. He is the one getting coerced! And this brings me to the following observation. Why did the elder master agree to this deal in the end? First, he refused to assist his son. (chapter 127) He believes that he has the petition, therefore he can no longer be blackmailed by his eldest son. The latter has no longer any leverage over him! However, he changed his mind. (chapter 127) For me, it is related to the bow. I noticed that the patriarch pays a lot of attention to “manners” and etiquette. Therefore the guards apologized on different occasions, yet the elder master always accepted their excuses (chapter 125) (chapter 126) Yet, in reality they were fake excuses. I have already pointed out that the servants would act on their own. But more importantly, their fake apology hid their failure as guards. How could they let the young master barge into the lord’s bedchamber? With a simple apology, this wrongdoing was overlooked. And now, observe what happened during the same night: (chapter 127) Yoon Seungho was followed by the guards! It looked like they were serving him. This scene reminded me of the officers’ appearance in front of the mansion. (chapter 94) This can only reinforce my theory that the main lead will turn against his father in the end. Keep in mind that there is a deal, so should the situation change (the painter’s desertion or the discovery of the second petition for example), the lord is no longer forced to keep his vow towards his father. Moreover, since Baek Na-Kyum got lied, “brainwashed” (chapter 125), “drugged” and slapped by Yoon Chang-Hyeon, he is destined to receive his karma through his son. And what was his dream? (chapter 86) He imagined that his second son would bring him fame and power. But now, the main lead is on his way to become “influential” turning the father’s words into a lie. Yes, the father and son needed to be together again so that the patriarch’s life lie would get exposed and ruined. Since he took the bloody paper (chapter 125) and paid the governor (chapter 127), he could get into trouble for it was, as if he was admitting his responsibility.

In addition, I would like to point out that the protagonist’s mentality is different from Kim’s! The latter advocates immobility and resignation., (chapter 87), whereas Yoon Seungho stands for change and hope. (Chapter 127) The latter is neither nihilist nor defeatist, for the painter has become his “god”, his religion. The hope to meet Baek Na-Kyum again will be his source of strength. He believes that the gods will help him again to have his wish come true. It is their destiny to meet again! (Chapter 127) Like announced in the last analysis, the lord is a changed man due to his new found religion. But this is not visible to the eyes. And the schemers are thinking that they are pulling the strings, while in reality they are themselves utilized as pawns by the spirits. Finally, the painter called himself a “plaything”, hence the schemers can jump to the false conclusion that they have still a chance to achieve their dream, like to punish the Yoons or to win the main lead’s heart. Finally, for me, this story is encouraging people to distinguish between fake heroes and from real saviors. (chapter 127) Where was Heena noona, when her brother was in prison? This rumor can only create the illusion that the painter is still devoted to the learned sir. Yet, after the last incident, the painter came to regret to have trust the learned sir. Both characters are now healed from their traumas (abandonment issues) and they are in full possession of their mind. This makes them less weak to manipulations.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

A Poem A Day/Jinx/ Painter Of The Night: The true Face of Family 👨‍👨‍👦‍👦👨‍👩‍👧‍👦

1. A Poem A Day and Family

The trigger for this essay was the K-drama A Poem a Day which I was recently rewatching. You might not know this, but I created this blog because of my analyses about K-dramas. Funny is that through them, I discovered Manhwas. That’s how I ended up reading BL-Manhwas which became my new passion. However, during my summer vacation, I was feeling nostalgic and melancholic, thus I decided to watch this terrific story “A Poem A Day” again. Like the title is implying, the story is revolving around poetry. In each episode, they included poems which were reflecting the situation, emotions and thoughts of characters in the series. And that’s how I came across this beautiful and touching poetry

The woman on the right is Woo Bo-Young. She is the protagonist of A Poem A Day. She loves poetry, but she couldn’t study Korean literature because of her family situation.

The poem gives a very good definition of family. A real family is when people share their pain, attachment and happiness. This signifies that their members have no secret, they are allowed to cry in front of others. Interesting is that the blanket, a pars pro toto for the bed, is a metaphor for the embrace. This explicates why in this image, the characters are presented as a family, as they are hugging each other. The blanket represents warmth and protection. Interesting is that this vision is rejecting the notion that men shouldn’t cry (“Cry together”). It doesn’t matter who is weeping. And now, it is time to examine more closely how this poem was illustrated in A Poem A Day.

In episode 6, Woo Bo-Young was spending the evening with her mother and her half-brother, for she needed comfort from her mother. When she was very young, her father died and left not only a huge amount of debts, but also an illegitimate son. That’s how Bo-Young and her mother discovered the existence of an affair. Despite everything, the mother decided to adopt him as her son. Because he didn’t share blood with Bo-Young’s mother, the woman made sure that he wouldn’t feel burdened or excluded. Thus she showered him with love and understanding which sometimes made Bo-Young question who was the real relative in this family. Though this jealousy is totally normal, this scene exposes their mutual affection. Simultaneously, this scene also displays the slowly drifting apart between Bo-Young and her half-brother and mother as well. At the restaurant, she didn’t share all her worries and emotions to her family. She didn’t get the comfort she had hoped. In other words, this poetry exposes her growing maturity and as such her quest to find a loved one! Yes, by finding a partner, Bo-Young will start her own family. On the other hand, this poem reflects how these 3 became a family as well.

And this drifting away is also symbolized by the birthday’s party Bo-Young organized for Lee Min-Ho. His own family had totally forgotten about his birthday. So when Bo-Young saw Min-Ho alone, she brought him to a buffet and offered him a cake. At the same time, the poem exposes the abandonment and betrayal from Lee Min-Ho’s family. He might live in comfort (“a sweet and soft ice-cream”), but he never felt part of his own family, for the parents only had eyes for the elder son. Thus they were never present for important events in his life. In other words, he could never voice his pain or share his joy and pride with them. He only caught their attention, when he caused trouble.

What caught my attention is that Choi Bum Young made a difference between “we become a family” and “be a family”. For him, family is not symbolized by sharing the same blood. The verb “become” insinuates not only change, but also something alive. Living under the same roof is not a synonym for family either (“No matter where you are”). As you can see, the house is not the symbol of a family. This means that the poem was exposing the existence of fake and true family. Under this new perspective, you comprehend why I selected such a title: The true face of family. Besides, the lyricist outlines that family is associated with hard work and trust. A family is created, when people feel safe and loved, but for that to happen, the members must open up their heart and their mind. That’s the reason why trust and respect are so vital. At the same time, the Manhwaphiles can grasp why the poet included the notion of effort. The person has to overcome the barrier, the fears. Hence it is not surprising that Choi Bum Young included the notion of struggles. Once the trust is there, the “you” is able to help the other. A real family is, when people face problems together. Therefore it is not surprising that the poetry emphasized the notion of “sharing”. The members should divulge their emotions and thoughts! Striking is the recurrence of the personal pronoun “You” which outlines the responsibility of a member. One has to share his agony or happiness to others first, if he wants to have a family. As long as the person doesn’t open up, there is no family. One has to take the first step and the others will follow. This explicates why the personal pronoun “you” turns into a WE! Thus this poem implies that Lee Min-Ho was partially responsible for his own suffering as well. He never shared his resent to his brother and parents. He should have argued with them much sooner, yet he let things happen. To conclude, family is not just made of sunshine and rainbows, but of clashes and troubles. Hence discussion is not excluded at all. To conclude, family symbolizes responsibility, faith, affection, communication, support and cover! The family is represented by the personal pronoun “we”.

As you can imagine, the moment I read this poem, I couldn’t help myself connecting it to Painter Of The Night and Jinx. Thus I decided to utilize the poetry as foundation in order to define the families in the Manhwas. Moreover, we can detect the evolution of families or we could say the loss and birth of a family. And the criteria in order to define a real family would be the embrace, the weeping and its acceptance, sharing the same cover, meals, secrets and emotions.

2. Family in Painter Of The Night

2. 1. Baek Na-Kyum’s “families”

When Na-Kyum had this dream, he was remembering his own family. (chapter 87) Not only the painter and the 3 noonas were sharing the same bed, but also they were taking their meals together. (chapter 87) They would even caress each other and laugh together. This scene oozes happiness. Consequently, it is no coincidence that during that night, they shared their honest thoughts to Baek Na-Kyum giving him good advices. But more importantly, the painter was there, when his noonas were struggling. (chapter 94) He cried in front of them. His tears symbolized his compassion and love for his noonas. He regarded them as his family. And it was the same for the artist. He had the noonas by his side, when he was in trouble or agony. (chapter 94) (chapter 107) However, at some point, it changed! (chapter 94) Jung In-Hun entered his life and consoled him. Thus I deduce that this image (chapter 68) represents a turning point in Baek Na-Kyum’s life. During that night, the scholar took away the young painter from Heena, hence he couldn’t help her. And now, observe the learned sir’s reaction. He didn’t allow the painter to cry. He shouldn’t share his pain. (chapter 70) In fact, he diverted Baek Na-Kyum’s attention from the incident to the moon. The learned sir was smiling the whole time. (chapter 70) He was acting, as if nothing had happened. The fact that he didn’t bear the tears from the painter exposes that the learned sir never considered him as a family. Therefore it is not surprising that he got abandoned, when the learned sir struggled: (chapter 75) But we have other scenes where Jung In-Hun didn’t behave like in the poem. When he discovered the truth, he had not been approached by Yoon Seungho due to his talent (chapter 19), he pushed away the painter. (chapter 19) He was mad, because Baek Na-Kyum was the cause for his sponsoring. (chapter 19) However, the family serves as pillar and protection. When the scholar’s pride got hurt, he rejected Baek Na-Kyum. He only approached the painter, when he needed him (chapter 10) (chapter 24) (chapter 35). (chapter 111) For me, in episode 10, he was definitely aware of the existence of a plot, thus he led the painter to the pavilion. Then in episode 24 and 35, he wanted the artist to spy on his benefactor. Finally, in episode 111, he knew that by taking away his former pupil, he would hurt Yoon Seungho, for he was aware of his affection for Baek Na-Kyum. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why Jung In-Hun didn’t bid farewell to the main lead in episode 44. Baek Na-Kyum’s presence was not necessary for the preparation for the civil service examination. And this brings me to the last scene between the learned sir and the painter. (chapter 118) He is now crying in front of him, as if he was considering him as a part of his family. He is trying to create the illusion that he shares his suffering, just like he shared his happiness during the parade. (chapter 111) But in the gibang, the learned sir changed his attitude towards his former pupil, for he kissed the painter. (chapter 117) It was, as if the former was starting his family. Baek Na-Kyum is now his “bride”. But naturally, everything is just an illusion. Why? It is because the Manhwaphiles never saw Jung In-Hun share his bed or room with the artist! (chapter 27) (chapter 38) He was also never seen taking his meals with him. This explicates why he never visited him, when the painter was sick. In fact, the learned sir is connected to the air and the courtyard. That’s the reason why he is always seen roaming around with Baek Na-Kyum (10: pavilion, 18-19-27-35-44: courtyard, countryside/city: 29-37-70 and ) But more importantly, he is not sharing his true thoughts and emotions to the young man. (chapter 118) He never explained how his face got bruised! This shows that he approached Na-Kyum for one reason. He was in trouble and he needed him. But he acted, as if he was becoming responsible for him. (chapter 118) (chapter 118) He didn’t expect a rejection. Why? It is because now, he was treating the main lead as family member. Nonetheless, don‘t get me wrong. In Joseon, servants were considered as a part of the household and as such of the „family“. I don‘t believe that the teacher views Baek Na-Kyum as an equal. Yet, the latter is in reality a free man. (chapter 118) Thus out of fear, he made a false love confession which resembles a lot to obsession and possessiveness. His words display his worries and despair. Another important aspect is the absence of the personal pronoun “we” in their conversation. We only have “you” and “me”. (chapter 118) (chapter 118) There is no union. Because he didn’t take the protagonist’s feelings into consideration, this “seduction” was doomed to fail. Thus I deduce that when the learned sir trampled on Baek Na-Kyum’s heart and loyalty in the library, (chapter 40), the latter learned the following lesson: Jung In-Hun had never been his new family. That’s the reason why he was so wounded. Therefore it is no coincidence that his karma is to be abandoned the moment he needs Baek Na-Kyum the most. But why did he not consider the painter as a family member? It is because he came from the gibang. Moreover, he was blinded by his desire to succeed on his own, not realizing the true role of a family.

And this brings me back to Heena and the noonas. The moment Jung In-Hun meddled in the painter’s life, the relationship between the noonas and Baek Na-Kyum deteriorated! And this coincides to these nights: (chapter 86) (chapter 107) The sexual abuse is something they hid from Baek Na-Kyum! They could never share such a burden with the protagonist. But there is more to it. In fact, Byeonduck illustrated the slow deterioration of Na-Kyum’s s family in season 2, 3 and 4. First, the painter couldn’t talk to his noonas like in the past: (chapter 46) He was forbidden to announce his departure which indicates that Heena was hiding something from the other kisaengs. Moreover, notice that he never talked back to Heena. He listened to her, though he was in pain. (chapter 46) He could only express his sadness with his tears. Then when Heena reentered his life, she was seen next to his bed while hugging. by his side (chapter 66) This means that she would no longer share his cover. This is no coincidence that in the gibang, the noona could no longer enter her brother’s room. (chapter 96) Little by little, Heena got excluded from the painter’s life. She could no longer share her meals with him. (chapter 93) This explicates why in season 4, Baek Na-Kyum can not penetrate Heena’s room. (chapter 105) She is hiding more and more things from her brother: her “illness”, her involvement in the murder of nobles and her lies. On the other hand, the painter still considered her as a part of his family because of her intervention in episode 68/69: (chapter 68) Their argument was reflecting their trust, though here the kisaeng was questioning her brother’s maturity. Due to her concerns, Baek Na-Kyum felt that they were still a family. However, I sense a rupture, when they argued in the kisaeng house. The artist was no longer trusting Heena’s words: (chapter 97) Interesting is that from that moment on, Baek Na-Kyum and Heena never faced each other! She didn’t join his side during the parade. This means that their argument in the kisaeng house represents their last reunion. And what did Heena do in this scene? She cried (chapter 97), while the painter didn’t, though he looked disturbed. (chapter 97) He lost all his colors. However, such a scene could be perceived as a sign of indifference, especially for the kisaeng. And this observation made me realize why the kisaeng asked Yoon Seungho not to reveal his suspicions about Jung In-Hun’s involvement to her brother. (chapter 105) Here, she implied that Baek Na-Kyum would cry out of pain and shock. But she had seen that he had shared no tears, when he heard about his murder: And it happened again in the shrine. (chapter 99) Simultaneously, the request from Heena exposes that they are no longer sharing agony and as such struggles. Moreover, this made me realize why the artist left the mansion after the nightmare. It was out of fear and obligation. For me, he had sensed that Heena liked the learned sir and as she was still part of his family, he had to make sure that this was not true. Yet, even after witnessing the faked crime scene, he still trusted Yoon Seungho. Hence I am deducing that the absence of tears is the trigger for their separation which stands in opposition to their embrace in the mansion: (chapter 66) . (chapter 68) And what was her reaction, when she saw her brother in tears and yelling at his lover?: (chapter 105) She remained silent, passive and rather indifferent. This impression gets reinforced, when she is lying next to her colleagues. She is not sharing her thoughts and emotions, rather pensive contrary to these kisaengs: (chapter 105) She is even turning her back to them. This displays the dissolution of this family. The kisaeng is no longer sharing her fears, her tears and emotions to others. Therefore she can not sense “happiness or relief” like the others.

But the gradual alienation between the protagonist and his noonas becomes more perceptible in season 3. In episode 93, they could share their happiness (chapter 93), but the moment the lord joined his side, the honesty started vanishing. Notice that the painter couldn’t talk about his past (how he met Yoon Seungho and how he got abandoned by Jung In-Hun). It was reduced to “I was caught up with something”. He had so many secrets that he couldn’t share to his noonas. And it was the same for the kisaengs. (chapter 93) They also had secrets, hence they were seen whispering. Baek Na-Kyum could confide less to Heena. Why? He sensed that the kisaengs might show no understanding. And note how the painter reacted, when he met his noonas in episode 105. (chapter 105) He lied to his noona, he didn’t voice his worries. He didn’t enjoy his time spent by the kisaengs’ side. He didn’t eat with them either. This is the sign that he was moving on, he was on the verge of starting his new family. In other words, this scene (chapter 105) corresponds to the bird flying from the nest which was witnessed by Heena and the kisaengs. Because the painter was not sincere to his noonas, it is not surprising that they acted the same way. Here, (chapter 105), the kisaeng’s words are a reference to loss of virginity. Yet the painter didn’t grasp the true meaning. Only in his dream and nightmare, he realized the significance of her words: (chapter 109) Hence I come to the conclusion that we are witnessing to the birth of Baek Na-Kyum’s new family: Yoon Seungho. (chapter 118) That’s the reason why the painter decided to run away with his lover. (chapter 118) However, in order to become a real family, the painter needs to call his husband like this: (chapter 72) Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why the noonas were no longer entirely honest with Baek Na-Kyum in the gibang. They couldn’t share their thoughts and secrets to the artist, as they had played a role in the separation of the couple (chapter 99) and the nobles’ execution. Besides, they also had secrets which they had to hide from their donsaeng.

2. 2. Yoon Seungho’s family

He never had a family to begin with. Why? First, the mother was neglecting him because of her hatred for her husband. This is what Byeonduck revealed. From my point of view, her detachment towards Yoon Seungho was linked to the first sexual experience and that her first son would resemble her husband. As for Yoon Chang-Hyeon, the father had definitely troubles with him. (chapter 57) I believe that it is related to the protagonist’s sensibility and intelligence. My assumption is that Yoon Seungho is a Highly Sensitive Person.

Therefore due to his particular personality, he could not share his thoughts and emotions to Yoon Chang-Hyeon and his brother, hence he expressed his emotions through painting. Moreover, due to his ambitious father, pranks were not well perceived. Therefore it is not surprising that he was forced to face adversity on his own, for he had no protection. Interesting is that Yoon Chang-Hyeon views the ancestors (chapter 85), his second son and even lord Song as his family (chapter 116) Hence they are sharing a drink, their secrets and emotions together, though it is obvious that the man in purple is deceiving the patriarch. However, the elder master still trusts and listens to his words. (chapter 107)

And what about Kim, the so-called faiithful butler? Was he not his surrogate father? It is the same. The latter never considered him as his family. Don’t forget what the butler said to the painter. (chapter 26) The latter was not allowed to cry! Therefore the artist heard the same reproach from the main lead. (chapter 26) The valet disliked the tears, because he refused to share the suffering. The reason is simple. If he did, this would have increased his guilt. Furthermore, Kim never shared the cover or his meals with Yoon Seungho in the past (chapter 83) and in the present. Here, (chapter 17) he even refused to bring him his breakfast. But one might argue that Kim cried in front of the protagonist in the shed, he even expressed regrets: (chapter 108) So we could assume that he was starting to view the main lead as a family member. But no… for me, it is just an illusion. First, note that he never let the lord see his gaze while weeping. Besides, the noble’s heart was not moved either. They were not crying together, a sign that the two were drifting apart. Moreover, in the shed, the valet never shared the information about the fire at the shrine. (chapter 108) The noble had to use threat and force in order to push the butler to voice his thoughts. Finally, at the end, the valet never vowed his loyalty to Yoon Seungho, but to Baek Na-Kyum. (chapter 108) Moreover, like exposed above, family in the poem symbolizes trust, love, responsibility, comfort and protection, but the valet failed to fulfil his duties which he admitted in the shed. As a conclusion, the butler didn’t keep such a promise. Moreover, what did the butler do after the painter’s abduction? (chapter 64) (chapter 64) He ran away. He never saved the painter, just like he didn’t argue with his master in that moment. But he could have, since the latter had no sword by his side. Imagine that he had a heated discussion with Yoon Seungho the very next day, and in the courtyard, the protagonist had the sword in the hand. (chapter 68) A sign that he knew that the noble would never slay him! And in the past, the valet had not come to his rescue, shared his suffering or defended his honor. And now, you comprehend why I am more than ever convinced that the valet was never Yoon Seungho’s family: no tear, no joy or no secret shared! His expression “bird of misfortune” embodies the gap between the two characters.

And that’s how I realized why the staff never cared for the couple in the end. It is because the staff would eat together, while Yoon Seungho and Baek Na-Kyum got excluded. In season 4, Yoon Seungho was even forced to give up on his own room for the painter and the maids (chapter 109) The latter would even get the opportunity to eat sweets and sit in the patio (chapter 109), while the lord was relegated to the courtyard. (chapter 109) And the poem mirrors perfectly the birth of Yoon Seungho’s first family. Baek Na-Kyum is his very first family. Thus he could share his pain, his fears, his resent, (chapter 62) and his hope to be happy for one moment: (chapter 63) I selected the terrible scene in the shed for two reasons. It symbolizes the verse “how to become a family”. This explicates why in season 3, the artist was slowly using the personal pronoun “we”. (chapter 78) This means that the two protagonists were learning how to become a true family. And one of this important step was “crying together” which occurred after the sexual abuse in the shrine, (chapter 102) However, Yoon Seungho had to learn the importance of “secrecy”! He kept his crime from his loved one hidden, not understanding that a real family is to “endure all hardships” together. Consequently, I judge this night as the finalization of their “Wedding”, though it is still not official. During this night, we have all the criteria. They share their worries (chapter 110), their happiness (chapter 110), they sit together while eating (chapter 110), they embrace each other, they share the same bed. And the lord makes the following promise: there won’t be any secret between them. He will share everything with his lover. (chapter 110) So when the brother gave the petition to the artist (chapter 116), he even reinforced their bond. It was, as if they had no longer any secret between them. Thus they talked about the document in the pavilion making sure that no one would listen to their discussion. (chapter 117) Therefore, it is not surprising that during that same night, the couple slept under the same blanket while hugging each other. (chapter 117) The symbol for the new family! But a family is not made just of two members! Is Yoon Seungwon a part of Yoon Seungho’s family? Let’s not forget that he considered the artist as his brother’s wife. (chapter 116) What caught my attention is that Yoon Seungho was not followed by his lover, when he met his brother in the gibang. (chapter 118) And this reminded me of this scene: (chapter 37) He wished to send away the artist, but the host refused. Then if you pay attention to his behavior, you will notice that none of them were seen eating together! (chapter 118) Neither in the mansion nor in the kisaeng house. The table between them symbolizes the gap between them. Another important detail is that his brother didn’t serve him a drink which is actually a custom in Joseon. (chapter 118) Compare it to Black Heart’s behavior: (chapter 43) In fact, the two guests were drinking on their own! Yoon Seungwon had even started drinking before the protagonist’s arrival. (chapter 118) Moreover, exactly like the scholar, Yoon Seungwon is just employing the pronouns “you”, “I” and “father”. There is no WE at all. (chapter 118) Moreover, he doesn’t want to share the pain and suffering with his father. And while he shared a secret with Yoon Seungho in the past, (chapter 118), I believe that he is hiding something from his brother again. Thus we see constantly him with a drop of sweat. (chapter 118) (chapter 118) Striking is that he is at no moment mentioning the painter, which actually represents the lord’s source of comfort and joy! He is more talking about the past than the present. He is hoping for a change of heart. That’s the reason why I come to the conclusion that Yoon Seungwon called the main lead as brother (chapter 118), but it is only a name! In reality, he desires to use the main lead. He needs him more than ever! Let’s not forget that the patriarch could discover Yoon Seungwon’s betrayal at any moment. Finally, I would like to outline that family stands for effort and understanding, nevertheless the younger master never showed compassion or worries for his brother, who had just recovered from a stabbing. His speech was full of blame. (chapter 118) Thus I conclude that Yoon Seungwon is not a part of Yoon Seungho’s new family and his smile in the library was fake. His words were just a lip service. (chapter 116) Don’t forget that during the same night, Yoon Seungho got stabbed and the younger master knew it.

And now it is time to examine the families in Jinx.

3. Family in Jinx

3.1. Kim Dan’s family

It is clear that though the grandma moved to the hospital (chapter 22), the physical therapist still views her as his family. This corresponds to the verse “no matter where you are”. This explains why he listened to her and started treating the champion differently. From my point of view, they became a family, because they slept under the same cover (chapter 21), shared their agony, fears (chapter 5) and their happiness together, though this needs to be relativized. (chapter 11). I will give more details later. Another evidence that they are family is that the grandmother would often sing him songs. Then we could say that the grandmother shares her meals with the doctor, for she is often saving yoghurts for her grandson. (chapter 05) She is happy, when she hears good news from her grandson. (chapter 07) When she feels lonely or miserable, she asks for his presence. (chapter 21)

Furthermore, she often caresses her grandson, a different form of embrace. (chapter 5) Nevertheless, there exist two negative aspects. First, I noticed that she didn’t question Kim Dan about his career, only when it was necessary. (chapter 07) She is not that involved in his current life. (chapter 05) Secondly, what caught my attention is that the halmoni is not letting her grandson weep. With her attitude, she implied that he had overreacted (“Now, now none of that”). (chapter 21) Moreover, the poem outlined the necessity of crying together (“be able to cry together”), yet the halmoni was not upset, when she found the little Dan in tears. She didn’t understand his abandonment issues. Thus I deduce that the shared agony was only in one way! If the grandmother was scared or suffering, her grandson should feel the same. (chapter 5) This explicates why Kim Dan was willing to sacrifice himself for his halmoni. (chapter 16) It is because he knew that her grandmother disliked tears. Besides, in a previous essay, I had already outlined that such an attitude was considered as abusive, for such a young child should have been shielded from harm. However, he was exposed to violence very early on. Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why Kim Dan started having secrets from her. Finally, the family portrayed in the poem implied the notion of effort and work. But the moment the grandmother refused to share his agony, she stopped putting energy in her relationship with Kim Dan. This means that as time passed on, she became more and more passive and relied more and more on the main lead. Another interesting aspect is that Kim Dan came to enjoy K-dramas because of his grandmother. (chapter 30) This shows that Kim Dan’s preferences are all influenced by the halmoni. We could say that he didn’t truly develop his own identity. It was, as if he had become the second version of “grandma”. And now, you comprehend why he rejected sex: (chapter 20)

Therefore it is not surprising that as time passes on, they are slowly drifting apart. Notice that he barely visited his grandmother. (chapter 30) Because the grandmother didn’t allow her grandson to share his struggles (no tears), Kim Dan has been hiding many things from his grandmother (chapter 07): the beatings from Heo Manwook, his firing from the hospital, the sexual assault from the perverted hospital director and the moneylender, his deal with Joo Jaekyung and the fact that he moved to the penthouse. This means that little by little, the physical therapist is sharing less and less his happiness with her. I doubt that he told her about his trip to Busan, his first MMA fight as spectator (chapter 15) and his first sparring with Joo Jaekyung (chapter 26). But this is a sign that Kim Dan is maturing. Therefore it is no coincidence that after their first day off spent together, Kim Dan is already under the champion’s spell. (chapter 30) And at some point, the grandma will notice her little boy’s transformation and the growing distance. And Choi Heesung could be the trigger for a first quarrel (chapter 30), because the doctor feels more attracted towards the champion than the actor. I have already outlined that so far, the physical therapist’s life had been determined by the grandmother. But a discussion is not necessarily a bad thing, quite the opposite, for to be a family means to share thoughts and emotions.

3.2. Joo Jaekyung’s “families”

So far, we don’t know if the celebrity has a family. However, what caught my attention is that Team Black is a company that Joo Jaekyung created for his personal needs. Though it is an enterprise (incorporation, where he is the shareholder), I noticed that Park Namwook treats the members like a family. They share their meals together (chapter 22) (chapter 26), they get support from each other (chapter 14) (chapter 23) or they argue (chapter 07). Moreover, they call the older members “hyung” (chapter 5) (chapter 23) which is another evidence that Team Black functions more like a family than like a company. What caught my attention is that the doctor is not addressed as hyung (chapter 30) but as Doc Dan or doc. (chapter 23), though the manager Park Namwook had introduced him as hyung. (chapter 07) The reason behind this different title is the champion. The latter addressed him like that: (chapter 22) It exposes that the physical therapist occupies a particular position at the gym. On the one hand, it could be interpreted that he has not been entirely adopted as a family member. On the other hand, the physical therapist didn’t exclude that he could have other clients. (chapter 25) This means that his “adoption” is not definitive and official. Nevertheless, I would like to outline that though Team Black’s structure resembles a lot to a family, we can not say that it is a true family. Why? It is because Joo Jaekyung is hiding many things from his hyungs and members. He is not sharing his problems to his coach (his insomnia, his jinx, his sexual orientation, his insecurities eg). Imagine that he preferred deceiving his admirer (chapter 15) than admitting that his shoulder had been plaguing him. And it is the same for Potato. He didn’t talk about the incident with the office room and the sofa. (chapter 25) According to me, Jeong Yosep knows about the true relationship between the physical therapist and the alpha black wolf. But he kept this information to himself as well. However, like pointed out before, family stands for communication and not secrecy! Moreover, so far, we only saw the fighters share their happiness. And what about their struggles or defeat? To conclude, Jinx is actually showing us the transformation of Team Black as company into a family. How they “become” a WE! Park Namwook does consider Team Black as his gym, but he has his own family. However, this is not the case for Jeong Yosep or Joo Jaekyung, who lives as a loner wolf! In my opinion, Team Black will turn into a real family, the moment Kim Dan loses his halmoni. Remember the quote from the poem: “If you can’t say you’re hurt when you feel hurt you’re not family“. Kim Dan won’t be able to hide his sadness and broken heart. In the beginning of the story, he lied to the coach and Kwak Junbeom about the reason for his injuries: (chapter 11), because he considered them as superior and colleagues. In other words, the fighters will share their pain with doc Dan helping him to overcome the loss. But this change can only happen, when the owner of Team Black has a change of heart himself as well. Remember how he pushed Oh Daehung and the other members away. (chapter 22) He didn’t want them to come to his house. (chapter 22) So far, he didn’t want people to cross the line, but thanks to the physical therapist, this will change. That’s how both protagonists will come to view more and more Team Black as a family. They will share their struggles and happy moments together. I have one evidence that Kim Dan is the key to turn Team Black into a real family. It is because Joo Jaekyung came to the gathering (chapter 9), though he had been avoiding such events in the past.

But in chapter 30, the Manhwalovers could discover that the champion belongs to an Entertainment agency as well. (chapter 30) But he is there an employee. Thus I am suspecting that the talent agency is working differently from Team Black. If there is a scandal, I doubt that the company would side with the star in trouble or they would try to find ways to get rid of the issue, like finding a scapegoat in order to bury the truth. As a conclusion, I am expecting to see companies run differently so that the readers can perceive Team Black as a family company, although it is an incorporation.

Naturally, there is no doubt that Kim Dan will become the champion’s real family. The author let us see such a scene. Right after their First Night together, the champion shared his bed with Kim Dan. (chapter 4) This was a reference to the blanket in the poem, though here Kim Dan slept in a cocoon. This was a sign that he didn’t feel safe. However, as time passed on, I detected a change in Kim Dan’s sleeping position. He is lying on his back and even in the middle of the bed. (chapter 29) It is because Joo Jaekyung always put him there! This exposes that the champion is still thinking that he represents a disturbance to the Sleeping beauty. One thing is sure: Joo Jaekyung will become the blanket taking over the grandmother’s past role: (chapter 21) At the same time, this signifies that Kim Dan will have a similar function in the champion’s life either. Thanks to his presence and embrace, the boxer will be able to relax and to fall asleep.

Another important detail is the doctor’s tears. When Kim Dan met the celebrity for the first time, the former started crying, when he thought hat he would get punished. (chapter 1) This was the reaction from the champion: (chapter 1) He questioned the cause for the tears. He was naturally annoyed (“the hell”), but he didn’t make fun of the doctor. And now, pay attention to the memory Joo Jaekyung had from their first night. He remembered his tears which had moved him deeply: (chapter 6) This shows that the celebrity is not judging the physical therapist as weak due to his tears. In episode 28, he even showed concerns, when he heard the doctor crying. (chapter 28) (chapter 28) He questioned the doctor once again, why he was in tears. However, he didn’t ask the doctor to stop weeping or to wipe his tears. He wanted to understand him. This exposes the fighter’s tolerance and interest in Kim Dan. For me, it reveals that Joo Jaekyung is willing to share the pain or fears with Kim Dan. Therefore it is not surprising that Kim Dan is remembering this moment! (chapter 30) He was allowed to express his emotions. Interesting is that this image is now connected to red, not to grey/black. (chapter 20) or orange/pink (chapter 30) The switch of color indicates the doctor’s increasing feelings and sensuality for Joo Jaekyung. That’s the reason why I am expecting that one day, the two protagonists will cry together, something that the grandma hasn’t done until now.

But let’s return our attention to the poem and its illustration in Jinx. A sweet and soft ice cream cone isn’t enough to become a family. Just because they shared one meal together (chapter 13), it doesn’t signify that they are a family now. And it is the same for the penthouse. (chapter 18) They might share the same flat, but the penthouse is so huge that they can technically live apart. Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan are slowly spending more and more time together, either because the champion feels like it (chapter 19) or it is necessary . (chapter 27) During the day off, they shared their thoughts,, their emotions (chapter 27) (chapter 27), their happiness (chapter 28) and their fears (chapter 27) (chapter 29) Because Joo JAekyung confessed his fears and health issues to Kim Dan, it shows that he was trusting him. For me, this night represents another step how to become a true family. “If you can’t say you’re hurt when you feel hurt you’re not family.” This day and night were so magical that it affected the protagonists’ life forever. From that moment on, Kim Dan is feeling more attracted to the champion, hence he is peeping at him. (chapter 30) And it is the same for the champion. Now, he is slowly regretting that they live in two different rooms and they have their own bathroom. Therefore he came to the doctor’s bathroom under the fake excuse that he had run out of toothpaste. (chapter 30) What was so funny is that he had opened the door like a huge bear. Why? It is because he was so annoyed how to explain his intrusion. (chapter 30) This shows that little by little, the champion is regretting his words to Kim Dan in the master’s room. (chapter 29) For me, he will be forced to recognize that work is not bringing him closer to Kim Dan, especially after Choi Heesung met the main lead. (chapter 30) For me, this scene is the bathroom represents another step how to become a true family. (chapter 30) However, like Mingwa voiced it, they have a long way to go, for Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan are hiding their true thoughts and emotions from each other. (chapter 30) Kim Dan had to hide his blushing, while the champion had to lie for his appearance. Moreover, the fact that he tried to hide his underwear (chapter 30) indicates that their intimacy has not reached its peak. He doesn’t feel comfortable around the athlete to be seen in underwear. Moreover, the champion is also hiding his jealousy and possessiveness towards the main character. (chapter 30) But like I said, they need to open up their hearts and mind in order to become a true family. From my point of view, the halmoni could play a huge role in their union. How so? It is because she entrusted her grandson to Joo Jaekyung. The latter also conversed with her (chapter 21) and even paid her hospital bills. She even took his hand (chapter 22) and gave him a yoghurt. (chapter 21) So the moment the grandma vanishes, it could also wound the champion’s heart, especially when his sex partner is so heartbroken. It would be interesting if the champion came to voice his feelings about her. If you can’t say you’re hurt when you feel hurt you’re not family.

And because the champion saved Kim Dan, paid off the debts and gave him a house and a place to feel safe, he embodies responsibility, trust, support and protection which is the true face of family. That’s the reason why the physical therapist is slowly transforming, developing his own interests and as such his own identity. But the closer the doctor gets to the champion, the bigger gap becomes between him and his grandma which can represent a source of conflict. And now, Choi Heesung met Kim Dan, thus he could disrupt the fragile harmony between Kim Dan, the grandma and Joo Jaekyung. Don’t forget that the grandmother is a huge fan of the actor and she is actually suffering from Peter Pan Syndrome. To conclude, Jinx is exactly like Painter Of The Night. We are witnessing the start of a new family breaking boundaries and taboos. Yet, both “families” are real and true, for they embody selflessness, honesty and trust.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: Terrific Power Of Love 🤍💖💢

Please support the authors by reading the manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the manhwa Painter Of The Night. But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents of Painter Of The Night.

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

1. Jung In-Hun’s kiss: his intentions

It was really a shock for many readers (including myself), when we saw Jung In-Hun kissing the painter. (chapter 117) I am quite certain that many were outraged and disgusted by the scholar’s smooching. First of all, why did the learned sir do it? One might say that it is related to the petition which is in Yoon Seungho’s possession. (chapter 117) The learned sir was tasked by the mysterious noble wearing a purple hanbok to retrieve the document. I would like to call my avid readers’ attention that we never saw the man introducing himself to the former teacher. He could have definitely impersonated someone, for this trick has often been used in this story. Anyway, in exchange for this favor, Jung In-Hun got promised a high position in the government.

The problem is that the villain can no longer enter the protagonist’s property due to Yoon Seungho’s final warning: (chapter 115) Thus Jung In-Hun has only one option left. He needs to utilize a spy and traitor in order to get the document. Because Jung In-Hun has known the painter since his childhood, it is not surprising that he chose to approach Baek Na-Kyum. As you can imagine, episode 117 is a new version of episode 24 (chapter 24), where the angry learned sir asked the naive artist to spy on their benefactor and episode 35 (chapter 35). In the latter, the scholar gave the same task to the main lead, but his attitude was totally different. He was acting like a gentle and concerned man, hence he stroke Baek Na-Kyum’s head and cheek. (chapter 35) He had two reasons for that. First, the painter was still recovering from his long illness. So he couldn’t act so coldy, for his selfishness and heartlessness would have become obvious. The learned sir had to justify his egoism and indifference. During his illness, he had at no moment visited him, but he had his reasons. (chapter 35) He hoped for the painter’s understanding. All this because he needed the low-born more than ever. He had not renounced on discovering Yoon Seungho’s weakness yet. However, in season 1, he failed to achieve his goal, because after the night spent with the main lead, Baek Na-Kyum refused to divulge any information about the meeting between the host and his brother Yoon Seungwon. (chapter 38)

This observation leads me to the following conclusion: Jung In-Hun is kissing the painter to order to obtain the painter’s heart and as such his support. He imagines that if he acts like this, the artist will be swayed and will listen to his request. This would mean that the artist would betray the main lead. (chapter 117) Hence we should consider the scholar’s kiss as the kiss of Judas. The latter, known as the Betrayal of Christ, is the act with which Judas identified Jesus to the multitude with swords and clubs who had come from the chief priests and elders of the people to arrest him. Thus I am expecting an arrest of the painter in the future. Since he is the love interest of Yoon Seungho, he has once again become the target of the next plot.

2. Betrayal or love?

However, I think that this interpretation (request to act like a spy and retrieve the petition) doesn’t reflect the whole situation. Why? It is because chapter 118 exposed the scholar’s despair. He was so under pressure that he began acting like a sexual assailant which divulgued his hypocrisy and recklessness. (Chapter 118) While he had faked his pity and empathy for the painter, when the latter was exposed to gangrape (chapter 118), the ending of the episode is showing him as a monster, acting like Min and his friends. (Chapter 118) How is his despair perceptible? First, the wounds on his face are displaying that he got exposed to violence.

The wound on the cheek can not be the result from Yoon Seungho’s punishment, though the readers saw the main lead slapping the scholar. (chapter 115) However, this is impossible. Time is the proof for the lord’s innocence. 7 days have already passed since Yoon Seungho’s violent outburst in front of the learned sir’s home. Don’t forget that it took Yoon Seungho 6 days to regain consciousness. (chapter 116) And the manhwaphiles saw that the painter spent the night with his lover after their conversation at the pavilion. (chapter 117) This means that Na-Kyum’s visit to the gibang could only take place after that night. That’s how I came to the conclusion that the meeting took place after 1 week (6 days+ 1 night). However, the swollen cheek will easily vanish within one week contrary to the stabbing. (chapter 117) Therefore after the release of episode 117, I had imagined that the wound from the learned sir was faked with the rouge from the noonas. Yet in episode 118, I detected the busted lip which can not be faked. The scratch is the evidence that the wound is real. Jung In-Hun knew too well that he couldn’t frame his previous sponsor for this. Hence he avoided to reply to the painter’s interrogation. (chapter 118) Furthermore, his cheek was perfectly fine, when he left his home. (Chapter 117) This must have happened on his way to the gibang or in the gibang itself! So who would do this? Yoon Chang-Hyeon? The noble with the purple hanbok? I will answer to this question further below.

(chapter 118) Striking is the darkness surrounding the learned sir’s gaze. The dark circles and the absence of light in his eyes is exposing Jung In-Hun’s stress and fear. He reminded me of Yoon Seungho from chapter 57: (chapter 57) It is less pronounced, for Jung In-hun only met this mysterious man once contrary to the main lead. Even Baek Na-Kyum noticed the transformation, hence he got scared. (Chapter 118) He couldn’t recognize his former teacher. The learned sir had become like a violent beast. But why would he be so frantic and hopeless that he became violent in his gestures and words? It is because he had been threatened again. The wounded lip and cheek are the evidences that he has been coerced to convince the painter that the latter should return to his side. (Chapter 118) His grabbing and yelling ooze urgency. One might think that the mysterious aristocrat with the purple hanbok is behind this, for he once voiced a menace towards the villain. (chapter 117) However, observe that in their meeting, Jung In-Hun spoke about affection (Chapter 118) and this doesn’t belong to this man’s world (power, lineage, yin/yang, education). And it is the same for Yoon Chang-Hyeon. The latter embodies hatred and rejection for sodomy! (chapter 86) He was even willing to kill his own son, moreover he threatened Yoon Seungho to have the painter killed. (chapter 116) That’s how I deduced that the person behind this intervention is actually longing and hoping for love from Yoon Seungho. Thus he requested from the learned sir to take back the painter.

This is the reason why Jung In-Hun also kissed Baek Na-Kyum. (chapter 118) The smooching was to persuade the painter that he was in love with the artist. This was the negative version of Baek Na-Kyum’s declaration of love. First, the confession (chapter 94), then the kiss (chapter 95) The artist had kissed the main lead for two reasons. He desired to convey the sincerity of his attachment and to prove that this was real. Yoon Seungho shouldn’t imagine that this was just an illusion, as he often questioned his own senses and sanity. In the gibang, the learned sir changed the chronology: first the smooching, then the confession. Why? It is because he thought that the painter still loved him, when Baek Na-Kyum showed concern for him. (Chapter 118) Due to his arrogance and vanity (the negative aspects of self-love), he jumped to the conclusion that nothing had changed. The painter seemed to be still naive. (chapter 118) Hence his surrogate father smirked. The irony is that there exist different kind of love: friendship, family… At the beginning, the artist was still viewing Jung In-Hun as a friend. Thus he got worried about his wounds. Yet observe that he had no intention to bid farewell to the former teacher. (Chapter 118) He is no longer considering him as a father figure, let alone a close one. Imagine the irony! In reality, the low-born was announcing to his former role model that he was abandoning him. Yes, it is the positive reflection of the scene in the library: (chapter 40) Jung In-Hun’s words came back to bite him. He is the one acting like a prostitute, like a man consumed by lust! (chapter 118) However, like mentioned above, my theory is that he was acting on the order of someone powerful. Consequently, I come to the deduction that he is reflecting Yoon Seungho’s sexual abuser, the pedophile. Thus the author added two mirrors in the room: (chapter 118) Baek Na-Kyum, as the mirror of truth, is not only confronting the scholar with his bigotry and dishonesty, but also the mastermind behind this encounter. This explicates why the learned sir spoke about love: (chapter 118) It reflects the pedophile’s situation, it comes too late. Because for me, the learned sir’s words are reflecting the abuser’s thoughts and emotions, it signifies that studying to his expressions is crucial. (chapter 118) Object of my desires caught my attention. This idiom is exposing that the person wants to possess the painter. That’s how Yoon Seungho was perceived by the pedophile. He only saw the main lead as a possession, as a doll… a male kisaeng. He never treated the protagonist as a person and showed no real respect. Moreover, object of desires made me think of the mirror of erised from Harry Potter once again. Thanks to Yoon Seungho, the man could outlive all his sexual fantasies … which is in reality an illusion. Furthermore, my theory is that they had a fake BDSM relationship. Fake because it was never consensual, hence Yoon Seungho was forced to accept such a sexual habit. And what did the painter reply to his former teacher‘s fake love confession? (chapter 118) This was the same for Yoon Seungho. The sexual abuser had only been obsessed with his own reflection and desires to the point that he never paid attention to his sex partner’s gaze… the loss of light in the gaze, the absence of tears … Besides, there was no agreement, everything was based on coercion and Kim knows that. That’s the reason why Jung In-Hun had tears in his eyes! It is because the main lead used to cry as well… asking for his pity and mercy. Since the scholar never cried before, I believe that the latter had asked to shed some tears in order to move the heart of the counterpart. (chapter 118) That’s what the sexual abuser had experienced in the past. Note that even when the painter was crying, the learned sir never wept. Hence these were just crocodile tears, for the learned sir had a goal in his mind: he needed the painter’s heart. Love is not war, hence using strategies can never conquer a heart, Tricks can never serve as a good foundation for a marriage. Trust, sincerity, mutual respect, empathy, selflessness are necessary.

We have another clue that behind the learned sir is standing the lord’s sexual abuser: (chapter 118) Baek Na-Kyum was never his young protégé, only his student. Why? It is he never protected him, he just consoled him! (chapter 94) However, like I had already outlined, Yoon Seungho was offered “protection” in exchange for his favors. That’s how the main lead got rewarded with the mansion and the proprieties. But now, Yoon Seungho is willing to give up on everything for Baek Na-Kyum. (chapter 117) This means that he is already cutting off ties with his fake protector. Yes, the latter was never his savior, because even now, he allowed Yoon Seungho to become wounded! If he had been serious about his promise, then he should have stopped Min and the other from meddling in the main lead’s life. No matter what… he has to keep the main lead by his side.

But I have another reason to suspect that the pedophile must have intervened. The wounds of the teacher reminded me of this scene: (Chapter 11) Back then, the painter had the burst lip and the glowing cheek too. (Chapter 11) He had protected Jung In-Hun, when the latter was suspected of ruining the painting. And how had Yoon Seungho acted in that scene? He had spoken like a powerful person, like a ruler! (Chapter 11) As you all know, my theory is that behind the name “lord Song” is hiding the king. But since I made a connection between episode 11 and 118, I deduce that Jung In-Hun has been put in the same position than the painter. His karma… for feigning ignorance and letting Baek Na-Kyum take the fall. He is paying for his wrongdoings all at once (11, 29, 35, 40). And what had Yoon Seungho said to his future lover? (Chapter 11) (Chapter 11) Yes, so far no one has been talking or thinking about the king as someone involved in the main lead’s suffering. Yet, I would like to outline that the gibang belongs to the state and as such to the king. Only a rich and influential person could hire the kisaengs for the day (chapter 118) Not even “lord Song” or lord Haseon from episode 107 couldn’t pull such a trick. (Chapter 107) He had announced his visit and the kisaengs had to gather next to the gate. There, the mysterious man selected only one woman. (Chapter 107) However, in episode 118, the kisaeng talking to Baek Na-Kyum expressed that there were different parties. Each kisaeng was participating in a different festivity (“It’s not usually this busy”). She would have mentioned it, if there was a huge party in the gibang. But there is another clue for the king’s intervention: the pipe is no longer visible in the noonas’ room (chapter 96: it’s on the table), just like there are now two mirrors and the number of rouge has also increased. (Chapter 118) Finally, this painting, Hokjado, is actually mocking the monarch. (chapter 105) The tiger in the painting usually represents the ruling elite, and its ridiculous expression is a satirical commentary on their behavior. He is here portrayed as a lazy man focused on smoking and pondering.

But why did Jung In-Hun wait for so long? It is because the schemers knew that the artist would never leave his lover’s side, as long as the main lead was unconscious. (chapter 116) It signifies that this panel is a new version of this scene: (chapter 103) And what is the common denominator between these two scenes? Both protagonists rejected the help from the staff, especially from butler Kim.

Additionally, I am suspecting that the schemers needed to wait for the recovery of Yoon Seungho for another reason! The latter had to witness the betrayal from his loved one. Yes, episode 118 gave us another clue for this: Jung In-Hun is ready to drop all his principles out of “love”, whereas in verity it is for his own sake. From my perspective, the schemers were slowly losing their patience. They must have recognized that they were running out of time! Yes, time is on the couple’s side. The longer the painter remained by Yoon Seungho’s side, the more power Baek Na-Kyum would have over the protagonist’s heart. In other words, he is escaping from the claws of the pedophile. The walk through the mountain announced a turning point in the main lead’s life. (chapter 102) He was already giving up on everything, even his own life, if he had not the artist by his side. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why killing the painter is not the first option for the pedophile.

For him, the best solution is that Yoon Seungho witnesses the painter’s betrayal and abandonment. However, he needs to be comforted by a close one… so that he doesn’t feel totally alone and abandoned, because he could decide to commit suicide again. That’s the reason why Yoon Seungwon is trying to convince his brother to find a new goal in life, to start a new life. (chapter 118) He is implying that he should take the exam and get a high position…. he should go to Hanyang. That way, he would cross the path of the ruler. Striking is that the young man employed the expression “bondage”. Is this a reference to BDSM? For me, Yoon Seungwon is helping the invisible hand which explains why he is betraying his father again. (chapter 118) He did it in the past, and he is repeating his actions. He shows no regret or remorse for the past (chapter 118) except his promise: (chapter 118) In fact, he blamed his brother and his father for everything, even Yoon Seungho’s way of life. His concern and affection for Yoon Seungho are totally superficial and trivial in the end. Why didn’t he ask about his wounds? He met him the next day after he regained consciousness. (chapter 118) Finally, I would like to outline that by saying “my father” he is actually excluding Yoon Seungho as family member contradicting his own words (brother). (chapter 118) It was, as if they had two different fathers. Note that despite the father’s cruel action, the young noble still calls Yoon Chang-Hyeon as “father”. To conclude, Yoon Seungwon doesn’t consider the protagonist as his brother despite his words. The younger master is the reflection of the learned sir, the one faking “love, honesty and concern” for a close one, whereas in reality these persons are more worried about their own future and comfort. (chapter 118) But the elder brother is no fool, he even starts questioning Yoon Seungwon’s actions: (chapter 118) Who gave Yoon Chang-Hyeon the idea that they could enter the palace again? It can not be the patriarch, for he would have asked for this much sooner. I come to the conclusion that back then, the Yoons got fooled concerning the cause for the treason. They were told that it was because of the petition… hence the younger master chose to hide the document by his brother. (chapter 118) From my point of view, he must have listened to the suggestions of an adult, for he was back then too young to understand what was happening. On the other hand, the monarch condemned the elder master for the fake reeducation (“pretense”). (chapter 37)

Among the indicators of democratic institutions in Korea, the one I want to address in today’s column is that of petitioning. Joseon people could petition the king or the government for all kinds of things. It was acceptable, and oft-seen. It was not a rare or dangerous thing to do ― it was the heart of interaction between the government and the people.” Quoted from https://www.koreatimes.co.kr/www/opinion/2023/05/739_281254.html?utm_source=KK

Thus I come to the conclusion that the petition is in reality the evidence of the Yoons’ innocence, yet the schemers had to maintain this lie alive. Hence Yoon Seungho was portrayed as a blackmailer (chapter 107), whereas the main lead had decided to protect his family despite their betrayal and abandonment. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why Yoon Seungwon has no interest to expose the petition contrary to the past. (chapter 118) It is because he knows the truth now. Nevertheless, he is choosing to keep his brother in the dark, for this revelation would make him appear as a liar. He definitely feels bound by secrecy. (chapter 76)

As you can see, both protagonists got to hear a confession… (chapter 118) (chapter 118) Both were supposed to ooze concern, affection and regret, as if they wanted to redeem themselves. However, the verity is that their actions were actually exposing their despair, selfishness, greed and their superficiality. Once again, they were betraying their acquaintance for their own interest. The lack of empathy for the main lead can be detected, when Yoon Seungwon portrayed him as a lucky person. (chapter 118) For this winning hand, Yoon Seungho had to suffer a martyrdom. Hence it becomes comprehensible why he is envisaging to renounce on everything. (chapter 117) He was only happy by the painter’s side.

In addition, the confessions from Seungwon and In-Hun have another common denominator: crime! In the final panel, Jung In-Hun appears as a lunatic on the verge of raping Baek Na-Kyum. (chapter 118) It is because he has been rejected!! (chapter 118) This reminded me of the rape at the pavilion. (chapter 25) On the other hand, I had made this connection, even before the release of episode 118. Why? It is because through deductions, I had already come to the conclusion that this was a stolen kiss.

3. The scholar’s downfall: kiss and prostitution

What caught my attention is the progression of the intimacy between Jung In-Hun and his student. First, he kissed his hands (chapter 24), then he hugged him (chapter 29). While the first embrace took place in a deserted area (close to the port), the second hug was witnessed by many people. It was in the open, moreover the so-called “hero” had jumped off the horse during the parade which could only catch the attention from the crowd. (chapter 111) Between the two embraces, we shouldn’t overlook the caresses on the head and cheeks which I mentioned above. As you can imagine, the kiss of Jung In-Hun represents the climax of their intimacy. Striking is that the affectionate gestures always took place in public (street twice and the courtyard).

So it looks like the scholar’s smooching contrasts to the previous scenes. However, this is just an illusion, because Jung In-Hun kissed the artist in the gibang, the symbol of prostitution! Since season 1 I had connected him to prostitution, and I had always predicted that the learned sir would end up selling himself for his own interest. What I had not expected is that he would offer his body to Baek Na-Kyum!! 😮🤮 Thus I interpret that the prostitute is not the painter, but the learned sir. He is giving up on his principles out of fear, greed and hatred! (chapter 34) His kiss is displaying his hypocrisy, which the artist could only feel. Hence he didn’t reciprocate the smooching. His lips remained immobile. (chapter 117) At the same time, this signifies that Jung In-Hun is trying to replace Yoon Seungho! This is the negative version of the First Wedding night! (chapter 19) Therefore I come to the conclusion that this kiss is like the embrace from episode 29: fake! It is because the learned sir needs him! This statement stands in opposition to the protagonist’s love confession. (chapter 117) The latter is willing to give up on his possessions and comfort for his lover. (chapter 117) His presence and affection represent the biggest treasure for Yoon Seungho. Baek Na-Kyum is his only source of joy and happiness. However, for the learned sir, the “need” has a different foundation. He can lose everything, if the painter doesn’t choose him. And if he were successful, he would even get power! As you can sense, for the learned sir, Baek Na-Kyum is just a tool, while for the Black Knight, he is a necessity! Without him, he has no reason to continue living. Jung In-Hun is desperate to survive, while Yoon Seungho is pushed to give up on his suicidal thoughts THANKS TO His father: (chapter 116) If he dies, the painter will follow him in death. However, the lord doesn’t desire to be the cause for the artist’s death. He seeks to make him happy. Thus he needs to survive in order to protect him.

Under this new light, the manhwaphiles can grasp why I selected “Terrific power of love”. The learned sir is betting his life that this kiss will move the artist and out of his adoration for him, Baek Na-Kyum will betray his lover. He still believes that he has power over the painter’s heart. We could detect his arrogance in their first reunion: (chapter 111) His gaze oozed not only arrogance, but also blindness. Imagine that he was smirking in front of the painter while looking at the wealthy aristocrat. It was, as though he thought that the artist wouldn’t notice his disdain and vanity. He imagined that the artist was still naive and ignorant like in season 1. This explains why the painter expressed his disapproval about the learned sir with a smile later: (chapter 111)

On the other hand, the problem for Jung In-Hun was how to reach the painter. The scholar couldn’t encounter the protagonist by chance in the street either, like in episode 111 (chapter 111), for Baek Na-Kyum is always accompanied by his soul mate (chapter 40, 45, 74-75, 91-97, 104-105) In addition, people would have recognized him due to the previous parade and noticed his interaction with the artist. Nevertheless, the villain needed privacy, as he was inciting the main lead to commit a wrongdoing: betrayal towards Yoon Seungho. So their meeting could never be mere coincidence and happen in the open. Their reunion had to be planned properly and in secrecy. Thus it signifies that it had to happen behind the dark knight’s back. I would even add that the beloved couple needed to be separated! And now, you comprehend why their meeting had to take place in the gibang! In season 3 and 4, the kisaeng house is the place where the main leads got separated from each other, though the intervention from the noonas didn’t always work like expected.

  • chapter 93: – first separation, for Yoon Seungho had to take care of the noona Heena Here we witnessed his return. However, the kisaengs badmouthed Yoon Seungho (chapter 93) Their attempt was to create a riff between the couple.
  • Chapter 94: Second separation. Why did Yoon Seungho go to the well back then (chapter 94), when the painter thought that they would go to the pond. (chapter 94) Why didn’t the artist follow his partner right away?
  • Chapter 96: Heena was supposed to interrupt the couple, but this attempt failed. (chapter 96) She intervened too late, and her brother didn’t notice her presence.
  • Chapter 97: People outside the gibang had to meddle forcing the main lead to leave the painter’s side. We know that it can not be the kisaengs due to this statement. (chapter 99) Yet, we never saw the face carrying the light (chapter 97) But it can not be the officers, for they were carrying torches. (chapter 97) Yet, the light in the previous image is nearer to the ground than to the top of the door. Besides, carrying a torch in a building made of paper and wood is quite dangerous. For me, the person approaching their suite could only lift such a candle light (chapter 19) We have two possibilities left: the kisaeng Heena or the butler. (chapter 98) This confrontation didn’t occur in episode 93, for the kisaeng’s back was illuminated by the candle light, whereas the room was darker in episode 93. (chapter 93) The light was standing further away from her in this picture. Hence I deduce that the lord must have revisited the kisaeng during that night. Because she was not holding the candle light, I can only deduce that the person witnessing this second conversation was butler Kim! Besides, we have another allusion to him through the reflection of episode 19 and the first Wedding night. Then later, Heena tried to convince her brother to leave Yoon Seungho’s side (chapter 97) by blaming him for Jung In-Hun’s murder, but her intervention failed. In reality, the separation could only take place thanks to the intervention of Yoon Seungho’s staff. In episode 97, the servants were definitely manipulating the painter with this corpse (chapter 97), whereas in episode 98, the maids had to play their role as well: badmouthing their master (chapter 98). He was a cruel and violent lord!
  • Chapter 105: Here the couple was separated again. While Seungho was with Heena, the painter was kept busy with his noonas. They all tricked the couple. Whereas Heena faked her recovery (chapter 105: Heena was strong enough to follow her brother to the door, and this quite quickly, for she witnessed their argument), the other cast doubts in Baek Na-Kyum (chapter 109) and finally the third one lied to her donsaeng. (chapter 105) Yoon Seungho had mentioned that he would return to the kisaeng house in order to fetch his lover. (chapter 105) Yoon Seungho was just thinking of a momentary separation, whereas the kisaeng implied that his departure was definitive. This shows that they had hidden the main lead’s true intention from the painter. This was no coincidence in my eyes.

Consequently, I deduced that this kiss was the result of the involvement of many people (kisaengs, noblemen and the king) and in particular of Yoon Seungho’s staff. We could say that this is the evidence of their betrayal, for they leaked information to an outsider. (chapter 118) However, I believe that Jung In-Hun was lying, for his visit could be leaked to the owner of the mansion. He has no idea that no one is siding with the main lead. But by saying this, he was covering up for the gibang, and as such Heena. She was definitely her source of information.

Moreover, who is convinced that the painter’s affection for the learned sir is not trivial and fleeting? Heena! (chapter 68) Why? It is because she has always loved the learned sir and projected her own thoughts and emotions onto the artist. In my eyes, this encounter is to prove the kisaeng wrong, to confront her with reality and her prejudices. What caught my attention is that each time, the painter couldn’t meet Heena, her absence was justified that she was serving a nobleman outside. (chapter 93) (chapter 99) (chapter 118) In my opinion, her absence has a purpose: Baek Na-Kyum should never suspect her involvement in this meeting. (chapter 118) Notice that the painter is already thinking that she was not expecting him. Yet, it is clear that he would come to the kisaeng house, for Yoon Seungho had been invited by his brother. The invitation had already been proceeded the day before: (chapter 117) So if something were to happen, Heena could feign ignorance and as such innocence. After their last argument, the noble has learnt that he shouldn’t keep his distance from the artist and he should confide to him, hence he talked about elopment at the pavilion.

This image (chapter 117) exposes the complicity of Heena, especially if you consider it as a new version of this scene: (chapter 97) Back then, the noona was also scared, for she was trembling and became quite rough, a sign that she had been threatened as well. But she is not working alone. From my perspective, she is supported by her sisters. The presence of the second mirror is the evidence of their complicity (chapter 118). On the other hand, I don’t think that they are aware of the truth.

The moment I saw the kiss scene from episode 117 (chapter 117), I couldn’t restrain myself connecting it to the one from episode 19, the First wedding night: a stolen kiss. (chapter 19) I had already pointed out the revelance of stolen kisses (chapter 25) (chapter 77) in a previous analysis. However, I will only focus on the comparison between episode 19 and 118, for both represent a first kiss!

First, the smooching between the hypocrite and the low-born occurred in front of a closed door. (chapter 118) And remember that in episode 19, the painter had caught the main lead by surprise, when he entered the room. (chapter 20) Back then, he wanted to discuss about the vanishing of the bottle. Observe the contrast:

chapter 19chapter 118
door opendoor close
the gibang – the studythe gibang – private room of the noona
witnessno witness
nightday
Baek Na-Kyum is aloneBaek Na-Kyum is alone
Baek Na-Kyum drunk – heartbrokenBaek Na-Kyum levelheaded and happy
Baek Na-Kyum got rejected by the scholarJung In-Hun got rejected
Baek Na-Kyum is invited to join Yoon Seungho in order to show the erotic paintingThe painter is not invited to meet Yoon Seungwon
a painting: an important paper (erotic publication – a wrongdoing)a petition: an important paper (crime)
the absence of the noonas – they were not introduced yetthe absence of the noonas

And what had happened in episode 19? Min had tried to play a trick (the expensive wine) in order to approach the artist and even taste him. As you can imagine that I could only come to the conclusion that the encounter from episode 118 had long be planned… even the kiss! This was not done on impulse contrary to episode 19 (chapter 19) And this was the same at the pavilion: (chapter 25) There, the lord imagined that with the kiss, he could reinitiate the first wedding night, but the opposite happened. This led to the painter’s rape. This happened, because the main lead’s anxieties and pain had been triggered. Once he had tasted the tenderness from the painter, he could no longer forget it. And what had said Yoon Seungho back then? (chapter 25) Thus I am deducing that this scene (chapter 118) has an important function in the couple’s life: to trigger their memories! Yoon Seungho has long forgotten that he got raped, He was brainwashed that he led a life of debauchery in order to provoke his father and he still believes this manipulation: (chapter 118) A lie that everyone around the main lead has kept alive… even Yoon Seungwon! But since the main lead has now opened up his heart to Baek Na-Kyum (chapter 96), this means that he has finally accepted his homosexuality. Consequently, the sexual abuser could have the impression that he just needs to remove the painter from the main lead’s side and that’s it. He can replace the artist… impersonation once again!

Besides, don’t forget that the lord’s confession in the very same room is connected to greed and possessiveness: (chapter 96) These notions are all reflected in the confrontation between Baek Na-Kyum and Jung In-Hun: (chapter 118) It was, as if the painter was a prize. Now, he only has eyes for the protagonist, whereas he only felt contempt towards him before.

When I saw this panel, (chapter 118), I couldn’t help myself thinking of the embrace between the two main characters. (chapter 105) Hence I came to the conclusion that the stolen kiss from Jung In-Hun represents a farewell, though the learned sir has no idea of this signification. Thus I thought of Judas’ kiss. The learned sir failed to achieve his goal exactly like in season 1. Even back then, he was distressed and under pressure, for he had recognized that he needed to pass the civil service examination first.

Because Jung In-Hun refused to listen to the lord’s warning, (chapter 115) the scholar will be soon confronted with reality: (chapter 115) In my opinion, he will be framed for the incident in the shaman’s house.

Why? It is because Jung In-Hun is behaving like a monster, and he mentioned the incident in the shaman’s house just before. (chapter 118) While the learned sir considered his words as a love confession, they actually appear as an admission of his complicity. He is recognizing that he knows. In addition, the absence of his glasses is the evidence of his wrongdoing. The moment the learned sir gave his spectacles, he knew that Black Heart and his helpers had planned to hurt the main lead. So the scholar was indeed an accomplice. (chapter 115) Hence I have the impression that this stolen kiss will have huge repercussions not only for the learned sir, but also for Heena. (chapter 118) Observe that the painter wanted to ignore the words from the fake teacher. So he could have a change of heart and report the incident to the authorities. He doesn’t know that his lover killed Black Heart and his friends. The learned sir was admitting that his nightmare had truly happened. (chapter 118) Hence the learned sir could get into trouble.

As for Heena, she loves the learned sir, and with this stolen kiss she is actually confronted by her belief. (chapter 68) The learned sir’s feelings for the artist were actually fleeting and trivial! He never had Baek Na-Kyum’s interests in his heart. He used the painter for his own benefit. But will she recognize this in the end? And if she advised the pedophile, then her words could backfire on her, for this trick didn’t work out. If so, she could come to resent her brother, for the latter led to the learned sir’s demise. Remember my prediction: the former scholar’s death.

But why did the scholar make such a move in the gibang? Yoon Seungho is not far away from his loved one! It is because the schemers want him as a witness. All along, betrayal and abandonment play a central role in this story. This came truly to the surface in season 3: (chapter 83) (chapter 88) From my point of view, the schemers are projecting their own thoughts and emotions on Yoon Seungho. Moreover I am quite certain that they have already calculated the possibility of a rejection. The painter’s so-called wrongdoings from season 1 (chapter 11: the ruined painting, chapter 29: desertion) and season 2 (chapter 61: the desertion) were all perceived as rejections. If he is caught with Jung In-Hun alone, they anticipate that Yoon Seungho will react like his father. He won’t be able to discern the truth. Baek Na-Kyum is not faithful and is now tainted. Or even worse… Yoon Seungho might commit a crime. This thought seems to contradict my previous statement: Jung In-Hun is acting on the pedophile’s order. Nonetheless, my theory is that there exist two conspiracies:

The one with “lord Song”, though for me, there are at least 3 “lord Song” as they look different (beards-hanboks, hair insertion: the ear serves as orientation) (chapter 107) (chapter 115) (chapter 115: flower pattern and no sleeve, the beard covers the jaw ) (chapter 117: no pattern, the lips are covered by the moustasch, straight) (chapter 117) There are simply too many divergences to say that it is a mistake from the author. This would actually mean that she is quite sloppy. Furthermore, I decided to rely on my eyes and not a belief: there is only one lord Song. Thus you comprehend why I never called the man talking to Jung In-Hun lord Song. So if my theory is true, this would signify that these men represent the previous gang “dogs of Joseon”, the older version of this: (chapter 101) And No-Name was treated exactly like Lee Jihwa, but he got framed and sentenced. Finally, I would like to point out that there were 3 black men involved in the first fake sexual education: (chapter 86) A coincidence? I don’t believe this. Besides, I discovered a relevant detail about petition and government.

“Of course, therein lies the irony ― that the time of kings, the Joseon dynasty, had democratic institutions. But there were several. I could write a column on each ― for example, student demonstrations. Korea’s student demonstration were hallmarks of Korean political life from April 19, 1960, through the 60s, 70s and 80s, until true democracy evolved in Korea. The “samsa” was the censorate ― the three offices of government that had the duty of criticizing the king and the government (and the censorate had great power in the Joseon court; the three arms of the censorate often, really often, criticized the king and his appointments). The king would sometimes withdraw the offending appointment or decision, and sometimes he would not, but he had to deal with the censors who were obliged to keep him on the straight and narrow of good Confucian, moral government. The king was required to attend lectures on Confucianism, which implied the adherence to ethical government.” Quoted from https://www.koreatimes.co.kr/www/opinion/2023/05/739_281254.html?utm_source=KK

The “samsa” implies 3 representatives of these offices. This would explain why lord Song is asking for the petition from the Yoons. These men could represent the 3 samsa.

And the second plot would be the king.

Another clue for this theory is Min and his friends’s death. They got killed, because they were also left in the dark. And we know that the story is going in circle. In my opinion, all the persons from the past have to make sure that their deceptions and tricks don’t get detected… neither by the victim Yoon Seungho nor by the pedophile. Just like the main lead and his father, there is no ambiguity that the monarch has been deceived as well. (chapter 107) Far away from the protagonist, he had to rely on his helping hands and his advisors. He trusted their words. Finally, we have the vision from Lee Jihwa: (chapter 101) That’s the moment when the truth will come to light. Someone will get angry, because he got confronted with the painful reality: he was a man consumed by lust, he was selfish, cruel, abusive, ignorant, coward, and even naive. He was never destined to be the protagonist’s life companion. (chapter 116) He was in truth Yoon Seungho‘s bird of misfortune. He is responsible for his misery. Before, I had assumed that right from the start, the pedophile could have been eyeing the pure teenager, but it is also possible that everything happened due to back luck. Each person made a mistake, out of fear they lied to cover up for their wrongdoing and chose Yoon Seungho as scapegoat. Father Lee tried to hide his son’s sodomy out of shame. If so, the king became responsible, for he never investigate the matter properly. It was his role as ruler to give justice and he failed terribly. In fact, he benefitted from this. Hence it is normal that he is now judged as the main culprit for Yoon Seungho‘s misery. Contrary to Baek NA-Kyum, the main lead can not act, as if nothing had happened. (Chapter 118) It is because the main lead had repressed it for a long time, in fact he had been brainwashed that he had become a prostitution out of revenge. Now, he knows that he has been longing for love and acceptance all along.

4. Yoon Seungho and the pavilion

Like the illustration is exposing it , I detected a strong connection between chapter 10 and 117. The common denominator was the pavilion. The learned sir brought the artist under the pretense for a walk in order to seek seclusion and privacy. While he faked his worries (chapter 10), he wanted the painter to stop working for Yoon Seungho. He desired him to leave the propriety, for he saw Baek Na-Kyum as a rival. Unlike the painter, the scholar had not been invited to join the party the night before. Hence he had to portray Yoon Seungho in such a bad light! (chapter 10) Back then, the vain and stupid man thought that the main lead had truly liked his poem. Thus he imagined that he could get the attention from the protagonist, once he got rid of his competitor.

Interesting is that he selected the pavilion and this for one reason. He needed witnesses for his innocence. As you already know, I had come to the deduction that the learned sir had participated in the prank. Moreover, people from far away couldn’t detect that the learned sir was inciting the artist to sedition and disobedience. He wanted to maintain his image of respectability and selfless and caring man. (chapter 10) This is not surprising that the author employed a panel from that chapter. (chapter 118) Back then, the artist had not detected the manipulation. Hence he had protected his former teacher, when the latter got accused of ruining the painting. This confession from the scholar (chapter 10) stands in opposition to Yoon Seungho’s. The latter has no expectation from the artist. (chapter 117) The latter is the one deciding about the lord’s fate. But why did he go to the pavilion with the painter? For privacy and intimacy! They needed to discuss the matter about the brother and the petition, a dangerous matter. (chapter 117) Here, the painter was acting as the main lead’s right-hand and advisor. He is taking over the butler’s function. He was full of concern for his loved one asking him to postpone the reunion (chapter 117) And the moment the artist voiced his fears (chapter 117), the noble suggested to leave everything behind. (chapter 117) He wanted to fulfill the artist’s wish, the symbol of his deep and selfless love. Striking is that there was no kiss and sex proving that true love can be expressed in many ways, and not just by physical intimacy. This contradicts the learned sir’s confession. He is just waiting for a signal from him. (chapter 117) And what would people see from far away? 2 people showing closeness and attachment, they wouldn’t expect a desertion, an abandonment!! And now you comprehend why Yoon Chang-Hyeon was sitting in the pavilion in town (chapter 116) It was, as if he was trying to get an alibi for his crime: he had planned to have his son killed, but it didn’t happen as expected. Thus he was forced to join his son. (chapter 116) This means that he was exposing his crime to people in town. Furthermore, he even confessed his hatred for his own son. He yelled this: (chapter 116) Yet, by stating this, he was admitting that he was violating social norms (Confucianism). That’s how I realized that the pavilion is not only the place where Yoon Seungho’s emancipation takes place, it is also the symbol for betrayal and abandonment.

None of these yanbang behaved like they should have: hardworking, educated, humble and honest! That’s the reason why I am suspecting that this conversation in the open will backfire on the elder master Yoon. Was the street totally empty during that night? No… because he was drinking in the pavilion. Besides, don’t forget that the tailor was a witness of Min’s wrongdoing. (chapter 101) Finally, a long time ago, I had developed the theory that the pavilion was the place where Yoon Seungho got abused.

In the name of love (for the Yoons, for Yoon Seungwon, for Yoon Seungho, for Baek Na-Kyum, for the scholar), the schemers and accomplices did terrible things. The reality was that love was a synonym for hatred, power, greed, ambition, fanatism, lust, survival, sexual fantasies… And now, take a closer to this panel: It is the same pavilion than Yoon Chang-Hyeon’s. This means that the couple will purify this place. At some point, the lord and his knight will come to admire the pond with the lotus flowers: (chapter 117) Byeonduck let us see a glimpse of their future.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: Uncatchable 👻 ghosts 👻👻 in town 🌆

Please support the authors by reading the manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

1. The man with the purple hanbok

When manhwaphiles saw the man with the purple hanbok (chapter 106) strolling through town, they jumped to the conclusion that this must be lord Song! They remembered the recollection from Lee Jihwa. (Chapter 83) However, since I have been examining Painter Of The Night so closely, I learned to pay attention to details. Consequently, I recognized very quickly that Yoon Seungho was not chasing one ghost, but he was running after 3 different people (chapter 106) impersonating „lord Song“ (chapter 106) If you look very attentively at the hanboks, you will realize the slight differences. First, the shade of the cloth diverges, then one cloth has a pattern, the other hanbok none. The form of the gat is also a little different, just like the color of the hair diverges. Besides, the readers should keep in their mind that in season 3, we had at least 3 bodies, though I am suspecting 4 corpses: (chapter 94) (chapter 97) (chapter 97) and (chapter 101) Thus I come to the following conclusion that these 3 persons wearing the purple hanbok are not the “real lord Song”, the one who tormented the protagonist. In my eyes, he was watching the protagonist from the tower! (chapter 106) Let’s not forget that each scene is reflected in each season! And in episode 37, we had this memory from the fake servant: (chapter 37) The empty street was the indication that the monarch was present in the city. And now pay attention to the situation in episode 105: (chapter 105) Why is the street empty, when it was not the case during the night in episode 69? (chapter 69) For me, the pedophile was in the kisaeng house. But let’s return our attention to episode 37. (chapter 37) The view was divulging that the person was watching the town from above… so it had to be from the gate. Such a scene should be repeated, as the story is going in circle. Besides, note that the lord is also wearing a purple hanbok with a design. This means that he can be recognized very easily and this from afar! (chapter 106) To sum up, for me, the 4th “lord Song” was present in this scene, but the protagonist couldn’t detect his presence, for the other “shadows” were there to divert his attention.

2. The purpose of lord Song’s ghosts

But what was the purpose to use these „ghosts“ embodying lord Song? For me, they served two purposes. Since the painter had refused to be separated from his lover, they had to create a subterfuge, to create the illusion that Yoon Seungho was abandoning Baek Na-Kyum. In other words, they wanted the painter to witness how the main lead would break his own promise. (Chapter 106) As you can see, they used a prank to wound the artist. Their goal was to incite the painter to return to the kisaeng house. He should cut ties with the main lead, as the latter is a man with a fickle nature. Yes, episode 106 was the negative version of chapter 75. (chapter 75) That’s the reason why the couple was sent to the same inn. However, I don’t think that they had expected the painter’s fainting. (chapter 106) For me, this is a blessing in disguise.

3. The helping hands in the trick

But how could they plan such a „joke“ so quickly, for the painter was supposed to stay in the gibang? Here, it is important that the manhwalovers remember what the lord did before eating with his companion. He stopped at the tailor’s shop!! (Chapter 106) The latter had to be informed not to send the new clothes to the kisaeng house, but to his own mansion. That’s the reason why Baek Na-Kyum asked this question to the butler. (chapter 106) That’s how the schemer and his accomplices knew for sure that their original plan had not worked out. And if you read my previous analyses, you are aware that I had discovered the existence of two tailors!! (chapter 106) Observe how the tailor in the background is wearing his scarf. It is the same way than Yoon Seungho‘s! But now take a closer look at the tailor from episode 45 (chapter 45) and 74 (chapter 74) This tailor is wearing the scarf the same way than the artist‘s. Finally, in episode 64, the manhwalovers could see the face of the second tailor. : (chapter 64) In the past, I had already outlined the divergences in the body shape and the clothes, but the most visible evidence is the scarf!! Finally, I would like my avid readers to detect that the tailor from chapter 64 has been calling the main lead master Yoon, and not lord Yoon Seungho. This shows that this man is involved not only in the recent prank, but also in the main lead‘s suffering. He is not recognizing Yoon Seungho as a real lord. The usage of different hanboks is the proof that the tailor is an accomplice in the latest trick. But this also explicates why the tricksters had not planned the artist’s fainting. First, he had been able to run after his lover. (chapter 105) Besides, this is how Baek Na-Kyum acted, when he saw his lord looking at him: (chapter 106) The fake smile from Baek Na-Kyum was hiding his true condition, he was still suffering from PTSD. Nonetheless, for the tailor and the other witnesses, it looked like the artist was strong. Nonetheless, since the main lead had learned in the past to fake his smile, he could detect that his lover was far from feeling well. (chapter 106) But there is another reason why they had not predicted such an outcome: the doctor!! They had to ensure that the lord’s path never crosses the physician’s! That’s the reason why the manhwaphiles never saw him in episode 106. He was like a ghost. But there is more to it.

What caught my attention is the couple was first encouraged to eat before meeting the physician. Here, it is implied that they are not at the medicine store. (chapter 106) Yet, in the Spanish version, the butler informs them that it’s soon their turn. This means that they are next to the medicine store. But let’s return to our main observation. Why was the couple pushed to „eat“? For the painter had wounded his hand, the first priority would have been to ask for an immediate treatment. Since the valet mentioned that it was about time to go to the medicine story, the manhwalovers should wonder why it was time. Thanks to the Spanish version, we know that according to the valet, the doctor had been treating other people before indicating that lord Yoon could not receive special treatment.

Secondly, Byeonduck drew such a panel where you could see the kitchen outdoors: (chapter 106) As you already know, each picture contains important information. Why did the artist create such an image? That’s how the mortar and the grinder caught my attention. I had seen these tools before. (chapter 57) Yes in the kitchen of the physician! Then in a different image, you can the kitchen with the stool and the circle with the shamanism drawing right behind the lord’s back. (chapter 106) We assumed that the couple was eating in an inn, but it is true? Finally, in the shelves, the manhwalovers can see small packages hanging around, (chapter 106), they look exactly like the medicine Kim fetched in episode 55. (chapter 55) Because of these parallels, I started wondering if the couple and the readers had not been fooled in the end. They were actually sitting in the medicine store, but due to the butler’s words and episode 75, the manhwalovers had the impression that the couple was in an inn. And the Spanish version seems to confirm my suspicion. I had already outlined that the furniture and shelves in the library had been switched. So it could be the same with the doctor’s office. Besides, the form of the building reminded me a lot of the house from the physician’s. (chapter 106) (chapter 74) Once you remove the cupboard from the side, you have a patio where you can eat. Under this new light, it explains why Yoon Seungho would say this to the butler: (chapter 106) It is because they were already there! And this would explain why the painter went to the restroom! (chapter 106) This coincides to the night of the abduction executed by No-Name! (chapter 59) To conclude, there was another ghost in episode 106, the invisible doctor. No matter what, the couple was not supposed to see the physician. Why? It is because he would have noticed the existence of two different doctors. That’s the reason why Kim acted as a mediator! (chapter 106) This was not to help his master and the painter at all. Quite the opposite. He had to cover up his own wrongdoings and help the schemer. Therefore it is not surprising that the valet was confronted with the artist’s fainting! (chapter 106) The latter had played a mean prank on Baek Na-Kyum!! Yes, you are reading it correctly. Now, you are wondering when the valet fooled the pure painter. Observe that Kim had joined his master (chapter 106), while the latter was waiting for his lover. He was standing next to him. (chapter 106) But look where he was standing, when Baek Na-Kyum saw him: (chapter 106) He had barely moved… maybe run for 4 meters! How could he be out of breath? Besides, why would he scream like that, when the lord was standing next to him? (chapter 106) It is because he needed Baek Na-Kyum to hear his lover’s departure!! Because we see this panel, we assume that the valet was left in the dark, especially after witnessing such a scene. (chapter 106) Our brain is trying to fill the blanks. But the moment you realize that Kim didn’t run such a long distance to be out of breath, you will realize that this “abandonment” was staged. This was the reflection of chapter 85, another fake run! (chapter 85)

In episode 106, Yoon Seungho just had to ask Kim to wait for him there with Baek Na-Kyum, similar to this scene! (chapter 86) Thus the butler got punished for his acting. He has now to take care of an unconscious painter. (chapter 106) And now, Kim is put in front of a choice. What should he do with the fragile artist? In my eyes, no matter what he chooses, he will get into trouble. Why? If he brings him to the doctor, the young noble will question the identity of the physician. Why is he not the same doctor than in the past? If he decides to bring him to the gibang, the lord will never believe that this was the artist’s choice. Besides, according to me, the noble asked his servant to wait for him there. Finally, if he brings him to the mansion, the lord will question his choice, for the artist needed the presence of a doctor. So the moment Yoon Seungho returns to the place where he left the butler and the painter, he could get scared, for they are no longer there. Thus the main lead could jump to the conclusion that his companion has been “kidnapped” again, especially after seeing the purple man circulating around them and hearing such grapevines. (chapter 106) Besides, I have another evidence that the painter got fooled by the valet. According to my observation, there is always a reflection within the same episode. Since the lord got fooled and was incited to follow the man with the purple hanbok, the artist had to experience the same. However, while the one got scared out of abandonment issues, the other got worried because of “lord Song”‘s obsession! Besides, because neither the butler nor the physician got punished for their crimes (passivity, silence, lies and disobedience), both need to receive their “punishment”. Let’s not forget what Yoon Seungho had said to the artist back then: (chapter 58) Kim had usurped his authority, he had made a decision without his master’s permission.

Moreover, I would like to outline that the place where the artist fainted is actually very close to the place when Jung In-Hun had dragged him. (chapter 24) The gate serves as the indication. (chapter 24) And in that episode, the artist got dragged twice. (chapter 24) First, it was the scholar, then the butler. However, in that scene, the butler had lied to the artist, for the noble had never requested to meet the artist in the pavilion. From my point of view, he was still hunting in the woods. As you can see, episode 24 contained all the elements of an abduction, though it was not perceptible. That’s the reason why I am suspecting that Yoon Seungho might think that his lover has been kidnapped again, especially after hearing such horrible gossips. Nonetheless, since the painter fainted, the valet will be forced to take care of Baek Na-Kyum. In addition, observe that the butler brought back the unconscious painter to the mansion, though the doctor was right next to them! This shows that Kim and the physician had not the artist‘s best interests in heart. He should have been treated right away.

4. The purple hanbok

But why did they utilize a purple hanbok in order to attract Yoon Seungho‘s attention? We have to envision that this mean prank is the negative version of the incident in chapter 76!! (Chapter 76) Coincidence versus trick! They wished to scare Yoon Seungho, to let him think that „lord Song“ knew about his crime and was about to denunciate him. Yes, in my eyes, the man with the purple hanbok embodies treason and was the reason why Yoon Seungho got arrested and tortured in the past!! Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why the lord would get so mad at his childhood friend. (Chapter 59) But the moment Yoon Seungho’s mother killed herself, it became clear that her son had been unfairly arrested and tormented. So someone had to take the fall for the injustice, the real lord Song. the (chapter 82) Nonetheless, there is no ambiguity that in reality the one behind the denunciation was father Lee. But the purple hanbok is connected not only to the arrest and torture, but also to the sexual abuse. Thus the painter had such a memory in the gibang: (chapter 1) The latter is the witness of Yoon Seungho’s sexual abuse. And what did the women say in the street? (chapter 106) The nobles would lust after men and women. Thus I am suspecting that Yoon Seungho won’t act like the schemers had planned. He will get the impression that the nobles might be still lusting after his lover, and the man with the purple hanbok is behind this. Yoon Seungho could remember Min’s words (chapter 102), Lee Jihwa was behind the scheme… and what had Lee Jihwa done in the past? He had sent a letter in his name. (chapter 59) Back then, Yoon Seungho assumed that his childhood friend knew nothing… but now, he is seeing the ghost lord Song circulating in town. So he could jump to the conclusion that the Lees have been helping lord Song. Finally, the manhwaworms will certainly recall the red-haired master’s confession, he knew everything!!. (chapter 57)

In my eyes, the women were spreading rumors on purpose!! They could recognize the main lead with his hanbok. (chapter 106) And this scene is a reflection of episode 64, where the two women were ignorant about the incident of the previous night. (chapter 64) Once again, this proves that the tailor is involved in the scheme.

The person behind this hoped to scare the noble, believing that Yoon Seungho was a superstitious man. Why? It is because he has the poem composed by Yoon Seungho. (chapter 106) The Spring Poem is actually reflected in this scenery: (chapter 106) This explicates why there is the refraction. During that day, both main leads are making important discoveries which indicates their relationship will only get reinforced.

When the lord wrote the poem in episode 92, what did the readers see there? A man in the shadow observing the couple, but the main lead had not detected his presence! (chapter 92) Yet this doesn’t end here. Episode 92 (chapter 92) is the positive reflection of episode 106: (chapter 106) This is no coincidence that there is the tower and gate in the background. From my point of view, the schemers are trying to manipulate the lord through rumors. But the puppet master is overlooking one important aspect, the gossips can be interpreted very differently. Besides, while the woman pointed out the existence of a manhunt against nobles (chapter 106), she contradicted her statement right after. (chapter 106) If nobles were involved in this, why did they kill the son of lord Shin? Besides, let’s not forget that Yoon Seungho never ordered the fire in the shrine and he never killed lord Shin! This means that he is innocent. That’s the reason why I come to the conclusion that contrary to their expectation, the lord won’t decide to leave the painter behind because of the imminent misfortune! From my point of view, Yoon Seungho could ask his lover to paint a lucky charm on their house, the tiger! (chapter 105) That way, the artist would feel that his master needs his help and talent. Moreover, I have the feeling that the main lead will go to the authorities and ask for their assistance. (chapter 101) Why did the shaman’s house get burned? How come that the son of lord Shin got killed? But we know for sure that the murderer had staged his death, he died because of a tiger. (chapter 103) Why are such rumors circulating in town and who are the witnesses? (chapter 106) Moreover, it is not random that the woman gossiping is similarly dressed than the maid in the kitchen. (chapter 103) As you can see, the schemers are no longer able to control Yoon Seungho and his lover, for both are supported by the gods. Chance stands on their side!

And this prediction leads me to the following observation. In town, there exists another ghost, the captain of the guards and his officers! (chapter 100) (chapter 101) (chapter 104) Though there is a manhunt, where is he? (chapter 106) As you can see, his absence is contradicting their statement. On the other hand, Yoon Seungho heard from the women this. (chapter 106) (chapter 106) So he could ask about the identity of the culprits and the witnesses, the new version of this scene. (chapter 98) To conclude, while the schemers thought that due to his crime, Yoon Seungho would lie low and cut ties with his lover, due to their meddling, they achieved the opposite. The lord will request an investigation… something he has never done before. He could even denunciate Lee Jihwa (chapter 67), that way he can escape punishment. This means that Black Heart’s last confession (and lie) could help the lord to protect himself and his lover. Finally, if Yoon Seungho were to mention the purple hanbok to his lover, the latter’s memory could get triggered and he could remember this night: (chapter 01) To conclude, the mysterious man with the purple hanbok is bringing the couple closer than before, whereas he hoped to achieve the opposite.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: «Thank god 🙏 he didn’t see nor hear a thing about that awful matter »

Please support the authors by reading the manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

The title of this essay comes from the following picture: (chapter 105) „Thank god, he didn’t see nor hear a thing about that awful matter“. This is what Heena said in the original version. [Here I would like to thank my follower @katamins again for her help]

1. Heena’s words

What caught my attention is that in the Korean version, the kisaeng employed the expression „Thank god“, displaying not only her relief but also her religiousness. In my eyes, Byeonduck‘s intention was to expose Heena‘s religion one more time, she is a Christian. Another important aspect is that her statement implies that Baek Na-Kyum can not testify about „that awful matter“, for he saw and heard nothing. The problem is the idiom „that awful matter“ is really ambiguous. Which incident is she referring to? Yoon Seungho‘s crime in the shaman’s house or her „murder“? While many readers only thought about Black heart’s execution, I believe that the noona was referring to her own “execution” as well. Why? It is because the lord refused Baek Na-Kyum to see his own sister. (chapter 105) He desired to spare his heart. To conclude, “that awful matter” is referring to the whole prank and its consequences.

On the other hand, in the English version the kisaeng‘s declaration is more precise. Because of the expression „that terrible day“, it becomes obvious that Heena is referring to her lies and manipulations in the gibang. (Chapter 97) At the same time, the idiom includes the staff‘s tricks as well: the corpse in front of the gate and the maids‘ badmouthing (Chapter 97) (chapter 98), because it happened during the day and at downfall. Due to this expression, the readers can detect the presence of Yoon Seungho’s white lie. The painter had clearly mentioned what he had heard before. (Chapter 104) However, he had been silenced by his lover, when the latter suggested to him to view everything as a nightmare. The lord made the mistake not to listen to the victim and witness.

On the other hand, if we take the noona‘s original testimony into consideration, we get the impression that the artist can not testify about the night of his „abduction“ and the murders . It is because he didn‘t see or hear anything. Since the painter was unconscious, when the lord arrived, the latter truly believes that his companion saw and heard nothing. Thus Baek Na-Kyum has no memory. He knows nothing, hence he can not remember a thing: (chapter 105) With such a contrast, the manhwalovers can detect the link between ignorance and absence of memories. To conclude, in both versions, the main lead is “lying” out of ignorance. This is the positive version of “ignorance is a blessing”. Hence the noona thinks herself safe.

But like I have already pointed out in the previous analysis, the painter was present, when she revealed her complicity. (Chapter 99) It was clear that her brother would meet the noble, as their meeting didn’t surprise her. She was more upset that Baek Na-Kyum was unconscious. (chapter 99) However, her question „What’s wrong with Na-Kyum?“ divulges her hypocrisy and acting. How could she not realize that her sibling had been beaten? (Chapter 99) His head was bleeding, and the black guards were carrying sticks. It was clear that his state was not caused by an illness. To conclude, the calling “lord Jihwa” is the proof of her complicity, though in front of Yoon Seungho it serves as an excuse to portray herself as a victim. (chapter 105) Thus I deduce that Heena thinks, the painter could not witness her acting in front of the scholar’s house, for his head was turned around and he was not moving. She feels secure concerning that night, while I am expecting the opposite. Nonetheless, her past behavior in the kisaeng house represents a source of danger for her. That’s the reason why she has to hide the “attempted murder” from her brother. The moment Heena mentions that she has been hurt, the painter won’t believe her. Why? It is because in the kisaeng house, he has not forgotten her words: (chapter 97) Even if she was “fooled”, the artist can only reproach her stupidity. Remember her harsh words, she had called him stupid: (chapter 97) She had helped Min, and she can not claim ignorance. As you can see, Yoon Seungho was encouraged to hide the “attempted murder” from Baek Na-Kyum for selfish reasons. Therefore it is no coincidence that when the lord visited Heena, he made sure that his lover wouldn‘t see Heena in bed. (Chapter 105) The painter was kept in the dark about her “failed assassination”. It was, as if this had never happened. Yoon Seungho was convinced that if Baek Na-Kyum heard about this, he would feel guilty. Indirectly, he was blamed for her injuries. On the other hand, this decision has huge repercussions. It was, as if Yoon Seungho was erasing the traces of the attempted murder against Heena. It was, as if it had never taken place, which is correct, for it had been a subterfuge. Hence later she can not claim that she has been a victim of the nobles’ brutality.

Finally, I would like to point out that the head-kisaeng was acting as a poor victim in front of Yoon Seungho. Imagine that a month has already passed, but she is still in bed, (chapter 105) though she was not beaten, slapped and punched like her brother. Don’t you find it weird that she remains in bed, though she can still walk? (chapter 105) She has now the perfect excuse to avoid nobles. She has been hurt, hence she can not work. The lord never questioned her attitude, for he wished himself that the painter would take a rest and remain in bed. (Chapter 104) This explicates why later the lord was hugging his lover under the cover. (Chapter 104) Hence I conclude that Heena must have thought the same way about Yoon Seungho. „Thank god, he didn’t see or hear a thing about that awful matter“. He has no idea about her altercations with her brother in the kisaeng house. It is important, because our beloved seme has the impression that the noona has her brother’s best interests at heart, but actually he is wrong. In my opinion, the relationship between Heena and his lover serves as a mirror to his relationship with Yoon Seungwon. So far, the young noble doesn’t suspect his brother to have betrayed him. Note that he blames his father more than his younger sibling.

2. Memory illusions

While reading episode 105, we discovered how Heena was saved. (chapter 105) Yet, this incident was presented as Yoon Seungho’s memory. This panel could be used as an evidence that my theory, Heena was present next to the shaman’s shrine during the bloodbath, was wrong. Nonetheless, this image didn’t make me change my mind. Why? I paid attention to details and judged this rescue as “fake” again. The servants had a drop of sweat on their face, the symbol for deception. Secondly, the kisaeng was wet, while the staff’s clothes weren’t damp. How did they save her then? Besides, where are the foot prints? Moreover, where was the head cover? (chapter 99) Finally, her hands and feet were not tied. So where did the items go? Since we saw her “execution”, we are the witnesses, and as such we know the truth about that “awful matter”, but it is not the case for the lord. This image contains so many errors, hence it can not reflect reality.

This observation led me to the following question: when did the rescue happen exactly? Besides, how could the lord have seen her, when he could barely leave the painter’s side? He spent the whole night with the painter. (chapter 103) Hence he could have never been outside the mansion. That’s how I realized that the author was presenting us a false memory. This means that the manhwalovers are facing an implanted memory. But how could this happen? First, false memory is quite normal and is often of no consequence. But a false memory relayed during criminal testimony might lead to the conviction of an innocent person. As the manhwalovers can detect, it represents a serious problem.

In fact, everyone is prone to false memory distortions, but people with mental illness are more susceptible to “memory illusion”. It is the same for persons who have issues to differentiate between reality and fiction. Since Yoon Seungho is suffering from PTSD and often questions his sense of reality, (chapter 58), it makes him particularly vulnerable to false memories.

But how is it possible to implant fake memories? Let’s not forget that memory is working with associations, as the former is a network of cells. Thus the connections between these cells can been severed. And the moment the cells are reconnected, the brain is trying to fill the blanks. And that’s how false memories can arise. But there exist more factors.

First, it is related to inaccurate perception.

“Sometimes we see things that aren’t there and miss obvious things that are right in front of us.” Quoted from https://www.verywellmind.com/how-do-false-memories-form-2795349

We have the perfect example in episode 105. Because of the butler’s following testimony (chapter 104), the lord and even the readers imagined to see medicine in the white bowl! (chapter 105) Besides, the author had always connected the drug with the tray. (chapter 23) As you can see, the readers interpreted this scene due to associations. Nonetheless, like mentioned in the previous analysis, the different color and the traces on the edge were the evidences that it was ink. (chapter 36) Besides, Heena was in bed indicating that she was still weak. The circumstances led people to have a different perception of “verity”!! Only through the mind’s eye, the manhwalovers can detect that this scene was staged.

Then the other cause is interference. This signifies that as soon as new information appears, it can affect old memories or the reverse. Experience, prejudice and knowledge have an influence on memories.

“Our minds try to fill in the missing spaces, often using current knowledge as well as beliefs or expectations.” Quoted from https://www.verywellmind.com/how-do-false-memories-form-2795349

And this aspect is visible in the lord’s memory either. (chapter 105) Observe that the servant on the right is acting like Yoon Seungho: (chapter 103) The protagonist projected his own thoughts and emotions onto one servant: shock! (chapter 105) Secondly, the kisaeng has the same body posture than the painter after the first abduction. (chapter 61) This was interference by excellence. Besides, emotions can affect your memories. Since the lord was so under shock after witnessing the painter’s unconsciousness, it is not surprising that he imagined to have witnessed this scene. At the same time, when he left the shrine in trance, he could have overlooked the presence of a third person… similar to Lee Jihwa next to the shed. That’s how he doesn’t recall anything from that night except his crime. He didn’t see and hear the person by his side. Where is the sword? Where did he get the hanbok from?

“Researchers have found that people tend to be more likely to remember events connected to strong emotions, but that the details of such memories are often suspect. Retelling important events can also lead to a false belief in the accuracy of the memory.” Quoted from https://www.verywellmind.com/how-do-false-memories-form-2795349

And now, you have the explanation why the lord is blaming his father the entire time and no one else. Finally, I would like to remind the readers that the main lead had tried to commit suicide during that night. Thus he went to the pound. (chapter 102) Therefore it is not astonishing that he imagined a similar scenery.

Another cause for false memory is misinformation. And we have the perfect illustration in chapter 1: (chapter 1) Baek Na-Kyum thought to have seen “Yoon Seungho” as huge sodomite, yet he only connected the name to the face after meeting the lord for the first time. (chapter 1) This shows that the artist had only heard his name without seeing his face before. This explicates why the main lead’s gaze and facial expressions were similar (chapter 1) (chapter 1)

As you can see, Byeonduck left many clues for this interpretation: the noona’s rescue was fake, for it was a false memory. Finally, since the lord was present, when the servants had “discovered” Baek Na-Kyum, the negative reflection would be that he was not gone himself there. Finally, we have the confession from Yoon Seungho, he never saved her. Indirectly, he was admitting that he had not assisted them. (chapter 105)

As you can see, this image was the result of a combination of different events the lord had experienced himself. Hence I deduce that this memory was implanted through suggestions by the servant standing on the left side of the picture. The staff had never searched for the painter, hence one of the domestics had asked his master: (chapter 103)

On the other hand, he only narrated the main aspects, and let the lord fill the blanks. That’s how the lord created a false memory which feels so vivid that it seems real. But I have another proof for this theory. In the previous episode, the lord had tried to implant a false memory into the painter: (chapter 104) My avid readers can certainly recall the rule I had detected: each chapter will be reflected in the next!

But since Yoon Seungho was implanted a false memory, this signifies that it is the same for Baek Na-Kyum too! 😲 One detail caught my attention, the noona’s comment. She had detected that the painter used to feel anxious around Jung In-Hun. (chapter 105) How is it possible? Especially, when the painter said this: (chapter 94) Furthermore, the painter is associating the learned sir to the moon and as such the night. (chapter 94) Thus I am now suspecting that this image is a false memory. But I have another reason to think that the painter’s idolization was more the result of “brainwashing” and as such “false memories”.

The same noona had observed that she had not seen her donsaeng weep like that, since he was 5 years old! (chapter 105) How can she date this incident so precisely? The moment I read her testimony, I discovered that in episode 94 the author had never shown us the painter crying! (chapter 94) (chapter 94) (chapter 94) It was, as if the noonas had never been informed about the painter’s suffering and tears. This shows that Heena has been hiding many things from her colleagues. But there is more to it! The manhwaphiles saw the artist’s tears in his childhood. (chapter 68) But here he was much older!! Under this new perspective, I realized that the following image could have been a false memory: (chapter 68) Heena was misremembering that night, and she was misattributing the painter’s tears. In other words, she was confusing two incidents.

Misattribution: Have you ever mixed up the details of one story with the details of another? For example, while telling a friend about your last vacation you might mistakenly relate an incident that happened on a vacation you took several years ago.” Quoted from https://www.verywellmind.com/how-do-false-memories-form-2795349

And now, take a closer look to the painter’s tears in episode 105: (chapter 105) It is the same facial expression, though the redness around the eyes is more pronounced. This observation confirms that the noona’s memories in the kisaeng (chapter 68) were not reflecting reality. She idolized the scholar’s attitude, while she was portraying herself as the real victim. Thus I started wondering why the painter must have felt anxious around the learned sir. (chapter 105) One might question the veracity of the kisaeng’s testimony, but so far, I judge her as “innocent”, though she definitely helps Heena to fool the couple. In her mind, it is for her brother’s best interests. But let’s not forget that the teenager Yoon Seungho was exposed to sex in a brutal way (chapter 86), so the painter must have made a similar experience. In my analysis “Baek Na-Kyum’s foot“, I had already doubted the “warmth and happiness” of the scene. For me, the zoom on the painter’s foot was the clue for the painter’s suffering. And this interpretation was confirmed in episode 105. (chapter 105) He had run after his lover in socks. While in “Baek Na-Kyum’s foot”, I thought that this memory was true, I come now to a different signification. It was a false memory in order to hide a crime related to Heena. I would like to outline that in the kisaeng’s comment, we have the notion of “shame” and as such “guilt”. First, I thought of rape, but then it could be much simpler. The painter could have witnessed his noona having sex with the learned sir. But because he was too young, he misjudged the situation… as a virgin, she had to bleed. Because he saw blood, he imagined that the learned sir had hurt Heena. This would explain why the artist was afterwards anxious around the teacher. One might think that this is not terrible. But let’s not forget that as a kisaeng, she can not have sex like that. (chapter 105)

“After 1650 some kisaeng were assigned to a specific government office; these were called gwan-gi, and though officeholders were strictly forbidden from having sex with them, in practice they were usually expected and often forced to provide sex to these bureaucrats” Quoted from https://maggiemcneill.com/2013/09/12/the-kisaeng/

Besides, I doubt that the learned sir paid her for her services, hence according to regulations, the couple had committed a wrongdoing. Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why Byeonduck let Heena witness their love session. (chapter 96) A similar situation had happened in the past.But because of her brother’s reaction, his huge tears, she got scared. (chapter 68) Hence my theory is that this image comes from that day, but she repressed it. Due to her guilty conscience and fears, she developed genophobia. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why later Heena caused trouble to Yoon Seungho in the kisaeng house. Her loss of virginity could have been detected. Finally, it explains why the kisaeng spoke about “fleeting and trivial emotions” (chapter 68) Through suggestions, she had been able to convince her brother that the learned sir was a nice person. This explicates why the caresses and hugs were used to silence the artist. By repeating to her brother, he liked Jung In-Hun, he came to develop such feelings. The kisaeng’s statement implies that the admiration for the teacher was not constant. (chapter 105) Her words represent a contradiction to Heena’s statement. (chapter 46) A change of heart versus “eternity”. This shows that the painter’s decision to go to the learned sir’s house was never his choice. He had simply followed Heena’s suggestion. She was definitely distorting his past. Furthermore I detected a strong connection between love and memory. (chapter 94) If it is a loved one, then it can only be a good memory. Therefore it is not surprising that by saying constantly saying that the painter likes the scholar, he is repressing the bad memories with the scholar (the beating in episode 34, the betrayal in chapter 29, his words in the library and his reproach about his job). So far, he only mentioned one negative incident.

But why did Byeonduck use false memories in her story? It is to make Yoon Seungho remember his true memories, which were repressed. However, in psychology, repressed memories are controversial. This explains why the author from „Memory illusions“, Julia Shaw, rejects this idea.

Research showed that the created memories often had the same theme as whatever the clinician was suggesting. So if the clinician suggested sexual abuse, the client would have memories of sexual abuse. If the clinician suggested alien abduction, the client would remember an alien abduction. And if the clinician suggested satanic ritual abuse, then the client would remember satanic ritual abuse. So this was a huge problem. This has led many psychologists and researchers to adamantly oppose any type of therapy that seeks to recover repressed memories, and they also would testify against any recovered memory in court.” Quoted from https://therapyinanutshell.com/repressed-memories-dissociative-amnesia-ptsd-and-the-memory-wars/

Through Baek Na-Kyum’s suffering, the lord is slowly reminded of his own tragedy. This means, his sexual abuse will come to the surface. At the same time, I believe that the painter is the witness of Yoon Seungho’s past suffering, but he has not discovered Yoon Seungho’s connection to the gibang. For me, the painter Baek Na-Kyum embodies true memories, especially since he is no longer under the influence of Heena.

3. The painter’s ignorance

The irony is that though the painter was kept in the dark about the lord’s intentions, he was capable to detect the verity!! How so? He was using his heart and his mind’s eye. First, though the lord’s sudden embrace had caught him by surprise, he had been able to interpret the true meaning: a goodbye (chapter 105) In the original version, this is what the artist thought:

“Earlier..why did it feel like the LAST…”

The last embrace! He had sensed the lord’s despair and heartache. They would no longer see each other. How do I know that the artist was caught by surprise? It is because he never reciprocated the hug. We have to envision a new version of this scene: (chapter 76) So while the painter was following his lover, the latter turned around and hugged him. Afterwards, he asked him to go to his noonas, for he needed to talk to Heena. Moreover, contrary to Yoon Seungho, Baek Na-Kyum paid attention to time. He was not lost in thoughts or had lost the sense of time (chapter 105) Despite being busy and talking to the kisaengs, the artist couldn’t forget his lover. All his attention was still focused on his lover. That’s the reason why he could catch the lord’s departure right on time. This means that Heena’s words didn’t become a reality. He could grasp the situation correctly, though he has no idea about the lord’s intentions. This has nothing to do with chance! It is thanks to the artist’s intelligence and sensibility.

But while he rushed to the lord’s side, he tripped and fell on his hand. (chapter 105) But the latter acted, as if his hand was not wounded. (chapter 105) He ignored his physical pain and heartache. (chapter 105) This is important, because the stumbling symbolizes the intervention of the gods… We have the perfect example at the end of season 3. The lord fell on his knees in front of the scholar’s house, hence there is a hand print on the snow. (chapter 100) That’s how he refused to view Lee Jihwa as the murderer of his lover, Baek Na-Kyum”. YES, the falling is the real manifestation of CHANCE! How so? I would like the manhwaphiles to keep in mind that chance is the antonym of trick and scheme! The latter are connected to plan and organization. Thus I come to the conclusion that the noble will decide to go to the doctor’s office in order to treat his lover’s hand. (chapter 105) Let’s not forget that Yoon Seungho treasures the artist’s hands so much. Besides, they are wearing the same scarfs than in episode 74. But this is something that the schemers are not expecting. After the start of season 4, I got aware that Yoon Seungho never saw the doctor clearly. When the main lead was brought there, (chapter 57) he was feverish so that he couldn’t pay attention to the physician. Besides, the man never remained by his side. Finally, in episode 74, the man never left the office!! (chapter 74) I conclude that Yoon Seungho never saw the physician for commoners! Besides, I doubt that he remembers him from his childhood. But this is not the same, when Baek Na-Kyum was ill. He met the other doctor twice. (chapter 33) (chapter 103) On the other hand, the artist assumes that the man in the office is Yoon Seungho’s doctor!! He heard his confession: (chapter 57) There exist two physicians in the city at least. That’s how a part of the truth will come to the surface! And who had fetched the doctor? (chapter 103) The staff… I would like to outline that in this panel, Kim was no longer seen next to the couple. (chapter 105), though he was still present here. (chapter 105) So where did he vanish? Probably to the mansion, for he had to warn the domestics that the artist would be returning! But if he left the couple behind, this means that he can’t witness what Yoon Seungho and Baek Na-Kyum will do next. And if they don’t go to the doctor, there is no ambiguity that the main lead will send for the doctor again. But according to me, the man disappeared. (chapter 103) To conclude, I am expecting that Yoon Seungho will make a huge discovery in the next episode… just like the painter did in the gibang.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night/ Doctor Frost: Bad decisions ❌⭕

Please support the authors by reading the manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night I am also using doctor Frost as reference again.  https://www.webtoons.com/en/mystery/dr-frost/list?title_no=371  

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

Many manhwalovers were heartbroken, when they witness how the painter ran after Yoon Seungho in order to remain by his side. (chapter 105) Imagine that despite his rush, he was clear-minded enough to take the yellow scarf, a present that the noble had just bought him before. 😢 The item had more value than the mituri (shoes). Thus he was running in socks. His gesture displayed how much the lord means to the painter. He cherishes everything the lord does for him. At the same time, it indicates his heartache. He was so desperate and scared, for he felt that he was about to get abandoned one more time. (chapter 105) According to my follower @katamins, in the Korean version, this is what Baek Na-Kyum yells:

“My lord, let’s go together…you left me behind…let’s go toge-..

One might argue that the meaning is the same, yet in the Korean version, the artist is emphasizing the “we” by employing the expressions “us” (let’s = let us) and “together”. He considers the lord as his family. Moreover, by repeating the same sentence, (chapter 105) it works like a spell or a prayer. The artist is clinching onto this phrase hoping that the noble is remembering his promise. The irony is that the low-born was smiling like a fool, (chapter 105) (chapter 105) masking his anxieties and huge pain… out of fear that Yoon Seungho would still reject him. He acted, as if nothing had happened: he had not hurt his hand, and the lord had done nothing wrong. The smile became the symbol of his agony which reminds us of Yoon Seungho’s. (chapter 83)

1. Smiling like a fool

As you can sense, this scene was a reflection from episode 85. (chapter 85) This means that Baek Na-Kyum was put in the same situation than his lover who wished to keep the artist by his side, but feared to open up to him out of self-hatred and guilt. The painter could get burdened or horrified by his revelations. Hence the painter’s reaction at the end mirrors the yangban’s in the study. Both were or are pleading the partner to stay by their side,. (chapter 85) (chapter 105) Nevertheless, their behavior diverges so much. The aristocrat couldn’t raise his voice or become violent by using his hand, because he could scare the artist and as such break his previous promise. Finally, by destroying the music box, he had already witnessed that he had pushed his lover further away. (chapter 85) At the same time, since he had been taught that no noble should lower himself in front of commoners, it is normal that he couldn’t beg Baek Na-Kyum on his knees. To sum up, the noble had to restrain himself extremely, his face and words were the only way to show his emotions and despair. And the artist sensed it, though the lord was not weeping. The proof is that when the father appeared, the artist changed his mind. He was no longer willing to leave, in fact he chose to look for his lover. (chapter 87) This shows that through communication, the lord had been able to affect the painter‘s mind and heart. On the other hand, we shouldn’t underestimate the lord’s flashback and Na-Kyum’s conversation with the butler which played a huge part in the artist‘s decision to vow loyalty to Yoon Seungho despite the secret.

And this is the same with the painter. The first visible difference is that the artist leashed out his anger mixed with agony, thus he started punching his partner. (chapter 105) Then I noticed that contrary to his lover, the artist asked the reasons for his decision. (chapter 105) Why did he change his mind? Is he responsible for this? As you can see, the painter came to voice his guilt and the remains of his deeply rooted self-hatred. (chapter 105) He must have committed a wrongdoing, he is responsible for the situation. He feels like a burden, for the lord had to take care of him each night. (chapter 104) They are no longer sharing the same bed, the lord is sitting by his side comforting him, when the young man has a nightmare. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible that the artist was working in the backyard. (chapter 104) He wished to help, that way he wouldn’t be seen as a spoiled child. He has to justify his presence in the mansion. Who is he exactly that he is sleeping in the lord’s bed? I am suspecting that there is a rumor circulating within the propriety, a new version of this scene: (chapter 38) which I will explain more in details below. Thus the artist is making sure to cause no trouble to Yoon Seungho and the staff, especially the maids. Hence he folds the cover and clean the bedroom. (chapter 104) Then he washes clothes. He makes sure that he is no burden to anyone. Yet, my impression is that the staff is taking advantage of the artist’s goodness. That’s how they fuel his guilt and shame.

2. Ignorance and secrets

The irony is that the main lead was keeping the artist in the dark about his crime for this exact reason: GUILT. He didn’t desire him to feel responsible. (chapter 104) This intention was again verbalized in the gibang. (chapter 105) In the Korean version, this is what Heena says:

Heena: “So Nakyum doesn’t know a thing? Thank god he didn’t see nor hear a thing about that awful matter”

The painter is left in the dark about the massacre in the shaman’s shrine. The kisaeng and the noble are both following the principle from Kim: Ignorance is a blessing. They imagine that by choosing secrecy, they are able to protect the artist. But the silence and secrecy are the exact reasons why Baek Na-Kyum feels like a burden! He was not allowed to talk about the circumstances of his misery. (chapter 104) He was told not to question what he had heard… he should simply consider everything like a nightmare. However, this method is actually wrong.

“Keeping secrets limits responsiveness by preventing people from acting naturally and sharing freely. […] People who have studied the psychology of secrecy explain that secrets create “motivational conflict,” where the goal to avoid the social costs of the information being revealed conflicts with the goal to connect with others and maintain intimacy by sharing the information. Because keeping secrets can undermine social relationships, secrecy can lead to isolation and feelings of loneliness in extreme cases. Holding secrets also takes energy. It’s tiring, and sometimes impossible, to keep a secret. The exercise of will and vigilance in being careful with what one says uses emotional and cognitive resources and can leave a residue of negative feelings, like guilt.” Quoted from https://medium.com/s/story/how-does-keeping-secrets-harm-us-91978aefed77

Under this new perspective, it explains why Kim aged so much within 10 months!! (chapter 07) (chapter 104) Not only he knows about the lord’s traumatic past, but it is the same for the painter. In addition, we have another explanation for Yoon Seungho’s insomnia and dissociative state. (chapter 57) Not only the latter was turned into the scapegoat for the downfall of the Yoons, but also he was not allowed to reveal the incident, the so-called treason. Why? It is because if he had spoken, the truth would have come to the surface. He was simply a victim. And now, the schemers and accomplices are repeating the same MO. Who suggested to Yoon Seungho to say this to his lover? (chapter 104) Naturally, Kim, because he is now the only one in the mansion who knows his past. Besides, why do you think that the lord’s past is coming to the surface as a nightmare? It is because he was incited to repress everything. But since the painter is going through the same experiences, this is not surprising that the noble’s memory is triggered and the past emerges again.

Thus when I saw this image (chapter 105), I couldn’t restrain myself thinking of the lord and his past martyrdom. Keep in your mind that the artist share the same destiny with his lover. This means that a similar scene must have occurred in his youth: (chapter 27) Put yourself in the young man’s shoes. You suddenly witness how the whole family is moving houses and leaving you behind! This must have been terrible for Yoon Seungho. One might argue that Kim stayed by his side, so he was not alone. But it is false for 2 reasons. The white bearded servant had been working in the mansion (chapter 27), when the other domestics left the propriety. This was his memory. Besides, like the servant confessed to Jung In-Hun, a huge part of the staff got replaced. This means that the lord was suddenly surrounded by people he didn’t know. Because my theory is that the young man was treated as a male kisaeng, this signifies that the new staff could never view the main lead as a noble. Besides, despite the betrayal, the elder master and Yoon Seungwon were his real family. Finally, Yoon Seungho had no saying in this, and I can imagine that the reason for this decision was not explained immediately. This must have been a huge blow for him as well. He must have felt lost and homeless. The result was that from that moment on, he became more dependent on the butler. And we have to question ourselves what the butler did with this huge responsibility, when the elder master moved to the second house.

3. Ignorance and rumors

The lord and Heena assume that the painter has been able to repress this terrible night, and he knows nothing about the lord’s crime. But the moment whispers reach the painter’s ears, he can only feel terrible. (chapter 104) He is treated like a noble, while his lover is acting like a servant. Besides, is it true that the painter knows nothing? Let’s not forget that in the trailer, the manhwalovers discover the existence of a rumor circulating. But who is spreading the rumor and where? Since this phrase appears in connection with the staff (maids and servants) in the courtyard, I come to the conclusion that the authors of this gossip are in the domain. “Fellows” indicate that they are speaking among themselves. But I have two more clues proving that the traitors are the domestics. First, observe how they call the protagonist: Young Master Yoon. So far, people in town only calls the protagonist lord Yoon (chapter 45) (chapter 45) or lord Yoon Seungho (chapter 39) or my lord. (chapter 76) Only the staff addresses him as “young master”. (chapter 103) (chapter 103), and this since season 3. This coincides with the meddling of the Yoons. The servants treat him, as if he was not an adult, no real lord. But they are wrong, because he is wearing the topknot with the gat. Hence he is a lord. Finally, only people close to the couple could know about the painter’s tragedy. , because in the village and town, there exists another gossip: (chapter 104) Thus I conclude that the gossip from the trailer is spread among the staff on purpose. They wished Baek Na-Kyum to hear it so that he will feel responsible, especially after hearing this. He is responsible for the lord’s lunacy. Under this new perspective, it explains why the painter is leaving the bed and working. He wishes to prove the words wrong. On the other hand, I think that Yoon Seungho also heard a grapevine in the domain, but a different one: (trailer). “He has many enemies”. How did I come to this idea? It is because he is addressed as Yoon Seungho! By underlining the painter as his weakness, the author of this rumor wishes to separate the couple. If he were to place the painter elsewhere, not only the latter would no longer be targeted, but also the lord would have no longer any weakness. Since there is always a reflection within the same chapter, I conclude that a second grapevine was spread in episode 104. This happened, while the lord was away. Thus the painter smiled like a “fool”, when he saw the lord: (chapter 104) As you can imagine, for me the maids were the perpetrators, a new version of episode 79 (here, the woman implied that the artist was responsible for Yoon Seungho’s insomnia, thus the painter has a drop of sweat on his face, a sign for shame) and chapter 98 . To conclude, I don’t believe that the artist is ignorant. Besides, it is possible that he saw the trace of blood on his lover’s face, then remember what the servants told their master in the courtyard: (chapter 103) Finally, the staff has every reason to get rid of the artist, for he is the witness of their wrongdoings. They definitely played a major role in the “prank”. They didn’t learn their lesson.

But let’s return our attention to the comparison between 85 and 105. Both are also a reflection of episode 29, the scholar’s betrayal. The latter brought back the painter for his own selfish interests. (chapter 29) This time, the one smiling like a fool (chapter 29) was Jung In-Hun who acted, as if he knew nothing and had seen nothing. (chapter 29) However, I have already pointed out that he was present, when the rape took place, for he knew where Yoon Seungho would meet the artist: the pavilion. And what have all these episodes in common? The first thought would be to say: abandonment and betrayal. The painter in front of the gibang felt “betrayed” and abandoned, but what shocked the lord so much was when the artist started blaming himself: (chapter 105) He never expected this from his lover, as he desired to get the exact opposite. As you can see, the prayer “let’s go home” didn’t work, but the self-blaming had a much stronger effect. On the other hand, what made the lord change his mind was the reminder from the painter: their mutual love confession. (chapter 105) We have to imagine that the painter wanted to say that he regretted to have opened his heart to the protagonist. Thus he said this: (chapter 105) “I had known, I would have never confessed” Nonetheless, he never finished his phrase, for in reality, he had no regret!! He was sure that he had made the right decision. It is because he had pondered a long time about this. He had observed his lover. That’s the reason why he mentioned their mutual love confession and as such their promise to stay together. And this brings me to the next observation. All these scenes have another common denominator: BAD DECISIONS!! The lord had made the wrong decision to entrust the painter to the kisaengs. Thus he came to regret this. He had made his lover cry, and even wounded him, though he desired to do the opposite. Therefore it is not surprising that he apologized to his lover. (chapter 105) This shows that the painter is showing him what true love and loyalty are. Moreover, he is teaching to make good decisions.

But what is a good decision?

4. Good decision versus bad decision

I have to admit that the trigger for this essay was the new chapter from my beloved manhwa “Doctor Frost”. After reading the psychologist’s statement (chapter 246), I realized why Yoon Seungho suffered so much. Self-made decision implies a conscious choice. It is made deliberately and thoughtfully, considers and includes all relevant factors, is consistent with the individual’s philosophy and values. As you can see, it implies knowledge. This definition exposes that making a choice for the sake of another person without his consent or knowledge can never be a good decision. One might argue about this, because children are too young to make decisions. In Doctor Frost, this man (Doctor Frost 246) decided to support a terror attack, and justified this by saying that this was for his daughter’s sake. But like the counterpart pointed out, he questioned his decision. Was it truly his choice, or was he simply following the leader’s suggestion? As you can see, the daughter was used as an excuse, it was never for her sake. This shows that children are the exception, besides they are often raised by two parents. Thus they are making deliberations together. But like the author revealed in Twitter, Yoon Seungho’s mother hated her husband so much that she neglected her eldest son. The patriarch made decisions on his own, but observe that it was always for the Yoons’ sake. This means that the father never took his son’s well-being into consideration, he never asked him about his opinion. He imposed his will, but he listened to others, like we could see in different occasions. (chapter 57) He fed his son with the drug prescribed by the physician, though the latter stated that he had no idea about the illness. Then he listened to father Lee’s complains and reproaches. He never questioned the intentions behind his actions and words. (chapter 82) Here, the red-haired bearded man was encouraging the elder master Yoon to return to the mansion and claim his rights. Finally, the young master admitted this to the messenger: (chapter 80) If someone stroke his ego, he would follow their advice and never doubt their words.

Under this perspective, it becomes comprehensible why Yoon Seungho became the bird of misfortune. He became the scapegoat, for neither Kim nor Yoon Chang-Hyeon accepted to take their responsibility. They had made this decision for Yoon Seungho’s sake!! (chapter 77) Since it backfired, then the protagonist was responsible for everything. And this is what Kim has always been preaching in season 1, 2 and 3: it was the best for Yoon Seungho, or Baek Na-Kyum etc. Nonetheless, since he let others make the decision, he was able to escape “responsibility”, thus the elder master Yoon was blamed for everything. (chapter 86)

The butler’s interventions are based like this: It was for the painter’s sake, or for the lord’s sake, or for the elder master’s sake… One might argue that the valet questioned the lord’s decision to send the painter back to the gibang. (chapter 104) But he simply employed reverse psychology.

Reverse psychology is a manipulation technique that involves getting people to do something by prompting them to do the opposite. Reverse psychology can take various forms, such as forbidding the target behavior, questioning the person’s ability to perform the target behavior, and encouraging the opposite of the target behavior.” Quoted from https://effectiviology.com/reverse-psychology/

And this is what father Lee was doing too, when he visited Yoon Chang-Hyeon. Besides, we shouldn’t forget the power of the grapevines in the mansion. To conclude, making decisions for the sake of others can never be a good decision!! Therefore it becomes understandable why the painter’s request in the study was a bad choice in the end. (Chapter 85) Yoon Seungho was coerced to open up. If he did not, he wouldn’t be forgiven. Naturally, the painter meant it well, yet the main lead was pressured to reveal his „bad action“. The main lead feared his negative judgement and rejection. We could say that the artist had made this request for the lord’s sake, however this was not a conscious and long deliberated decision. And now, you comprehend why the main leads suffered both so much!! Yoon Seungho’s mother neglected her eldest son, but she kept her distance from her husband. They never talked to each other, and as such never made decisions together. And it was the same for the painter. The kisaeng Heena was the one who made the decision without the noonas’ consent and her brother‘s opinion.

5. Heena‘s bad decisions

Secondly, making decisions because you were manipulated, can not be considered a self-made decision. And what did Heena do? She made decisions for Baek Na-Kyum, but she never asked for her brother’s opinion or her colleagues. She made her decision based on her impressions and belief! (chapter46) Even in season 4, she has not changed her mind-set entirely. (chapter 105) She is still viewing the painter’s decision as a bad choice. But she is simply wrong, for the painter listened to her advice and after deliberations, he chose to open his heart. His confession was not made in the heat of the moment. (chapter 62) The lord’s vision (chapter 62) became a reality (chapter 105), though he never expected to be like that: a gaze full of pain and anxiety. To conclude, this night in the barn embodies “bad decisions”. Everything the lord did was under the influence of his unconscious. His abandonment issues clouded his judgement. Yet, despite everything, the noble made one good decision during that fateful night: he chose to never let the artist go!! (chapter 63) Because the painter has always been betrayed and abandoned himself too, such words could only move the artist. There was someone willing to be by his side and to give him a home. Therefore it is no coincidence that the artist brought up these words from that night. (chapter 105) They left a deep impression on Baek Na-Kyum.

But let’s return our attention to the head-kisaeng. (chapter 105) Note that she employed the expression “believe”. This is no coincidence, for it displays her narrow-mindedness. Finally, note that in episode 97, her conversation with her brother was truly a bad choice. She lied to Baek Na-Kyum, she was extremely stressed, scared and angry. (chapter 97) And why did she act like that? She justified that it was for the painter’s sake, and she knew more than her brother. The reality was that it was for her own sake. She was definitely cornered, for she feared repercussions. Moreover, she pushed her brother to follow her advice. And now look at what the noona said in front of Yoon Seungho:

Heena: “So Nakyum doesn’t know a thing? Thank god he didn’t see nor hear a thing about that awful matter”

She is glad that her brother didn’t witness her conversation with Min (chapter 99) and her “fake death”, but as you already know, I think, he heard her during that night. Note that the painter didn’t meet his noona Heena during that day. Since Heena and the staff played tricks so that Baek Na-Kyum ended up going to the scholar’s house, it is not surprising why the staff is putting the whole blame on the painter. However, who is responsible for this? Naturally, the staff, Kim and Heena. The latter made bad choices blinded by her arrogance and prejudices. Thus I deduce that Yoon Seungho learned a good lesson in front of the gibang. He should never make a decision without consulting his partner. (chapter 105) From my point of view, both need to learn to make decisions TOGETHER!! But in order to do so, the two main leads need to listen to each other and communicate. And this is what truly happened in episode 105. The young noble discovered the painter’s low self-esteem and his guilt. That’s the reason why I believe that Yoon Seungho will decide to talk about the scholar. The lord suspects the learned sir, for he thinks that he is still alive. (chapter 105) This signifies that the noble will decide not to follow the noona’s advice: (chapter 105) But by learning about the learned sir’s past, the protagonist will realize that he only knew a side about Jung In-Hun.

On the other hand, since the head-kisaeng agreed (chapter 105) with the noona’s statement, the painter looks happy with Yoon Seungho despite the tears, it looks like the noona is slowly coming to terms with her brother’s relationship. But I have to admit that I believe that her “decision” is just short-lived. First, in season 2, the noona had accepted to let her brother stay at the Yoons’ (chapter 69) But then she had changed her mind after hearing the menace from the servant. However, I have three other reasons to expect a change of heart from the head-kisaeng. First, Heena is the younger reflection of the butler. The manhwaphiles shouldn’t forget that the valet had almost come to terms with the painter’s presence (chapter 65), but the ruckus caused by the kisaeng had provoked a change of heart in the valet. Then, the lord had made the following condition to the kisaeng: (chapter 105) The lord is keeping his lover by his side, as long as nothing happens to him. So if he gets into trouble… she could achieve her goal, the painter is returned to her. But the most important clue is for me the bowl! (chapter 105) While many jumped to the conclusion that this was the medicine sent by the physician, I had a totally different impression. For me, this bowl was used to write a letter!! First, the color is different from the normal “medicine”. (chapter 23) Most of them look dark brown and not black. (chapter 36) (chapter 77) Besides, it never leaves traces on the edge. (chapter 36) The points on the border are the traces left by the brush. She wrote a letter. And I have another evidence for this: (chapter 36) The painter used white bowls while painting. On the other hand, the lord wrote a letter during that time. As you can see, in episode 36, we have the combination of painting, seduction (touching) and medicine… exactly like in episode 105. The artist tried to paint a lucky charm, a tiger, but he didn’t finish it. He got interrupted… which is very similar than in chapter 36. So the letter should represent another common denominator.

This means that Heena made the decision to write a letter before meeting Yoon Seungho and witnessing their interaction in front of the gibang. Finally, let’s not forget that the kisaeng was always brought up in connection with letters:

  • Chapter 68:
  • Chapter 69:
  • Chapter 91:
  • Chapter 97:

Naturally, I can not guarantee 100% this theory… besides, I can not tell the content and the recipient of this message. And if this theory is correct, the head-kisaeng did something which will have repercussions about her „decision“: let the painter live with Yoon Seungho. This means that she will be forced to question her past decision. Was it made deliberately and thoughtfully, did she consider and include all relevant factors, or did she act based on her instincts? In my eyes, Heena has always made such decisions. Every choice was based on hunch, but more precisely influenced by her prejudices and fears. Thus she is projecting her MO (chapter 105) onto Yoon Seungho. Will she come to regret her action or not? One thing is sure, the painter accepted the sincere apology from his lover. How could he not forgive him after calling „Nakyumah“ and embracing him! (Chapter 105) (chapter 105) Both left the gibang together, while the artist was removing his tears. And this leads me to the final observation.

By forcing the painter to remain silent about the last incident, the schemers and accomplices are not realizing that their actions will bring light to Yoon Seungho‘s suffering and its origins. In other words, by burying one truth, they are digging another grave… the secrets from the first past!! (Chapter 76) By making the same decisions, it is not surprising that the same deed can never succeed. It was not a real self-made decision. They simply followed a pattern.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: 📣Breaking news! 📣The painter vanished again! 😨 (second version)

Please support the authors by reading the manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

As the illustration of this analysis is indicating it, the title of the essay is referring to the painter’s departure from the mansion in season 3. For you can anticipate it, I would like to expose my new discoveries before the release of chapter 103. Why? It is because that way, the readers can perceive the new chapter under a different perspective.

1. “All the World’s a Stage”

Since I recognized the importance of clothes in Painter Of The Night, I started paying more attention to the appearances. Striking is that in season 3, the schemers utilized hanboks and shirts to forge an identity. By wearing a yellow hanbok, Min attempted to impersonate Lee Jihwa (chapter 101) so that he could put the blame on his “friend”. But the problem is that he was caught red-handed. Hence he ended up executed. On the other side, the corpse in the well was supposed to be Deok-Jae (chapter 98), although he was wearing clothes similar to the learned sir’s. What caught my attention is the expression Yoon Seungho employed: “pretending”. With such an idiom, he was implying that the servant had not only violated social norms, but also he had been acting. As you can sense, these two situations have one common denominator: playing a role and the clothes served as a disguise. It was, as if both victims of a murder had been playing in a theater play. This explicates why in the fanart, the author is portraying Baek Na-Kyum and Yoon Seungho as actors who are working in a sageuk. And this made me think of the famous poem from Shakespeare who describes life as a stage, where a person plays different roles all along his life: an infant, a school boy, a lover, a soldier, etc., until he dies, which is symbolized by an eternal sleep. https://youtu.be/_jaSFtcDEiE

I had also detected another parallel between the manhwa and Shakespeare’s other theater piece “Hamlet”, thus I had composed the essay “To be or not to be”. This particular drama was focusing on the question about the meaning of life. Through his character Hamlet, the writer incites the public to question his personality. All along the theater piece, the beholder is never certain if Hamlet’s madness is fake or genuine. Once again, we had the reference to this idea that “life is like a stage” and humans show different sides of themselves. Since the publication of chapter 87, I had already pointed out the presence of theater, with the twist of fate or called “Coup de Théâtre”. To conclude, we should view Painter Of The Night as an application of Shakespeare’s poem and principle. Everything is a stage… and all the characters are playing a role. Nonetheless, this “theater piece” shouldn’t be viewed lightly, for Black Heart, his friends and Deok-Jae paid a huge price for their acting: they made their exit by losing their life. They had played their role, determined by the goddess Byeonduck.

Then I would like to point out that at no moment, the main lead saw the body himself. He was simply confronted with the clothes which resembled a lot to the scholar’s. (chapter 98) Why? From my point of view, they were trying to scare the main lead, to remind him that he could never replace Jung In-Hun in the painter’s heart, to shake his belief. But the problem is that the schemers had missed the right timing, for the artist had already confessed his love for Yoon Seungho and this twice. Therefore the latter couldn’t doubt his lover’s words, and mistake it for an illusion. As a conclusion, the clothes were used tools to trick the couple, they had become costumes!! However, because the author is using karma as poetic justice, this signifies that the hanboks and shirts can serve as a clue to perceive the truth too. The ones who tried to deceive the protagonists with clothes and words, should be fooled by their own manipulations.

2. A new perception of chapter 98

My avid readers will certainly recall the detected principles Byeonduck utilized to develop her story.

  1. The story is going in circle, it works like a kaleidoscope.
  2. There is a reflection within the same chapter: the positive and negative reflection.
  3. Each episode will be reflected in the next chapter.
  4. All seasons are reflected in each other.
  5. The painter and Yoon Seungho share the same fate, hence their actions are similar.
  6. The clothes and shoes are tools to identify a character.

Naturally, you might be wondering how these rules are relevant to the clothes. But note that in episode 98, the lord wondered himself why the hanboks would look so similar to the learned sir’s! (chapter 98) This shows that the lord was able distinguish the real clothes from the imitation. He had not only a good memory, but his eyes were sensitive enough to detect the difference. But how is it about the readers? Did they notice that these maids were different from the head-maid and her colleague? (chapter 94) Their clothes were almost identical, yet their body shapes and the cut of the shirts diverged. That’s the reason why I deduced that in episode 98, the author had the intention to manipulate the manhwaphiles. But in order to escape the trap, the readers needed to look carefully at the characters’ clothes. This was the clue that Byeonduck had left for the readers to discern the truth. And now, look at this: (chapter 98) What was the painter wearing on his way to the bedchamber? White pants with his Mountbatten pink jacket. But how did he show up at the learned sir’s home? (chapter 98) He was dressed differently. 😮 He had changed his pants, put on his scarf and hat. But when he went to the lord’s study, he was not carrying them!! How do we explain the difference? The answer is quite simple. He had returned to his room in order to fetch his clothes. And since Baek Na-Kyum took the lord’s clothes, this signifies that he had the intention to return to the domain. The readers will certainly recall the artist’s behavior, when he had threatened the main lead to leave Yoon Seungho. He had switched his clothes, and put on his old clothes. (chapter 98) Thus if the lord had gone to the study, he would had realized that the painter had not deserted the propriety, for he had not taken his belongings with him. The hat and scarf were signalizing that Baek Na-Kyum considered himself as a member of the Yoons‘ household.

Moreover, because in chapter 98, the artist had tried to hide his presence from the maids at the door of the kitchen (chapter 98), I assume that later he did the opposite (rule 2). He met the maids on purpose. Why? He let them know about his intentions. He was going out in order to visit the learned sir’s home. Finally, remember what he had thought on his way to the mansion. (rule 3) If only Yoon Seungho had left a word… The servants served as his messenger. Hence I am convinced that Baek Na-Kyum must have talked to the maids and told them where he was going!! He copied his lover, yet contrary to him, he must have given a precise information. (Rule 5) This means that he had informed the staff about his departure!! Moreover, in chapter 98, the maids acted, as if they had not detected the painter’s presence while badmouthing Yoon Seungho. (chapter 98) Hence they were portrayed without eyes and with a drop of sweat on their face, a sign for deception. So the negative reflection would be that Baek Na-Kyum had informed the maids, and he had gone to the kitchen for that reason. From my point of view, when he met them, he was already wearing his hat and scarf. To sum up, the artist had never left the maids in the dark. And the clothes are the evidence of the staff’s lie.

Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why the painter lost all his clothes during that night!! If the lord had seen them there, he would have realized that the painter had never deserted the mansion, for he would have taken his own clothes!! It was important that they vanished. First, he lost his hat (chapter 99) Then the scarf was no longer present, when the painter woke up. Then the nobles removed his shirt, socks and pants in the shrine. (chapter 100) And now observe that after Lee Jihwa’s departure, the artist’s clothes except the white shirt vanished too. (chapter 102) Where did they go? The readers saw Black Heart leaving the building, but we should question this: WHY? He never went there to fetch lord Shin, since he abandoned him outside. We all imagined that he left the room empty-handed. But it is true? Now, I don‘t think so. He had to get rid of the clothes in order to mislead the main lead!! A new version of chapter 61 and 97! Furthermore, was Min talking to himself, when he said this? (chapter 101) Because the readers could detect the presence of a shadow in episode 102 , I am now envisioning that Min was not alone outside during that night. In fact, someone had misled Black Heart telling him that lord Jihwa had ran away. However, the unconscious lord Shin should have made him think that Lee Jihwa had fought back… Hence he had not fled, rather betrayed them. Moreover, he was not looking at the direction of the entrance and gate. In fact, he was turning his gaze in the direction to the shrine. (Chapter 101) The tree serves as an orientation for the beholder. But why was someone waiting outside? It was to cover up all the traces of his meddling. Baek Na-Kyum was supposed to vanish during that night, and they had planned to employ his pants and shirt to mislead people… even Black Heart. In my opinion, the invisible hand had already envisioned the nobles’ death. To conclude, the clothes proved my previous theory. The staff had staged the desertion by faking ignorance. (chapter 98) They were waiting for his return to fake their anger and search. And now, you comprehend why the servants mentioned the kisaeng in front of Yoon Seungho. It was to stop him from going to the study… to divert his attention. Under this new approach, the artist’s last words get a new meaning. (chapter 102) Since he had informed Yoon Seungho through the maids about his whereabouts, Baek Na-Kyum was expecting that he would come to his side. I would like the manhwalovers to keep in their mind that the artist was not conscious, when he moved to the shaman’s house. So in his mind, he was not far away from the learned sir’s house. Finally, since he had informed the maids, he could anticipate that the lord wouldn’t get mad at him, and wouldn‘t imagine that he had abandoned him (chapter 101) He trusted his lover’s heart in the end. That’s the reason why Black Heart’s superficial promise had no effect on Baek Na-Kyum. The latter truly believed that Yoon Seungho had been informed. But how could they play such a trick on the couple?

2. The director of the stage

Only one person could expect from the painter that he would switch clothes: Kim! (chapter 86) He had witnessed the argument between the couple by hiding behind the door. Thus in chapter 103, Kim will get the shock of his life… and it is the same for the maids. Yoon Seungho is returning with the painter. And the new trailer reveals that when the lord opened the door, adomestic was standing next to a maid. This is an indication of their involvement, though we need to discern the head-maid from the women in chapter 98. That’s the reason why the moment the maid appears, observe her clothes and try to discern her identity. Is this the head-maid or one maid from season 3? The preview displayed the arrival of the doctor.

The author reveals the butler’s surprise and shock. He never expected his entrance. This shows that the valet is just an actor too, he is not a deity, hence he gets fooled too. But why is Kim reacting this way? IT is because he never asked for the doctor’s request. So who sent the doctor? On the other hand, if the maids are involved and they witness the artist’s return, they have every reason to get worried. Their deception (lying by omission) could come to the light, for Baek Na-Kyum had given his lover an important task. He had to investigate why he had taken so much time before joining the artist’s side. By sending the doctor, they can fake their concern and even divert attention from themselves. Suddenly the connection between the maids and the doctor reminded me of episode 33.

3. The maids, Black Heart and the physician

If you read my previous analyses about the physicians, you are aware about my theory. Byeonduck introduced three different doctors, as their clothes and hat diverge. For me, it is the physician from season 1, for he is dressed similarly. (chapter 103) The form of the beard is also similar. But now, I have another evidence that this doctor from season 4 is not the physician from season 2!!! (chapter 63) The shoes are also different! That’s the reason why in the trailer, the beholders are seeing the physician’s shoes!! He doesn’t possess mituri like the other. Moreover, he is wearing a hanbok under his apron , while the other is dressed more like a commoner, a shirt with pants. And note that in chapter 33, we had the following combination: Min’s party, the visit of the doctor, Baek Na-Kyum’s illness, the maids and Yoon Seungho who “ran away” after his mistake. (rule 1 and 4) (chapter 33) And what had Kim done during his examination? He had not only threatened the physician (chapter 33), afterwards he had even badmouthed him, for he had not given the correct diagnosis. (chapter 33) However, here the butler had simply lied to hide his own wrongdoings: his passivity and silence. And note the doctor’s words addressed to the “beholder”: (chapter 103)

He is lying. The drop of sweat is the evidence. First, he has already seen the painter in a terrible state before. But since he is referring to Yoon Seungho, it signifies that he has already seen Yoon Seungho flustered. Why? Because the doctor from chapter 57 only met the young master, when he was a teenager. (chapter 57) The latter was introduced to Yoon Chang-Hyeon through the butler. The protagonist must have had a doctor in the past. Can you imagine a life without a doctor for 13 years? And this assumption was proven correct after the release. But let’s return our attention to the physician from season 4. What caught my attention is the white bag. Why is he wearing it? It is because he is on the verge of vanishing, he plans to run away. But why? From my point of view, he is the one who provided the aphrodisiac and opium to Lee Jihwa. Besides, in season 1, he had already given the “replenishing medicine” to the valet. (chapter 33) (rule 1-2-3) But why would he do such a thing? Simply, because he had been helping Min. He needed the protection of a powerful lord, since Kim had abused his position by threatening him. After seeing the new pictures from chapter 103, I had this sudden revelation. What did Min do after getting beaten by Yoon Seungho? (chapter 54) He certainly didn’t let his wounds untreated. Thus the next morning his face (chapter 56) looked much better. He had no swelling and the redness was already vanishing. From my point of view, he asked for the doctor’s assistance and that’s how the both came to an understanding. But since Min is now dead, the physician could get into trouble, for he helped the lord and now he is dead. But why am I so sure that the physician is about to run away? Look at all these images: (chapter 44) (chapter 44) (chapter 45) (chapter 100) They are all carrying the white bag on their back… and they are about to depart! Kim wished to leave the propriety with his master under the pretense that he was bringing misfortune to the painter. All this proves that the doctor is far from being innocent. Hence he wishes to run away. However, if he does this, this means that he exits the “play”. So he could die. Moreover, how did he know that the lord would return to the mansion with the wounded painter? I can not answer to this question with certainty. However, I would like to point out that since Min talked to someone in the shadow, it is very likely that this person had long planned Black Heart and his friend’s demise. Nonetheless, the schemers had not foreseen two three elements:

  • the survival of lord Shin (chapter 102)
  • the survival of Baek Na-Kyum, once again…. in season 2, he also almost died (chapter 61) [For more read the essay “No matter what… Baek Na-Kyum must vanish”]
  • the absence of Min’s friend who has always been by his side! (chapter 59) Lord Jang had disguised himself as Black Heart’s friend, the hanboks looked very similar. (chapter 99) (chapter 59) The schemers mistook him for the noble with the mole.

They are trying to repeat the same actions from the past, but the schemers are doomed to fail, for they didn’t listen to The Joker’s advice: (chapter 76) And this observation leads me to present the following theory: father Lee is definitely involved in this new trick! The drama has not ended yet. Why? According to my theory, these domestics didn’t belong to Yoon Seungho’s staff (chapter 61), for the colors grey-white off are only seen at the Lee’s. (chapter 9) (chapter 18, Lee Jihwa’s spy) (chapter 41) (chapter 50) (chapter 100) And now compare these servants to the staff from chapter 97: Their colors are all different reflecting that Yoon Seungho has no control over his staff. But what did the staff do in episode 61, when they manipulated the lord by saying that the painter had run away? One of the domestics offered the scarf and headgear to the lord: (chapter 61) Once again the clothes… All these details are exposing the involvement of elder Lee. He had many reasons to have Min and the painter eliminated. However, there is no ambiguity that he is not working on his own. That’s the reason why I am now wondering if “father Lee” or the shadow sent the doctor to Yoon Seungho in order to witness the painter’s death. Note that the doctor from season 1 came and not season 2. And what had the maids said in episode 33? (chapter 33) Yet, the painter survived, hence the doctor has every reason to run away. His complicity could come to light… on the other hand, the moment he leaves Yoon Seungho’s side, he is no longer protected. The reason is simple. He owns a part of the truth, and what the schemers are attempting to do is the exact opposite: burying the truth so that their act is not discovered. And now who participated in this huge “drama”? The list of the suspects is quite long… Father Lee (chapter 82), lord Yoon Chang-Hyeon (chapter 86), the other physician (chapter 74), “lord Song” (chapter 83), the “fake servant” alias the king (for me) (chapter 37) There is no doubt that a tailor was involved, for he had to create similar clothes, the costumes … (chapter 64) All have one common denominator: the BEARD. They are OLD BEARDED MEN!

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: The shadow 👤 behind the shrine ⛩️

Please support the authors by reading the manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

Lezhin Korea released a few panels from season 4, thus we could discover that lord Shin got into trouble. He is on the ground, his face bruised and bloody, while he is asking an anonymous man for help. He is mentioning the shrine. As he is wearing the same hanbok, we can definitely assume that this scene takes place during the same night. The irony is that each time Byeonduck offers a new piece of a puzzle, she also creates a new riddle or mystery. How did the young master get wounded in the first place? And who is the person facing lord Shin?

1. The shoes and the weapon

First of all, I would like to point out that this image confirmed my results from my ongoing investigation. The author is using the shoes and clothes to give clues about a person‘s identity. Thus I was definitely right to say that during the abduction in season 2, there were two perpetrators. (Chapter 59) (chapter 66) The size and length of the protections and the cords around the pants were different. Besides, the masks were also different due to the form of the mouth.. (Chapter 61) (chapter 61) Finally, I had also detected his presence next to the barn because of a time jump. First, the manhwaphiles saw Lee Jihwa sitting on the floor, (Chapter 60), then shortly after he was standing at the entrance of the storage room holding a fireplace poker! (chapter 60) His position indicated that the young master had shortly left the building. However, the readers had not witnessed his move, for the author had diverted their attention by exposing the character‘s inner thoughts. He was recollecting the past, while talking to himself. (chapter 60) However, how did the fire poker end up in his own hand? The last time this tool was seen, it was in the kitchen. (chapter 60) As you can see, each image has its importance! However, I doubt that the upset aristocrat had this sudden idea and returned to the kitchen and take the fire iron. His mind and heart were definitely elsewhere, while such an action exposes the intention of hurting someone. Jihwa was acting, as if he was in trance, the moment he saw the hickey and heard the painter’s scream. His long lasting stupor was visible in this image. (chapter 60) That’s the reason why I had developed the theory that someone was hiding in the shadow, next to the barn and observing the evolution of the event. [For more read the essay “No matter what… Baek Na-Kyum must vanish“] For me, it could only be Kim. The latter had put the fire iron in the young man’s hand with the hope that he would strike Baek Na-Kyum. My conclusion was that he was not just involved in the painter’s abduction. However, all these were minor circumstantial evidences. Now, I found more concrete proofs for this hypothesis. Thanks to the new release, I can corroborate my assumption! 😱 The fireplace is the evidence of his involvement during that night! Why would Byeonduck zoom on the furnaces? (chapter 57) It is because they serve as a clue for unveiling the truth. (chapter 60) And now take a closer look at the stove in the storage room! (chapter 62) It is the same furnace! 😨We all assume that the lord prepared the fireplace, because he put his clothes on his lover. But is it true? We were all jumping to this conclusion, but actually we never saw it. Our brain was led to fill the blanks. (chapter 61) Finally, the readers were all assuming that the butler had never entered the storage room due to this image and his action before. (chapter 61) But is it true? He could have opened the door before, and go to the lord in order to explain his intervention. Faking his concerns for the painter. Why would he place the fireplace there? He wished that the warmth from the fire would wake up the painter. Hence he remained close to the gate of the storage room. That way, he had a reason to visit his master. Moreover, the author exposed that the valet had been keeping an eye on his master for a while too. (chapter 62) Because the valet went to his master, we got the impression that the valet had followed his master’s instructions. (chapter 61) In fact, this request could be perceived differently. The lord had seen the butler’s intervention, hence he expressed this wish. From my point of view, the butler must have brought the fireplace to the barn, and he left the poker there on purpose. I am quite certain that some people will think that I am again exaggerating. But why did the butler put a fireplace with a fire iron in the lord’s room, when the coal was not properly lit? (chapter 86) Compare the fire to this one: (chapter 62) But note that in the furnace, there was a fire iron too. (chapter 88) Consequently, I am suspecting that Kim had expected an outburst from Yoon Seungho. The latter could hurt his father with the fire iron. But none of this happened, for the lord preferred playing a comedy.

But let’s return our attention to the fireplace in the storage room. My theory would explain why Kim encouraged his master to go to the barn. (chapter 61) He hoped that Yoon Seungho would become so enraged due to the betrayal that in his violent outburst, he would grab the tool and wound the artist!! Thus he said this the next morning: (chapter 65) He had expected that the lord would hurt the main lead. But how was he supposed to harm Baek Na-Kyum in the end? With the fire iron… This signifies that he had been present in the barn during the abduction, and even knew the place of the sequestration. Thus he took the furnace and the fire iron to the shed.

And now, you have the explanation how lord Shin was wounded. He got beaten with a fire iron! This explicates the cut on his nose. Compare his face to the painter’s who got wounded by wooden sticks. (chapter 99) The painter’s head was bleeding, but his face and nose remained intact. (chapter 99) Besides, this theory also explains why the shrine is set on fire. (chapter 103) The fire iron is connected to a stove. Finally, I would like to outline the absence of the furnace in the shrine, though it was very cold outside. (chapter 99) So when the lord said this to his lover (chapter 88), we could interpret it the following way. It was once again a vision from the future, he was seeing from lord Shin’s perspective the betrayal. To conclude, I am sensing many parallels between the noble’s death and the night of chapter 86/87/88.

But I have another evidence that the butler had been spying on Jihwa and No-Name. How is it possible that Lee Jihwa had such a vision? (chapter 60) (chapter 60) At no moment, he was told that his childhood friend had been brought to the physician’s. He just heard him leaving. Moreover, the joker never mentioned the place where the couple was fooling around. (chapter 60) He didn’t even admit that he had seen them himself. These were memories from someone else! One might assume that these could represent the criminal’s recollection, but I don’t think so. He arrived much later to the physician’s house. If he had been present right from the start, he could have kidnapped Baek Na-Kyum on his way to the restroom. (chapter 59) To conclude, the person with such memories (chapter 62) had been at the doctor’s office before. This stands in opposition to the false memory the red-haired master had in the study. (chapter 43) Here, he had visited the place, hence he could imagine what had happened, though he never saw their encounter according to me. [For more read the essay “The liars in front of the mirror of truth: Lee Jihwa and Yoon Chang-Hyeon”] This explains why he created a false memory. However, in chapter 60, it is simply impossible for him to have such a vision, for he was not there. And in the propriety, only two people could know about their love session, the doctor and naturally the valet. For the latter is constantly seen with the bucket of water, I conclude that this can only be the butler. (chapter 58) He had left the bucket of water in the patio! But note that when the painter left the room, the item had simply vanished. (chapter 59) The painter was not supposed to detect his presence.

2. Identifying the shadows

Since I recognized the presence of a third person involved in the kidnapping from season 2, I come to the deduction that we have in this scene 3 people. And if the release is not changing, and these panels are still framed in black, this signifies that the readers are dealing with remembrance again. So we could say that we are seeing the event from the perpetrator’s perspective. But we will see. On the other hand, why am I so sure about the presence of 3 people? First, don’t forget that the story is going in circle, thus the author is working with reflections. The manhwaphiles will certainly recall that lord Shin had been made unconscious by No-Name, when he had approached Lee Jihwa. (chapter 100) The manhwaworms can grasp the similarities. Back then, the lord had refused to help Baek Na-Kyum, thus he was even encouraging Lee Jihwa to return to the shrine. Hence he had acted as a willing accomplice and perpetrator. Thus his karma is to be denied any assistance, he is punished the same way than his friends, Min and the other nobles. Finally, observe that the red-haired master (chapter 100) was lowering himself in front of No-Name which reminds me a lot to lord Shin’s situation. However, the naïve yangban is not suspecting the person facing him. He has the impression that the latter will listen to him and assist him. Thus I deduce that he was assaulted by someone else, the third person… I am excluding 2 people with the beating, for the noble was not unconscious in contrast to the scene in front of the scholar’s house. Besides, this person was not strong enough to kill the noble and had not tied him up either. (chapter 66) (chapter 99) Lord Shin was still conscious, and he could still run away, until he met this mysterious person. Why do I think so? It is because lord Shin is not suspecting the one standing in front of him. If they were together, he would have recognized the betrayal. From my point of view, he didn’t see them together. And I have another evidence for this interpretation. This picture is a reflection from this one due to the presence of the shadow. (chapter 88) Abandonment and rejection versus embrace and acceptance. And what had Yoon Seungho said during that fateful night? (chapter 88) (chapter 88) But while the painter was exposed to sexual abuse, lord Shin had indeed left his friend’s side. In my eyes, lord Shin embodies treason. As you can see, I conclude that lord Shin is about to get assassinated and from the person he expected the least. Why? It is because no one has to realize that lord Shin ran away from the shaman’s shrine. (chapter 102) He was a survivor. The opposite from this scene. They faked the painter’s desertion, (chapter 60) hence in episode 102 they had to mask his escape, for this would have exposed the involvement of other people, like Lee Jihwa, the doctor with the drugs and Heena. And now, you have the explanation why the shadow hidden behind the tree had put mattresses on the soil. The desertion and survival from lord Shin should not be detected. But who is this person facing the weak lord? And who is the third person who hit the young man? First, I would like to answer the second question.

3. Identifying the helping hand

We have to suspect a rather frail person who can be reckless and even stupid. As you can envision it, I am now suspecting the kisaeng Heena. Not only her philosophy allows her to be blinded by hatred, but also she witnessed herself her brother’s terrible condition. (chapter 99) Secondly, the moment she hears from someone that she got betrayed, for her brother died, she could definitely resent Min and his friends. But one might argue that she was killed by the two guards, or if she is alive, she was held captive by them. However, it is important to recall the following rules: the clothes and shoes are revealing the character’s identity. Both men are not wearing robes. Besides, they are not wearing black shoes like the other black guards! Yet, note all the black guards from chapter 7, 64/65 and 86 were wearing black shoes (chapter 7), (chapter 65) or boots (chapter 86), a sign for a high position. They even had all a sword. Why would the guards from chapter 99 use a wooden stick? In my eyes, it is because they are no real black guards. Besides, I detected that one man had a scarf similar to the butler’s, from lower quality. Thus I am suspecting that these two men are more servants than trained black guards. In other words, they are commoners. This would explicate why they didn’t know how to tie Heena properly. Her mouth was not covered, her feet were not tied. Thus they covered their face. That way, Baek Na-Kyum wouldn’t recognize them. And if he were to survive, then he could blame it on Yoon Chang-Hyeon, as their uniform was similar. During the assault, he couldn’t pay attention to such details and question their true origins. Besides, don’t forget that so far, the beating was tasked to the staff: (chapter 13) (chapter 77) As you can see, the wooden stocks were present during the first straw mat beating.

Under this new light, the manhwalovers can grasp why their face was masked. If they had to be identified, then by the clothes… that way they could mislead the investigation and frame innocents. We could detect their involvement in this scene, (chapter 101), but here Min thought that he was capable to frame the Lees. The other evidence for this interpretation is the presence of two servants during the main lead’s hunt, while he was wearing the suspicious boots. (chapter 83) As you can detect, I see a strong connection between the new panel and the hunt from chapter 83. And here we have 3 people again.

But let’s return our attention to the kisaeng who I am suspecting to be behind the noble’s wounds. What caught my attention is that the woman has always been involved in kidnapping and immobility (being tied up). She was present, when the lord was dragged and tied up. (chapter 68) She was again a witness, when her brother was tied up in the bedchamber. (chapter 66) Finally, when her brother was on the verge of getting abducted, she saw him lying unconscious with a bloody face. However, she never considered it as an abduction, for his hands and feet were not tied up. (chapter 99) That’s the reason why she blamed him with her questions. She implied that he shouldn’t have fought back. As you can see, I detect a common thread between Heena and her presence in different scenes: sequestration and a bloody face. But this doesn’t end here. When the young painter got beaten in the gibang, there was a furnace on the left side. (chapter 94) For me, this incident was to push the painter to leave the gibang and as such to listen to Heena’s suggestion. Furthermore, the man on the left side was wearing a white headband, though he was dressed like a noble in a hunting outfit! The hair dress and his moustache [for more read the analysis “Painful departures”] led me to the following assumption: He was just a commoner in the end, impersonating a noble.

The other clue for Heena’s involvement in lord Shin’s demise is her presence in chapter 88. (chapter 88) She was supposed to discover a crime scene. But what did she do? She didn’t report it to the authorities. Why? It is because the schemers implied that she would never get justice. As a kisaeng, she was totally powerless.

Thus the moment someone tells her that her brother died by the hands of nobles, the young woman’s hatred for yangbans can only increase. At the end of season 3, Yoon Seungho and even the shadow behind the shrine believed that the painter had died too. Consequently, the painter was just given a purple hanbok, and the main lead went to the mountain. Since the protagonist was under such a shock and pain, he never pondered why there was a person helping him. He was behaving like Lee Jihwa during the night of the abduction, the hanbok was put in his hand. The sword, the scholar’s glasses and even the painter’s clothes vanished from the shrine. (chapter 102) This is the evidence that someone had manipulated the crime scene. The clothes from the painter could serve as evidence of her brother’s curtains. Heena could come to the conclusion that Min had gone back on his words, and her fake death, which had definitely shocked (chapter 99) and bothered her, could only be perceived as real at the end. But this means that while Yoon Seungho had murdered the nobles, there was someone hiding in the shadow , exactly like in season 2. He had not stopped the execution either. He could have faked his late arrival and the shocked lord would have even believed him. This time, the man in the shadow had covered the bloody traces and had thought that the noble outside had died from cold. (chapter 61) And according to me (chapter 61) the second Joker (Kim) had tried to murder the painter, but he had failed, for he had covered the painter’s head. (chapter 66) However, his new attempt to have the painter vanished failed again.

4. The “trustworthy” disguised man

What caught my attention are the pants. The form and color remind me a lot of the painter’s. (chapter 97) It could be the same, though I have my doubts. Secondly, I suddenly got aware that the painter had 3 different grey pants at least. (chapter 4) This one had a cut just below the knees, though the color is much brighter. (chapter 84) This is the third one I detected, as the shape of the pants diverge once again. This explicates why Baek Na-Kyum chose to change his clothes before leaving the mansion. (chapter 85) And because his pants are very similar to the painter’s, I deduce that he must be close to Baek Na-Kyum or at least he has a spy informing him about the artist’s clothes. Compare his pants to other servants: (chapter 97) (chapter 61) (chapter 67) (chapter 67) Their pants have either a different pigment (white, black, khaki, or light grey) or the shape is different. That’s the reason why I am assuming that the person was wearing these trousers on purpose. A new version of this scene: (chapter 98) The only difference is that the disguised person is alive contrary to the corpses in the wells. But the problem is that the shoes are betraying him. The boots resemble a lot to Yoon Seungho’s which the latter utilized during the hunt. (chapter 83) What did the lord see back then? Three shadows, two men wearing a gat and one caught in the middle with a topknot. Since I consider Yoon Seungho as a shaman, I believe that this vision was not only referring to the past and the incident in the shrine. It exposes the immutable truth, the involvement of three people, either. This is no coincidence. Thus imagine one moment that this illusion was referring to lord Shin’s murder. He is about to get murdered because of a new conspiracy. From my point of view, the man is disguising himself. However, I doubt that he is wearing the lord’s boots. The latter could be “couple boots”, just like the lord and the painter had couple hats. (chapter 91) And note during that day, Baek Na-Kyum was called sir due to his hat and clothes. (chapter 91) However, if the woman had paid attention to his shoes (mituri), she would have realized that our beloved painter is just a low-born. One might think that I view Kim as the one facing lord Shin. Strangely, I am suspecting the involvement of someone else. One thing is sure. The person in front of lord Shin is disguising himself, and the latter trusted the man in front of him. But his misfortune was not to identify correctly the person, for he didn’t detect the contrast between the clothes and the shoes. And the author left us another clue that disguise plays a huge role in our protagonists’ suffering. Why is Kim wearing a gat with a headband for nobles, when he is dressed like a servant? But there is another detail what caught my attention. He is wearing a bag. It was, as if he had packed his belongings before leaving the mansion. This means, he is taking his brown hanbok, but he is not wearing it. He reminded me of Deok-Jae. (chapter 44) (chapter 54) But the readers should question themselves this: why did Kim dress like this in the first place? From my point of view, the schemers have already planned to frame Baek Na-Kyum for the murder of the nobles and even of Jung In-Hun. Kim is trying to separate the couple so that the artist can be arrested easily and sentenced immediately. By burning the place, the evidence that Baek Na-Kyum was a victim vanished. That’s how they can manage to turn a victim into a perpetrator. They wanted to erase every trace of the crimes, but then the return of the painter will force them to change their plan. The fire can help them to turn Baek Na-Kyum into a scapegoat. That’s the reason why the anonymous shadow is wearing clothes similar to the painter’s. No one should recognize him. Later, Baek Na-Kyum can be “identified” as the culprit. And any blood trace on his clothes could serve to incriminate the painter. They could use the resemblance of the clothes as a proof for his crime. That’s the reason why lord Shin had to die in the end. And if lord Shin never doubted this person, I am suspecting that the latter is working with the authorities. Kim is not the only suspect, for according to me, there always exist a conspiracy of 3 and even 5 people. This observation leads me to create a list of suspects. First of all, Yoon Seungho’s confession to the learned sir should help us to determine the schemers and culprits. (chapter 44). A synonym for old bearded men is “elders”. The latter are supposed to serve as role models. That’s the reason why the young man didn’t suspect the man. With his beard, he must have oozed “responsibility” and even “selflessness”. But who are the suspects?

  • The officer from the bureau investigation is definitely involved. Thus he misled Yoon Seungho. Besides, observe that the officers are connected to fire! (chapter 94) Secondly, his explanation implied the involvement of a physician. (chapter 98) Though he had been found in a well, the lord’s comment insinuates that “Deok-Jae” had been stabbed. Striking is that the lord didn’t show any interest in the violation of clothes and the servant’s death. This reaction surprised the yangban which left him speechless. It is important, because this shows that the schemers were trying to direct the lord’s attention to a certain person: Lee Jihwa. They were trying to instill the thought that Lee Jihwa had planted a professional spy in his household. And after his betrayal, Deok-Jae had run away with the money earned from his work.
  • The physician: What caught my attention is that the author focused on the fire place at his office. (chapter 57) Why? There has to be a reason. I don’t believe in coincidence in Painter Of The Night. Furthermore, observe that both men, Kim and the doctor, were sitting in the kitchen, similar to Jihwa and No-Name. (chapter 57) Finally, the painter met the Joker again on the same day he visited the physician. (chapter 75) Finally, why was the doctor never brought to the mansion again after his last visit in chapter 57? And it looks like he was not there to treat Baek Na-Kyum. The latter is suffering from PTSD. Thus the painter had a nightmare. Hence I have the impression that the butler’s intervention and suggestion to Yoon Seungho will fail. The lord won’t be able to leave his side. Moreover, I would like the readers to recall that when Baek Na-Kyum got sick, a different physician was fetched. (chapter 33) Different clothes displays a different identity. From my point of view, the doctor doesn‘t want to be connected to Yoon Seungho. Finally, don‘t you find it weird that he was not by his side in chapter 57? He literally abandoned the young master in the room with the painter (chapter 57), though the latter was a patient too. He had a wounded wrist. The physician should have controlled Yoon Seungho’s fever, brought him water and even an infusion. His absence and passivity caught my attention. So what was he doing in the kitchen? Finally, the doctor is also connected to the shaman. Not only he mentioned him, but also there is the symbol of shamanism in his kitchen. Why did the gods want our couple to have their first “true” love session at the physician’s office? Somehow, it was to confront him with the truth. Finally, don’t you find it weird how Kim reacted (chapter 82), when the new version of Deok-Jae made the following suggestion to Kim: (chapter 82) Hence the doctor is not off the hook, quite the opposite.
  • Father Lee: he has a huge motivation to eliminate not only the painter, but also Min. The latter had denunciated Lee Jihwa’s crime to Yoon Seungho. Since I judge father Lee as someone suffering from Machiavellianism, he certainly plotted something behind Yoon Seungho, and not only once, but at least twice. Moreover, someone could have divulged to the patriarch that Black Heart had been responsible for the loss of his son’s topknot and his manipulations. Besides, Black Heart had witnessed the altercation between the Lees and Yoon Seungho (chapter 67), and discovered Lee Jihwa’s sodomy which was supposed to be a secret. The father is well aware that the main lead’s suffering is linked to the young master’s sexual orientation, which the father had always denied. His involvement could be detected, when he allowed one of his servants to be dragged to the gibang. (chapter 99) Finally, The Joker also heard father Lee’s humiliation and powerlessness. (chapter 67) He never asked for the authorities’ assistance, for his son’s crime could have come to the surface. And since there was a ruckus in the gibang, where his name was mentioned, he had another reason to kill lord Shin. With his disappearance, his son’s “crimes” would be buried. Moreover, his son never went to the bureau of investigation to clear his name. (chapter 101) Thus the fire could be seen as a desperate measure to cover the Lees’ culpability.
  • Because people are violating code dress, and they are wearing similar clothes to deceive people, I think that we should include the tailor in the list of suspects, but the one I am referring to is the one from chapter 64. (chapter 64) He can play a huge role by making a false testimony, as he can recognize the clothes ordered by the clients.
  • Finally, I would like to include these two men. (chapter 37) The latter had already disguised himself in season 1, and due to his age, no one would suspect his real nature or power. Then we have this faceless man from chapter 83: (chapter 83) I am not including Yoon Chang-Hyeon in this list, for he is not intelligent and cunning enough to develop such a plan. For me, he is just a pawn. Thus he never intervened on his own. He was always pushed by others’ suggestions. Yet, there is no ambiguity that the elder Yoon will be involved in a new plot.

To conclude, I am suspecting many people involved in lord Shin’s struggle and curtains. Thus expect in season 4 new plots again. Finally, I would like to underline the butler’s hypocrisy one more time. While he keeps saying to his master that he is a bird of misfortune, why is he remaining by his side? Dedication or love? I have my doubt, for he keeps badmouthing him. If this “curse” was true, how come that he did not suffer like the painter? And note that he has a drop of sweat on his face, the symbol for manipulations and lies. In my eyes, the words from the publication are reflecting the butler and Heena’s philosophy. Why? Both are trying to hide their own wrongdoings and bad choices. They are still in denial to admit their responsibility.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.